US20210031144A1 - Instruments, modules, and methods for improved detection of edited sequences in live cells - Google Patents
Instruments, modules, and methods for improved detection of edited sequences in live cells Download PDFInfo
- Publication number
- US20210031144A1 US20210031144A1 US17/073,300 US202017073300A US2021031144A1 US 20210031144 A1 US20210031144 A1 US 20210031144A1 US 202017073300 A US202017073300 A US 202017073300A US 2021031144 A1 US2021031144 A1 US 2021031144A1
- Authority
- US
- United States
- Prior art keywords
- cells
- editing
- retentate
- cell
- module
- Prior art date
- Legal status (The legal status is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the status listed.)
- Abandoned
Links
- 238000000034 method Methods 0.000 title abstract description 207
- 230000001976 improved effect Effects 0.000 title abstract description 16
- 238000001514 detection method Methods 0.000 title abstract description 13
- 210000004027 cell Anatomy 0.000 claims description 1392
- 239000012465 retentate Substances 0.000 claims description 334
- 239000012466 permeate Substances 0.000 claims description 298
- 239000013598 vector Substances 0.000 claims description 199
- 150000007523 nucleic acids Chemical class 0.000 claims description 152
- 102000039446 nucleic acids Human genes 0.000 claims description 144
- 108020004707 nucleic acids Proteins 0.000 claims description 144
- 238000009826 distribution Methods 0.000 claims description 98
- 239000012530 fluid Substances 0.000 claims description 73
- 238000004520 electroporation Methods 0.000 claims description 70
- 239000003153 chemical reaction reagent Substances 0.000 claims description 52
- 230000009466 transformation Effects 0.000 claims description 51
- 230000001580 bacterial effect Effects 0.000 claims description 29
- 108091034117 Oligonucleotide Proteins 0.000 claims description 13
- 239000002904 solvent Substances 0.000 claims description 12
- 210000004962 mammalian cell Anatomy 0.000 claims description 10
- 238000013515 script Methods 0.000 claims description 10
- JLCPHMBAVCMARE-UHFFFAOYSA-N [3-[[3-[[3-[[3-[[3-[[3-[[3-[[3-[[3-[[3-[[3-[[5-(2-amino-6-oxo-1H-purin-9-yl)-3-[[3-[[3-[[3-[[3-[[3-[[5-(2-amino-6-oxo-1H-purin-9-yl)-3-[[5-(2-amino-6-oxo-1H-purin-9-yl)-3-hydroxyoxolan-2-yl]methoxy-hydroxyphosphoryl]oxyoxolan-2-yl]methoxy-hydroxyphosphoryl]oxy-5-(5-methyl-2,4-dioxopyrimidin-1-yl)oxolan-2-yl]methoxy-hydroxyphosphoryl]oxy-5-(6-aminopurin-9-yl)oxolan-2-yl]methoxy-hydroxyphosphoryl]oxy-5-(6-aminopurin-9-yl)oxolan-2-yl]methoxy-hydroxyphosphoryl]oxy-5-(6-aminopurin-9-yl)oxolan-2-yl]methoxy-hydroxyphosphoryl]oxy-5-(6-aminopurin-9-yl)oxolan-2-yl]methoxy-hydroxyphosphoryl]oxyoxolan-2-yl]methoxy-hydroxyphosphoryl]oxy-5-(5-methyl-2,4-dioxopyrimidin-1-yl)oxolan-2-yl]methoxy-hydroxyphosphoryl]oxy-5-(4-amino-2-oxopyrimidin-1-yl)oxolan-2-yl]methoxy-hydroxyphosphoryl]oxy-5-(5-methyl-2,4-dioxopyrimidin-1-yl)oxolan-2-yl]methoxy-hydroxyphosphoryl]oxy-5-(5-methyl-2,4-dioxopyrimidin-1-yl)oxolan-2-yl]methoxy-hydroxyphosphoryl]oxy-5-(6-aminopurin-9-yl)oxolan-2-yl]methoxy-hydroxyphosphoryl]oxy-5-(6-aminopurin-9-yl)oxolan-2-yl]methoxy-hydroxyphosphoryl]oxy-5-(4-amino-2-oxopyrimidin-1-yl)oxolan-2-yl]methoxy-hydroxyphosphoryl]oxy-5-(4-amino-2-oxopyrimidin-1-yl)oxolan-2-yl]methoxy-hydroxyphosphoryl]oxy-5-(4-amino-2-oxopyrimidin-1-yl)oxolan-2-yl]methoxy-hydroxyphosphoryl]oxy-5-(6-aminopurin-9-yl)oxolan-2-yl]methoxy-hydroxyphosphoryl]oxy-5-(4-amino-2-oxopyrimidin-1-yl)oxolan-2-yl]methyl [5-(6-aminopurin-9-yl)-2-(hydroxymethyl)oxolan-3-yl] hydrogen phosphate Polymers Cc1cn(C2CC(OP(O)(=O)OCC3OC(CC3OP(O)(=O)OCC3OC(CC3O)n3cnc4c3nc(N)[nH]c4=O)n3cnc4c3nc(N)[nH]c4=O)C(COP(O)(=O)OC3CC(OC3COP(O)(=O)OC3CC(OC3COP(O)(=O)OC3CC(OC3COP(O)(=O)OC3CC(OC3COP(O)(=O)OC3CC(OC3COP(O)(=O)OC3CC(OC3COP(O)(=O)OC3CC(OC3COP(O)(=O)OC3CC(OC3COP(O)(=O)OC3CC(OC3COP(O)(=O)OC3CC(OC3COP(O)(=O)OC3CC(OC3COP(O)(=O)OC3CC(OC3COP(O)(=O)OC3CC(OC3COP(O)(=O)OC3CC(OC3COP(O)(=O)OC3CC(OC3COP(O)(=O)OC3CC(OC3COP(O)(=O)OC3CC(OC3CO)n3cnc4c(N)ncnc34)n3ccc(N)nc3=O)n3cnc4c(N)ncnc34)n3ccc(N)nc3=O)n3ccc(N)nc3=O)n3ccc(N)nc3=O)n3cnc4c(N)ncnc34)n3cnc4c(N)ncnc34)n3cc(C)c(=O)[nH]c3=O)n3cc(C)c(=O)[nH]c3=O)n3ccc(N)nc3=O)n3cc(C)c(=O)[nH]c3=O)n3cnc4c3nc(N)[nH]c4=O)n3cnc4c(N)ncnc34)n3cnc4c(N)ncnc34)n3cnc4c(N)ncnc34)n3cnc4c(N)ncnc34)O2)c(=O)[nH]c1=O JLCPHMBAVCMARE-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 claims description 5
- 210000005253 yeast cell Anatomy 0.000 claims description 4
- 101710163270 Nuclease Proteins 0.000 abstract description 173
- 238000010362 genome editing Methods 0.000 abstract description 22
- 238000012216 screening Methods 0.000 abstract description 8
- 230000012010 growth Effects 0.000 description 164
- 239000002609 medium Substances 0.000 description 136
- 238000002955 isolation Methods 0.000 description 133
- 108090000623 proteins and genes Proteins 0.000 description 130
- 108020005004 Guide RNA Proteins 0.000 description 125
- 239000007787 solid Substances 0.000 description 105
- 230000001939 inductive effect Effects 0.000 description 104
- 230000010261 cell growth Effects 0.000 description 94
- 239000012528 membrane Substances 0.000 description 80
- 238000009295 crossflow filtration Methods 0.000 description 70
- 230000014509 gene expression Effects 0.000 description 66
- 238000010606 normalization Methods 0.000 description 66
- 239000000706 filtrate Substances 0.000 description 65
- 239000007788 liquid Substances 0.000 description 61
- 238000012545 processing Methods 0.000 description 61
- 230000008569 process Effects 0.000 description 54
- PEDCQBHIVMGVHV-UHFFFAOYSA-N Glycerine Chemical compound OCC(O)CO PEDCQBHIVMGVHV-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 52
- 238000011534 incubation Methods 0.000 description 52
- 108091026890 Coding region Proteins 0.000 description 51
- 108020004414 DNA Proteins 0.000 description 50
- PYMYPHUHKUWMLA-UHFFFAOYSA-N arabinose Natural products OCC(O)C(O)C(O)C=O PYMYPHUHKUWMLA-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 50
- SRBFZHDQGSBBOR-UHFFFAOYSA-N beta-D-Pyranose-Lyxose Natural products OC1COC(O)C(O)C1O SRBFZHDQGSBBOR-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 50
- PYMYPHUHKUWMLA-WDCZJNDASA-N arabinose Chemical compound OC[C@@H](O)[C@@H](O)[C@H](O)C=O PYMYPHUHKUWMLA-WDCZJNDASA-N 0.000 description 48
- 102000004169 proteins and genes Human genes 0.000 description 42
- 238000013518 transcription Methods 0.000 description 42
- 230000035897 transcription Effects 0.000 description 42
- 108020004705 Codon Proteins 0.000 description 39
- 235000018102 proteins Nutrition 0.000 description 39
- 229920000136 polysorbate Polymers 0.000 description 38
- 238000004113 cell culture Methods 0.000 description 36
- 239000001963 growth medium Substances 0.000 description 36
- 238000012546 transfer Methods 0.000 description 35
- 239000000758 substrate Substances 0.000 description 34
- -1 poly(methyl methylacrylate) Polymers 0.000 description 33
- 241000167854 Bourreria succulenta Species 0.000 description 30
- 235000019693 cherries Nutrition 0.000 description 30
- 238000010790 dilution Methods 0.000 description 30
- 239000012895 dilution Substances 0.000 description 30
- 230000000694 effects Effects 0.000 description 30
- 239000002773 nucleotide Substances 0.000 description 29
- 125000003729 nucleotide group Chemical group 0.000 description 29
- 239000000872 buffer Substances 0.000 description 28
- 239000000243 solution Substances 0.000 description 27
- 241000588724 Escherichia coli Species 0.000 description 26
- 230000006698 induction Effects 0.000 description 25
- 238000007747 plating Methods 0.000 description 25
- 239000000463 material Substances 0.000 description 24
- 238000011084 recovery Methods 0.000 description 24
- 229960005091 chloramphenicol Drugs 0.000 description 23
- WIIZWVCIJKGZOK-RKDXNWHRSA-N chloramphenicol Chemical compound ClC(Cl)C(=O)N[C@H](CO)[C@H](O)C1=CC=C([N+]([O-])=O)C=C1 WIIZWVCIJKGZOK-RKDXNWHRSA-N 0.000 description 23
- 239000013612 plasmid Substances 0.000 description 23
- 150000001413 amino acids Chemical class 0.000 description 22
- 230000001105 regulatory effect Effects 0.000 description 22
- 230000008439 repair process Effects 0.000 description 22
- 108091028043 Nucleic acid sequence Proteins 0.000 description 20
- 240000004808 Saccharomyces cerevisiae Species 0.000 description 20
- 235000014680 Saccharomyces cerevisiae Nutrition 0.000 description 20
- 235000001014 amino acid Nutrition 0.000 description 20
- 239000003550 marker Substances 0.000 description 20
- ZAMOUSCENKQFHK-UHFFFAOYSA-N Chlorine atom Chemical compound [Cl] ZAMOUSCENKQFHK-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 19
- 229940024606 amino acid Drugs 0.000 description 19
- 238000002474 experimental method Methods 0.000 description 19
- 229920001817 Agar Polymers 0.000 description 18
- 239000008272 agar Substances 0.000 description 18
- 238000006243 chemical reaction Methods 0.000 description 18
- 230000006870 function Effects 0.000 description 18
- FAPWRFPIFSIZLT-UHFFFAOYSA-M Sodium chloride Chemical compound [Na+].[Cl-] FAPWRFPIFSIZLT-UHFFFAOYSA-M 0.000 description 16
- 230000008901 benefit Effects 0.000 description 16
- 238000011068 loading method Methods 0.000 description 16
- 230000035772 mutation Effects 0.000 description 16
- 235000010482 polyoxyethylene sorbitan monooleate Nutrition 0.000 description 16
- 229920000053 polysorbate 80 Polymers 0.000 description 16
- 238000002203 pretreatment Methods 0.000 description 16
- 230000002068 genetic effect Effects 0.000 description 15
- 229920002401 polyacrylamide Polymers 0.000 description 15
- 102000040430 polynucleotide Human genes 0.000 description 15
- 108091033319 polynucleotide Proteins 0.000 description 15
- 229960003669 carbenicillin Drugs 0.000 description 14
- FPPNZSSZRUTDAP-UWFZAAFLSA-N carbenicillin Chemical compound N([C@H]1[C@H]2SC([C@@H](N2C1=O)C(O)=O)(C)C)C(=O)C(C(O)=O)C1=CC=CC=C1 FPPNZSSZRUTDAP-UWFZAAFLSA-N 0.000 description 14
- 101150045500 galK gene Proteins 0.000 description 14
- 235000015097 nutrients Nutrition 0.000 description 14
- 239000002157 polynucleotide Substances 0.000 description 14
- 230000010076 replication Effects 0.000 description 14
- 230000027455 binding Effects 0.000 description 13
- 239000000203 mixture Substances 0.000 description 13
- 238000012544 monitoring process Methods 0.000 description 13
- 239000006152 selective media Substances 0.000 description 13
- XLYOFNOQVPJJNP-UHFFFAOYSA-N water Substances O XLYOFNOQVPJJNP-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 13
- 229920000089 Cyclic olefin copolymer Polymers 0.000 description 12
- LFQSCWFLJHTTHZ-UHFFFAOYSA-N Ethanol Chemical compound CCO LFQSCWFLJHTTHZ-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 12
- 230000001413 cellular effect Effects 0.000 description 12
- 238000013461 design Methods 0.000 description 12
- 239000011148 porous material Substances 0.000 description 12
- 239000000047 product Substances 0.000 description 12
- 239000000126 substance Substances 0.000 description 12
- 108091032973 (ribonucleotides)n+m Proteins 0.000 description 11
- 239000002033 PVDF binder Substances 0.000 description 11
- 239000006285 cell suspension Substances 0.000 description 11
- 238000010586 diagram Methods 0.000 description 11
- 238000006073 displacement reaction Methods 0.000 description 11
- 210000003527 eukaryotic cell Anatomy 0.000 description 11
- 238000003384 imaging method Methods 0.000 description 11
- 230000003287 optical effect Effects 0.000 description 11
- 239000004417 polycarbonate Substances 0.000 description 11
- 229920000515 polycarbonate Polymers 0.000 description 11
- 229920002981 polyvinylidene fluoride Polymers 0.000 description 11
- 101000952182 Homo sapiens Max-like protein X Proteins 0.000 description 10
- 102100037423 Max-like protein X Human genes 0.000 description 10
- 238000007792 addition Methods 0.000 description 10
- 230000009286 beneficial effect Effects 0.000 description 10
- 238000003780 insertion Methods 0.000 description 10
- 230000037431 insertion Effects 0.000 description 10
- 238000005259 measurement Methods 0.000 description 10
- 230000037361 pathway Effects 0.000 description 10
- 229920001343 polytetrafluoroethylene Polymers 0.000 description 10
- 239000004810 polytetrafluoroethylene Substances 0.000 description 10
- 241000894006 Bacteria Species 0.000 description 9
- 108700026244 Open Reading Frames Proteins 0.000 description 9
- 239000011324 bead Substances 0.000 description 9
- 230000003833 cell viability Effects 0.000 description 9
- 230000008859 change Effects 0.000 description 9
- 230000000295 complement effect Effects 0.000 description 9
- 239000013604 expression vector Substances 0.000 description 9
- 230000001965 increasing effect Effects 0.000 description 9
- 230000007246 mechanism Effects 0.000 description 9
- 229910052751 metal Inorganic materials 0.000 description 9
- 239000002184 metal Substances 0.000 description 9
- 238000012163 sequencing technique Methods 0.000 description 9
- 229910001868 water Inorganic materials 0.000 description 9
- 241000196324 Embryophyta Species 0.000 description 8
- 108091081024 Start codon Proteins 0.000 description 8
- 230000004075 alteration Effects 0.000 description 8
- 230000033228 biological regulation Effects 0.000 description 8
- 150000001875 compounds Chemical class 0.000 description 8
- 238000005520 cutting process Methods 0.000 description 8
- 238000001914 filtration Methods 0.000 description 8
- 229930182830 galactose Natural products 0.000 description 8
- 238000010438 heat treatment Methods 0.000 description 8
- 229920000642 polymer Polymers 0.000 description 8
- 239000011780 sodium chloride Substances 0.000 description 8
- 238000003466 welding Methods 0.000 description 8
- 239000006142 Luria-Bertani Agar Substances 0.000 description 7
- 239000006154 MacConkey agar Substances 0.000 description 7
- 238000004458 analytical method Methods 0.000 description 7
- 230000010307 cell transformation Effects 0.000 description 7
- 229920002678 cellulose Polymers 0.000 description 7
- 239000001913 cellulose Substances 0.000 description 7
- 238000007796 conventional method Methods 0.000 description 7
- 210000004748 cultured cell Anatomy 0.000 description 7
- 238000012217 deletion Methods 0.000 description 7
- 230000037430 deletion Effects 0.000 description 7
- 238000004519 manufacturing process Methods 0.000 description 7
- 238000009877 rendering Methods 0.000 description 7
- 125000006850 spacer group Chemical group 0.000 description 7
- 230000002103 transcriptional effect Effects 0.000 description 7
- 238000013519 translation Methods 0.000 description 7
- 230000014616 translation Effects 0.000 description 7
- 239000004713 Cyclic olefin copolymer Substances 0.000 description 6
- FBPFZTCFMRRESA-FSIIMWSLSA-N D-Glucitol Natural products OC[C@H](O)[C@H](O)[C@@H](O)[C@H](O)CO FBPFZTCFMRRESA-FSIIMWSLSA-N 0.000 description 6
- 102000004190 Enzymes Human genes 0.000 description 6
- 108090000790 Enzymes Proteins 0.000 description 6
- 239000000853 adhesive Substances 0.000 description 6
- 230000001070 adhesive effect Effects 0.000 description 6
- 230000015572 biosynthetic process Effects 0.000 description 6
- 238000010367 cloning Methods 0.000 description 6
- 238000001816 cooling Methods 0.000 description 6
- 238000007865 diluting Methods 0.000 description 6
- 230000005782 double-strand break Effects 0.000 description 6
- 230000000977 initiatory effect Effects 0.000 description 6
- 230000003993 interaction Effects 0.000 description 6
- 101150066555 lacZ gene Proteins 0.000 description 6
- 239000012160 loading buffer Substances 0.000 description 6
- 108020004999 messenger RNA Proteins 0.000 description 6
- 230000004048 modification Effects 0.000 description 6
- 238000012986 modification Methods 0.000 description 6
- 238000003199 nucleic acid amplification method Methods 0.000 description 6
- 238000005192 partition Methods 0.000 description 6
- 229920003023 plastic Polymers 0.000 description 6
- 239000004033 plastic Substances 0.000 description 6
- 238000011176 pooling Methods 0.000 description 6
- 229920006395 saturated elastomer Polymers 0.000 description 6
- 238000013207 serial dilution Methods 0.000 description 6
- 238000002741 site-directed mutagenesis Methods 0.000 description 6
- 239000000600 sorbitol Substances 0.000 description 6
- 235000000346 sugar Nutrition 0.000 description 6
- 230000008685 targeting Effects 0.000 description 6
- 230000001131 transforming effect Effects 0.000 description 6
- 229910000619 316 stainless steel Inorganic materials 0.000 description 5
- 108091093088 Amplicon Proteins 0.000 description 5
- 239000004698 Polyethylene Substances 0.000 description 5
- 239000004743 Polypropylene Substances 0.000 description 5
- 108010029485 Protein Isoforms Proteins 0.000 description 5
- 102000001708 Protein Isoforms Human genes 0.000 description 5
- 230000003213 activating effect Effects 0.000 description 5
- 230000003321 amplification Effects 0.000 description 5
- 210000004102 animal cell Anatomy 0.000 description 5
- 238000013459 approach Methods 0.000 description 5
- 239000000969 carrier Substances 0.000 description 5
- 238000009833 condensation Methods 0.000 description 5
- 230000005494 condensation Effects 0.000 description 5
- 238000011109 contamination Methods 0.000 description 5
- 230000008878 coupling Effects 0.000 description 5
- 238000010168 coupling process Methods 0.000 description 5
- 238000005859 coupling reaction Methods 0.000 description 5
- 230000007423 decrease Effects 0.000 description 5
- 230000001627 detrimental effect Effects 0.000 description 5
- 239000003623 enhancer Substances 0.000 description 5
- 239000012634 fragment Substances 0.000 description 5
- 239000012737 fresh medium Substances 0.000 description 5
- 239000011521 glass Substances 0.000 description 5
- 229930027917 kanamycin Natural products 0.000 description 5
- 229960000318 kanamycin Drugs 0.000 description 5
- SBUJHOSQTJFQJX-NOAMYHISSA-N kanamycin Chemical compound O[C@@H]1[C@@H](O)[C@H](O)[C@@H](CN)O[C@@H]1O[C@H]1[C@H](O)[C@@H](O[C@@H]2[C@@H]([C@@H](N)[C@H](O)[C@@H](CO)O2)O)[C@H](N)C[C@@H]1N SBUJHOSQTJFQJX-NOAMYHISSA-N 0.000 description 5
- 229930182823 kanamycin A Natural products 0.000 description 5
- 238000002703 mutagenesis Methods 0.000 description 5
- 231100000350 mutagenesis Toxicity 0.000 description 5
- 239000008188 pellet Substances 0.000 description 5
- 239000012071 phase Substances 0.000 description 5
- 229920000573 polyethylene Polymers 0.000 description 5
- 229920001155 polypropylene Polymers 0.000 description 5
- 239000013615 primer Substances 0.000 description 5
- 210000001236 prokaryotic cell Anatomy 0.000 description 5
- 238000006467 substitution reaction Methods 0.000 description 5
- QTBSBXVTEAMEQO-UHFFFAOYSA-M Acetate Chemical compound CC([O-])=O QTBSBXVTEAMEQO-UHFFFAOYSA-M 0.000 description 4
- 108091033409 CRISPR Proteins 0.000 description 4
- 108091079001 CRISPR RNA Proteins 0.000 description 4
- 241000206602 Eukaryota Species 0.000 description 4
- 108700028146 Genetic Enhancer Elements Proteins 0.000 description 4
- 241001465754 Metazoa Species 0.000 description 4
- 239000000020 Nitrocellulose Substances 0.000 description 4
- 239000004677 Nylon Substances 0.000 description 4
- 229920012266 Poly(ether sulfone) PES Polymers 0.000 description 4
- 239000004952 Polyamide Substances 0.000 description 4
- 239000004793 Polystyrene Substances 0.000 description 4
- 241001355948 Turnip curly top virus Species 0.000 description 4
- FJWGYAHXMCUOOM-QHOUIDNNSA-N [(2s,3r,4s,5r,6r)-2-[(2r,3r,4s,5r,6s)-4,5-dinitrooxy-2-(nitrooxymethyl)-6-[(2r,3r,4s,5r,6s)-4,5,6-trinitrooxy-2-(nitrooxymethyl)oxan-3-yl]oxyoxan-3-yl]oxy-3,5-dinitrooxy-6-(nitrooxymethyl)oxan-4-yl] nitrate Chemical compound O([C@@H]1O[C@@H]([C@H]([C@H](O[N+]([O-])=O)[C@H]1O[N+]([O-])=O)O[C@H]1[C@@H]([C@@H](O[N+]([O-])=O)[C@H](O[N+]([O-])=O)[C@@H](CO[N+]([O-])=O)O1)O[N+]([O-])=O)CO[N+](=O)[O-])[C@@H]1[C@@H](CO[N+]([O-])=O)O[C@@H](O[N+]([O-])=O)[C@H](O[N+]([O-])=O)[C@H]1O[N+]([O-])=O FJWGYAHXMCUOOM-QHOUIDNNSA-N 0.000 description 4
- 230000001464 adherent effect Effects 0.000 description 4
- 238000005273 aeration Methods 0.000 description 4
- 239000003242 anti bacterial agent Substances 0.000 description 4
- 229940088710 antibiotic agent Drugs 0.000 description 4
- 229920002301 cellulose acetate Polymers 0.000 description 4
- 239000013626 chemical specie Substances 0.000 description 4
- 229920001577 copolymer Polymers 0.000 description 4
- 230000000875 corresponding effect Effects 0.000 description 4
- 150000002148 esters Chemical class 0.000 description 4
- 239000003365 glass fiber Substances 0.000 description 4
- 238000013537 high throughput screening Methods 0.000 description 4
- 239000012510 hollow fiber Substances 0.000 description 4
- 230000006872 improvement Effects 0.000 description 4
- 238000003754 machining Methods 0.000 description 4
- 238000007726 management method Methods 0.000 description 4
- 235000012459 muffins Nutrition 0.000 description 4
- 229920001220 nitrocellulos Polymers 0.000 description 4
- 229920001778 nylon Polymers 0.000 description 4
- 229920002492 poly(sulfone) Polymers 0.000 description 4
- 230000008488 polyadenylation Effects 0.000 description 4
- 229920002647 polyamide Polymers 0.000 description 4
- 229920002223 polystyrene Polymers 0.000 description 4
- 229920002635 polyurethane Polymers 0.000 description 4
- 239000004814 polyurethane Substances 0.000 description 4
- 239000004800 polyvinyl chloride Substances 0.000 description 4
- 229920000915 polyvinyl chloride Polymers 0.000 description 4
- 238000000746 purification Methods 0.000 description 4
- 230000002829 reductive effect Effects 0.000 description 4
- 230000000717 retained effect Effects 0.000 description 4
- 230000009758 senescence Effects 0.000 description 4
- 239000000725 suspension Substances 0.000 description 4
- 230000009897 systematic effect Effects 0.000 description 4
- 238000010354 CRISPR gene editing Methods 0.000 description 3
- OKTJSMMVPCPJKN-UHFFFAOYSA-N Carbon Chemical compound [C] OKTJSMMVPCPJKN-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 3
- 102000005221 Cleavage Stimulation Factor Human genes 0.000 description 3
- 108010081236 Cleavage Stimulation Factor Proteins 0.000 description 3
- 241000124008 Mammalia Species 0.000 description 3
- 108091092878 Microsatellite Proteins 0.000 description 3
- 108091027544 Subgenomic mRNA Proteins 0.000 description 3
- 241000700605 Viruses Species 0.000 description 3
- 238000005267 amalgamation Methods 0.000 description 3
- 125000000539 amino acid group Chemical group 0.000 description 3
- 229910052799 carbon Inorganic materials 0.000 description 3
- 210000000349 chromosome Anatomy 0.000 description 3
- 238000003776 cleavage reaction Methods 0.000 description 3
- 230000001010 compromised effect Effects 0.000 description 3
- 230000001351 cycling effect Effects 0.000 description 3
- 230000003247 decreasing effect Effects 0.000 description 3
- 238000009510 drug design Methods 0.000 description 3
- 238000005516 engineering process Methods 0.000 description 3
- 238000011010 flushing procedure Methods 0.000 description 3
- 239000011888 foil Substances 0.000 description 3
- BRZYSWJRSDMWLG-CAXSIQPQSA-N geneticin Natural products O1C[C@@](O)(C)[C@H](NC)[C@@H](O)[C@H]1O[C@@H]1[C@@H](O)[C@H](O[C@@H]2[C@@H]([C@@H](O)[C@H](O)[C@@H](C(C)O)O2)N)[C@@H](N)C[C@H]1N BRZYSWJRSDMWLG-CAXSIQPQSA-N 0.000 description 3
- 210000005260 human cell Anatomy 0.000 description 3
- 238000009396 hybridization Methods 0.000 description 3
- 229910052739 hydrogen Inorganic materials 0.000 description 3
- 239000001257 hydrogen Substances 0.000 description 3
- 238000000338 in vitro Methods 0.000 description 3
- 238000001746 injection moulding Methods 0.000 description 3
- 230000010354 integration Effects 0.000 description 3
- 230000006799 invasive growth in response to glucose limitation Effects 0.000 description 3
- 230000001788 irregular Effects 0.000 description 3
- 238000009630 liquid culture Methods 0.000 description 3
- 230000033001 locomotion Effects 0.000 description 3
- 238000002156 mixing Methods 0.000 description 3
- 238000010369 molecular cloning Methods 0.000 description 3
- 230000007935 neutral effect Effects 0.000 description 3
- 102000054765 polymorphisms of proteins Human genes 0.000 description 3
- 108090000765 processed proteins & peptides Proteins 0.000 description 3
- 102000004196 processed proteins & peptides Human genes 0.000 description 3
- 238000002708 random mutagenesis Methods 0.000 description 3
- 238000003259 recombinant expression Methods 0.000 description 3
- 230000006798 recombination Effects 0.000 description 3
- 238000005215 recombination Methods 0.000 description 3
- 230000002441 reversible effect Effects 0.000 description 3
- 230000007017 scission Effects 0.000 description 3
- 230000003595 spectral effect Effects 0.000 description 3
- 230000003068 static effect Effects 0.000 description 3
- 238000003860 storage Methods 0.000 description 3
- 239000006228 supernatant Substances 0.000 description 3
- 238000003786 synthesis reaction Methods 0.000 description 3
- 210000001519 tissue Anatomy 0.000 description 3
- 231100000331 toxic Toxicity 0.000 description 3
- 230000002588 toxic effect Effects 0.000 description 3
- 238000001890 transfection Methods 0.000 description 3
- 238000002834 transmittance Methods 0.000 description 3
- 230000035899 viability Effects 0.000 description 3
- 239000013603 viral vector Substances 0.000 description 3
- 239000002699 waste material Substances 0.000 description 3
- ZZKNRXZVGOYGJT-VKHMYHEASA-N (2s)-2-[(2-phosphonoacetyl)amino]butanedioic acid Chemical compound OC(=O)C[C@@H](C(O)=O)NC(=O)CP(O)(O)=O ZZKNRXZVGOYGJT-VKHMYHEASA-N 0.000 description 2
- QGZKDVFQNNGYKY-UHFFFAOYSA-N Ammonia Chemical compound N QGZKDVFQNNGYKY-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- BHELIUBJHYAEDK-OAIUPTLZSA-N Aspoxicillin Chemical compound C1([C@H](C(=O)N[C@@H]2C(N3[C@H](C(C)(C)S[C@@H]32)C(O)=O)=O)NC(=O)[C@H](N)CC(=O)NC)=CC=C(O)C=C1 BHELIUBJHYAEDK-OAIUPTLZSA-N 0.000 description 2
- 102000011591 Cleavage And Polyadenylation Specificity Factor Human genes 0.000 description 2
- 108010076130 Cleavage And Polyadenylation Specificity Factor Proteins 0.000 description 2
- 241000195493 Cryptophyta Species 0.000 description 2
- 102000053602 DNA Human genes 0.000 description 2
- 230000004568 DNA-binding Effects 0.000 description 2
- 108090000626 DNA-directed RNA polymerases Proteins 0.000 description 2
- 102000004163 DNA-directed RNA polymerases Human genes 0.000 description 2
- 229920002307 Dextran Polymers 0.000 description 2
- 206010059866 Drug resistance Diseases 0.000 description 2
- ULGZDMOVFRHVEP-RWJQBGPGSA-N Erythromycin Chemical compound O([C@@H]1[C@@H](C)C(=O)O[C@@H]([C@@]([C@H](O)[C@@H](C)C(=O)[C@H](C)C[C@@](C)(O)[C@H](O[C@H]2[C@@H]([C@H](C[C@@H](C)O2)N(C)C)O)[C@H]1C)(C)O)CC)[C@H]1C[C@@](C)(OC)[C@@H](O)[C@H](C)O1 ULGZDMOVFRHVEP-RWJQBGPGSA-N 0.000 description 2
- 108060002716 Exonuclease Proteins 0.000 description 2
- 108010037362 Extracellular Matrix Proteins Proteins 0.000 description 2
- 102000010834 Extracellular Matrix Proteins Human genes 0.000 description 2
- 241000233866 Fungi Species 0.000 description 2
- 108700007698 Genetic Terminator Regions Proteins 0.000 description 2
- 208000012766 Growth delay Diseases 0.000 description 2
- GUBGYTABKSRVRQ-QKKXKWKRSA-N Lactose Natural products OC[C@H]1O[C@@H](O[C@H]2[C@H](O)[C@@H](O)C(O)O[C@@H]2CO)[C@H](O)[C@@H](O)[C@H]1O GUBGYTABKSRVRQ-QKKXKWKRSA-N 0.000 description 2
- 108090000364 Ligases Proteins 0.000 description 2
- 102000003960 Ligases Human genes 0.000 description 2
- 229920000459 Nitrile rubber Polymers 0.000 description 2
- 241000283973 Oryctolagus cuniculus Species 0.000 description 2
- 239000004820 Pressure-sensitive adhesive Substances 0.000 description 2
- 102000009572 RNA Polymerase II Human genes 0.000 description 2
- 108010009460 RNA Polymerase II Proteins 0.000 description 2
- XUIMIQQOPSSXEZ-UHFFFAOYSA-N Silicon Chemical compound [Si] XUIMIQQOPSSXEZ-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- 239000004098 Tetracycline Substances 0.000 description 2
- 230000009102 absorption Effects 0.000 description 2
- 238000010521 absorption reaction Methods 0.000 description 2
- 239000011543 agarose gel Substances 0.000 description 2
- WYTGDNHDOZPMIW-RCBQFDQVSA-N alstonine Natural products C1=CC2=C3C=CC=CC3=NC2=C2N1C[C@H]1[C@H](C)OC=C(C(=O)OC)[C@H]1C2 WYTGDNHDOZPMIW-RCBQFDQVSA-N 0.000 description 2
- 229910052782 aluminium Inorganic materials 0.000 description 2
- XAGFODPZIPBFFR-UHFFFAOYSA-N aluminium Chemical compound [Al] XAGFODPZIPBFFR-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- 101150073130 ampR gene Proteins 0.000 description 2
- 238000000137 annealing Methods 0.000 description 2
- 230000000712 assembly Effects 0.000 description 2
- 238000000429 assembly Methods 0.000 description 2
- 230000005540 biological transmission Effects 0.000 description 2
- 238000004422 calculation algorithm Methods 0.000 description 2
- UBAZGMLMVVQSCD-UHFFFAOYSA-N carbon dioxide;molecular oxygen Chemical compound O=O.O=C=O UBAZGMLMVVQSCD-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- 230000030833 cell death Effects 0.000 description 2
- 230000032823 cell division Effects 0.000 description 2
- 230000003915 cell function Effects 0.000 description 2
- 230000004640 cellular pathway Effects 0.000 description 2
- 230000033077 cellular process Effects 0.000 description 2
- 230000004098 cellular respiration Effects 0.000 description 2
- 239000000919 ceramic Substances 0.000 description 2
- 238000007596 consolidation process Methods 0.000 description 2
- 238000012937 correction Methods 0.000 description 2
- 230000002596 correlated effect Effects 0.000 description 2
- OPTASPLRGRRNAP-UHFFFAOYSA-N cytosine Chemical compound NC=1C=CNC(=O)N=1 OPTASPLRGRRNAP-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- 230000007812 deficiency Effects 0.000 description 2
- 230000002950 deficient Effects 0.000 description 2
- 230000001419 dependent effect Effects 0.000 description 2
- 238000011033 desalting Methods 0.000 description 2
- 239000006160 differential media Substances 0.000 description 2
- VHJLVAABSRFDPM-QWWZWVQMSA-N dithiothreitol Chemical compound SC[C@@H](O)[C@H](O)CS VHJLVAABSRFDPM-QWWZWVQMSA-N 0.000 description 2
- 239000012154 double-distilled water Substances 0.000 description 2
- 238000001312 dry etching Methods 0.000 description 2
- 229920001971 elastomer Polymers 0.000 description 2
- 230000002255 enzymatic effect Effects 0.000 description 2
- 230000002922 epistatic effect Effects 0.000 description 2
- 230000001747 exhibiting effect Effects 0.000 description 2
- 102000013165 exonuclease Human genes 0.000 description 2
- 210000002744 extracellular matrix Anatomy 0.000 description 2
- 238000002875 fluorescence polarization Methods 0.000 description 2
- 102000034287 fluorescent proteins Human genes 0.000 description 2
- 108091006047 fluorescent proteins Proteins 0.000 description 2
- RWSXRVCMGQZWBV-WDSKDSINSA-N glutathione Chemical compound OC(=O)[C@@H](N)CCC(=O)N[C@@H](CS)C(=O)NCC(O)=O RWSXRVCMGQZWBV-WDSKDSINSA-N 0.000 description 2
- 230000005484 gravity Effects 0.000 description 2
- 230000036541 health Effects 0.000 description 2
- 238000002744 homologous recombination Methods 0.000 description 2
- 230000006801 homologous recombination Effects 0.000 description 2
- 230000002209 hydrophobic effect Effects 0.000 description 2
- 238000001566 impedance spectroscopy Methods 0.000 description 2
- 239000012212 insulator Substances 0.000 description 2
- 239000008101 lactose Substances 0.000 description 2
- 239000003446 ligand Substances 0.000 description 2
- 239000002502 liposome Substances 0.000 description 2
- XIXADJRWDQXREU-UHFFFAOYSA-M lithium acetate Chemical compound [Li+].CC([O-])=O XIXADJRWDQXREU-UHFFFAOYSA-M 0.000 description 2
- 238000004020 luminiscence type Methods 0.000 description 2
- 230000010534 mechanism of action Effects 0.000 description 2
- 238000009285 membrane fouling Methods 0.000 description 2
- 230000002503 metabolic effect Effects 0.000 description 2
- 239000002207 metabolite Substances 0.000 description 2
- 150000002739 metals Chemical class 0.000 description 2
- 108091027963 non-coding RNA Proteins 0.000 description 2
- 102000042567 non-coding RNA Human genes 0.000 description 2
- 230000030648 nucleus localization Effects 0.000 description 2
- 229920002493 poly(chlorotrifluoroethylene) Polymers 0.000 description 2
- 229920003229 poly(methyl methacrylate) Polymers 0.000 description 2
- 239000005023 polychlorotrifluoroethylene (PCTFE) polymer Substances 0.000 description 2
- 239000004926 polymethyl methacrylate Substances 0.000 description 2
- 229920001296 polysiloxane Polymers 0.000 description 2
- 238000002360 preparation method Methods 0.000 description 2
- 238000004886 process control Methods 0.000 description 2
- 230000004224 protection Effects 0.000 description 2
- RXWNCPJZOCPEPQ-NVWDDTSBSA-N puromycin Chemical compound C1=CC(OC)=CC=C1C[C@H](N)C(=O)N[C@H]1[C@@H](O)[C@H](N2C3=NC=NC(=C3N=C2)N(C)C)O[C@@H]1CO RXWNCPJZOCPEPQ-NVWDDTSBSA-N 0.000 description 2
- 238000011002 quantification Methods 0.000 description 2
- 230000009467 reduction Effects 0.000 description 2
- 230000000754 repressing effect Effects 0.000 description 2
- 238000011160 research Methods 0.000 description 2
- 238000007790 scraping Methods 0.000 description 2
- 238000007789 sealing Methods 0.000 description 2
- 238000000926 separation method Methods 0.000 description 2
- 230000019491 signal transduction Effects 0.000 description 2
- 229910052710 silicon Inorganic materials 0.000 description 2
- 239000010703 silicon Substances 0.000 description 2
- 238000004611 spectroscopical analysis Methods 0.000 description 2
- 230000007480 spreading Effects 0.000 description 2
- 238000003892 spreading Methods 0.000 description 2
- 229910001220 stainless steel Inorganic materials 0.000 description 2
- 239000010935 stainless steel Substances 0.000 description 2
- 210000000130 stem cell Anatomy 0.000 description 2
- UCSJYZPVAKXKNQ-HZYVHMACSA-N streptomycin Chemical compound CN[C@H]1[C@H](O)[C@@H](O)[C@H](CO)O[C@H]1O[C@@H]1[C@](C=O)(O)[C@H](C)O[C@H]1O[C@@H]1[C@@H](NC(N)=N)[C@H](O)[C@@H](NC(N)=N)[C@H](O)[C@H]1O UCSJYZPVAKXKNQ-HZYVHMACSA-N 0.000 description 2
- 150000008163 sugars Chemical class 0.000 description 2
- 230000008093 supporting effect Effects 0.000 description 2
- 230000004083 survival effect Effects 0.000 description 2
- 229960002180 tetracycline Drugs 0.000 description 2
- 229930101283 tetracycline Natural products 0.000 description 2
- 235000019364 tetracycline Nutrition 0.000 description 2
- 150000003522 tetracyclines Chemical class 0.000 description 2
- RWQNBRDOKXIBIV-UHFFFAOYSA-N thymine Chemical compound CC1=CNC(=O)NC1=O RWQNBRDOKXIBIV-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- 231100000419 toxicity Toxicity 0.000 description 2
- 230000001988 toxicity Effects 0.000 description 2
- 238000011222 transcriptome analysis Methods 0.000 description 2
- 241000701161 unidentified adenovirus Species 0.000 description 2
- 241001430294 unidentified retrovirus Species 0.000 description 2
- 238000011144 upstream manufacturing Methods 0.000 description 2
- 238000010200 validation analysis Methods 0.000 description 2
- 210000002845 virion Anatomy 0.000 description 2
- 238000001039 wet etching Methods 0.000 description 2
- 238000012070 whole genome sequencing analysis Methods 0.000 description 2
- 102000040650 (ribonucleotides)n+m Human genes 0.000 description 1
- DUJGMZAICVPCBJ-VDAHYXPESA-N 4-amino-1-[(1r,4r,5s)-4,5-dihydroxy-3-(hydroxymethyl)cyclopent-2-en-1-yl]pyrimidin-2-one Chemical compound O=C1N=C(N)C=CN1[C@H]1[C@H](O)[C@H](O)C(CO)=C1 DUJGMZAICVPCBJ-VDAHYXPESA-N 0.000 description 1
- AWXGSYPUMWKTBR-UHFFFAOYSA-N 4-carbazol-9-yl-n,n-bis(4-carbazol-9-ylphenyl)aniline Chemical compound C12=CC=CC=C2C2=CC=CC=C2N1C1=CC=C(N(C=2C=CC(=CC=2)N2C3=CC=CC=C3C3=CC=CC=C32)C=2C=CC(=CC=2)N2C3=CC=CC=C3C3=CC=CC=C32)C=C1 AWXGSYPUMWKTBR-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- UZOVYGYOLBIAJR-UHFFFAOYSA-N 4-isocyanato-4'-methyldiphenylmethane Chemical compound C1=CC(C)=CC=C1CC1=CC=C(N=C=O)C=C1 UZOVYGYOLBIAJR-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- FHVDTGUDJYJELY-UHFFFAOYSA-N 6-{[2-carboxy-4,5-dihydroxy-6-(phosphanyloxy)oxan-3-yl]oxy}-4,5-dihydroxy-3-phosphanyloxane-2-carboxylic acid Chemical group O1C(C(O)=O)C(P)C(O)C(O)C1OC1C(C(O)=O)OC(OP)C(O)C1O FHVDTGUDJYJELY-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- QTBSBXVTEAMEQO-UHFFFAOYSA-N Acetic acid Chemical compound CC(O)=O QTBSBXVTEAMEQO-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 102000002260 Alkaline Phosphatase Human genes 0.000 description 1
- 108020004774 Alkaline Phosphatase Proteins 0.000 description 1
- 241000203069 Archaea Species 0.000 description 1
- 238000012935 Averaging Methods 0.000 description 1
- 241000479656 Bessa Species 0.000 description 1
- 108010006654 Bleomycin Proteins 0.000 description 1
- COVZYZSDYWQREU-UHFFFAOYSA-N Busulfan Chemical compound CS(=O)(=O)OCCCCOS(C)(=O)=O COVZYZSDYWQREU-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 101100298998 Caenorhabditis elegans pbs-3 gene Proteins 0.000 description 1
- 101100191768 Caenorhabditis elegans pbs-4 gene Proteins 0.000 description 1
- DLGOEMSEDOSKAD-UHFFFAOYSA-N Carmustine Chemical compound ClCCNC(=O)N(N=O)CCCl DLGOEMSEDOSKAD-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 229910000531 Co alloy Inorganic materials 0.000 description 1
- 102000008186 Collagen Human genes 0.000 description 1
- 108010035532 Collagen Proteins 0.000 description 1
- UHDGCWIWMRVCDJ-CCXZUQQUSA-N Cytarabine Chemical compound O=C1N=C(N)C=CN1[C@H]1[C@@H](O)[C@H](O)[C@@H](CO)O1 UHDGCWIWMRVCDJ-CCXZUQQUSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 102100026846 Cytidine deaminase Human genes 0.000 description 1
- 108010031325 Cytidine deaminase Proteins 0.000 description 1
- FBPFZTCFMRRESA-JGWLITMVSA-N D-glucitol Chemical compound OC[C@H](O)[C@@H](O)[C@H](O)[C@H](O)CO FBPFZTCFMRRESA-JGWLITMVSA-N 0.000 description 1
- SHZGCJCMOBCMKK-UHFFFAOYSA-N D-mannomethylose Natural products CC1OC(O)C(O)C(O)C1O SHZGCJCMOBCMKK-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 230000005778 DNA damage Effects 0.000 description 1
- 231100000277 DNA damage Toxicity 0.000 description 1
- 238000000018 DNA microarray Methods 0.000 description 1
- 239000003155 DNA primer Substances 0.000 description 1
- 230000033616 DNA repair Effects 0.000 description 1
- 241000702421 Dependoparvovirus Species 0.000 description 1
- 102100024746 Dihydrofolate reductase Human genes 0.000 description 1
- 239000006144 Dulbecco’s modified Eagle's medium Substances 0.000 description 1
- 108010042407 Endonucleases Proteins 0.000 description 1
- 102000004533 Endonucleases Human genes 0.000 description 1
- YQYJSBFKSSDGFO-UHFFFAOYSA-N Epihygromycin Natural products OC1C(O)C(C(=O)C)OC1OC(C(=C1)O)=CC=C1C=C(C)C(=O)NC1C(O)C(O)C2OCOC2C1O YQYJSBFKSSDGFO-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 101100105459 Escherichia coli (strain K12) yagP gene Proteins 0.000 description 1
- 241000660147 Escherichia coli str. K-12 substr. MG1655 Species 0.000 description 1
- 108700024394 Exon Proteins 0.000 description 1
- 238000005079 FT-Raman Methods 0.000 description 1
- 230000005526 G1 to G0 transition Effects 0.000 description 1
- 108010010803 Gelatin Proteins 0.000 description 1
- 229930182566 Gentamicin Natural products 0.000 description 1
- CEAZRRDELHUEMR-URQXQFDESA-N Gentamicin Chemical compound O1[C@H](C(C)NC)CC[C@@H](N)[C@H]1O[C@H]1[C@H](O)[C@@H](O[C@@H]2[C@@H]([C@@H](NC)[C@@](C)(O)CO2)O)[C@H](N)C[C@@H]1N CEAZRRDELHUEMR-URQXQFDESA-N 0.000 description 1
- WQZGKKKJIJFFOK-GASJEMHNSA-N Glucose Natural products OC[C@H]1OC(O)[C@H](O)[C@@H](O)[C@@H]1O WQZGKKKJIJFFOK-GASJEMHNSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 108010024636 Glutathione Proteins 0.000 description 1
- 102100037473 Glutathione S-transferase A1 Human genes 0.000 description 1
- 102000009465 Growth Factor Receptors Human genes 0.000 description 1
- 108010009202 Growth Factor Receptors Proteins 0.000 description 1
- 102100031573 Hematopoietic progenitor cell antigen CD34 Human genes 0.000 description 1
- 108010034791 Heterochromatin Proteins 0.000 description 1
- 241000238631 Hexapoda Species 0.000 description 1
- 101100246554 Homo sapiens CAD gene Proteins 0.000 description 1
- 101000908713 Homo sapiens Dihydrofolate reductase Proteins 0.000 description 1
- 101001026125 Homo sapiens Glutathione S-transferase A1 Proteins 0.000 description 1
- 101000777663 Homo sapiens Hematopoietic progenitor cell antigen CD34 Proteins 0.000 description 1
- 101000988802 Homo sapiens Hematopoietic prostaglandin D synthase Proteins 0.000 description 1
- 101001057504 Homo sapiens Interferon-stimulated gene 20 kDa protein Proteins 0.000 description 1
- 101001055144 Homo sapiens Interleukin-2 receptor subunit alpha Proteins 0.000 description 1
- 101001000302 Homo sapiens Max-interacting protein 1 Proteins 0.000 description 1
- 101000957259 Homo sapiens Mitotic spindle assembly checkpoint protein MAD2A Proteins 0.000 description 1
- 101000884271 Homo sapiens Signal transducer CD24 Proteins 0.000 description 1
- 101000837344 Homo sapiens T-cell leukemia translocation-altered gene protein Proteins 0.000 description 1
- 101000809797 Homo sapiens Thymidylate synthase Proteins 0.000 description 1
- 101000801254 Homo sapiens Tumor necrosis factor receptor superfamily member 16 Proteins 0.000 description 1
- GRRNUXAQVGOGFE-UHFFFAOYSA-N Hygromycin-B Natural products OC1C(NC)CC(N)C(O)C1OC1C2OC3(C(C(O)C(O)C(C(N)CO)O3)O)OC2C(O)C(CO)O1 GRRNUXAQVGOGFE-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 102100027268 Interferon-stimulated gene 20 kDa protein Human genes 0.000 description 1
- 108020004684 Internal Ribosome Entry Sites Proteins 0.000 description 1
- 108091092195 Intron Proteins 0.000 description 1
- QNAYBMKLOCPYGJ-REOHCLBHSA-N L-alanine Chemical compound C[C@H](N)C(O)=O QNAYBMKLOCPYGJ-REOHCLBHSA-N 0.000 description 1
- ZDXPYRJPNDTMRX-VKHMYHEASA-N L-glutamine Chemical compound OC(=O)[C@@H](N)CCC(N)=O ZDXPYRJPNDTMRX-VKHMYHEASA-N 0.000 description 1
- ROHFNLRQFUQHCH-YFKPBYRVSA-N L-leucine Chemical compound CC(C)C[C@H](N)C(O)=O ROHFNLRQFUQHCH-YFKPBYRVSA-N 0.000 description 1
- SHZGCJCMOBCMKK-JFNONXLTSA-N L-rhamnopyranose Chemical compound C[C@@H]1OC(O)[C@H](O)[C@H](O)[C@H]1O SHZGCJCMOBCMKK-JFNONXLTSA-N 0.000 description 1
- PNNNRSAQSRJVSB-UHFFFAOYSA-N L-rhamnose Natural products CC(O)C(O)C(O)C(O)C=O PNNNRSAQSRJVSB-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- KZSNJWFQEVHDMF-BYPYZUCNSA-N L-valine Chemical compound CC(C)[C@H](N)C(O)=O KZSNJWFQEVHDMF-BYPYZUCNSA-N 0.000 description 1
- JVTAAEKCZFNVCJ-UHFFFAOYSA-M Lactate Chemical compound CC(O)C([O-])=O JVTAAEKCZFNVCJ-UHFFFAOYSA-M 0.000 description 1
- ROHFNLRQFUQHCH-UHFFFAOYSA-N Leucine Natural products CC(C)CC(N)C(O)=O ROHFNLRQFUQHCH-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 108010047230 Member 1 Subfamily B ATP Binding Cassette Transporter Proteins 0.000 description 1
- VVQNEPGJFQJSBK-UHFFFAOYSA-N Methyl methacrylate Chemical compound COC(=O)C(C)=C VVQNEPGJFQJSBK-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 102100025825 Methylated-DNA-protein-cysteine methyltransferase Human genes 0.000 description 1
- 108060004795 Methyltransferase Proteins 0.000 description 1
- 102000016397 Methyltransferase Human genes 0.000 description 1
- 102100038792 Mitotic spindle assembly checkpoint protein MAD2A Human genes 0.000 description 1
- 108010085220 Multiprotein Complexes Proteins 0.000 description 1
- 102000007474 Multiprotein Complexes Human genes 0.000 description 1
- 102000007999 Nuclear Proteins Human genes 0.000 description 1
- 108010089610 Nuclear Proteins Proteins 0.000 description 1
- 101710160107 Outer membrane protein A Proteins 0.000 description 1
- 102000017143 RNA Polymerase I Human genes 0.000 description 1
- 108010013845 RNA Polymerase I Proteins 0.000 description 1
- 102000014450 RNA Polymerase III Human genes 0.000 description 1
- 108010078067 RNA Polymerase III Proteins 0.000 description 1
- 238000001069 Raman spectroscopy Methods 0.000 description 1
- 108020004511 Recombinant DNA Proteins 0.000 description 1
- 108091027981 Response element Proteins 0.000 description 1
- 239000006146 Roswell Park Memorial Institute medium Substances 0.000 description 1
- 102100038081 Signal transducer CD24 Human genes 0.000 description 1
- 108700005078 Synthetic Genes Proteins 0.000 description 1
- 102100028692 T-cell leukemia translocation-altered gene protein Human genes 0.000 description 1
- 238000010459 TALEN Methods 0.000 description 1
- RTAQQCXQSZGOHL-UHFFFAOYSA-N Titanium Chemical compound [Ti] RTAQQCXQSZGOHL-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 101710183280 Topoisomerase Proteins 0.000 description 1
- 108010043645 Transcription Activator-Like Effector Nucleases Proteins 0.000 description 1
- 108091023040 Transcription factor Proteins 0.000 description 1
- 102000040945 Transcription factor Human genes 0.000 description 1
- ISAKRJDGNUQOIC-UHFFFAOYSA-N Uracil Chemical group O=C1C=CNC(=O)N1 ISAKRJDGNUQOIC-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- KZSNJWFQEVHDMF-UHFFFAOYSA-N Valine Natural products CC(C)C(N)C(O)=O KZSNJWFQEVHDMF-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 238000002835 absorbance Methods 0.000 description 1
- 238000009825 accumulation Methods 0.000 description 1
- 239000002253 acid Substances 0.000 description 1
- 150000007513 acids Chemical class 0.000 description 1
- GFFGJBXGBJISGV-UHFFFAOYSA-N adenyl group Chemical group N1=CN=C2N=CNC2=C1N GFFGJBXGBJISGV-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 230000002776 aggregation Effects 0.000 description 1
- 238000004220 aggregation Methods 0.000 description 1
- 235000004279 alanine Nutrition 0.000 description 1
- 238000012867 alanine scanning Methods 0.000 description 1
- 125000001931 aliphatic group Chemical group 0.000 description 1
- 229910021529 ammonia Inorganic materials 0.000 description 1
- 229960000723 ampicillin Drugs 0.000 description 1
- AVKUERGKIZMTKX-NJBDSQKTSA-N ampicillin Chemical compound C1([C@@H](N)C(=O)N[C@H]2[C@H]3SC([C@@H](N3C2=O)C(O)=O)(C)C)=CC=CC=C1 AVKUERGKIZMTKX-NJBDSQKTSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 125000000129 anionic group Chemical group 0.000 description 1
- 239000002246 antineoplastic agent Substances 0.000 description 1
- 125000000089 arabinosyl group Chemical group C1([C@@H](O)[C@H](O)[C@H](O)CO1)* 0.000 description 1
- 238000000149 argon plasma sintering Methods 0.000 description 1
- 125000003118 aryl group Chemical group 0.000 description 1
- 238000003556 assay Methods 0.000 description 1
- QVGXLLKOCUKJST-UHFFFAOYSA-N atomic oxygen Chemical compound [O] QVGXLLKOCUKJST-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 238000011021 bench scale process Methods 0.000 description 1
- WQZGKKKJIJFFOK-VFUOTHLCSA-N beta-D-glucose Chemical compound OC[C@H]1O[C@@H](O)[C@H](O)[C@@H](O)[C@@H]1O WQZGKKKJIJFFOK-VFUOTHLCSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 230000003115 biocidal effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- 239000012620 biological material Substances 0.000 description 1
- 229930189065 blasticidin Natural products 0.000 description 1
- 229960001561 bleomycin Drugs 0.000 description 1
- OYVAGSVQBOHSSS-UAPAGMARSA-O bleomycin A2 Chemical compound N([C@H](C(=O)N[C@H](C)[C@@H](O)[C@H](C)C(=O)N[C@@H]([C@H](O)C)C(=O)NCCC=1SC=C(N=1)C=1SC=C(N=1)C(=O)NCCC[S+](C)C)[C@@H](O[C@H]1[C@H]([C@@H](O)[C@H](O)[C@H](CO)O1)O[C@@H]1[C@H]([C@@H](OC(N)=O)[C@H](O)[C@@H](CO)O1)O)C=1N=CNC=1)C(=O)C1=NC([C@H](CC(N)=O)NC[C@H](N)C(N)=O)=NC(N)=C1C OYVAGSVQBOHSSS-UAPAGMARSA-O 0.000 description 1
- 230000000903 blocking effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- 230000008499 blood brain barrier function Effects 0.000 description 1
- 210000001218 blood-brain barrier Anatomy 0.000 description 1
- 230000005587 bubbling Effects 0.000 description 1
- NTXGQCSETZTARF-UHFFFAOYSA-N buta-1,3-diene;prop-2-enenitrile Chemical compound C=CC=C.C=CC#N NTXGQCSETZTARF-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 239000006227 byproduct Substances 0.000 description 1
- 210000004899 c-terminal region Anatomy 0.000 description 1
- 229960005243 carmustine Drugs 0.000 description 1
- 125000002091 cationic group Chemical group 0.000 description 1
- 230000001364 causal effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- 230000008568 cell cell communication Effects 0.000 description 1
- 230000001767 chemoprotection Effects 0.000 description 1
- 229920001436 collagen Polymers 0.000 description 1
- 230000002860 competitive effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- 230000009918 complex formation Effects 0.000 description 1
- 230000000536 complexating effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- 238000007906 compression Methods 0.000 description 1
- 239000004020 conductor Substances 0.000 description 1
- 238000012790 confirmation Methods 0.000 description 1
- 239000000356 contaminant Substances 0.000 description 1
- 229940104302 cytosine Drugs 0.000 description 1
- 230000006378 damage Effects 0.000 description 1
- 230000009849 deactivation Effects 0.000 description 1
- 230000000593 degrading effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- 238000004925 denaturation Methods 0.000 description 1
- 230000036425 denaturation Effects 0.000 description 1
- 238000000151 deposition Methods 0.000 description 1
- 230000000368 destabilizing effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- 238000002405 diagnostic procedure Methods 0.000 description 1
- 108020001096 dihydrofolate reductase Proteins 0.000 description 1
- 208000037265 diseases, disorders, signs and symptoms Diseases 0.000 description 1
- 208000035475 disorder Diseases 0.000 description 1
- 230000034431 double-strand break repair via homologous recombination Effects 0.000 description 1
- 229940079593 drug Drugs 0.000 description 1
- 239000003814 drug Substances 0.000 description 1
- 238000004049 embossing Methods 0.000 description 1
- 239000000839 emulsion Substances 0.000 description 1
- 238000012407 engineering method Methods 0.000 description 1
- 230000002708 enhancing effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- 229960003276 erythromycin Drugs 0.000 description 1
- 238000005530 etching Methods 0.000 description 1
- 210000001808 exosome Anatomy 0.000 description 1
- 238000001125 extrusion Methods 0.000 description 1
- 239000012065 filter cake Substances 0.000 description 1
- ODKNJVUHOIMIIZ-RRKCRQDMSA-N floxuridine Chemical compound C1[C@H](O)[C@@H](CO)O[C@H]1N1C(=O)NC(=O)C(F)=C1 ODKNJVUHOIMIIZ-RRKCRQDMSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 238000001943 fluorescence-activated cell sorting Methods 0.000 description 1
- 230000037433 frameshift Effects 0.000 description 1
- 125000000524 functional group Chemical group 0.000 description 1
- 230000002538 fungal effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- 230000005021 gait Effects 0.000 description 1
- ZXQYGBMAQZUVMI-GCMPRSNUSA-N gamma-cyhalothrin Chemical compound CC1(C)[C@@H](\C=C(/Cl)C(F)(F)F)[C@H]1C(=O)O[C@H](C#N)C1=CC=CC(OC=2C=CC=CC=2)=C1 ZXQYGBMAQZUVMI-GCMPRSNUSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 239000000499 gel Substances 0.000 description 1
- 239000008273 gelatin Substances 0.000 description 1
- 229920000159 gelatin Polymers 0.000 description 1
- 235000019322 gelatine Nutrition 0.000 description 1
- 235000011852 gelatine desserts Nutrition 0.000 description 1
- 239000010437 gem Substances 0.000 description 1
- 238000003209 gene knockout Methods 0.000 description 1
- 108091006104 gene-regulatory proteins Proteins 0.000 description 1
- 102000034356 gene-regulatory proteins Human genes 0.000 description 1
- 230000007614 genetic variation Effects 0.000 description 1
- 229960002518 gentamicin Drugs 0.000 description 1
- 239000008103 glucose Substances 0.000 description 1
- ZDXPYRJPNDTMRX-UHFFFAOYSA-N glutamine Natural products OC(=O)C(N)CCC(N)=O ZDXPYRJPNDTMRX-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 229960003180 glutathione Drugs 0.000 description 1
- UYTPUPDQBNUYGX-UHFFFAOYSA-N guanine Chemical group O=C1NC(N)=NC2=C1N=CN2 UYTPUPDQBNUYGX-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 230000003394 haemopoietic effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- 238000003306 harvesting Methods 0.000 description 1
- 210000003958 hematopoietic stem cell Anatomy 0.000 description 1
- 210000004458 heterochromatin Anatomy 0.000 description 1
- 229940088597 hormone Drugs 0.000 description 1
- 239000005556 hormone Substances 0.000 description 1
- 102000052073 human NGFR Human genes 0.000 description 1
- 125000004435 hydrogen atom Chemical group [H]* 0.000 description 1
- 239000012051 hydrophobic carrier Substances 0.000 description 1
- GRRNUXAQVGOGFE-NZSRVPFOSA-N hygromycin B Chemical compound O[C@@H]1[C@@H](NC)C[C@@H](N)[C@H](O)[C@H]1O[C@H]1[C@H]2O[C@@]3([C@@H]([C@@H](O)[C@@H](O)[C@@H](C(N)CO)O3)O)O[C@H]2[C@@H](O)[C@@H](CO)O1 GRRNUXAQVGOGFE-NZSRVPFOSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 229940097277 hygromycin b Drugs 0.000 description 1
- 238000001727 in vivo Methods 0.000 description 1
- 238000010348 incorporation Methods 0.000 description 1
- 238000009413 insulation Methods 0.000 description 1
- 230000010189 intracellular transport Effects 0.000 description 1
- 230000001678 irradiating effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- 238000012804 iterative process Methods 0.000 description 1
- 238000002372 labelling Methods 0.000 description 1
- 231100000518 lethal Toxicity 0.000 description 1
- 230000001665 lethal effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- 230000000670 limiting effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- 150000002632 lipids Chemical class 0.000 description 1
- 238000001638 lipofection Methods 0.000 description 1
- 230000007774 longterm Effects 0.000 description 1
- 231100000053 low toxicity Toxicity 0.000 description 1
- 210000000415 mammalian chromosome Anatomy 0.000 description 1
- 238000007567 mass-production technique Methods 0.000 description 1
- 230000013011 mating Effects 0.000 description 1
- 230000001404 mediated effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- 238000012269 metabolic engineering Methods 0.000 description 1
- 230000037353 metabolic pathway Effects 0.000 description 1
- 125000002496 methyl group Chemical group [H]C([H])([H])* 0.000 description 1
- 108040008770 methylated-DNA-[protein]-cysteine S-methyltransferase activity proteins Proteins 0.000 description 1
- 230000000813 microbial effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- 238000001000 micrograph Methods 0.000 description 1
- 238000000520 microinjection Methods 0.000 description 1
- 238000000386 microscopy Methods 0.000 description 1
- 238000004476 mid-IR spectroscopy Methods 0.000 description 1
- 230000003278 mimic effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- 208000024191 minimally invasive lung adenocarcinoma Diseases 0.000 description 1
- 238000000302 molecular modelling Methods 0.000 description 1
- 239000003471 mutagenic agent Substances 0.000 description 1
- 231100000707 mutagenic chemical Toxicity 0.000 description 1
- 230000003505 mutagenic effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- 239000002105 nanoparticle Substances 0.000 description 1
- 239000002070 nanowire Substances 0.000 description 1
- 230000006780 non-homologous end joining Effects 0.000 description 1
- 210000004940 nucleus Anatomy 0.000 description 1
- 238000002515 oligonucleotide synthesis Methods 0.000 description 1
- 238000000424 optical density measurement Methods 0.000 description 1
- 230000008520 organization Effects 0.000 description 1
- 230000010355 oscillation Effects 0.000 description 1
- 229910052760 oxygen Inorganic materials 0.000 description 1
- 239000001301 oxygen Substances 0.000 description 1
- 238000004806 packaging method and process Methods 0.000 description 1
- 230000036961 partial effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- 239000002245 particle Substances 0.000 description 1
- 230000035515 penetration Effects 0.000 description 1
- 239000000049 pigment Substances 0.000 description 1
- 229920001184 polypeptide Polymers 0.000 description 1
- 230000029279 positive regulation of transcription, DNA-dependent Effects 0.000 description 1
- 239000000843 powder Substances 0.000 description 1
- 230000035755 proliferation Effects 0.000 description 1
- 230000004853 protein function Effects 0.000 description 1
- 230000006916 protein interaction Effects 0.000 description 1
- 238000005086 pumping Methods 0.000 description 1
- 229950010131 puromycin Drugs 0.000 description 1
- 238000010188 recombinant method Methods 0.000 description 1
- 230000007115 recruitment Effects 0.000 description 1
- 238000005057 refrigeration Methods 0.000 description 1
- 230000008929 regeneration Effects 0.000 description 1
- 238000011069 regeneration method Methods 0.000 description 1
- 230000003362 replicative effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- 238000012827 research and development Methods 0.000 description 1
- 108091008146 restriction endonucleases Proteins 0.000 description 1
- 108020004418 ribosomal RNA Proteins 0.000 description 1
- 230000000630 rising effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- 238000005488 sandblasting Methods 0.000 description 1
- 238000007480 sanger sequencing Methods 0.000 description 1
- 238000009394 selective breeding Methods 0.000 description 1
- 230000003007 single stranded DNA break Effects 0.000 description 1
- 239000002002 slurry Substances 0.000 description 1
- 239000007790 solid phase Substances 0.000 description 1
- 241000894007 species Species 0.000 description 1
- 230000009870 specific binding Effects 0.000 description 1
- 238000009987 spinning Methods 0.000 description 1
- 230000000087 stabilizing effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- 238000003756 stirring Methods 0.000 description 1
- 229960005322 streptomycin Drugs 0.000 description 1
- 238000001356 surgical procedure Methods 0.000 description 1
- 238000010408 sweeping Methods 0.000 description 1
- 238000003856 thermoforming Methods 0.000 description 1
- 229940113082 thymine Drugs 0.000 description 1
- 239000010936 titanium Substances 0.000 description 1
- 229910052719 titanium Inorganic materials 0.000 description 1
- 230000005030 transcription termination Effects 0.000 description 1
- 238000000844 transformation Methods 0.000 description 1
- 239000012780 transparent material Substances 0.000 description 1
- OUYCCCASQSFEME-UHFFFAOYSA-N tyrosine Natural products OC(=O)C(N)CC1=CC=C(O)C=C1 OUYCCCASQSFEME-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 239000004474 valine Substances 0.000 description 1
- 239000000277 virosome Substances 0.000 description 1
- 238000012800 visualization Methods 0.000 description 1
- 238000005406 washing Methods 0.000 description 1
- 101150020397 yagP gene Proteins 0.000 description 1
Images
Classifications
-
- B—PERFORMING OPERATIONS; TRANSPORTING
- B01—PHYSICAL OR CHEMICAL PROCESSES OR APPARATUS IN GENERAL
- B01D—SEPARATION
- B01D63/00—Apparatus in general for separation processes using semi-permeable membranes
- B01D63/08—Flat membrane modules
- B01D63/082—Flat membrane modules comprising a stack of flat membranes
-
- C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
- C12—BIOCHEMISTRY; BEER; SPIRITS; WINE; VINEGAR; MICROBIOLOGY; ENZYMOLOGY; MUTATION OR GENETIC ENGINEERING
- C12N—MICROORGANISMS OR ENZYMES; COMPOSITIONS THEREOF; PROPAGATING, PRESERVING, OR MAINTAINING MICROORGANISMS; MUTATION OR GENETIC ENGINEERING; CULTURE MEDIA
- C12N15/00—Mutation or genetic engineering; DNA or RNA concerning genetic engineering, vectors, e.g. plasmids, or their isolation, preparation or purification; Use of hosts therefor
-
- B—PERFORMING OPERATIONS; TRANSPORTING
- B01—PHYSICAL OR CHEMICAL PROCESSES OR APPARATUS IN GENERAL
- B01D—SEPARATION
- B01D63/00—Apparatus in general for separation processes using semi-permeable membranes
- B01D63/08—Flat membrane modules
- B01D63/088—Microfluidic devices comprising semi-permeable flat membranes
-
- B—PERFORMING OPERATIONS; TRANSPORTING
- B01—PHYSICAL OR CHEMICAL PROCESSES OR APPARATUS IN GENERAL
- B01D—SEPARATION
- B01D61/00—Processes of separation using semi-permeable membranes, e.g. dialysis, osmosis or ultrafiltration; Apparatus, accessories or auxiliary operations specially adapted therefor
- B01D61/14—Ultrafiltration; Microfiltration
- B01D61/18—Apparatus therefor
-
- B—PERFORMING OPERATIONS; TRANSPORTING
- B01—PHYSICAL OR CHEMICAL PROCESSES OR APPARATUS IN GENERAL
- B01L—CHEMICAL OR PHYSICAL LABORATORY APPARATUS FOR GENERAL USE
- B01L3/00—Containers or dishes for laboratory use, e.g. laboratory glassware; Droppers
- B01L3/50—Containers for the purpose of retaining a material to be analysed, e.g. test tubes
- B01L3/502—Containers for the purpose of retaining a material to be analysed, e.g. test tubes with fluid transport, e.g. in multi-compartment structures
- B01L3/5027—Containers for the purpose of retaining a material to be analysed, e.g. test tubes with fluid transport, e.g. in multi-compartment structures by integrated microfluidic structures, i.e. dimensions of channels and chambers are such that surface tension forces are important, e.g. lab-on-a-chip
- B01L3/502761—Containers for the purpose of retaining a material to be analysed, e.g. test tubes with fluid transport, e.g. in multi-compartment structures by integrated microfluidic structures, i.e. dimensions of channels and chambers are such that surface tension forces are important, e.g. lab-on-a-chip specially adapted for handling suspended solids or molecules independently from the bulk fluid flow, e.g. for trapping or sorting beads, for physically stretching molecules
-
- C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
- C12—BIOCHEMISTRY; BEER; SPIRITS; WINE; VINEGAR; MICROBIOLOGY; ENZYMOLOGY; MUTATION OR GENETIC ENGINEERING
- C12N—MICROORGANISMS OR ENZYMES; COMPOSITIONS THEREOF; PROPAGATING, PRESERVING, OR MAINTAINING MICROORGANISMS; MUTATION OR GENETIC ENGINEERING; CULTURE MEDIA
- C12N15/00—Mutation or genetic engineering; DNA or RNA concerning genetic engineering, vectors, e.g. plasmids, or their isolation, preparation or purification; Use of hosts therefor
- C12N15/09—Recombinant DNA-technology
- C12N15/10—Processes for the isolation, preparation or purification of DNA or RNA
- C12N15/102—Mutagenizing nucleic acids
-
- B—PERFORMING OPERATIONS; TRANSPORTING
- B01—PHYSICAL OR CHEMICAL PROCESSES OR APPARATUS IN GENERAL
- B01D—SEPARATION
- B01D2201/00—Details relating to filtering apparatus
- B01D2201/04—Supports for the filtering elements
- B01D2201/0407—Perforated supports on both sides of the filtering element
-
- B—PERFORMING OPERATIONS; TRANSPORTING
- B01—PHYSICAL OR CHEMICAL PROCESSES OR APPARATUS IN GENERAL
- B01D—SEPARATION
- B01D2313/00—Details relating to membrane modules or apparatus
- B01D2313/04—Specific sealing means
- B01D2313/041—Gaskets or O-rings
-
- B—PERFORMING OPERATIONS; TRANSPORTING
- B01—PHYSICAL OR CHEMICAL PROCESSES OR APPARATUS IN GENERAL
- B01D—SEPARATION
- B01D2313/00—Details relating to membrane modules or apparatus
- B01D2313/04—Specific sealing means
- B01D2313/042—Adhesives or glues
-
- B—PERFORMING OPERATIONS; TRANSPORTING
- B01—PHYSICAL OR CHEMICAL PROCESSES OR APPARATUS IN GENERAL
- B01D—SEPARATION
- B01D2313/00—Details relating to membrane modules or apparatus
- B01D2313/08—Flow guidance means within the module or the apparatus
-
- B—PERFORMING OPERATIONS; TRANSPORTING
- B01—PHYSICAL OR CHEMICAL PROCESSES OR APPARATUS IN GENERAL
- B01D—SEPARATION
- B01D2313/00—Details relating to membrane modules or apparatus
- B01D2313/08—Flow guidance means within the module or the apparatus
- B01D2313/086—Meandering flow path over the membrane
-
- B—PERFORMING OPERATIONS; TRANSPORTING
- B01—PHYSICAL OR CHEMICAL PROCESSES OR APPARATUS IN GENERAL
- B01D—SEPARATION
- B01D2313/00—Details relating to membrane modules or apparatus
- B01D2313/10—Specific supply elements
- B01D2313/105—Supply manifolds
-
- B—PERFORMING OPERATIONS; TRANSPORTING
- B01—PHYSICAL OR CHEMICAL PROCESSES OR APPARATUS IN GENERAL
- B01D—SEPARATION
- B01D2313/00—Details relating to membrane modules or apparatus
- B01D2313/20—Specific housing
-
- B—PERFORMING OPERATIONS; TRANSPORTING
- B01—PHYSICAL OR CHEMICAL PROCESSES OR APPARATUS IN GENERAL
- B01D—SEPARATION
- B01D2313/00—Details relating to membrane modules or apparatus
- B01D2313/20—Specific housing
- B01D2313/205—Specific housing characterised by the shape
-
- B—PERFORMING OPERATIONS; TRANSPORTING
- B01—PHYSICAL OR CHEMICAL PROCESSES OR APPARATUS IN GENERAL
- B01D—SEPARATION
- B01D2313/00—Details relating to membrane modules or apparatus
- B01D2313/20—Specific housing
- B01D2313/206—Specific housing characterised by the material
- B01D2313/2061—Organic, e.g. polymeric material
-
- B—PERFORMING OPERATIONS; TRANSPORTING
- B01—PHYSICAL OR CHEMICAL PROCESSES OR APPARATUS IN GENERAL
- B01D—SEPARATION
- B01D2313/00—Details relating to membrane modules or apparatus
- B01D2313/50—Specific extra tanks
-
- B—PERFORMING OPERATIONS; TRANSPORTING
- B01—PHYSICAL OR CHEMICAL PROCESSES OR APPARATUS IN GENERAL
- B01D—SEPARATION
- B01D25/00—Filters formed by clamping together several filtering elements or parts of such elements
- B01D25/003—Filters formed by clamping together several filtering elements or parts of such elements integrally combined with devices for controlling the filtration
-
- B—PERFORMING OPERATIONS; TRANSPORTING
- B01—PHYSICAL OR CHEMICAL PROCESSES OR APPARATUS IN GENERAL
- B01D—SEPARATION
- B01D63/00—Apparatus in general for separation processes using semi-permeable membranes
- B01D63/08—Flat membrane modules
- B01D63/087—Single membrane modules
-
- B—PERFORMING OPERATIONS; TRANSPORTING
- B01—PHYSICAL OR CHEMICAL PROCESSES OR APPARATUS IN GENERAL
- B01L—CHEMICAL OR PHYSICAL LABORATORY APPARATUS FOR GENERAL USE
- B01L2200/00—Solutions for specific problems relating to chemical or physical laboratory apparatus
- B01L2200/06—Fluid handling related problems
- B01L2200/0647—Handling flowable solids, e.g. microscopic beads, cells, particles
- B01L2200/0668—Trapping microscopic beads
-
- B—PERFORMING OPERATIONS; TRANSPORTING
- B01—PHYSICAL OR CHEMICAL PROCESSES OR APPARATUS IN GENERAL
- B01L—CHEMICAL OR PHYSICAL LABORATORY APPARATUS FOR GENERAL USE
- B01L2300/00—Additional constructional details
- B01L2300/06—Auxiliary integrated devices, integrated components
- B01L2300/0681—Filter
-
- B—PERFORMING OPERATIONS; TRANSPORTING
- B01—PHYSICAL OR CHEMICAL PROCESSES OR APPARATUS IN GENERAL
- B01L—CHEMICAL OR PHYSICAL LABORATORY APPARATUS FOR GENERAL USE
- B01L2300/00—Additional constructional details
- B01L2300/08—Geometry, shape and general structure
- B01L2300/0809—Geometry, shape and general structure rectangular shaped
- B01L2300/0829—Multi-well plates; Microtitration plates
-
- B—PERFORMING OPERATIONS; TRANSPORTING
- B01—PHYSICAL OR CHEMICAL PROCESSES OR APPARATUS IN GENERAL
- B01L—CHEMICAL OR PHYSICAL LABORATORY APPARATUS FOR GENERAL USE
- B01L2300/00—Additional constructional details
- B01L2300/08—Geometry, shape and general structure
- B01L2300/0861—Configuration of multiple channels and/or chambers in a single devices
- B01L2300/0883—Serpentine channels
-
- B—PERFORMING OPERATIONS; TRANSPORTING
- B01—PHYSICAL OR CHEMICAL PROCESSES OR APPARATUS IN GENERAL
- B01L—CHEMICAL OR PHYSICAL LABORATORY APPARATUS FOR GENERAL USE
- B01L3/00—Containers or dishes for laboratory use, e.g. laboratory glassware; Droppers
- B01L3/50—Containers for the purpose of retaining a material to be analysed, e.g. test tubes
- B01L3/502—Containers for the purpose of retaining a material to be analysed, e.g. test tubes with fluid transport, e.g. in multi-compartment structures
- B01L3/5027—Containers for the purpose of retaining a material to be analysed, e.g. test tubes with fluid transport, e.g. in multi-compartment structures by integrated microfluidic structures, i.e. dimensions of channels and chambers are such that surface tension forces are important, e.g. lab-on-a-chip
- B01L3/502707—Containers for the purpose of retaining a material to be analysed, e.g. test tubes with fluid transport, e.g. in multi-compartment structures by integrated microfluidic structures, i.e. dimensions of channels and chambers are such that surface tension forces are important, e.g. lab-on-a-chip characterised by the manufacture of the container or its components
-
- C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
- C12—BIOCHEMISTRY; BEER; SPIRITS; WINE; VINEGAR; MICROBIOLOGY; ENZYMOLOGY; MUTATION OR GENETIC ENGINEERING
- C12N—MICROORGANISMS OR ENZYMES; COMPOSITIONS THEREOF; PROPAGATING, PRESERVING, OR MAINTAINING MICROORGANISMS; MUTATION OR GENETIC ENGINEERING; CULTURE MEDIA
- C12N15/00—Mutation or genetic engineering; DNA or RNA concerning genetic engineering, vectors, e.g. plasmids, or their isolation, preparation or purification; Use of hosts therefor
- C12N15/09—Recombinant DNA-technology
- C12N15/10—Processes for the isolation, preparation or purification of DNA or RNA
- C12N15/1003—Extracting or separating nucleic acids from biological samples, e.g. pure separation or isolation methods; Conditions, buffers or apparatuses therefor
Definitions
- This invention relates to improved instruments, modules, and methods to screen, select and thus optimize detection of genome edits in live cells.
- nucleases that allow for manipulation of gene sequences, and hence gene function.
- the nucleases include nucleic acid-guided nucleases, which enable researchers to generate permanent edits in live cells.
- Current protocols employing nucleic acid-guided nuclease systems typically utilize constitutively-expressed nuclease components to drive high efficiency editing.
- constitutive expression of editing components can lead to rapid depletion of edited cell types and selective enrichment of cells that have not been edited.
- dsDNA double-strand DNA
- nucleic acid-guided nuclease gene editing for improved instruments, modules and methods for creating genome edits and for identifying and enriching cells that have been edited.
- the present invention satisfies this need.
- the present disclosure provides instruments, modules and methods to enable automated high-throughput and extremely sensitive screening to identify edited cells in populations of cells that have been subjected to nucleic acid-guided nuclease editing.
- the instruments, modules, and methods take advantage of isolation or substantial isolation, where the term “isolation” in this context refers to the process of separating cells and growing them into clonally-isolated formats.
- the term “substantial isolation” refers to the process of separating cells in a population of cells into “groups” of 2 to 100, or 2 to 50, and preferably 2 to 10 cells. Isolation (or substantial isolation), followed by an initial period of growth (e.g., incubation), editing, and growth normalization leads to enrichment of edited cells.
- the instruments, modules, and methods described herein facilitate “cherry picking” of edited cell colonies, allowing for direct selection of edited cells.
- Isolation or substantial isolation assists in overcoming the growth bias from unedited cells that occurs under competitive growth regimes such as in bulk liquid culture. Indeed, it has been determined that removing growth rate bias via isolation or substantial isolation, incubation, editing and normalization improves the observed editing efficiency by up to 4 ⁇ (from, e.g., 10% to 40% absolute efficiency at population scale) or more over conventional methods, and further that cherry-picking colonies using the methods described herein brings the observed editing efficiency up to 8 ⁇ (from, e.g., 10% to 80% absolute efficiency at population scale) over conventional methods.
- the compositions and methods employ inducible guide RNA (gRNA) constructs leading to increased observed transformation efficiency and automation-friendly control over the timing and duration of the editing process.
- gRNA inducible guide RNA
- One particularly facile module or device for isolation or substantial isolation is a solid wall device where cells are substantially isolated, grown in a clonal (or substantially clonal) format, edited, and either normalization or cherry picking is employed.
- the solid wall devices or modules and the uses thereof are described in detail herein.
- the instruments, modules and methods in some embodiments allow for normalization of edited and unedited cell colonies. Normalization refers to growing colonies of cells—whether edited or unedited—to terminal size; that is, growing the cells until the cells in the colonies enter senescence due to, e.g., nutrient exhaustion or constrained space for further growth.
- Certain embodiments of the instruments, modules, and methods provide for enriching for edited cells during nucleic acid-guided nuclease editing, where the methods comprise transforming cells with one or more vectors comprising a promoter driving expression of a nuclease, a promoter driving transcription of a guide nucleic acid and a donor DNA sequence; diluting the transformed cells to a cell concentration sufficient to substantially isolate the transformed cells on a substrate; growing (e.g., incubating) the substantially isolated cells on the substrate; providing conditions for editing; and either 1) growing the cell colonies to colonies of terminal size (e.g., normalizing the cell colonies) and harvesting the normalized cell colonies; or 2) monitoring the growth of cells colonies on the substrate then selecting slow-growing colonies.
- at least the gRNA is optionally under the control of an inducible promoter.
- a singulation assembly for a solid wall isolation or substantial isolation, incubation, editing, and normalization or cherry-picking (“solid wall insolation/incubation/normalization module” or “SWIIN”) module comprising: a solid wall isolation, induction and normalization (SWIIN) module comprising: a retentate member comprising: an upper surface and a lower surface and a first and second end, an upper portion of a serpentine channel defined by raised areas on the lower surface of the retentate member, wherein the upper portion of the serpentine channel traverses the lower surface of the retentate member for about 50% to about 90% of the length and width of the lower surface of the retentate member; at least one port fluidically connected to the upper portion of the serpentine channel; and a reservoir cover at the first end of the retentate member; a permeate member disposed under the retentate member comprising: an upper surface and a lower surface and a first and second end, a lower portion of a serpentine
- the permeate member further comprises ultrasonic tabs disposed on the raised areas on the upper surface of the permeate member and at the first and second end of the permeate member
- the retentate member further comprises recesses for the ultrasonic tabs disposed in the raised areas on the lower surface and at the first and second end of the retentate member
- the ultrasonic tabs are configured to mate with the recesses for the ultrasonic tabs
- the permeate member, retentate member, where the perforated member and the filter are coupled together by ultrasonic welding.
- the permeate member, retentate member, the perforated member and the filter are coupled together by solvent bonding.
- first and second reservoirs are each fluidically coupled to a reservoir port into which fluids and/or cells flow from the first retentate reservoir into the first retentate port and from the first permeate reservoir into the first permeate port and into the serpentine channels in the retentate and permeate members.
- the SWIIN module further comprises a third and a fourth reservoir, wherein the third reservoir is 1) fluidically coupled to a second port in the retentate member, 2) fluidically coupled to a reservoir access aperture into which fluids and/or cells flow from outside the SWIIN module into the third reservoir, and 3) pneumatically coupled to a pressure source; and wherein the fourth reservoir is 1) fluidically coupled to a second port in the permeate member, 2) fluidically coupled to a reservoir access aperture into which fluids and/or cells flow from outside the SWIIN module into the fourth reservoir, and 3) pneumatically coupled to a pressure source.
- the perforated member comprises at least 100,000 perforations, or at least 200,000 perforations, or at least 250,000 perforations, or at least 300,000 perforations, or at least 350,000 perforations or at least 400,000 perforations, or at least 500,000 perforations or more.
- the volume of a well formed by a perforation is from 1-15 nl, or from 2-10 nl, or from 3-8 nl, or from 1-10 nl, or from 2-5 nl.
- the retentate member is fabricated from polycarbonate, cyclic olefin co-polymer, or poly(methyl methylacrylate).
- a serpentine channel portion of each of the retentate and permeate members is from 75 mm to 350 mm in length, from 50 mm to 250 mm in width, and from 2 mm to 15 mm in thickness, and from 150 mm to 250 mm in length, from 100 mm to 150 mm in width, and from 4 mm to 8 mm in thickness.
- the volume of the mated serpentine channel is from 4 to 40 mL, or from 6 mL to 30 mL, or from 10 mL to 20 mL. In some aspects, the volume of the first and second reservoir is from 4 to 50 mL, or from 8 to 40 mL, or from 10 to 30 mL.
- each end of the permeate member configured to elevate the permeate and retentate members above the at least one port in the in retentate member and the at least one port in the permeate member.
- SWIIN module further comprise imaging means to detect cells growing in the wells, and in some aspects, the imaging means is a camera with means to backlight the serpentine channel portion of the SWIIN.
- the SWIIN module is part of a SWIIN assembly comprising a heated cover, a heater, a fan, and a thermoelectric control device.
- an automated multi-module cell editing instrument comprising: a SWIIN module, a housing configured to house all of some of the modules; a receptacle configured to receive cells; one or more receptacles configured to receive nucleic acids; a growth module; a transformation module configured to introduce the nucleic acids into the cells; and a processor configured to operate the automated multi-module cell editing instrument based on user input and/or selection of a pre-programmed script.
- the transformation module comprises a flow-through electroporation device; and in some aspects the automated multi-module cell editing instrument further comprises a cell concentration module.
- the cell concentration module is a tangential flow filtration module.
- a liquid handling system transfers liquids between the modules.
- the automated multi-module cell processing system performs the processes of growing cells, concentrating and rendering the cells electrocompetent, transforming the cells with nucleic acid-guided nuclease editing components, isolating the transformed cells, inducing editing in the isolated cells, and growing and enriching the cells, all without human intervention.
- a method for enriching edited cells during nucleic acid-guided nuclease editing comprising: transforming cells with one or more vectors comprising a promoter driving transcription of a coding sequence for a nuclease, a promoter driving transcription of a guide nucleic acid and a DNA donor sequence; diluting the transformed cells to a cell concentration to substantially isolate the transformed cells on a substrate; growing the cells and initiating editing; growing the edited cells into colonies; and selecting cells from the substantially isolated colonies from the substrate or pooling cells from the isolated colonies from the substrate, wherein the selected cells or pooled cells are enriched for edited cells.
- the gRNA is under the control of an inducible promoter and 1) the cells are allowed to grow from 2-200 doublings after isolation, and 2) there is an inducing step after the growth step and prior to the editing step.
- Yet other embodiments provide a method for enriching edited cells during nucleic acid-guided nuclease editing comprising: transforming cells with one or more vectors comprising a promoter driving transcription of a coding sequence for a nuclease, a promoter driving transcription of a guide nucleic acid and a DNA donor sequence; diluting the transformed cells to a cell concentration to substantially isolate the transformed cells on a substrate; growing the cells and allowing the cells to edit; growing the cells to form colonies; and selecting small colonies from the substantially isolated colonies from the substrate, wherein the selected cells are enriched for edited cells.
- the gRNA is under the control of an inducible promoter and 1) the cells are allowed to grow from 2-200 doublings after singulation, and 2) there is an inducing step after the growth step and prior to the editing step.
- a method for enriching edited cells during nucleic acid-guided nuclease editing comprising: transforming cells with one or more vectors comprising a promoter driving transcription of a coding sequence for a nuclease, a promoter driving transcription of a guide nucleic acid and a DNA donor sequence; diluting the transformed cells to a cell concentration to substantially isolate the transformed cells on a first substrate; growing the cells and allowing the cells to edit; and growing the cells to form colonies of terminal size.
- the terminal-size cell colonies are pooled, and in some aspects, the terminal-size colonies are picked.
- the gRNA is under the control of an inducible promoter and 1) the cells are allowed to grow from 2-200 doublings after singulation, and 2) there is an inducing step after the growth step and prior to the editing step.
- a singulation assembly for a solid wall isolation or substantial isolation, growth, induction of editing, and normalization or cherry-picking (“solid wall insolation/induction/normalization module” or “SWIIN”) module comprising: a retentate member comprising an upper surface and a lower surface, wherein the retentate member comprises at least one retentate distribution channel which traverses the retentate member from its upper surface to its lower surface and for most of the length of retentate member; wherein the lower surface of the retentate member comprises retentate ridges between which are retentate flow directors; wherein the retentate member further comprises one or more retentate member ports configured to supply cells and fluid to and remove cells and fluid from the retentate member; and wherein the retentate member ports are fluidically-connected to the retentate distribution channel and retentate flow directors; a perforated member with an upper surface and a lower surface, wherein the upper surface of the perforated
- the means to couple the retentate member, perforated member, filter, gasket and permeate member comprises ultrasonic welding and in other aspects, the means comprises pressure sensitive adhesive, solvent bonding, mated fittings, or a combination of adhesives, welding, solvent bonding, and mated fittings; and other such fasteners and couplings.
- the perforated member comprises at least 50,000; 100,000; 150,000; 200,000, 250,000 perforations or more
- the SWIIN is a compound SWIIN and each part of the compound SWIIN comprises a perforated member with at least 50,000; 100,000; 150,000; 200,000, 250,000 perforations.
- the retentate and permeate members are fabricated from polycarbonate, cyclic olefin co-polymer, or poly(methyl methylacrylate); and in some aspects, the retentate and permeate members are from 75 mm to 350 mm in length, from 50 mm to 250 mm in width, and from 2 mm to 15 mm in thickness. In some aspects of the singulation assembly, the retentate and permeate members are from 150 mm to 250 mm in length, from 100 mm to 150 mm in width, and from 4 mm to 8 mm in thickness.
- the singulation assembly there are two permeate distribution channels and/or two retentate distribution channels, and in some aspects the retentate distribution channels and or permeate distribution channels are approximately 150 mm in length and 1 mm in width. In some aspects, the retentate and/or permeate ridges are approximately 0.5 mm in height and 80 mm in length, and in some aspects, the retentate and/or permeate flow directors are approximately 5 mm across. In some aspects, the volume of the singulation assembly is from 15 mL to 100 mL.
- SWIIN module comprising the singulation assembly and further comprising: a reservoir assembly comprising at least two reservoirs wherein a first reservoir is 1) fluidically-coupled to at least one reservoir port into which fluids and/or cells flow from outside the SWIIN module into the first reservoir, 2) fluidically-coupled to a reservoir/channel port from which fluids and/or cells flow into the one or more retentate member ports; and 3) pneumatically-coupled to a pressure source; a second reservoir is 1) fluidically-coupled to at least one reservoir port into which fluids flow from outside the SWIIN module into the second reservoir, 2) fluidically-coupled to a reservoir/channel port from which fluids flow into the one or more permeate member ports; and 3) pneumatically-coupled to a pressure source; and a SWIIN cover.
- a first reservoir is 1) fluidically-coupled to at least one reservoir port into which fluids and/or cells flow from outside the SWIIN module into the first reservoir, 2) fluidically-coupled to a reservoir/channel port
- the SWIIN module further comprises two additional reservoirs wherein a first and third reservoir are 1) fluidically-coupled to at least two reservoir ports into which fluids and/or cells flow from outside the SWIIN module into the first and third reservoirs, 2) fluidically-coupled to a reservoir/channel port from which fluids and/or cells flow into the at least two retentate member ports; and 3) pneumatically-coupled to a pressure source; and a second and fourth reservoir are 1) fluidically-coupled to at least two reservoir ports into which fluids flow from outside the SWIIN module into the second and fourth reservoirs, 2) fluidically-coupled to a reservoir/channel port from which fluids flow into the at least two permeate member ports; and 3) pneumatically-coupled to a pressure source.
- a first and third reservoir are 1) fluidically-coupled to at least two reservoir ports into which fluids and/or cells flow from outside the SWIIN module into the first and third reservoirs, 2) fluidically-coupled to a reservoir/channel port from which fluids and/or
- the SWIIN cover comprises a reservoir cover portion of the SWIIN cover, and wherein the reservoir cover portion comprises 1) at least two reservoir access apertures, wherein the reservoir access apertures provide access to the reservoir ports, and 2) at least two pneumatic access apertures, wherein the pneumatic access apertures provide access to the at least two reservoirs and provide negative and positive pressure to the at least two reservoirs.
- the SWIIN module is configured to monitor cell colony growth after inducing editing, and further comprises means for cherry picking slow growing cell colonies.
- editing is induced by an inducible promoter that is a temperature inducible promoter, and temperature to induce transcription of the nuclease and/or guide nucleic acid is provided to the SWIIN module by a Peltier device.
- the SWIIN module is one module in an automated multi-module cell processing instrument.
- FIG. 1A is a simplified flow chart of exemplary methods for enriching and selecting edited cells.
- FIG. 1B is a plot of optical density vs. time showing the growth curves for edited cells (dotted line) and unedited cells (solid line).
- FIG. 1C depicts an exemplary inducible expression system for regulating gRNA and/or nuclease transcription.
- FIG. 2A depicts a prior art, standard protocol for performing nucleic acid-guided nuclease genome editing.
- FIG. 2B depicts a protocol for functional deconvolution of the editing process, either by arraying cells in 96-well plates containing different media or by arraying cells on a culture dish containing different media.
- FIG. 2C depicts a protocol for picking colonies from a culture dish, arraying the colonies on a 96-well plate, then performing functional deconvolution.
- FIG. 2E depicts a protocol for cherry picking
- FIG. 2F depicts a protocol used for confirming that cherry-picking is extremely effective for selecting for edited cells.
- FIG. 3A depicts a simplified graphic of a workflow for isolating, editing and normalizing cells in a solid wall device.
- 3 B depicts a simplified graphic of a workflow variation for substantially isolating, editing and normalizing cells in a solid wall device.
- FIG. 3C is a photograph of one embodiment of a solid wall device.
- FIGS. 3D-3F are photographs of E. coli cells largely isolated (via substantial Poisson distribution) and grown into colonies in microwells in a solid wall device with a permeable bottom at low, medium, and high magnification, respectively.
- FIGS. 3G-3J are photographs of the perforated member and the microwells therein.
- FIG. 4A-4H depict the components of two exemplary embodiments of a singulation assembly comprising retentate and permeate members, as well as a perforated member/filter/gasket assembly.
- FIG. 4I-4O depict an assembled isolation, incubation, editing and either normalization or cherry-picking module (e.g., “solid wall isolation/incubation/normalization module” or “SWIIN”) and a reservoir member to deliver fluids to the SWIIN module.
- FIG. 4P is an exemplary pneumatic architecture diagram for the SWIIN module described in relation to FIGS. 4A-4P , with the status of the components for the various steps listed in Tables 1 and 2.
- FIGS. 4Q-4X depict a different embodiment of a SWIIN module, where the retentate and permeate members are coincident with reservoir assembly.
- FIG. 4Y depicts the embodiment of the SWIIN module in FIGS. 4Q-4X further comprising a heater and a heated cover.
- FIG. 4Z is an exemplary pneumatic architecture diagram for the SWIIN module described in relation to FIGS. 4Q-4X , with the status of the components for the various steps listed in Tables 3-5.
- FIGS. 4AA-4DD are simplified depictions of the status of pressure and volume for each reservoir in the SWIIN depicted in relation to FIGS. 4Q-4X .
- FIGS. 5A-5D depict a stand-alone, integrated, automated multi-module instrument and components thereof, including an isolation module, with which to generate and identify edited cells.
- FIG. 6A depicts one embodiment of a rotating growth vial for use with a cell growth module described herein.
- FIG. 6B illustrates a perspective view of one embodiment of a rotating growth device in a cell growth module housing.
- FIG. 6C depicts a cut-away view of the cell growth module from FIG. 6B .
- FIG. 6D illustrates the cell growth module of FIG. 6B coupled to LED, detector, and temperature regulating components.
- FIG. 7A is a model of tangential flow filtration employed by the TFF device presented herein.
- FIG. 7B depicts a top view of a lower member of one embodiment of an exemplary TFF device.
- FIG. 7C depicts a top view of upper and lower members and a membrane of an exemplary TFF device.
- FIG. 7D depicts a bottom view of upper and lower members and a membrane of an exemplary TFF device.
- FIGS. 7E-7K depict various views of yet another embodiment of a TFF module having fluidically coupled reservoirs.
- FIG. 7L is an exemplary pneumatic architecture diagram for the TFF module described in relation to FIGS. 7E-7K .
- FIGS. 8A and 8B are top perspective and bottom perspective views, respectively, of flow-through electroporation devices (here, there are six such devices co-joined).
- FIG. 8C is a top view of one embodiment of an exemplary flow-through electroporation device.
- FIG. 8D depicts a top view of a cross section of the electroporation device of FIG. 8C .
- FIG. 8E is a side view cross section of a lower portion of the electroporation devices of FIGS. 8C and 8D .
- FIG. 9 is a simplified block diagram of an embodiment of an exemplary automated multi-module cell processing instrument comprising an isolation or substantial isolation/incubation/editing and normalization or cherry-picking module (“solid wall isolation/incubation/normalization module” or “SWIIN”).
- an isolation or substantial isolation/incubation/editing and normalization or cherry-picking module (“solid wall isolation/incubation/normalization module” or “SWIIN”).
- FIG. 10 is a simplified block diagram of an alternative embodiment of an exemplary automated multi-module cell processing instrument comprising an isolation or substantial isolation/incubation/editing and normalization or cherry-picking module (“solid wall isolation/incubation/normalization module” or “SWIIN”).
- an isolation or substantial isolation/incubation/editing and normalization or cherry-picking module (“solid wall isolation/incubation/normalization module” or “SWIIN”).
- FIG. 11A is a map of an exemplary bacterial engine vector that may be used in the methods described herein; and FIG. 11B is a map of an exemplary bacteria editing vector (with an editing cassette) that may be used in the methods described herein.
- FIG. 12 is a bar graph showing the transformation efficiencies observed for galK gRNA targeting cassettes under a variety of promoters.
- FIG. 13 is a plot of cell growth vs. time, demonstrating that thermal induction of editing does not impact bacterial cell growth or viability.
- FIG. 14 depicts results demonstrating repressed gRNA cassettes yield high cell viability/transformation efficiency for three exemplary nucleases.
- FIG. 15 illustrates heat maps and growth curves showing the OD at 6 hours for uninduced and induced cell populations.
- FIG. 16 shows the results of cell colony normalization for E. coli cells under various conditions.
- FIG. 17A is a photograph of a solid wall device with a permeable bottom on agar, on which yeast cells have been substantially isolated and grown into clonal colonies.
- FIG. 17B presents photographs of yeast colony growth at various time points.
- FIG. 18 is a graph comparing the percentage of editing obtained for a standard plating protocol (SPP), and replicate samples using two different conditions in a solid wall isolation, incubation, and normalization device (SWIIN): the first with LB+arabinose; and the second with SOB followed by SOB+arabinose.
- SPP standard plating protocol
- WIIN normalization device
- FIG. 19 is a bar graph showing the curing efficiency obtained with four different protocols performed for curing on the SWIIN.
- FIG. 20A shows two exemplary depletion maps for MAD7.
- FIG. 20B is a bar graph demonstrating that the cherry-picking methods described herein allow for identification of edits adjacent non-canonical PAMs.
- CRISPR-specific techniques can be found in, e.g., Appasani and Church, Genome Editing and Engineering from TALENs and CRISPRs to Molecular Surgery (2016); and Lindgren and Charpentier, CRISPR: Methods and Protocols (2015); both of which are herein incorporated in their entirety by reference for all purposes.
- proximate proximate
- minor proximate
- similar terms generally refer to ranges that include the identified value within a margin of 20%, 10% or preferably 5% in certain embodiments, and any values therebetween.
- nucleic acid refers to Watson-Crick base pairing between nucleotides and specifically refers to nucleotides that are hydrogen bonded to one another with thymine or uracil residues linked to adenine residues by two hydrogen bonds and cytosine and guanine residues linked by three hydrogen bonds.
- a nucleic acid includes a nucleotide sequence described as having a “percent complementarity” or “percent homology” to a specified second nucleotide sequence.
- a nucleotide sequence may have 80%, 90%, or 100% complementarity to a specified second nucleotide sequence, indicating that 8 of 10, 9 of 10 or 10 of 10 nucleotides of a sequence are complementary to the specified second nucleotide sequence.
- the nucleotide sequence 3′-TCGA-5′ is 100% complementary to the nucleotide sequence 5′-AGCT-3′; and the nucleotide sequence 3′-TCGA-5′ is 100% complementary to a region of the nucleotide sequence 5′-TTAGCTGG-3′.
- control sequences refers collectively to promoter sequences, polyadenylation signals, transcription termination sequences, upstream regulatory domains, origins of replication, internal ribosome entry sites, nuclear localization sequences, enhancers, and the like, which collectively provide for the replication, transcription and translation of a coding sequence in a recipient cell. Not all of these types of control sequences need to be present so long as a selected coding sequence is capable of being replicated, transcribed and—for some components—translated in an appropriate host cell.
- donor DNA or “donor nucleic acid” refers to nucleic acid that is designed to introduce a DNA sequence modification (insertion, deletion, substitution) into a locus by homologous recombination using nucleic acid-guided nucleases.
- the donor DNA must have sufficient homology to the regions flanking the “cut site” or site to be edited in the genomic target sequence.
- the length of the homology arm(s) will depend on, e.g., the type and size of the modification being made.
- the donor DNA will have at least one region of sequence homology (e.g., one homology arm) to the genomic target locus.
- the donor DNA will have two regions of sequence homology (e.g., two homology arms) to the genomic target locus.
- an “insert” region or “DNA sequence modification” region the nucleic acid modification that one desires to be introduced into a genome target locus in a cell—will be located between two regions of homology.
- the DNA sequence modification may change one or more bases of the target genomic DNA sequence at one specific site or multiple specific sites. A change may include changing 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 10, 15, 20, 25, 30, 35, 40, 50, 75, 100, 150, 200, 300, 400, or 500 or more base pairs of the target sequence.
- a deletion or insertion may be a deletion or insertion of 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 10, 15, 20, 25, 30, 35, 40, 50, 75, 100, 150, 200, 300, 400, or 500 or more base pairs of the target sequence.
- the donor DNA optionally further includes an alteration to the target sequence, e.g., a PAM mutation, that prevents binding of the nuclease at the PAM or spacer in the target sequence after editing has taken place.
- enrichment refers to enriching for edited cells by isolation or substantial isolation of cells, initial growth of cells into cell colonies (e.g., incubation), editing (optionally induced, particularly in bacterial systems), and growing the cell colonies into terminal-sized colonies (e.g., saturation or normalization of colony growth).
- cherry picking or “selection of edited cells” refers to the process of using a combination of isolation or substantial isolation, initial growth of cells into colonies (incubation), editing (optionally induced, particularly in bacterial systems), then using cell growth—measured by colony size, concentration of metabolites or waste products, or other characteristics that correlate with the rate of growth of the cells—to select for cells that have been edited based on editing-induced growth delay. Selection may entail picking or selecting slow-growing cell colonies; alternatively, selection may entail eliminating (by, e.g., eradicating or removing) the faster-growing cell colonies.
- guide nucleic acid or “guide RNA” or “gRNA” refer to a polynucleotide comprising 1) a guide sequence capable of hybridizing to a genomic target locus, and 2) a scaffold sequence capable of interacting or complexing with a nucleic acid-guided nuclease.
- “Homology” or “identity” or “similarity” refers to sequence similarity between two peptides or, more often in the context of the present disclosure, between two nucleic acid molecules.
- the term “homologous region” or “homology arm” refers to a region on the donor DNA with a certain degree of homology with the target genomic DNA sequence. Homology can be determined by comparing a position in each sequence which may be aligned for purposes of comparison. When a position in the compared sequence is occupied by the same base or amino acid, then the molecules are homologous at that position. A degree of homology between sequences is a function of the number of matching or homologous positions shared by the sequences.
- the terms “isolation” or “isolate” mean to separate individual cells so that each cell (and the colonies formed from each cell) will be separate from other cells; for example, a single cell in a single microwell, or 100 single cells each in its own microwell. “Isolation” or “isolated cells” result in one embodiment, from a Poisson distribution in arraying cells.
- the terms “substantially isolated”, “largely isolated”, and “substantial isolation” mean cells are largely separated from one another, in small groups or batches. That is, when 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 17, 18, 19, 20, 21, 22, 23, 24, 25, 26, 27, 28, 29, 30 or up to 50—but preferably 10 or less cells—are delivered to a microwell.
- “Substantially isolated” or “largely isolated” result, in one embodiment, from a “substantial Poisson distribution” in arraying cells.
- a “substantial Poisson distribution” in arraying cells.
- operably linked refers to an arrangement of elements where the components so described are configured so as to perform their usual function.
- control sequences operably linked to a coding sequence are capable of effecting the transcription, and in some cases, the translation, of a coding sequence.
- the control sequences need not be contiguous with the coding sequence so long as they function to direct the expression of the coding sequence.
- intervening untranslated yet transcribed sequences can be present between a promoter sequence and the coding sequence and the promoter sequence can still be considered “operably linked” to the coding sequence.
- such sequences need not reside on the same contiguous DNA molecule (i.e. chromosome) and may still have interactions resulting in altered regulation.
- a “promoter” or “promoter sequence” is a DNA regulatory region capable of binding RNA polymerase and initiating transcription of a polynucleotide or polypeptide coding sequence such as messenger RNA, ribosomal RNA, small nuclear or nucleolar RNA, guide RNA, or any kind of RNA transcribed by any class of any RNA polymerase I, II or III. Promoters may be constitutive or inducible. In the methods described herein optionally the promoters driving transcription of the gRNAs is inducible.
- selectable marker refers to a gene introduced into a cell, which confers a trait suitable for artificial selection.
- General use selectable markers are well-known to those of ordinary skill in the art.
- Drug selectable markers such as ampicillin/carbenicillin, kanamycin, chloramphenicol, erythromycin, tetracycline, gentamicin, bleomycin, streptomycin, puromycin, hygromycin, blasticidin, and G418 may be employed.
- selectable markers include, but are not limited to human nerve growth factor receptor (detected with a MAb, such as described in U.S. Pat. No.
- target genomic DNA sequence refers to any locus in vitro or in vivo, or in a nucleic acid (e.g., genome) of a cell or population of cells, in which a change of at least one nucleotide is desired using a nucleic acid-guided nuclease editing system.
- the target sequence can be a genomic locus or extrachromosomal locus.
- a “vector” is any of a variety of nucleic acids that comprise a desired sequence or sequences to be delivered to and/or expressed in a cell.
- Vectors are typically composed of DNA, although RNA vectors are also available.
- Vectors include, but are not limited to, plasmids, fosmids, phagemids, virus genomes, YACs, BACs, mammalian synthetic chromosomes, and the like.
- the phrase “engine vector” comprises a coding sequence for a nuclease—optionally under the control of an inducible promoter—to be used in the nucleic acid-guided nuclease systems and methods of the present disclosure.
- the engine vector may also comprise, in a bacterial system, the ⁇ Red recombineering system or an equivalent thereto, as well as a selectable marker.
- the phrase “editing vector” comprises a donor nucleic acid, including an alteration to the target sequence which prevents nuclease binding at a PAM or spacer in the target sequence after editing has taken place, and a coding sequence for a gRNA optionally under the control of an inducible promoter (and preferably under the control of an inducible promoter in bacterial systems).
- the editing vector may also comprise a selectable marker and/or a barcode.
- the engine vector and editing vector may be combined; that is, the contents of the engine vector may be found on the editing vector.
- the present disclosure provides instruments, modules and methods for nucleic acid-guided nuclease genome editing that provide 1) enhanced observed editing efficiency of nucleic acid-guided nuclease editing methods, and 2) improvement in screening for and detecting cells whose genomes have been properly edited, including high-throughput screening techniques.
- current protocols employing nuclease systems bulk culture of cells with constitutively-expressed nuclease components typically are used to drive high-efficiency editing.
- pooled or multiplex formats can lead to selective enrichment of cells that are not edited due to the lack of double-strand DNA breaks that occur during editing.
- the instruments, modules, and methods may be applied to all cell types including, archaeal, prokaryotic, and eukaryotic (e.g., yeast, fungal, plant and animal) cells.
- the instruments, modules, and methods described herein employ editing cassettes comprising a guide RNA (gRNA) sequence covalently linked to a donor DNA sequence where, particularly in bacterial systems, the gRNA optionally is under the control of an inducible promoter (e.g., the editing cassettes are CREATE cassettes; see U.S. Ser. No. 9/982,278, issued 29 May 2019 and Ser. No. 10/240,167, issued 26 Mar. 2019; Ser. No. 10/266,849, issued 23 Apr. 2019; and U.S. Ser. No. 15/948,785, filed 9 Apr. 2018; Ser. No. 16/275,439, filed 14 Feb. 2019; and Ser. No. 16/275,465, filed 14 Feb.
- gRNA guide RNA
- the disclosed methods allow for cells to be transformed, substantially isolated, grown for several doublings (e.g. incubation), after which editing is allowed.
- the isolation process effectively negates the effect of unedited cells taking over the cell population.
- the combination of substantially isolating cells, then allowing for initial growth followed by optionally inducing transcription of the gRNA (and optionally the nuclease) and either normalization of cell colonies or cherry picking cells leads to 2-2.50 ⁇ , 10-225 ⁇ , 25-200 ⁇ , 40-175 ⁇ , 50-150 ⁇ , 60-100 ⁇ , or 50-100 ⁇ gains in identifying edited cells over prior art methods and allows for generation of arrayed or pooled edited cells comprising cell libraries with edited genomes.
- inducible gRNA constructs provides “pulsed” exposure of the cells to active editing components, which 1) allows for the cells to be arrayed (e.g., largely isolated) prior to initiation of the editing procedure, 2) decreases off-arget activity, 3) allows for identification of rare cell edits, and 4) enriches for edited cells or permit high-throughput screening applications to identify editing activity using cell growth as a proxy for editing, by, e.g., measuring optical density, colony size, or metabolic by-products or other characteristics thereby enriching the edited cell population.
- nucleic acid-guided nucleases e.g., RNA-guided nucleases
- a nucleic acid-guided nuclease complexed with an appropriate synthetic guide nucleic acid in a cell can cut the genome of the cell at a desired location.
- the guide nucleic acid helps the nucleic acid-guided nuclease recognize and cut the DNA at a specific target sequence.
- the nucleic acid-guided nuclease may be programmed to target any DNA sequence for cleavage as long as an appropriate protospacer adjacent motif (PAM) is nearby.
- PAM protospacer adjacent motif
- the nucleic acid-guided nuclease editing system may use two separate guide nucleic acid molecules that combine to function as a guide nucleic acid, e.g., a CRISPR RNA (crRNA) and trans-activating CRISPR RNA (tracrRNA).
- a guide nucleic acid e.g., a CRISPR RNA (crRNA) and trans-activating CRISPR RNA (tracrRNA).
- the guide nucleic acid may be a single guide nucleic acid that includes both the crRNA and tracrRNA sequences or a single guide nucleic acid that does not require a tracrRNA.
- a guide nucleic acid e.g., gRNA
- a guide nucleic acid complexes with a compatible nucleic acid-guided nuclease and can then hybridize with a target sequence, thereby directing the nuclease to the target sequence.
- a guide nucleic acid can be DNA or RNA; alternatively, a guide nucleic acid may comprise both DNA and RNA.
- a guide nucleic acid may comprise modified or non-naturally occurring nucleotides.
- the gRNA is encoded by a DNA sequence on a polynucleotide molecule such as a plasmid, linear construct, or resides within an editing cassette and is optionally—particularly in bacterial systems—under the control of an inducible promoter.
- a guide nucleic acid comprises a guide sequence, where the guide sequence is a polynucleotide sequence having sufficient complementarity with a target sequence to hybridize with the target sequence and direct sequence-specific binding of a complexed nucleic acid-guided nuclease to the target sequence.
- the degree of complementarity between a guide sequence and the corresponding target sequence when optimally aligned using a suitable alignment algorithm, is about or more than about 50%, 60%, 75%, 80%, 85%, 90%, 95%, 97.5%, 99%, or more.
- Optimal alignment may be determined with the use of any suitable algorithm for aligning sequences.
- a guide sequence (the portion of the guide nucleic acid that hybridizes with the target sequence) is about or more than about 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 17, 18, 19, 20, 21, 22, 23, 24, 25, 26, 27, 28, 29, 30, 35, 40, 45, 50, 75, or more nucleotides in length. In some embodiments, a guide sequence is less than about 75, 50, 45, 40, 35, 30, 25, 20 nucleotides in length. Preferably the guide sequence is 10-30 or 15-20 nucleotides long, or 15, 16, 17, 18, 19, or 20 nucleotides in length.
- the guide nucleic acid is provided as a sequence to be expressed from a plasmid or vector and comprises both the guide sequence and the scaffold sequence as a single transcript.
- the guide nucleic acids may be transcribed from two separate sequences.
- the guide nucleic acid can be engineered to target a desired target DNA sequence by altering the guide sequence so that the guide sequence is complementary to the target DNA sequence, thereby allowing hybridization between the guide sequence and the target DNA sequence.
- the gRNA/nuclease complex binds to a target sequence as determined by the guide RNA, and the nuclease recognizes a protospacer adjacent notif (PAM) sequence adjacent to the target sequence.
- PAM protospacer adjacent notif
- the target sequence can be any polynucleotide (either DNA or RNA) endogenous or exogenous to a prokaryotic or eukaryotic cell, or in vitro.
- the target sequence can be a polynucleotide residing in the nucleus of a eukaryotic cell.
- a target sequence can be a sequence encoding a gene product (e.g., a protein) and/or a non-coding sequence (e.g., a regulatory polynucleotide, an intron, a PAM, or “junk” DNA).
- the guide nucleic acid may be part of an editing cassette that encodes the donor nucleic acid; that is, the editing cassette may be a CREATE cassette (see, e.g., U.S. Ser. No. 9/982,278, issued 29 May 2019 and Ser. No. 10/240,167, issued 26 Mar. 2019; Ser. No. 10/266,849, issued 23 Apr. 2019; and U.S. Ser. Nos. 15/948,785, filed 9 Apr. 2018; Ser. No. 16/275,439, filed 14 Feb. 2019; and Ser. No. 16/275,465, filed 14 Feb. 2019, all of which are incorporated by reference in their entirety).
- the guide nucleic acid and the donor nucleic acid may be and typically are under the control of a single (optionally inducible) promoter.
- the guide nucleic acid may not be part of the editing cassette and instead may be encoded on the engine or editing vector backbone.
- a sequence coding for a guide nucleic acid can be assembled or inserted into a vector backbone first, followed by insertion of the donor nucleic acid.
- the donor nucleic acid can be inserted or assembled into a vector backbone first, followed by insertion of the sequence coding for the guide nucleic acid.
- sequence encoding the guide nucleic acid and the donor nucleic acid are simultaneously but separately inserted or assembled into a vector.
- sequence encoding the guide nucleic acid and the sequence encoding the donor nucleic acid are both included in the editing cassette.
- the target sequence is associated with a PAM, which is a short nucleotide sequence recognized by the gRNA/nuclease complex.
- PAM is a short nucleotide sequence recognized by the gRNA/nuclease complex.
- the precise PAM sequence and length requirements for different nucleic acid-guided nucleases vary; however, PAMs typically are 2-7 base-pair sequences adjacent or in proximity to the target sequence and, depending on the nuclease, can be 5′ or 3′ to the target sequence.
- Engineering of the PAM-interacting domain of a nucleic acid-guided nuclease may allow for alteration of PAM specificity, improve target site recognition fidelity, decrease target site recognition fidelity, and increase the versatility of a nucleic acid-guided nuclease.
- the genome editing of a target sequence both introduces a desired DNA change to a target sequence, e.g., the genomic DNA of a cell, and removes, mutates, or renders inactive a proto-spacer (PAM) region in the target sequence; that is, the donor DNA often includes an alteration to the target sequence that prevents binding of the nuclease at the PAM in the target sequence after editing has taken place. Rendering the PAM at the target sequence inactive precludes additional editing of the cell genome at that target sequence, e.g., upon subsequent exposure to a nucleic acid-guided nuclease complexed with a synthetic guide nucleic acid in later rounds of editing.
- a desired DNA change e.g., the genomic DNA of a cell
- PAM proto-spacer
- cells having the desired target sequence edit and an altered PAM can be selected using a nucleic acid-guided nuclease complexed with a synthetic guide nucleic acid complementary to the target sequence.
- Cells that did not undergo the first editing event will be cut rendering a double-stranded DNA break, and thus will not continue to be viable.
- the cells containing the desired target sequence edit and PAM alteration will not be cut, as these edited cells no longer contain the necessary PAM site and will continue to grow and propagate.
- nucleic acid-guided nucleases can recognize some PAMs very well (e.g., canonical PAMs), and other PAMs less well or poorly (e.g., non-canonical PAMs). Because the methods disclosed herein allow for identification of edited cells in a large background of unedited cells, the methods allow for identification of edited cells where the PAM is less than optimal; that is, the methods for identifying edited cells herein allow for identification of edited cells even if editing efficiency is very low. Additionally, the present methods expand the scope of target sequences that may be edited since edits are more readily identified, including cells where the genome edits are associated with less functional PAMs.
- the polynucleotide sequence encoding the nucleic acid-guided nuclease can be codon optimized for expression in particular cells, such as archaeal, prokaryotic or eukaryotic cells.
- Eukaryotic cells can be yeast, fungi, algae, plant, animal, or human cells.
- Eukaryotic cells may be those of or derived from a particular organism, such as a mammal, including but not limited to human, mouse, rat, rabbit, dog, or non-human mammal including non-human primate.
- nucleic acid-guided nuclease The choice of nucleic acid-guided nuclease to be employed depends on many factors, such as what type of edit is to be made in the target sequence and whether an appropriate PAM is located close to the desired target sequence. Nucleases of use in the methods described herein include but are not limited to Cas 9, Cas 12/CpfI, MAD2, or MAD7 or other MADzymes.
- the nuclease may be encoded by a DNA sequence on a vector (e.g., the engine vector) and be under the control of a constitutive or an inducible promoter. Again, at least one of and preferably both of the nuclease and guide nucleic acid are under the control of an inducible promoter.
- the donor nucleic acid is on the same polynucleotide (e.g., vector or editing (CREATE) cassette) as the guide nucleic acid.
- the donor nucleic acid is designed to serve as a template for homologous recombination with a target sequence nicked or cleaved by the nucleic acid-guided nuclease as a part of the gRNA/nuclease complex.
- a donor nucleic acid polynucleotide may be of any suitable length, such as about or more than about 30, 35, 40, 45, 50, 75, 100, 150, 200, 500, 1000, 2500, 5000 nucleotides or more in length.
- the donor nucleic acid can be provided as an oligonucleotide of between 40-300 nucleotides, more preferably between 50-250 nucleotides.
- the donor nucleic acid comprises a region that is complementary to a portion of the target sequence (e.g., a homology arm).
- the donor nucleic acid overlaps with (is complementary to) the target sequence by, e.g., about 10, 15, 20, 25, 30, 35, 40, 50, 60, 70, 80, 90 or more nucleotides.
- the donor nucleic acid comprises two homology arms (regions complementary to the target sequence) flanking the mutation or difference between the donor nucleic acid and the target template.
- the donor nucleic acid comprises at least one mutation or alteration compared to the target sequence, such as an insertion, deletion, modification, or any combination thereof compared to the target sequence.
- the donor nucleic acid is provided as an editing cassette, which is inserted into a vector backbone where the vector backbone may comprise a promoter driving transcription of the gRNA and the donor nucleic acid.
- the vector backbone may comprise a promoter driving transcription of the gRNA and the donor nucleic acid.
- the promoter driving transcription of the gRNA and the donor nucleic acid is optionally an inducible promoter (and in bacterial systems is preferably an inducible promoter) and the promoter driving transcription of the nuclease is optionally an inducible promoter as well.
- Inducible editing is advantageous in that substantially or largely isolated cells can be grown for several to many cell doublings before editing is initiated, which increases the likelihood that cells with edits will survive, as the double-strand cuts caused by active editing are largely toxic to the cells. This toxicity results both in cell death in the edited colonies, as well as a lag in growth for the edited cells that do survive but must repair and recover following editing. However, once the edited cells have a chance to recover, the size of the colonies of the edited cells will eventually catch up to the size of the colonies of unedited cells (e.g., the process of “normalization” or growing colonies to “terminal size”; see, e.g., FIG. 1B described infra).
- an editing cassette may comprise one or more primer sites.
- the primer sites can be used to amplify the editing cassette by using oligonucleotide primers; for example, if the primer sites flank one or more of the other components of the editing cassette.
- the donor nucleic acid may comprise—in addition to the at least one mutation relative to a target sequence—one or more PAM sequence alterations that mutate, delete or render inactive the PAM site in the target sequence.
- the PAM sequence alteration in the target sequence renders the PAM site “immune” to the nucleic acid-guided nuclease and protects the target sequence from further editing in subsequent rounds of editing if the same nuclease is used.
- the editing cassette also may comprise a barcode.
- a barcode is a unique DNA sequence that corresponds to the donor DNA sequence such that the barcode can identify the edit made to the corresponding target sequence.
- the barcode can comprise greater than four nucleotides.
- the editing cassettes comprise a collection of donor nucleic acids representing, e.g., gene-wide or genome-wide libraries of donor nucleic acids.
- the library of editing cassettes is cloned into vector backbones where, e.g., each different donor nucleic acid design is associated with a different barcode, or, alternatively, each different cassette molecule is associate with a different barcode.
- an expression vector or cassette encoding components of the nucleic acid-guided nuclease system further encodes a nucleic acid-guided nuclease comprising one or more nuclear localization sequences (NLSs), such as about or more than about 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, or more NLSs.
- NLSs nuclear localization sequences
- the engineered nuclease comprises NLSs at or near the amino-terminus, NLSs at or near the carboxy-terminus, or a combination.
- the methods described herein provide enhanced observed editing efficiency of nucleic acid-guided nuclease editing methods as the result of a combination of isolation or substantial isolation, initial cell growth (incubation), editing, and either normalization of the resulting cell colonies or cherry picking slow-growing cell colonies.
- the combination of the isolation or substantial isolation, initial cell growth, editing and normalization processes overcomes the growth bias in favor of unedited cells—and the fitness effects of editing (including differential editing rates)—thus allowing all cells “equal billing” with one another.
- the combination of isolation or substantial isolation, initial cell growth, editing, and cherry picking allows for direct selection of edited colonies of cells.
- Isolating, incubating, editing, and normalization of cell colonies or cherry picking of cell colonies leads to 2-250 ⁇ , 10-225 ⁇ , 25-200 ⁇ , 40-175 ⁇ , 50-150 ⁇ , 60-100 ⁇ , or 5-100 ⁇ gains in identifying edited cells over prior art methods and allows for the generation of arrayed or pooled edited cells comprising genome libraries, Additionally, the instruments, nodules and methods may be leveraged to create iterative editing systems to generate combinatorial libraries, identify rare cell edits, and enable high-throughput enrichment applications to identify editing activity.
- FIG. 1A shows simplified flow charts for two alternative exemplary methods 100 a and 100 b for isolating cells for enrichment ( 100 a ) and for cherry picking ( 100 b ).
- method 100 begins by transforming cells 110 with the components necessary to perform nucleic acid-guided nuclease editing.
- the cells may be transformed simultaneously with separate engine and editing vectors; the cells may already be transformed with an engine vector expressing the nuclease (e.g., the cells may have already been transformed with an engine vector or the coding sequence for the nuclease may be stably integrated into the cellular genome) such that only the editing vector needs to be transformed into the cells; or the cells may be transformed with a single vector comprising all components required to perform nucleic acid-guided nuclease genome editing.
- an engine vector expressing the nuclease e.g., the cells may have already been transformed with an engine vector or the coding sequence for the nuclease may be stably integrated into the cellular genome
- the cells may be transformed with a single vector comprising all components required to perform nucleic acid-guided nuclease genome editing.
- a variety of delivery systems can be used to introduce (e.g., transform or transfect) nucleic acid-guided nuclease editing system components into a host cell 110 .
- These delivery systems include the use of yeast systems, lipofection systems, microinjection systems, biolistic systems, virosomes, liposomes, immunoliposomes, polycations, lipid:nucleic acid conjugates, virions, artificial virions, viral vectors, electroporation, cell permeable peptides, nanoparticles, nanowires, exosomes.
- molecular trojan horse liposomes may be used to deliver nucleic acid-guided nuclease components across the blood brain barrier.
- electroporation particularly flow-through electroporation (either as a stand-alone instrument or as a module in an automated multi-module system) as described in, e.g., U.S. Ser. No. 16/147,120, filed 28 Sep. 2018; Ser. No. 16/147,353, filed 28 Sep. 2018; Ser. No. 16/147,865, filed 30 Sep. 2018; and Ser. No. 16/147,871, filed 30 Sep. 2018.
- the solid wall isolation or substantial isolation/incubation/editing and normalization module is one module in an automated multi-module cell editing instrument as described herein infra, the cells are likely transformed in an automated cell transformation module.
- the cells are substantially or largely isolated 120 ; that is, the cells are diluted (if necessary) in a liquid culture medium so that the cells, when delivered to a substrate for isolation, are substantially separated from one another and can form colonies that are substantially separated from one another.
- a solid wall device is used (described infra in relation to FIGS. 3A-3E and 4A-4Z )
- the cells are diluted such that when delivered to the solid wall device the cells fill the microwells of the solid wall device in a Poisson or substantial Poisson distribution.
- FIG. 1 illustrated in FIG.
- isolation is accomplished when an average of 1 ⁇ 2 cell is delivered to each microwell; that is, where some microwells contain one cell and other microwells contain no cells.
- a substantial Poisson distribution of cells occurs when two to several (2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 17, 18, 19, 20, 21, 22, 23, 24, 25, 26, 27, 28, 29, 30 or up to 50, but preferably 10 or less, or preferably 5 or less) cells are delivered to a microwell (illustrated in FIG. 3B ).
- the cells are allowed to grow to, e.g., between 2 and 130, or between 5 and 120, or between 10 and 100 doublings, establishing clonal colonies 130 .
- editing proceeds 140 .
- an inducible system is used where at least the gRNA is under the control of an inducible promoter (see FIG. 1C described in detail infra).
- Normalization occurs as the nutrients in the medium around a growing cell colony are depleted and/or cell growth fills the microwells and further growth is physically constrained.
- the terminal-size colonies are pooled 160 by, e.g., scraping the colonies off a plate comprising solid medium or other substrate or by flushing clonal cell colonies from microwells in a solid wall device or module to pool the cells from the normalized cell colonies.
- isolation or substantial isolation overcomes growth bias from unedited cells or cells exhibiting fitness effects as the result of edits made
- isolation or substantial isolation, incubation, editing, and normalization alone enriches the total population of cells with cells that have been edited; that is, isolation or substantial isolation combined with incubation, editing and normalization (e.g., growing colonies to terminal size) allows for high-throughput enrichment of edited cells.
- Method 100 b shown in FIG. 1A is similar to the method 100 a in that cells of interest are transformed 110 with the components necessary to perform nucleic acid-guided nuclease editing.
- the cells may be transformed simultaneously with both the engine and editing vectors, the cells may already be expressing the nuclease (e.g., the cells may have already been transformed with an engine vector or the coding sequence for the nuclease may be stably integrated into the cellular genome) such that only the editing vector needs to be transformed into the cells, or the cells may be transformed with a single vector comprising all components required to perform nucleic acid-guided nuclease genome editing.
- solid wall isolation/incubation/normalization module or “SWIIN”
- cell transformation may be performed in an automated flow-through transformation module as described in relation to FIGS. 8A-8E below.
- the cells are transformed 110 with the components necessary to perform nucleic acid-guided nuclease editing, the cells are diluted (if necessary) in liquid medium so that the cells, when delivered to an isolation device or module, are separated from one another and can form colonies that are separated from one another.
- the cells are diluted such that when delivered to the solid wall device, the cells fill the microwells of the solid wall device in a Poisson or substantial Poisson distribution.
- the cells grown to, e.g., between 2 and 150, or between 5 and 120, or between 10 and 100 doublings, establishing clonal colonies 130 .
- editing is allowed 140 .
- editing is induced by, e.g., activating inducible promoters that control transcription of the gRNA and optionally the nuclease and a recombineering system.
- these edited cells When allowed to recover, these edited cells start growing and re-establish cell populations within each isolated partition or colony; however, the growth of edited colonies tends to lag behind the growth of clonal colonies where an edit has not taken place (e.g., cell “escapees”). If growth of these colonies is monitored 170 , the small or slow-growing colonies (edited cells) may be identified and then selected or cherry picked 180 based on the observable size differentials of the colonies.
- FIG. 1B is a plot of OD versus time for unedited cells (solid line) versus edited cells (dashed line).
- FIG. 1B shows how normalization of edited and non-edited colonies takes place. Note that the OD (e.g., growth) of the edited cells lags behind the unedited cells initially, but eventually catches up due, e.g., to unedited cells exhausting the nutrients in the medium, becoming physically constrained within a microwell or other confined growth area (such as a droplet), or otherwise exiting log-phase growth. The cell colonies are allowed to grow long enough for the growth of the edited colonies to catch up with (approximate the size of, e.g., number of cells in) the unedited colonies.
- FIG. 1C depicts an exemplary inducible expression system such as used in bacteria—in this example, the pL inducible system—for regulating gRNA activity.
- a portion of an exemplary engine vector 111 comprising an origin of replication 112 , a promoter 114 driving expression of the c1857 repressor gene 116 , and a first pL promoter 118 driving expression of a nuclease 121 .
- FIG. 1C depicts an exemplary inducible expression system such as used in bacteria—in this example, the pL inducible system—for regulating gRNA activity.
- FIG. 1C depicts an exemplary inducible expression system such as used in bacteria—in this example, the pL inducible system—for regulating gRNA activity.
- FIG. 1C depicts an exemplary engine vector 111 comprising an origin of replication 112 , a promoter 114 driving expression of the c1857 repressor gene 116 , and a first pL promote
- FIG. 1C there is also seen a portion of an exemplary editing vector 131 , comprising an origin of replication 132 , and a second pL promoter 134 driving transcription of an editing cassette 136 (e.g., a CREATE cassette) which includes a coding sequences for both a gRNA and a donor DNA.
- an editing cassette 136 e.g., a CREATE cassette
- the middle illustration of FIG. 1C depicts the product 124 of the c1857 repressor gene 116 on the engine vector 111 actively repressing the first pL promoter 118 driving transcription of the nuclease 121 and the second pL promoter 134 driving transcription of the editing cassette 136 on the editing vector 131 .
- FIG. 1C depicts the protein product 126 of the c1857 repressor gene 116 on the engine vector 111 unfolding/degrading due to increased temperature.
- the unfolded or degraded protein product 126 cannot bind first pL promoter 118 or second pL promoter 134 ; thus, pL promoter 118 is active and drives transcription of the nuclease 121 on engine vector 111 and pL promoter 134 is active and drives transcription of the editing cassette 136 on the editing vector 131 .
- transcription of both the nuclease and the gRNA are under control of a pL promoter; however, in other embodiments, different inducible promoters may be used to drive transcription of the nuclease and gRNA or in some embodiments only the gRNA is under control of an inducible promoter.
- the pL and pBAD promoters are shown in relation to the exemplary bacterial engine and editing vectors in FIGS. 11A and 11B , and a number of gene regulation control systems have been developed for the controlled expression of genes in plant, microbe and animal cells, including mammalian cells.
- the pL promoter is a particularly useful inducible promoter because the pL promoter is activated by an increase in temperature, to, e.g., 42° C., and deactivated by returning the temperature to, e.g., 30° C.
- activating the inducible promoter requires addition of or removal of a molecular compound from the culture medium, thus requiring liquid handling, medium exchange, wash steps and the like.
- FIG. 2A depicts a standard, conventional, prior art protocol 200 for performing nucleic acid-guided nuclease genome editing where constitutively-expressed nuclease components typically are used to drive high efficiency editing.
- a library or collection of editing vectors 202 is introduced 203 (e.g., electroporated) into cultured cells 204 that comprise a coding sequence for a nuclease under the control of a constitutive or inducible promoter.
- the coding sequence for the nuclease is contained on an “engine vector”, although in other embodiments the coding sequence for the nuclease may be integrated into the cell genome.
- the components of the engine and editing vectors may be combined.
- the editing vectors 202 comprise an editing sequence comprising a sequence for a desired edit in a nucleic acid sequence endogenous to the cell as well as an optional PAM-altering sequence (most often a sequence that disables the PAM at the target sequence in the genome), a coding sequence for a gRNA under the control of a constitutive promoter, and a selectable marker.
- the cells that grow on plate 206 with the selective medium should comprise both the engine and editing vectors; however, it is likely that in some cells the nucleic acid-guided editing components may be non-functional. In pooled or multiplex formats, there is likely to be selective enrichment of the cells with a non-functional editing system since un-edited cells are not subjected to the double-strand DNA breaks that occur during editing.
- the strong selection for cells with non-functional nucleic acid-guided nuclease editing systems leads to a disproportionate representation of non-edited cells in the final cell population and compromises the integrity of libraries generated via multiplexed nuclease editing systems.
- FIGS. 2B-2F depict improved protocols for performing nucleic acid-guided nuclease genome editing.
- FIG. 2B depicts a first embodiment 201 of an improved protocol for performing nucleic acid-guided nuclease genome editing using an optional inducible promoter to drive expression of the gRNA.
- FIG. 2B depicts a first embodiment 201 of an improved protocol for performing nucleic acid-guided nuclease genome editing using an optional inducible promoter to drive expression of the gRNA.
- a library or collection of editing vectors 202 is introduced 203 (e.g., electroporated) into cultured cells 204 that comprise a coding sequence for a nuclease under the control of a constitutive or inducible promoter; however, in bacteria the tightest regulation of the nucleic acid-guided nuclease system is achieved by using an inducible promoter to drive expression of the nuclease, thus it is preferred that an inducible promoter is used to drive transcription of the nuclease.
- the coding sequence for the nuclease is contained on an “engine plasmid” (most often along with, e.g., a selectable marker) that has already been transformed into the cells, although in other embodiments the coding sequence for the nuclease may be integrated into the genome of the cells. In yet other embodiments such as in yeast, the coding sequence for the nuclease may be located on the editing vector (that is, a combined engine and editing vector).
- the editing vectors 202 comprise an editing sequence, which optionally includes a PAM-altering sequence (most often a sequence that disables the PAM at the target site in the genome), a coding sequence for a gRNA under the control of an inducible promoter, and a selectable marker.
- the cells are plated 205 on selective medium to select for cells that have both the engine and the editing vectors and grown until colonies 206 form.
- Cells are then picked 207 from the colonies and grown overnight in, e.g., first 96-well plate 208 in medium that selects for both the engine and editing vectors.
- the cells from the first 96-well plate 208 are replicated into a second 96-well plate 210 into medium containing an additional selective component such as, e.g., arabinose, to drive strong induction of the ⁇ red recombineering system (the homologous repair machinery).
- the inducible pBAD promoter-induced by the presence of arabinose in the growth medium controls the ⁇ red recombineering system and is described in relation to FIG. 11A below.
- a recombineering system is exemplified here in a bacterial editing system, recombineering systems generally are not needed in eukaryotic editing systems.
- cutting and editing of the cellular genome is induced by increasing the temperature to 42° C. in the second 96-well plate 210 for, e.g., one-half to approximately two hours (depending on cell type), to activate the pL inducible promoters which drive transcription of the nuclease and the gRNA.
- the temperature is returned to 30° C. to allow the cells to recover.
- cells from the first 96-well plate 208 are replicated into a third 96-well plate 214 into medium that does not contain the selective component that induces the homologous repair machinery (here, arabinose, such that the ⁇ Red recombineering system is not activated).
- the third 96-well plate 214 is subjected to the same conditions as the second 96-well plate; that is, initial cell growth at 30° C., increasing the temperature to 42° C. for, e.g., two hours to activate the pL inducible promoter driving the expression of the nuclease and the gRNA, then reducing the temperature to 30° C.
- 96-well plates 210 and 214 shown are two agar plates 212 and 216 , where cells from plate 206 are arrayed.
- Plate 212 corresponds to the second 96-well plate 210 , containing growth medium with arabinose
- plate 216 corresponds to the third 96-well plate 214 , containing growth medium without arabinose.
- ⁇ /+ temperature induction of cutting For example, in a +/ ⁇ temperature induction experiment, plate 210 would be the uninduced culture plate (no temp) and culture plate 214 would be the temperature-induced culture plate. The same overall interpretation applies; however, cut activity is isolated to avoid having to deconvolute cut from paste.
- second and third 96-well plates ( 210 and 214 , respectively) and at plates 212 and 216 , colonies of cells can be seen. Looking first at second 96-well plate 210 , there are two types of colonies: 226 (white wells) and 228 (hatched wells). Looking at third 96-well plate 214 , there are two types of colonies: 220 (black wells) and 226 (white wells). Replicate plating of cells from the first 96-well plate into the second and third 96-well plates with differential media allows for functional deconvolution of the resulting cell populations. In third 96-well plate 214 , cells were cultured in a medium without arabinose.
- the ⁇ Red recombineering system With no arabinose, the ⁇ Red recombineering system is not active, and cells that have active gRNA and nuclease expression (induced by increasing the temperature of the cultured cells to 42° C.) are not viable due to the double-strand cuts made by the active gRNA and nuclease yet without repair by the ⁇ Red recombineering system. These cell colonies 222 are denoted by white wells.
- the cell colonies 220 denoted by black wells represent cells that have inactive gRNAs, such that the genomes of cells in these colonies are not cut by the gRNA and nuclease complex. Inactive gRNAs occur at a frequency of approximately 2-15% in a typical cell editing experiment, and typically are the result of errors in the guide sequence portion (homology portion) of the gRNA.
- second 96-well plate 210 the cells were cultured in a medium with arabinose, thereby activating the ⁇ Red recombineering system.
- Cells that have active gRNA and nuclease expression are cut, edited, and the ⁇ Red recombineering system repairs the double-strand DNA breaks and thus these cells are viable.
- viable are cells with inactive gRNAs (or less frequently, inactive nucleases). All viable colonies in plate 210 are denoted by hatched wells 228 .
- cells that have active gRNAs but are not edited appropriately are denoted by white wells 226 .
- the function of the nucleic acid-guided nuclease system in each colony can be determined. For example, if colonies of cells grow without arabinose (plate 214 , black wells 220 ) and with arabinose (plate 210 , hatched wells 228 ), the cells must not have an active gRNA. If the cells had an active gRNA, they would not have been viable in medium without arabinose (e.g., without an active ⁇ Red recombineering system).
- colonies of cells fail to grow in medium without arabinose (plate 214 , white wells 226 ) and do grow when arabinose is added to the culture medium (plate 210 , hatched wells 228 ), the cells in these wells comprise an active nucleic acid-guided nuclease system—with active gRNA and nuclease components—and are very likely to have been properly edited.
- the colonies of cells fail to grow either without arabinose (plate 214 , white wells 226 ) or with arabinose (plate 210 , white wells 226 )
- the gRNA is active, but the cells are not able to repair the cut for some reason.
- the method depicted in FIG. 2B allows for identification of edited cell colonies via functional deconvolution of the various components of the editing “machinery” in one experiment.
- the phenotypic readout is the same as in 96-well plates 210 and 214 .
- the medium in culture dish 212 contains arabinose
- the medium in culture dish 216 does not contain arabinose.
- cells with inactive gRNAs grow, as there is no edit (double-strand break) to repair.
- editing takes place but there is no active repair machinery to repair the edits, and the cells are not viable and do not form colonies.
- culture dish 212 that contains arabinose cells that have inactive gRNAs form colonies, as do cells that have active gRNAs but are properly edited.
- the method 201 depicted in FIG. 2B allows for identification of cells with nonfunctional gRNAs that, due to the lack of double-strand DNA breaks, have a growth advantage. Most importantly, the method 201 depicted in FIG. 2B allows for identification of cells that have been properly edited. An aliquot of the colonies 228 from either second 96-well plate 210 or agar plate 212 —the colonies confirmed to have an active gRNA—can be picked and sequenced to confirm editing. 96-well plate 210 or agar plate 212 may be retained so that once proper editing is confirmed by, e.g., sequencing, one can go back to plate 210 or 212 and retrieve the properly-edited cells.
- Plates 210 and 212 may be referred to, e.g., as “cell hotels” or “cell repositories.”
- the method 201 depicted in FIG. 2B first substantially or largely isolates the cells by plating them on selective medium at an appropriate dilution such that single cells form single colonies. Again, isolation or substantial isolation overcomes growth the bias that is characteristic of unedited cells. The method then allows for functional deconvolution of the different colonies by replica plating colonies in 96-well microtiter plates under different section media to allow positive identification of edited colonies. A specific protocol for this exemplary method is described in Example 6 below.
- FIG. 2C depicts a second exemplary embodiment of an improved protocol 240 for performing nucleic acid-guided nuclease genome editing using an inducible promoter in a bacterial system to drive expression of the gRNA, and, preferably, the nuclease as well.
- a library or collection of editing vectors 202 is introduced 203 (e.g., electroporated) into cultured cells 204 that comprise a coding sequence for a nuclease under the control of a constitutive or inducible promoter; however, the tightest regulation of the nucleic acid-guided nuclease system is achieved by using an inducible promoter to drive expression of the nuclease and thus is preferred.
- the coding sequence for the nuclease is contained on an “engine plasmid” (most often along with, e.g., a selectable marker) that has already been transformed into the cells, although in other embodiments, the coding sequence for the nuclease may be integrated into the genome of the cells. In yet other embodiments such as in yeast, the coding sequence for the nuclease may be located on the editing vector (that is, a combined engine and editing vector).
- the editing vectors 202 comprise an editing sequence with a desired edit vis-à-vis an endogenous nucleic acid sequence in the cell along with a PAM-altering sequence (most often a sequence that disables the PAM at the target site in the genome), a coding sequence for a gRNA under the control of, preferably, an inducible promoter, and a selectable marker.
- a PAM-altering sequence most often a sequence that disables the PAM at the target site in the genome
- a coding sequence for a gRNA under the control of, preferably, an inducible promoter, and a selectable marker.
- the cells are plated 235 on selective medium on substrate or plate 236 to select for cells that have both the engine and the editing vectors.
- the cells are diluted before plating such that the cells are substantially or largely isolated—separated enough so that they and the colonies they form are separated from other cell colonies—and the cells are then grown 237 on plate or substrate 236 until colonies 238 begin to form.
- the cells are allowed to grow at, e.g., 30° C. for, e.g., between 2 and 150, or between 5 and 120, or between 10 and 50 doublings, establishing clonal colonies. This initial growth of cells is to accumulate enough clonal cells in a colony to survive induction of editing.
- cutting and editing of the cellular genome is induced by inducing or activating the promoters driving at least the gRNA (and in some instances the nuclease as well), and the ⁇ Red recombineering system (if present). If the ⁇ Red recombineering system is present and under the control of an inducible promoter, preferably this inducible promoter is different from the inducible promoter driving transcription of the gRNA and nuclease and is activated (induced) before induction of the gRNA and nuclease.
- the ⁇ Red recombineering system works as the “band aid” or repair system for double-strand breaks in bacteria, and in some species of bacteria must be present for the double-strand breaks that occur during editing to resolve.
- the ⁇ Red recombineering system may be under the control of, e.g., a pBAD promoter.
- the pBAD promoter like the pL promoter, is an inducible promoter; however, the pBAD promoter is regulated (induced) by the addition of arabinose to the growth medium.
- the ⁇ Red recombineering system will be activated when the cells are grown 237 .
- transcription of the gRNA and nuclease is induced by increasing the temperature to 42° C. for, e.g., a half-hour to two hours (or more, depending on the cell type), which activates the pL inducible promoter.
- the temperature is returned to 30° C. to allow the cells to recover and to disable the pL promoter system.
- the cells are grown on substrate or plate 236 into colonies of terminal size 244 ; that is, the colonies arising from the substantially or largely isolated cells are grown into colonies to a point where cell growth has peaked and becomes normalized (e.g., saturated) for both edited and unedited cells.
- normalization occurs as the nutrients in the medium around a growing cell colony are depleted and/or cell growth fills the microwells or is otherwise constrained; that is, the cells are in senescence.
- the terminal-size colonies are then pooled 241 by, e.g., scraping the colonies off the substrate or plates (or by, e.g., flushing the clonal cell colonies from microwells in a solid wall device) to pool 280 the cells from the normalized cell colonies.
- the method 240 illustrated and described for FIG. 2C utilizes isolation or substantial isolation, initial growth (e.g., incubation), editing, normalization and pooling of the resulting cell colonies.
- isolation or substantial isolation overcomes growth bias from unedited cells or cells exhibiting fitness effects as the result of edits made
- the combination of isolation or substantial isolation, incubation, editing, and normalization enriches the total population of cells with cells that have been edited.
- method 240 in FIG. 2C takes no steps to deconvolute the editing “machinery.”
- FIG. 2D depicts a third exemplary embodiment of an improved protocol 250 for performing nucleic acid-guided nuclease genome editing using an inducible promoter to drive expression of the gRNA, and in some embodiments and preferably, the nuclease as well.
- FIG. 2D depicts a protocol 250 for activity-based error correction and re-arraying. In FIG. 2D as in FIGS.
- a library or collection of editing vectors 202 is introduced 203 (e.g., electroporated) into cultured cells 204 that comprise a coding sequence for a nuclease under the control of a constitutive or inducible promoter (preferably inducible), either contained on an “engine plasmid” (e.g., along with, e.g., a selectable marker) that has already been transformed into the cells, or integrated into the genome of the cells.
- a constitutive or inducible promoter preferably inducible
- an “engine plasmid” e.g., along with, e.g., a selectable marker
- the coding sequence for the nuclease may be located on the editing vector.
- the editing vectors 202 comprise an editing sequence, a PAM-altering sequence (most often a sequence that disables the PAM at the target site in the genome), a coding sequence for a gRNA under the control of, optionally, an inducible promoter, and a selectable marker.
- the cells are diluted and plated 205 on selective medium 206 to select for cells that have both the engine and the editing vectors (e.g., medium with chloramphenicol and carbenicillin) and grown until colonies form 221 , again in a process that substantially or largely isolates the cells.
- Cells are then picked 207 from the colonies 221 and grown overnight in, e.g., first 96-well plate 208 in medium that does not comprise a selective medium.
- the cells from the first 96-well plate are replicated 211 into a second 96-well plate 214 in medium without arabinose, resulting in wells with colonies (black wells 220 ), and wells without cells colonies (white wells 222 ).
- This process identifies cells with active gRNAs, as cells with active gRNAs will not survive because without arabinose the ⁇ Red recombineering system is not active to repair the cuts in the genome made by the gRNA.
- the wells 222 likely denote wells with active gRNAs.
- the colonies that do grow in this second 96-well plate 214 likely have inactive gRNAs, and thus there is no cut to repair and the cells remain viable (denoted by black wells 220 ).
- these cells are then “cherry-picked” 213 from the first 96-well plate and arrayed into a third 96-well plate 252 to be kept as a cell repository or “cell hotel.” All colonies in the third 96-well plate 252 are cells that have been identified as likely having active gRNAs 222 . With this cell repository 252 , aliquots of these “cherry-picked” cells (e.g., here cells with active gRNAs) can then be arrayed 255 into a fourth 96-well plate 254 in medium with arabinose.
- the cells in this fourth 96-well plate 254 are subjected to cutting and editing conditions, e.g., increasing the temperature to 42° C. for, e.g., two hours, to induce the pL inducible promoter driving the expression of the gRNA.
- cutting and editing conditions e.g., increasing the temperature to 42° C. for, e.g., two hours, to induce the pL inducible promoter driving the expression of the gRNA.
- colonies containing cells that have been properly edited can be identified by monitoring growth of the colonies and selecting slow-growing colonies or by targeted or whole genome sequencing taking cells from plate 254 .
- the cells with the desired edits can be retrieved from 96-well plate 252 (e.g., the cell repository or “cell hotel”).
- the cells colonies with the putatively active gRNAs on plate 252 can be pooled 253 into a mixed cell culture 256 and either analyzed or subjected to an additional round of editing.
- FIG. 2E depicts yet another exemplary embodiment of an improved protocol 270 for performing nucleic acid-guided nuclease genome editing.
- the protocol 270 in FIG. 2D does not entail functional deconvolution of the editing “machinery” of the cells but depicts a protocol for high-throughput screening using colony morphology to identify edited cells.
- cell viability is compromised in the period after editing begins.
- the present method takes advantage of the growth lag in colonies of edited cells to identify edited cells.
- the colony size of the edited cells is 20% smaller than colonies of non-edited cells.
- the colony size of the edited cells is 30%, 40%, 50%, 60%, 70%, 80% or 90% smaller than the colonies of non-edited cells.
- the colony size of the edited cells is 30-80% smaller than colonies of non-edited cells, and in some embodiments, the colony size of the edited cells is 40-70% smaller than colonies of non-edited cells.
- a library or collection of editing vectors 202 is introduced 203 (e.g., electroporated) into cultured cells 204 that comprise a coding sequence for a nuclease, contained 1) on an “engine plasmid” (most often along with a selectable marker) that has already been transformed into the cells; 2) integrated into the genome of the cells being transformed; or 3) the coding sequence for the nuclease may be located on the editing vector.
- the editing plasmids 202 comprise an editing sequence and optionally include a PAM-altering sequence (e.g., a sequence that disables the PAM at the target site in the genome), a coding sequence for a gRNA and a selectable marker.
- a promoter is included in the editing vector backbone, and an editing cassette is inserted 3′ of the promoter where the editing cassette comprises, from 5′ to 3′: a coding sequence for a gRNA, and a donor DNA comprising a desired edit for a target sequence and the PAM-altering sequence (e.g., a CREATE cassette).
- the transformed cells are diluted and plated (e.g., substantially or largely isolated) onto selective medium 272 that selects for both the engine and editing vectors (e.g., medium containing both chloramphenicol and carbenicillin) and, in bacterial systems, further contains arabinose so as to activate the ⁇ Red recombineering system.
- the cells are grown 273 at 30° C. for 12-16 hours so that the cells establish colonies, edit, and grow to re-establish colonies on plate 272 . Once colonies appear, there are large 278 and small 276 colonies.
- the colonies with small size 276 are indicative of an active gRNA and likely to have been edited as the double-strand cuts caused by active editing are largely toxic to the cells, resulting both in cell death in the edited colonies as well as a lag in growth for the edited cells that do survive but must repair and recover following editing.
- the small colonies (edited cells) are cherry picked 277 and are arrayed on a 96-well plate 282 (or several to many 96-well plates). Cells in the 96-well plate 282 can be cultured, and aliquots from this 96-well plate 282 can be sequenced and colonies with desired edits identified.
- This 96-well plate may be kept as a cell hotel or cell repository, and once cells that have been properly edited are identified, one can retrieve the cells with the desired edit from “cell hotel” 96-well plate 282 .
- small colonies 276 may be picked and pooled 275 for additional rounds of editing since the edited cells have been selected in the first round of editing and likely comprise edits from the first round.
- this method does not provide functional deconvolution of the editing machinery; however, the method depicted in FIG. 2E employs both isolation or substantial isolation and cherry picking and thus enables for a high-throughput diagnostic method to identify cells based on the colony size morphology that have a high likelihood of being edited, and once identified, the edited cell population can be enriched. Screening out a large proportion of the cells with non-functional gRNAs allows for identification of edited cells more readily.
- OD optical density
- other cell growth parameters can be measured in addition to or instead of cell colony size or OD.
- spectroscopy using visible, UV, or near infrared (NIR) light allows monitoring the concentration of nutrients and/or wastes in the cell culture.
- spectroscopic measurements may be used to quantify multiple chemical species simultaneously. Nonsymmetric chemical species may be quantified by identification of characteristic absorbance features in the NIR.
- symmetric chemical species can be readily quantified using Raman spectroscopy.
- Many critical metabolites, such as glucose, glutamine, ammonia, and lactate have distinct spectral features in the IR, such that they may be easily quantified.
- the amount and frequencies of light absorbed by the sample can be correlated to the type and concentration of chemical species present in the sample.
- FT-NIR provides the greatest light penetration depth and so can be used for thicker sample so that they provide a higher degree of light scattering.
- FT-mid-IR MIR
- FT-Raman is advantageous when the interference due to water is to be minimized.
- spectral properties can be measured via, e.g., dielectric impedance spectroscopy, visibly fluorescence, fluorescence polarization, or luminescence. Additionally, sensors for measuring, e.g., dissolved oxygen, carbon dioxide, pH, and/or conductivity may be used to assess the rate of cell growth.
- FIG. 2F depicts additional detail of the exemplary embodiment shown in FIG. 2E , using a specific example based on experiments performed (see Example 1, infra).
- FIG. 2F shows high-throughput screening 290 using colony morphology to identify or cherry pick edited cells.
- in edited cells cell viability is compromised in the period after editing is induced.
- the present method takes advantage of the growth lag in colonies of edited cells to identify edited cells.
- transformed cells are diluted and plated on medium containing arabinose 274 and grown for a period of time at, e.g., 30° C.
- editing is induced by, e.g., raising the temperature to 42° C.
- the exemplary workflows described herein employ the concept of isolation. Isolation overcomes the growth bias in favor of unedited cells, thus allowing edited cells “equal billing” with unedited cells. Further, in some embodiments the methods take advantage of a tightly-regulated inducible system to screen edited cells from non-edited cells (both cells where the gRNA is non-functional, and cells where the gRNAs are functional but some component of the nucleic acid-guided nuclease system is not functional).
- Screening may be performed using replica plates and identifying “escapees” or cells in which the gRNA is non-functional, screening may be performed by taking advantage of the growth lag of edited cells in comparison to non-edited cells, or enrichment can be performed by using a combination of isolation or substantial isolation, initial growth, optionally inducing editing followed by normalization.
- the result of the methods is that even in nucleic acid-guided nuclease systems where editing is not optimal (such as in systems where non-canonical PAMs are targeted), there is an increase in the observed editing efficiency; that is, edited cells can be identified even in a large background of unedited cells.
- FIGS. 2B-2F show cell colony isolation, incubation, and editing on solid medium in cell culture dishes or in 96-well plates. It should be recognized by one of ordinary skill in the art given the discussion herein that isolation, incubation, and editing can be performed in other formats, such as, e.g., in the solid wall devices described in relation to FIGS. 3A-3F and 4A-4Z , or as described in U.S. Ser. No. 62/735,365, entitled “Detection of Nuclease Edited Sequences in Automated Modules and Systems”, filed 24 Sep. 2018, and U.S. Ser. No.
- 62/781,112 entitled “Improved Detection of Nuclease Edited Sequences in Automated Modules and Systems,” filed 18 Dec. 2018, which include descriptions of isolation or substantial isolation by isolating cells on functionalized islands, isolation or substantial isolation within aqueous droplets carried in a hydrophobic carrier fluid or Gel Beads-in-Emulsion (GEMs, see, e.g., 10 ⁇ Genomics, Pleasanton, Calif.), or isolation or substantial isolation within a polymerized alginate scaffold (for this embodiment of isolation, also see U.S. Ser. No. 62/769,805, entitled “Improved Detection of Nuclease Edited Sequences in Automated Modules and Instruments via Bulk Cell Culture”, filed 20 Nov. 2018).
- GEMs Gel Beads-in-Emulsion
- the instruments, methods, and modules described herein enable enhanced observed editing efficiency of nucleic acid-guided nuclease editing methods as the result of isolation or substantial isolation, incubation, editing, and normalization.
- the combination of the isolation or substantial isolation, incubation, editing and normalization processes overcomes the growth bias in favor of unedited cells—and the fitness effects of editing, including differential editing rates—thus allowing all cells “equal billing” with one another.
- the result of the instruments, modules, and methods described herein is that even in nucleic acid-guided nuclease systems where editing is not optimal (such as in systems where non-canonical PAMs are targeted), there is an increase in the observed editing efficiency; that is, edited cells can be identified even in a large background of unedited cells. Observed editing efficiency can be improved up to 80% or more.
- FIG. 3A depicts a solid wall device 350 and a workflow for isolating cells in microwells in the solid wall device, where in this exemplary workflow one or both of the gRNA and nuclease may optionally be under the control of an inducible promoter.
- solid wall device 350 At the top left of the figure (i), there is depicted solid wall device 350 with microwells 352 .
- a section 354 of substrate 350 is shown at (ii), also depicting microwells 352 .
- a side cross-section of solid wall device 350 is shown, and microwells 352 have been loaded, where, in this embodiment, Poisson or substantial Poisson loading has taken place; that is, each microwell has one or no cells, and the likelihood that any one microwell has more than one cell is low.
- Note wells 356 have one cell loaded.
- workflow 340 is illustrated where substrate 350 having microwells 352 shows microwells 356 with one cell per microwell, microwells 357 with no cells in the microwells, and one microwell 360 with two cells in the microwell.
- step 351 the cells in the microwells are allowed to double approximately 2-150 times to form clonal colonies (v), then editing optionally is induced 353 by heating the substrate (e.g., for temperature-induced editing) or flowing chemicals under or over the substrate (e.g., sugars, antibiotics for chemical-induced editing) or by moving the solid wall device to a different medium, particularly facile if the solid wall device is placed on a membrane which forms the bottom of microwells 352 (membrane not shown).
- substrate e.g., for temperature-induced editing
- chemicals under or over the substrate e.g., sugars, antibiotics for chemical-induced editing
- the medium used will depend, of course, on the type of cells being edited—e.g., bacterial, yeast or mammalian.
- medium for bacterial growth includes LB, SOC, M9 Minimal medium, and Magic medium
- medium for yeast cell growth includes TPD, YPG, YPAD, and synthetic minimal medium
- medium for mammalian cell growth includes MEM, DMEM, IMDM, RPMI, and Hanks.
- adherent cells cells may be disposed on beads or another type of scaffold suspended in medium. Most normal mammalian tissue-derived cells—except those derived from the hematopoietic system—are anchorage dependent and need a surface or cell culture support for normal proliferation.
- Microcarriers of particular use typically have a diameter of 100-300 ⁇ m and have a density slightly greater than that of the culture medium (thus facilitating an easy separation of cells and medium for, e.g., medium exchange) yet the density must also be sufficiently low to allow complete suspension of the carriers at a minimum stirring rate in order to avoid hydrodynamic damage to the cells.
- Many different types of microcarriers are available, and different microcarriers are optimized for different types of cells.
- Cytodex 1 (dextran-based, GE Healthcare), DE-52 (cellulose-based, Sigma-Aldrich Labware), DE-53 (cellulose-based, Sigma-Aldrich Labware), HLX 11-170 (polystyrene-based); collagen or ECM (extracellular matrix)-coated carriers, such as Cytodex 3 (dextran-based, GE Healthcare) or HyQ-sphere Pro-F 102-4 (polystyrene-based, Thermo Scientific); non-charged carriers, like HyQspheres P 102-4 (Thermo Scientific); or macroporous carriers based on gelatin (Cultisphere, Percell Biolytica) or cellulose (Cytopore, GE Healthcare).
- the solid wall devices can provide populations of cells with varying edits and/or percentages of clonality. It has been determined that flowing medium over the retentate side surface of the SWIIN, e.g., a tangential or sheer flow across the top of the perforate member of the SWIIN, will flush off the tops (“muffin tops”, see FIG. 3F ) of the cell colonies over growing the wells of the SWIIN without contaminating the wells containing other cells; i.e., depositing flushed cells in wells.
- cells are allowed to grow to a desired state, for example when some of the colonies—fast-growing colonies, which are likely to be unedited cells—have over-grown the wells, then the “muffin tops” are flushed off.
- the cells again are allowed to grow again to a desired state, for example when some or many more of the colonies have over-grown the wells, then the “muffin tops” are flushed off, and additional rounds of cell growth and flushing/collection can continue as desired.
- each round of collection may be kept separate and analyzed for clonality, percentage of edited cells, etc.
- This embodiment requires monitoring of cell growth by, e.g., imaging, as described in relation to FIG. 4Y .
- FIG. 3B depicts a solid wall device 350 and a workflow for substantially isolating cells in microwells in a solid wall device, where in this workflow—as in the workflow depicted in FIG. 3A —optionally one or both of the gRNA and nuclease is under the control of an inducible promoter.
- a solid wall device 350 with microwells 352 .
- a section 354 of substrate 350 is shown at (ii), also depicting microwells 352 .
- a side cross-section of solid wall device 350 is shown, and microwells 352 have been loaded, where, in this embodiment, substantial Poisson loading has taken place; that is, one microwell 357 has no cells, and some microwells 376 , 378 have a few cells.
- FIG. 3B cells with active gRNAs are shown as solid circles, and cells with inactive gRNAs are shown as open circles.
- workflow 370 is illustrated where substrate 350 having microwells 352 shows three microwells 376 with several cells all with active gRNAs, microwell 357 with no cells, and two microwells 378 with some cells having active gRNAs and some cells having inactive gRNAs.
- step 371 the cells in the microwells are allowed to double approximately 2-150 times to form clonal colonies (v), then editing optionally is induced 373 by heating the substrate (e.g., for temperature-induced editing) or flowing chemicals under or over the substrate (e.g., sugars, antibiotics for chemical-induced editing) or by moving the solid wall device to a different medium, particularly facile if the solid wall device is placed on a membrane which forms the bottom of microwells 352 .
- substrate e.g., for temperature-induced editing
- chemicals under or over the substrate e.g., sugars, antibiotics for chemical-induced editing
- microwells 378 After editing 373 , many cells in the colonies of cells that have been edited die as a result of the double-strand cuts caused by active editing and there is a lag in growth for the edited cells that do survive but must repair and recover following editing (microwells 378 ), where cells that do not undergo editing thrive (microwells 379 ) (vi). Thus, in microwells 378 where only cells with active gRNAs reside (cells depicted by solid circles), most cells die off; however, in microwells 379 containing cells with inactive gRNAs (cells depicted by open circles), cells continue to grow and are not impacted by active editing.
- each microwell 378 and 379 ) are allowed to grow to continue to establish colonies and normalize, where the colonies of edited cells in microwells 378 catch up in size and/or cell number with the unedited cells in microwells 379 that do not undergo editing (vii).
- the colonies of cells in the microwells are not clonal; that is, not all cells in a well arise from a single cell. Instead, the cell colonies in the well may be mixed colonies, arising in many wells from two to several different cells.
- either pooling 390 of all cells in the microwells can take place, in which case the cells are enriched for edited cells by eliminating the bias from non-editing cells and fitness effects from editing or cells may be flushed from the SWIIN and collected at various time points; alternatively, colony growth in the microwells is monitored after editing, and slow growing colonies (e.g., the cells in microwells 378 ) are identified and selected 391 (e.g., “cherry picked”) resulting in even greater enrichment of edited cells.
- slow growing colonies e.g., the cells in microwells 378
- selected 391 e.g., “cherry picked”
- FIG. 3C is a photograph of one embodiment of a solid wall substrate comprising microwells for isolating cells.
- the solid wall substrate is a perforated disk of metal and is approximately 2 inches ( ⁇ 47 mm) in diameter.
- the perforated disk seen in this photograph is fabricated 316 stainless steel, where the perforations form the walls of the microwells, and a filter or membrane is used to form the bottom of the microwells.
- a filter or membrane such as a 0.22 m PVDF DuroporeTM woven membrane filter
- Filter or membrane members that may be used in the solid wall isolation/incubation/editing and normalization or cherry-picking devices and modules are those that are solvent resistant, are contamination free during filtration, and are able to retain the types and sizes of cells of interest.
- pore sizes can be as low as 0.10 ⁇ m, however for other cell types (such as for mammalian cells), the pore sizes can be as high as 10.0 m.
- the pore sizes useful in the cell concentration device/module include filters with sizes from 0.10 ⁇ m, 0.11 ⁇ m, 0.12 ⁇ m, 0.13 ⁇ m, 0.14 ⁇ m, 0.15 ⁇ m, 0.16 ⁇ m, 0.17 ⁇ m, 0.18 ⁇ m, 0.19 ⁇ m, 0.20 ⁇ m, 0.21 ⁇ m, 0.22 ⁇ m, 0.23 ⁇ m, 0.24 ⁇ m, 0.25 ⁇ m, 0.26 ⁇ m, 0.27 ⁇ m, 0.28 ⁇ m, 0.29 ⁇ m, 0.30 ⁇ m, 0.31 ⁇ m, 0.32 ⁇ m, 0.33 ⁇ m, 0.34 ⁇ m, 0.35 ⁇ m, 0.36 ⁇ m, 0.37 ⁇ m, 0.38 ⁇ m, 0.39 ⁇ m, 0.40 ⁇ m, 0.41 ⁇ m, 0.42 ⁇ m, 0.43 ⁇ m, 0.44 ⁇ m, 0.45 ⁇ m, 0.46 ⁇ m, 0.47 ⁇ m, 0.48 ⁇ m, 0.39
- the filters may be fabricated from any suitable material including cellulose mixed ester (cellulose nitrate and acetate) (CME), polycarbonate (PC), polyvinylidene fluoride (PVDF), polyethersulfone (PES), polytetrafluoroethylene (PTFE), nylon, or glass fiber.
- CME cellulose mixed ester
- PC polycarbonate
- PVDF polyvinylidene fluoride
- PES polyethersulfone
- PTFE polytetrafluoroethylene
- the perforations are approximately 150 ⁇ m-200 ⁇ m in diameter, resulting in the microwells having a volume of approximately 2.5 nl, with a total in this embodiment of approximately 30,000 microwells.
- the distance between the microwells is approximately 279 nm center-to-center.
- the microwells have a volume of approximately 2.5 nl, the volume of the microwells may be from 1 to 25 nl, or preferably from 2 to 10 nl, and even more preferably from 2 to 4 nl.
- the preferred size/volume of the microwells will depend of cell type (e.g., bacterial, yeast, mammalian).
- the perforated disk shown here is made of 316 stainless steel; however other bio-compatible metals and materials may be used.
- the solid wall device may be disposable or it may be reusable.
- the solid wall device shown in FIG. 3C is round, but can be of any shape, for example, square, rectangular, oval, etc. (See, e.g., FIGS. 4A-4X .) Round perforated disks are useful if petri dishes are used to supply the solid wall module with nutrients via solid medium in, e.g., a petri or other cell culture dish.
- the filters used to form the bottom of the microwells of the solid wall device include 0.22 ⁇ m PVDF DuroporeTM woven membrane filters.
- the perforated disks may be smaller or larger as desired and the configuration of the solid wall module will depend on how nutrients are supplied to the solid wall module, and how media exchange is performed. For example, see the perforated member in the embodiments of a solid wall module in FIGS. 4A-4T .
- FIGS. 3D-3F are photographs of E. coli cells substantially or largely isolated via Poisson or substantial Poisson distribution in microwells or perforations in a perforated disk with a membrane bottom at low, medium and high magnification, respectively.
- FIG. 3D shows digital growth at low magnification where the darker microwells are microwells where cells are growing.
- FIG. 3E is a top view of microwells in a perforated disk where the darker microwells are microwells where cells are growing.
- FIG. 3D-3F are photographs of E. coli cells substantially or largely isolated via Poisson or substantial Poisson distribution in microwells or perforations in a perforated disk with a membrane bottom at low, medium and high magnification, respectively.
- FIG. 3D shows digital growth at low magnification where the darker microwells are microwells where cells are growing.
- FIG. 3E is a top view of microwells in a perforated disk where the darker microwells are microwells where cells are growing.
- 3F is a photograph of microwells where the membrane (e.g., the permeable membrane that forms the bottom of the microwells) has been removed, where unpatterned (smooth) microwells are microwells where cells are not growing, and microwells with irregular pigment/patterned are microwells where cells are growing, and, in this photograph, have filled the microwells in which they are growing.
- a 0.2 ⁇ m filter membrane was swaged against the perforated disk under high pressure. The perforated disk formed the walls of the microwells, and the 0.2 m filter formed the bottom of the microwells.
- the E. coli cells were pulled into the microwells using a vacuum (see Example 11 for methods).
- the perforated disk+filter was then placed on an LB agar plate membrane-side down, and the cells were grown overnight at 30° C., then two days at room temperature. The membrane was removed and the bottomless microwells were photographed by light microscopy. Note the ease with which different selective media can be used to select for certain cell phenotypes; that is, one need only transfer the perforated disk+filter to a different plate or petri dish comprising a desired selective medium.
- the number of cells loaded into a singulation device or singulation assembly ranges from between approximately 0.1 ⁇ to 2.5 ⁇ the number of perforations or microwells, or from between approximately 0.3 ⁇ to 2.0 ⁇ the number of perforations or microwells, or from between approximately 0.5 ⁇ to 1.5 ⁇ the number of perforations or microwells.
- FIG. 3G shows a scanning electromicrograph of a perforated member.
- perforated member 301 is fabricated from 316 stainless steel, where the perforations form the walls of microwells, and a filter or membrane (not seen in this FIG. 3G ) is used to form the bottom of the microwells.
- the perforations (microwells) are approximately 150 ⁇ m-200 ⁇ m in diameter, and the perforated member is approximately 125 ⁇ m deep, resulting in microwells having a volume of approximately 2.5 nl, with a total of approximately 200,000 microwells.
- the distance between the microwells is approximately 279 ⁇ m center-to-center.
- the microwells have a volume of approximately 2.5 nl, the volume of the microwells may be from 1 to 25 nl, or preferably from 2 to 10 nl, and even more preferably from 2 to 4 nl.
- the perforated members used in the embodiments described in relation to FIGS. 4A-4T are approximately 14 cm long and 10 cm (140 mm ⁇ 100 mm) wide; however, smaller perforated members (such as shown in FIG. 3C ) or larger perforated members may be used depending on the density of microwells in the perforated member and the number of microwells or partitions required.
- the larger the plexity (e.g., complexity) of the library being used to edit a population of cells a larger number of microwells or partitions is preferred. If, for example, a 10,000-plex library is used to edit a population of cells, a perforated member with 200,000 microwells or partitions would be more than adequate; however, if a 50,000-plex library is used to edit a population of cells, a perforated member (or two or more members in a compound SWIIN) with a total of 400,000 or more microwells or partitions may be preferred.
- a perforated member or two or more members in a compound SWIIN
- the number of microwells in a single SWIIN module may range from 20,000 to 500,000 microwells, or from 30,000 to 450,000 microwells, or from 50,000 to 400,000 microwells or from 100,000 to 300,000 microwells.
- compound SWIIN devices may be employed (see, e.g., FIGS. 4CC and 4DD of U.S. Ser. No. 16/399,988, filed 30 Apr. 2019).
- the number of cells loaded into a singulation device or singulation assembly ranges from between approximately 0.1 ⁇ to 2.5 ⁇ the number of perforations or microwells, or from between approximately 0.3 ⁇ to 2.0 ⁇ the number of perforations or microwells, or from between approximately 0.5 ⁇ to 1.5 ⁇ the number of perforations or microwells; thus, the number of cells loaded onto a perforated member comprising approximately 200,000 perforations would range from about 20,000 cells to about 500,000 cells, or from about 60,000 cells to about 400,000 cells, or from about 100,000 cells to about 300,000 cells.
- the preferred size/volume of the microwells will depend on the cell type (e.g., archaeal, bacterial, yeast, non-mammalian eukaryotic, and/or mammalian being edited).
- the perforated member shown here is made of 316 stainless steel; however other bio-compatible metals and materials may be used, such as titanium, cobalt-based alloys, and ceramics.
- the SWIIN may be disposable or it may be reusable. If reused, the SWIIN may be heated to 55° C. or greater to sterilize the SWIIN alternatively, antibiotics maybe flushed through the SWIIN.
- FIGS. 3H-3J are scanning electromicrographs of a portion of a perforated member 301 ( FIG. 3G ), a close up of one microwell 302 without ( FIG. 3H ) and with ( FIGS. 3I and 3J ) a filter membrane forming the bottom of the microwell 302 .
- FIG. 3G shows perforated member 301 and 30 or so microwells 302 .
- FIG. 3H also shows perforated member 301 and a single microwell 302 , where this microwell is approximately 172 ⁇ m in diameter.
- FIG. 3I shows perforated member 301 and approximately 8 microwells 302 , each of which has a portion of a filter or membrane 303 forming the bottom of the microwell 302 .
- FIG. 3J is a higher magnification micrograph of one of the microwells 302 from the perforated member 301 shown in FIG. 3I .
- a filter or membrane such as a 0.22 ⁇ m PVDF DuroporeTM woven membrane filter
- Filter or membrane members that may be used to form the bottom of the microwells of a perforated member in a solid wall isolation or substantial isolation/incubation/editing/normalization or cherry picking module are those that are solvent resistant, are contamination free during filtration, do not tear under pressures required to exchange media and load cells, and are able to retain the types and sizes of cells of interest.
- the filters may be fabricated from any suitable material including cellulose mixed ester (cellulose nitrate and acetate) (CME), polycarbonate (PC), polyvinylidene fluoride (PVDF), polyethersulfone (PES), polytetrafluoroethylene (PTFE), nylon, or glass fiber.
- CME cellulose mixed ester
- PC polycarbonate
- PVDF polyvinylidene fluoride
- PES polyethersulfone
- PTFE polytetrafluoroethylene
- nylon or glass fiber.
- the perforated member 301 and filter 303 are swaged together; that is, the perforated member 301 and filter 303 are pressed together under high pressure (e.g., 20 kpsi).
- the holes or partitions in the perforated member are etched with a slight taper and the filter material is pressed into the opening then relaxed to form an effective swage, allowing for an adhesive-free coupling.
- an adhesive could be employed.
- FIGS. 4A through 4Z depict various components of different embodiments and components of a solid wall isolation or substantial isolation, incubation, editing and either normalization or cherry picking module (“solid wall isolation/incubation/normalization module” or “SWIIN”) suitable for isolating (or substantially isolating) cells of all types, growing cells for an initial, e.g., 2-150 rounds of cell division, optionally inducing editing, and either normalizing or cherry picking the resulting cell colonies.
- the SWIIN modules presented may be stand-alone devices, or, often, one module in an automated multi-module cell processing instrument.
- FIG. 4A depicts an embodiment of a singulation assembly 420 a from a top perspective view, which presents the “retentate side” of singulation assembly 420 a .
- retentate member 404 in FIGS. 4A-4C has two distribution channels 405 disposed lengthwise on either side (left-right) of retentate member 404 ; however, it should be understood by one of ordinary skill in the art given the present disclosure that instead of two distribution channels, a single distribution channel could be disposed, e.g., lengthwise down the middle of retentate member 404 or in another configuration three distribution channels may be disposed lengthwise on either side and down the middle of retentate member 404 .
- Retentate member 404 of FIGS. 4A-4C comprises a generally smooth upper surface; two distribution channels 405 which traverse retentate member 404 from its top surface to its bottom surface and for most of the length of retentate member 404 ; and ridges 406 a , which are disposed on the bottom surface of retentate member 404 and traverse the bottom of retentate member 404 from side-to-side, left-to-right (in this embodiment, there are approximately 26 retentate member ridges 406 a ).
- Flow directors 406 are formed between ridges 406 a on retentate member 404 .
- retentate member 404 has two ports 407 , which allow for cells and medium to be introduced into (and removed from) singulation assembly 420 a .
- distribution channel covers 413 which cover the two distribution channels 405 and provide the top surface and seal of distribution channels 405 .
- retentate member 404 has a single port 407 , which allows for cells to be introduced into singulation assembly 420 a ; and there is also a distribution channel cover 413 , which covers the single distribution channel 405 in retentate member 404 and provides a seal for distribution channel 405 .
- distribution channel 405 is approximately 150 mm long and 1 mm wide; retentate member ridges 406 a are approximately 0.5 mm in height and 80 mm in length; and retentate member flow directors 406 are approximately 5 mm across.
- the volume of fluid in the singulation assembly ranges from 3 mL to 100 mL, or from 5 mL to 60 mL, or from 10 mL to 40 mL (note this is for a 200K perforation singulation assembly).
- Retentate and permeate members 404 and 408 are transparent, and are approximately 200 mm long, 130 mm wide, and 4 mm thick, though in other embodiments, the retentate and permeate members can be from 75 mm to 350 mm in length, or from 100 mm to 300 mm in length, or from 150 mm to 250 mm in length; from 50 mm to 250 mm in width, or from 75 mm to 200 mm in width, or from 100 mm to 150 mm in width; and from 2 mm to 15 mm in thickness, or from 4 mm to 10 mm in thickness, or from 5 mm to 8 mm in thickness.
- the retentate (and permeate) members are fabricated from PMMA (poly(methyl methacrylate); however, other materials may be used, including polycarbonate, cyclic olefin co-polymer (COC), glass, polyvinyl chloride, polyethylene, polyamide, polypropylene, polysulfone, polyurethane, and co-polymers of these and other polymers.
- PMMA poly(methyl methacrylate)
- COC cyclic olefin co-polymer
- glass polyvinyl chloride
- polyethylene polyethylene
- polyamide polyamide
- polypropylene polysulfone
- polyurethane polyurethane
- retentate member 404 In addition to retentate member 404 , also seen in FIG. 4A are fastener holes 412 , a center “sandwich” layer comprising a gasket 416 surrounding perforated member 401 swaged with (and positioned above) filter or membrane 403 (the individual components are not seen in this FIG. 4A ).
- the bottom layer of singulation assembly 420 a seen in FIG. 4A is formed by a permeate member 408 .
- Permeate member 408 like retentate member 404 , comprises one or more (as seen in FIG. 4B , there are two) permeate member distribution channels, a multiplicity of ridges, and flow directors, and one or more ports (none of which are shown in FIG. 4A but see FIG.
- the singulation assembly 420 a and SWIIN modules 400 comprising the singulation assembly 420 a are fabricated from material that withstand temperature of 4° C. to 60° C. Heating and cooling of the SWIIN modules may be provided by a Peltier device or thermoelectric cooler or by reverse Rankine vapor-compression refrigeration or absorption heat pumps.
- solid wall isolation/incubation/normalization module or “SWIIN”
- SWIIN normalization or cherry-picking module
- An appropriate medium is introduced into singulation assembly 420 a through permeate member 408 .
- the medium flows upward through filter 403 to nourish the cells.
- the cells are deposited into the microwells, are grown for an initial, e.g., 2-100 doublings, editing optionally is induced by, e.g., raising the temperature of the SWIIN to 42° C. to induce a temperature inducible promoter or by removing growth medium from the permeate member and replacing the growth medium with a medium comprising a chemical component that induces an inducible promoter.
- the temperature of the SWIIN may be decreased, or the inducing medium may be removed and replaced with fresh medium lacking the chemical component thereby de-activating the inducible promoter.
- the cells then are allowed to continue to grow in the SWIIN until the growth of the cell colonies in the microwells is normalized. Once the colonies are normalized, the colonies are flushed from the microwells (by applying liquid or air pressure to the permeate member channels and flow directors and thus to the filter) and pooled; alternatively, the growth of the cell colonies in the microwells is monitored, and slow-growing colonies are directly selected by, e.g., pooling the cells from the slow-growing colonies.
- Colony growth in the singulation assembly can be monitored by automated devices such as those sold by JoVE (ScanLagTM system, Cambridge, Mass.) (also see Levin-Reisman, et al., Nature Methods, 7:737-39 (2010)).
- Cell growth for, e.g., mammalian cells may be monitored by, e.g., the growth monitor sold by IncuCyte (Ann Arbor, Mich.) (see also, Choudhry, PLos One, 11(2):e0148469 (2016)).
- automated colony pickers may be employed, such as those sold by, e.g., TECAN (PickoloTM system, Mannedorf, Switzerland); Hudson Inc. (RapidPickTM, Springfield, N.J.); Molecular Devices (QPix 400TM system, San Jose, Calif.); and Singer Instruments (PIXLTM system, Somerset, UK).
- FIG. 4B depicts the embodiment of the singulation assembly 420 a in FIG. 4A from a bottom perspective view, which presents the bottom of the permeate member 408 of singulation assembly 420 a .
- Permeate member 408 comprises a generally smooth lower surface (which in FIG. 4B , because singulation assembly 420 a is viewed from the bottom, the lower surface is toward the top of FIG. 4B ); two distribution channels (not shown) covered by distribution channel covers 414 (here, located on either side (left-right) of permeate member 408 ); ridges 410 a disposed on the top surface of permeate member 408 (where the top surface of the permeate member 408 in FIG.
- permeate member 408 is facing down) and traverse the top of permeate member 408 from side-to-side (in this embodiment, there are approximately 26 ridges 410 a ); and flow directors 410 that are formed between ridges 410 a .
- permeate member 408 has two ports 411 , which deliver fluids to (and remove fluids from) the distribution channels (not seen here as they are covered by distribution channel covers 414 ) and then to flow directors 410 .
- a center “sandwich” layer comprising a gasket 416 surrounding a perforated member 401 swaged with and positioned above a filter or membrane 403 (the individual components are not seen in this FIG. 4B ), and the bottom-most layer of singulation assembly 420 a seen in FIG. 4B is retentate member 404 .
- Gasket 416 is made from rubber, silicone, nitrile rubber, polytetrafluoroethylene, a plastic polymer such as polychlorotrifluoroethylene, or other readily compressible material. It should be noted that in the embodiments depicted in FIGS.
- fasteners are exemplified; however, other means can be used to secure retentate member 408 , gasket 416 , perforated member 401 , filter 403 , and permeate member 408 , such as adhesives, ultrasonic welding or bonding, solvent bonding, mated fittings, or a combination of adhesives, welding, solvent bonding, and mated fittings; and other such fasteners and couplings.
- adhesives ultrasonic welding or bonding, solvent bonding, mated fittings, or a combination of adhesives, welding, solvent bonding, and mated fittings; and other such fasteners and couplings.
- FIGS. 4Q-4X ultrasonic welding is used.
- FIG. 4C depicts the embodiment of the singulation assembly 420 a of FIGS. 4A and 4B from a side exploded perspective view.
- retentate member 404 comprising two distribution channels 405 located on either side (left-right) of retentate member 404 , both of which traverse retentate member 404 from its top surface to its bottom surface and for most of the length of retentate member 404 ;
- ridges 406 a which are disposed on the bottom surface of retentate member 404 and traverse the bottom surface of retentate member 404 from side-to-side (in this embodiment, there are approximately 26 ridges 406 a ); and flow directors 406 that are formed between ridges 406 a .
- retentate member 404 has two ports 407 , which allow for cells and other fluids to be introduced into (and removed from) singulation assembly 420 a through distribution channels 405 .
- distribution channel covers 413 which are configured to fit into, cover and seal the two distribution channels 405 .
- Gasket 416 , perforated member 401 and filter 403 can be seen more clearly in this exploded view of singulation assembly 420 a , where perforated member 401 and filter 403 are of very similar size and gasket 416 is configured to surround perforated member 401 and filter 403 , to secure perforated member 401 and filter 403 , and to provide a leak-proof seal between retentate member 404 and permeate member 408 .
- permeate member 408 is seen from the top down where permeate member 408 comprises two distribution channels 409 located lengthwise on either side (left-right) of permeate member 408 , both of which traverse permeate member 408 from its bottom surface to its top surface and for most of the length of permeate member 408 . Also seen are ridges 410 a , which here are disposed on the top surface of permeate member 408 and traverse the top of permeate member 408 from side-to-side, and flow directors 410 that are formed between ridges 410 a .
- permeate member 408 has two ports 411 , seen in this FIG.
- FIG. 4D depicts another embodiment of a singulation assembly, 420 b , from a top perspective view, which presents the “retentate side” of singulation assembly 420 b .
- the singulation assembly 420 b embodiment seen in FIG. 4D differs from singulation assembly 420 b seen in FIGS. 4A-4C in that the configuration of the distribution channels 405 in retentate member 404 (and distribution channels 409 in permeate member 408 ) in FIGS. 4D-4G is different.
- 4D-4G are branched; that is, instead of a port 407 delivering fluids directly into a distribution channel 405 at the point where port 407 intersects directly with distribution channel 405 , in the embodiment of the singulation assembly shown in FIGS. 4D-4G , fluids flow into ports 407 , then into branched distribution channels 405 on either side (left-right) of retentate member 407 .
- the branched distribution channels in this embodiment have a first conduit which terminates approximately half-way down the length of retentate member 404 , where the first conduit then branches into two secondary conduits, the two secondary conduits branch into four tertiary conduits, and these tertiary conduits deliver fluids to a final conduit that travels the length of the retentate member, evenly distributing delivering fluids to the flow directors 406 .
- retentate member 404 of FIGS. 4D-4G comprises a generally smooth upper surface; two distribution channels 405 one of the left and one on the right of retentate member 404 which traverse retentate member 404 from its top surface to its bottom surface and are branched thus distributing fluid the length of retentate member 404 .
- Retentate member 404 also comprises ridges 406 a , which are disposed on the bottom surface of retentate member 404 and traverse the bottom of retentate member 404 from side-to-side.
- flow directors 406 that are formed between ridges 406 a on retentate member 404 ; and two ports 407 , which introduce and distribute cells and medium into (and remove cells and medium from) retentate member 404 of singulation assembly 420 b .
- distribution channel covers 413 which cover the two branched distribution channels 405 on retentate member 404 and actually provide the top surface and sealing of branched distribution channels 405 .
- retentate member 404 may not comprise the branches and the branching may be featured on distribution channel covers 413 , which are mated to retentate member 404 .
- a center “sandwich” layer comprising a gasket 416 surrounding perforated member 401 swaged with and positioned above filter or membrane 403 .
- the bottom layer of singulation assembly 420 b seen in FIG. 4D is formed by permeate member 408 .
- Permeate member 408 like retentate member 404 , comprises one or more (as seen in FIG. 4E , there are two) distribution channels (here, they are branched), ridges, flow directors, and one or more ports (none of which are shown in FIG. 4D but see FIG. 4E ).
- FIG. 4E depicts the embodiment of the singulation assembly 420 b in FIG. 4D from a bottom perspective view, which presents the bottom of the permeate member 408 of singulation assembly 420 b at the top of this FIG. 4E .
- Permeate member 408 comprises a generally smooth lower surface (which in FIG. 4E , because singulation assembly 420 b is viewed from the bottom, the lower surface is toward the top of FIG. 4E ); two branched distribution channels 409 covered by distribution channel covers 414 ; ridges 410 a disposed on the top surface of permeate member 408 (where the top surface of the permeate member 408 in FIG.
- permeate member 408 is facing down) and traverse the top surface of permeate member 408 from side-to-side; and flow directors 410 that are formed between ridges 410 a .
- permeate member 408 has two ports 411 , which deliver fluids to the branched distribution channels 409 and to flow directors 410 .
- the branching for distribution channels 409 in permeate member 408 is a part of permeate member 408 ; however, permeate member 408 may not comprise the branches and the branching may instead be featured on distribution channel covers 414 , which are mated to permeate member 408 .
- a center “sandwich” layer comprising a gasket 416 surrounding a perforated member 401 disposed above a filter or membrane 403 (the individual components are not seen in this FIG. 4E ), and bottom-most layer of singulation assembly 420 b seen in FIG. 4E is the retentate member 404 .
- FIG. 4F depicts the embodiment of the singulation assembly 420 b of FIGS. 4D and 4E from a side exploded perspective view.
- retentate member 404 comprising two branched distribution channels 405 located on either side (left-right) of retentate member 404 , both of which traverse retentate member 404 from its top surface to its bottom surface where the branches traverse most of the length of retentate member 404 ; ridges 406 a disposed on the bottom surface of retentate member 404 and traverse the bottom surface of retentate member 404 from side-to-side; and flow directors 406 that are formed between ridges 406 a .
- retentate member 404 has two ports 407 , which are fluidically coupled to branched distribution channels 405 and flow directors 406 and are configured to introduce cells and other fluids into (and remover cells and other fluids from) singulation assembly 420 b .
- distribution channel covers 413 which are configured to fit into, cover and seal the two branched distribution channels 405 .
- Gasket 416 , perforated member 401 and filter 403 can be seen clearly in this exploded view of singulation assembly 420 b , where perforated member 401 and filter 403 are of very similar size and gasket 416 is configured to surround perforated member 401 and filter 403 and to provide a leak-proof seal between retentate member 404 and permeate member 408 .
- permeate member 408 is seen from the top down where permeate member 408 comprises two branched distribution channels 409 located lengthwise on either side (left-right) of permeate member 408 , both of which traverse permeate member 408 from its bottom surface to its top surface and provide branched conduits for most of the length of permeate member 408 .
- Permeate member 408 further comprises ridges 410 a , which here are disposed on the top surface of permeate member 408 and traverse the top of permeate member 408 from side-to-side and flow directors 410 that are formed between permeate member ridges 410 a .
- permeate member 408 has two ports 411 (only one port 411 can be seen in FIG. 4F ). Also seen are distribution channel covers 414 that are separate from singulation assembly 420 b in this exploded view and not inserted to cover branched distribution channels 409 . Also seen in FIG. 4F are fastener holes 412 and fasteners 412 a , although again, other means aside from fasteners may be used for securing the components of singulation assembly 420 b.
- FIG. 4G is a close-up top view from the top of retentate member 404 as shown in FIGS. 4D and 4F .
- Seen are ridges 406 a , which are disposed on the bottom surface of retentate member 404 and traverse the bottom surface of retentate member 404 from side-to-side, and flow directors 406 that are formed between ridges 406 a .
- distribution channel 405 comprising flow director holes 415 configured to distribute fluid into flow directors 406 , where distribution channel 405 is covered by distribution channel cover 413 .
- FIG. 4H is a close-up cross-sectional view of retentate member 404 , with ridges 406 a and flow directors 406 that are formed between ridges 406 a . Also seen is permeate member 408 , with ridges 410 a and flow directors 410 that are formed between permeate member ridges 410 a . Interposed between retentate member 404 and permeate member 408 are gasket 416 , perforated member 401 , and filter 403 . Note that ridges 406 a on retentate member 404 and ridges 410 a are coincident with one another, separated only by perforated member 401 and filter 403 . As stated previously, ridges 406 a and ridges 410 a provide support to perforated member 401 and filter 403 and reduce the likelihood that filter 403 will tear during, e.g., cell loading or medium exchange.
- FIGS. 4I-4M depict different views of one embodiment of a solid wall isolation or substantial isolation, incubation, editing and normalization (SWIIN) module 400 .
- FIG. 4I presents a side perspective view of SWIIN module 400 .
- SWIIN module 400 comprises, e.g., one of the exemplary singulation assemblies seen in FIGS. 4A-4C and 4D-4F which are housed in a SWIIN cover 440 and are one part of the SWIIN module.
- Various components of SWIIN cover 440 include reservoir cover 442 , grip 441 , windows 444 (shown are six windows), feet 443 , and barcode (or other identifying information) 445 . Note that in the embodiments depicted in FIGS.
- the windows are round; however, it should be recognized by one of ordinary skill in the art given the present disclosure that the windows can be any shape. Typically, it is desirable for 30% or more of the retentate member be available for viewing, or 50% more, or 60% more, or 70%, 80% or 90% more of the retentate member be available for viewing to get a reasonable sub-sample statistic on cell loading. Also seen is reservoir assembly cover 430 a , which in this embodiment is not molded with SWIIN cover 440 but resides within the reservoir cover portion 442 of SWIIN cover 440 .
- Reservoir assembly cover 430 a comprises four reservoir access apertures ( 432 a , 432 b , 432 c , and 432 d ) and four pneumatic access apertures ( 433 a , 433 b , 433 c , and 433 d ).
- Pneumatic access apertures 433 a , 433 b , 433 c , and 433 d in most embodiments include filters to prevent contamination.
- Windows 444 may be used to monitor cell loading and/or cell growth via camera (e.g., video camera).
- a video camera may be used to monitor cell growth by, e.g., density change measurements based on an image of an empty well, with phase contrast, or if, e.g., a chromogenic marker, such as a chromogenic protein, is used to add a distinguishable color to the cells.
- Chromogenic markers such as blitzen blue, dreidel teal, virginia violet, vixen purple, prancer purple, tinsel purple, maccabee purple, donner magenta, cupid pink, seraphina pink, scrooge orange, and leor orange (the Chromogenic Protein Paintbox, all available from ATUM (Newark, Calif.)) obviate the need to use fluorescence, although fluorescent cell markers, fluorescent proteins, and chemiluminescent cell markers may also be used.
- FIG. 4J is a top-down view of SWIIN module 400 , showing SWIIN cover 440 and various components thereof including reservoir cover 442 , grip 441 , windows 444 (shown are six windows), feet 443 , and barcode (or other identifying information) 445 . Also seen is reservoir assembly cover 430 a residing within the reservoir cover portion 442 of SWIIN cover 440 , where reservoir assembly cover 430 a comprises four reservoir access apertures ( 432 a , 432 b , 432 c , and 432 d ) and four pneumatic access apertures ( 433 a , 433 b , 433 c , and 433 d ).
- FIG. 4K is a side view of SWIIN module 400 , depicting SWIIN cover 440 , reservoir cover 442 , grip 441 , and feet 443 .
- FIG. 4L is a view from the barcode “end” of SWIIN module 400 toward the reservoir “end” of SWIIN module 400 . Seen are SWIIN cover 400 , reservoir cover 442 , grip 441 , and feet 443 .
- FIG. 4M is a bottom perspective view of SWIIN module 400 , showing SWIIN cover 440 , reservoir cover 442 , feet 443 , as well as distribution channel covers 414 disposed on the bottom of permeate member 408 .
- FIGS. 4N and 4O depict views of a reservoir assembly 430 .
- reservoir assembly 430 is disposed upon a singulation assembly 420 a comprising retentate member 404 ; distribution channel covers 413 ; a gasket, perforated member, and filter assembly (not shown clearly), and a permeate member (also not shown clearly)
- Reservoir assembly 430 comprises reservoir assembly cover 430 a , where reservoir assembly cover 430 a comprises four reservoir access apertures ( 432 a , 432 b , 432 c , and 432 d ) and four pneumatic access apertures ( 433 a , 433 b , 433 c , and 433 d ).
- FIG. 4O is a top perspective view of a cross section of reservoir assembly 430 taken through the “reservoir” end of SWIIN cover 440 . Seen are feet 443 of SWIIN cover 440 . Reservoirs 431 a , 431 b , 431 c , and 431 d are seen, as well as reservoir/channel ports 434 a , 434 b , 434 c , and 434 d .
- Reservoirs 431 b and 431 c are fluidically coupled to conduits that either are fluidically coupled to distribution channels on the retentate member or distribution channels on the permeate member, and reservoirs 431 a and 431 d are fluidically coupled to conduits that either are fluidically coupled to distribution channels on the retentate member or distribution channels on the permeate member; that is if reservoirs 431 b and 431 c are fluidically coupled to conduits that are coupled to distribution channels on the retentate member, then reservoirs 431 a and 431 d are fluidically coupled to conduits that are coupled to distribution channels on the permeate member.
- any reservoir may be configured to deliver fluids to and remove fluids from either retentate member 404 or permeate member 408 .
- Reservoirs 431 a , 431 b , 431 c , and 431 d typically have a volume of from 5.0 to 100 mL, or from 7.5 to 60 mL, or from 10 to 40 mL (these volumes are for the 200K singulation assembly).
- reservoirs 431 a , 431 b , 431 c , and 431 d are funnel-shaped in the portion of the reservoir leading to reservoir/channel ports 434 a , 434 b , 434 c , and 434 d and aid in delivery of fluids from reservoirs 431 a , 431 b , 431 c , and 431 d.
- FIG. 4P is an exemplary pneumatic block diagram suitable for the SWIIN module depicted in FIGS. 4I-4M and, e.g., utilizing the singulation assemblies described in relation to FIGS. 4A-4F .
- SV solenoid valves
- RR1 and RR2 retentate reservoirs
- PR1 and PR2 permeate reservoirs
- one of the valves is for pneumatic actuation, and one of the valves serves to block the line.
- Tables 1 and 2 provide the valve status, pressures, and reservoir volumes for each step of the initial fluid flow, cell loading, growth, editing, and cell collection processes for the pneumatic block diagram in FIG. 4P .
- FIG. 4Q depicts yet another embodiment of a SWIIN module 450 from an exploded top perspective view.
- the SWIIN module embodiment described in relation to FIGS. 4Q-4Z provides advantages over the previously-described SWIIN modules. For example, the positioning of the reservoirs and reservoir ports below the retentate and permeate serpentine channels minimizes instantaneous flow of fluid in the reservoirs through the reservoir ports and into channels that connect the reservoir ports to the retentate and permeate channels. Instead, flow is controlled by the application of pressure (positive or negative) and an appropriate time chosen by the user.
- SWIIN module 450 does not have a “singulation assembly” comprising the retentate and permeate members and a gasket surrounding the perforated member and filter sandwiched between the retentate and permeate members that is separate from a SWIIN cover and reservoir assembly; instead, in SWIIN module 450 the retentate member is formed on the bottom of a top of a SWIIN module component and the permeate member is formed on the top of the bottom of a SWIIN module component. Eliminating a “singulation assembly”, SWIIN cover, SWIIN grip, etc., vastly simplifies manufacture and assembly of the SWIIN module and decreases costs.
- a SWIIN assembly comprising the SWIIN module 450 comprises features to manage condensation, which allows for improved imaging of the wells. These features are described infra.
- the SWIIN module 450 in FIG. 4Q comprises from the top down, a reservoir gasket or cover 458 , a retentate member 404 (where a retentate flow channel cannot be seen in this FIG. 4Q ), a perforated member 401 swaged with a filter (filter not seen in FIG. 4Q ), a permeate member 408 comprising integrated reservoirs (permeate reservoirs 452 and retentate reservoirs 454 ), and two reservoir seals 462 , which seal the bottom of permeate reservoirs 452 and retentate reservoirs 454 .
- a permeate channel 460 a can be seen disposed on the top of permeate member 408 , defined by a raised portion 476 of serpentine channel 460 a , and ultrasonic tabs 464 can be seen disposed on the top of permeate member 408 as well.
- the perforations that form the wells on perforated member 401 are not seen in this FIG. 4Q ; however, through-holes 466 to accommodate the ultrasonic tabs 464 are seen.
- supports 470 are disposed at either end of SWIIN module 450 to support SWIIN module 450 and to elevate permeate member 408 and retentate member 404 above reservoirs 452 and 454 to minimize bubbles or air entering the fluid path from the permeate reservoir to serpentine channel 460 a or the fluid path from the retentate reservoir to serpentine channel 460 b (neither fluid path is seen in this FIG. 4Q , but see FIG. 4X ).
- the serpentine channel 460 a that is disposed on the top of permeate member 408 traverses permeate member 408 for most of the length of permeate member 408 except for the portion of permeate member 408 that comprises permeate reservoirs 452 and retentate reservoirs 454 and for most of the width of permeate member 408 .
- “most of the length” means about 95% of the length of the retentate member or permeate member, or about 90%, 85%, 80%, 75%, or 70% of the length of the retentate member or permeate member.
- width means about 95% of the width of the retentate member or permeate member, or about 90%, 85%, 80%, 75%, or 70% of the width of the retentate member or permeate member.
- the perforated member is similar to the perforated member described in relation to the SWIIN singulation assembly in FIGS. 4A-4H with the exception that the perforated member in this embodiment includes through-holes to accommodate ultrasonic tabs disposed on the permeate member.
- the perforated member is fabricated from 316 stainless steel, and the perforations form the walls of microwells while a filter or membrane is used to form the bottom of the microwells.
- the perforations are approximately 150 ⁇ m-200 ⁇ m in diameter, and the perforated member is approximately 125 ⁇ m deep, resulting in microwells having a volume of approximately 2.5 nl, with a total of approximately 200,000 microwells.
- the distance between the microwells is approximately 279 ⁇ m center-to-center.
- the microwells have a volume of approximately 2.5 nl, the volume of the microwells may be from 1 to 25 nl, or preferably from 2 to 10 nl, and even more preferably from 2 to 4 nl.
- filters appropriate for use are solvent resistant, contamination free during filtration, and are able to retain the types and sizes of cells of interest.
- pore sizes can be as low as 0.10 ⁇ m, however for other cell types (e.g., such as for mammalian cells), the pore sizes can be as high as 10.0 ⁇ m-20.0 ⁇ m or more.
- the pore sizes useful in the cell concentration device/module include filters with sizes from 0.10 ⁇ m, 0.11 ⁇ m, 0.12 ⁇ m, 0.13 ⁇ m, 0.14 ⁇ m, 0.15 ⁇ m, 0.16 ⁇ m, 0.17 ⁇ m, 0.18 ⁇ m, 0.19 ⁇ m, 0.20 ⁇ m, 0.21 ⁇ m, 0.22 ⁇ m, 0.23 ⁇ m, 0.24 ⁇ m, 0.25 ⁇ m, 0.26 ⁇ m, 0.27 ⁇ m, 0.28 ⁇ m, 0.29 ⁇ m, 0.30 ⁇ m, 0.31 ⁇ m, 0.32 ⁇ m, 0.33 ⁇ m, 0.34 ⁇ m, 0.35 ⁇ m, 0.36 ⁇ m, 0.37 ⁇ m, 0.38 ⁇ m, 0.39 ⁇ m, 0.40 ⁇ m, 0.41 ⁇ m, 0.42 ⁇ m, 0.43 ⁇ m, 0.44 ⁇ m, 0.45 ⁇ m, 0.46 ⁇ m, 0.47 ⁇ m, 0.48 ⁇ m, 0.39
- the filters may be fabricated from any suitable material including cellulose mixed ester (cellulose nitrate and acetate) (CME), polycarbonate (PC), polyvinylidene fluoride (PVDF), polyethersulfone (PES), polytetrafluoroethylene (PTFE), nylon, or glass fiber.
- CME cellulose mixed ester
- PC polycarbonate
- PVDF polyvinylidene fluoride
- PES polyethersulfone
- PTFE polytetrafluoroethylene
- FIG. 4R is a top-down view of permeate member 408 , showing serpentine channel 460 a (the portion of the serpentine channel disposed in permeate member 408 ) defined by raised portion 476 of serpentine channel 460 a , permeate reservoirs 452 , retentate reservoirs 454 , reservoir ports 456 (two of the four of which are labeled), ultrasonic tabs 464 disposed at each end of permeate member 408 and on the raised portion 476 of serpentine channel 460 a of permeate member 408 , two permeate ports 411 , and two retentate ports 407 are also seen.
- FIG. 4S is a bottom-up view of retentate member 404 , showing serpentine channel 460 b (the portion of the serpentine channel disposed in retentate member 408 ) defined by the raised portion 476 of the serpentine channel 460 b . Also seen is an integrated reservoir cover 478 for the permeate and retentate reservoirs that mate with permeate reservoirs 452 and retentate reservoirs 454 on the permeate member.
- the integrated reservoir cover 478 comprises reservoir access apertures 432 a , 432 b , 432 c , and 432 d , as well as pneumatic ports 433 a , 433 b , 433 c and 433 d .
- the serpentine channel 460 a of permeate member 408 and the serpentine channel 460 b of retentate member 404 mate to form the top (retentate member) and bottom (permeate member) of a mated serpentine channel.
- the footprint length of the serpentine channel structure is from, e.g., from 80 mm to 500 mm, from 100 mm to 400 mm, or from 150 mm to 250 mm.
- the entire footprint width of the channel structure is from 50 mm to 200 mm, from 75 mm to 175 mm, or from 100 mm to 150 mm.
- the cross-section configuration of the mated serpentine channel may be round, elliptical, oval, square, rectangular, trapezoidal, or irregular. If square, rectangular, or another shape with generally straight sides, the cross section may be from about 2 mm to 15 mm wide, or from 3 mm to 12 mm wide, or from 5 mm to 10 mm wide. If the cross section of the mated serpentine channel is generally round, oval or elliptical, the radius of the channel may be from about 3 mm to 20 mm in hydraulic radius, or from 5 mm to 15 mm in hydraulic radius, or from 8 mm to 12 mm in hydraulic radius.
- serpentine channels 460 a and 460 b disposed between serpentine channels 460 a and 460 b is perforated member 401 (adjacent retentate member 404 ) and filter 403 (adjacent permeate member 408 ), where filter 403 is swaged with perforated member 401 .
- Serpentine channels 460 a and 460 b can have approximately the same volume or a different volume.
- each “side” or portion 460 a , 460 b of the serpentine channel may have a volume of, e.g., 2 mL, or serpentine channel 460 a of permeate member 408 may have a volume of 2 mL, and the serpentine channel 460 b of retentate member 404 may have a volume of, e.g., 3 mL.
- the volume of fluid in the serpentine channel may range from about 2 mL to about 80 mL, or about 4 mL to 60 mL, or from 5 mL to 40 mL, or from 6 mL to 20 mL (note these volumes apply to a SWIIN module comprising a, e.g., 50-500K perforation member).
- the volume of the reservoirs may range from 5 mL to 50 mL, or from 7 mL to 40 mL, or from 8 mL to 30 mL or from 10 mL to 20 mL, and the volumes of all reservoirs may be the same or the volumes of the reservoirs may differ (e.g., the volume of the permeate reservoirs is greater than that of the retentate reservoirs).
- the serpentine channel portions 460 a and 460 b of the permeate member 408 and retentate member 404 are approximately 200 mm long, 130 mm wide, and 4 mm thick, though in other embodiments, the retentate and permeate members can be from 75 mm to 400 mm in length, or from 100 mm to 300 mm in length, or from 150 mm to 250 mm in length; from 50 mm to 250 mm in width, or from 75 mm to 200 mm in width, or from 100 mm to 150 mm in width; and from 2 mm to 15 mm in thickness, or from 4 mm to 10 mm in thickness, or from 5 mm to 8 mm in thickness.
- the retentate (and permeate) members may be fabricated from PMMA (poly(methyl methacrylate) or other materials may be used, including polycarbonate, cyclic olefin co-polymer (COC), glass, polyvinyl chloride, polyethylene, polyamide, polypropylene, polysulfone, polyurethane, and co-polymers of these and other polymers.
- PMMA poly(methyl methacrylate) or other materials may be used, including polycarbonate, cyclic olefin co-polymer (COC), glass, polyvinyl chloride, polyethylene, polyamide, polypropylene, polysulfone, polyurethane, and co-polymers of these and other polymers.
- Preferably at least the retentate member is fabricated from a transparent material so that the cells can be visualized (see, e.g., FIG. 4Y and the description thereof).
- a video camera may be used to monitor cell growth by, e.g., density change measurements based on an image of an empty well, with phase contrast, or if, e.g., a chromogenic marker, such as a chromogenic protein, is used to add a distinguishable color to the cells.
- a chromogenic marker such as a chromogenic protein
- Chromogenic markers such as blitzen blue, dreidel teal, virginia violet, vixen purple, prancer purple, tinsel purple, maccabee purple, donner magenta, cupid pink, seraphina pink, scrooge orange, and leor orange (the Chromogenic Protein Paintbox, all available from ATUM (Newark, Calif.)) obviate the need to use fluorescence, although fluorescent cell markers, fluorescent proteins, and chemiluminescent cell markers may also be used.
- colony growth in the SWIIN module can be monitored by automated devices such as those sold by JoVE (ScanLagTM system, Cambridge, Mass.) (also see Levin-Reisman, et al., Nature Methods, 7:737-39 (2010)).
- Cell growth for, e.g., mammalian cells may be monitored by, e.g., the growth monitor sold by IncuCyte (Ann Arbor, Mich.) (see also, Choudhry, PLos One, 11(2):e0148469 (2016)).
- automated colony pickers may be employed, such as those sold by, e.g., TECAN (PickoloTM system, Mannedorf, Switzerland); Hudson Inc. (RapidPickTM, Springfield, N.J.); Molecular Devices (QPix 400TM system, San Jose, Calif.); and Singer Instruments (PIXLTM system, Somerset, UK).
- Condensation of the SWIIN module 450 may be controlled by, e.g., moving heated air over the top of (e.g., retentate member) of the SWIIN module 450 , or by applying a transparent heated lid over at least the serpentine channel portion 460 b of the retentate member 404 . See, e.g., FIG. 4Y and the description thereof infra.
- SWIIN module 450 cells and medium—at a dilution appropriate for Poisson or substantial Poisson distribution of the cells in the microwells of the perforated member—are flowed into serpentine channel 460 b from ports in retentate member 404 , and the cells settle in the microwells while the medium passes through the filter into serpentine channel 460 a in permeate member 408 .
- the cells are retained in the microwells of perforated member 401 as the cells cannot travel through filter 403 .
- Appropriate medium may be introduced into permeate member 408 through permeate ports 411 .
- the medium flows upward through filter 403 to nourish the cells in the microwells (perforations) of perforated member 401 .
- buffer exchange can be effected by cycling medium through the retentate and permeate members.
- the cells are deposited into the microwells, are grown for an initial, e.g., 2-100 doublings, editing is induced by, e.g., raising the temperature of the SWIIN to 42° C. to induce a temperature inducible promoter or by removing growth medium from the permeate member and replacing the growth medium with a medium comprising a chemical component that induces an inducible promoter.
- the temperature of the SWIIN may be decreased, or the inducing medium may be removed and replaced with fresh medium lacking the chemical component thereby de-activating the inducible promoter.
- the cells then continue to grow in the SWIIN module 450 until the growth of the cell colonies in the microwells is normalized.
- the colonies are flushed from the microwells by applying fluid or air pressure (or both) to the permeate member serpentine channel 460 a and thus to filter 403 and pooled.
- fluid or air pressure or both
- FIG. 4T is a top perspective view of a SWIIN module with the retentate and perforated members in partial cross section.
- serpentine channel 460 a is disposed on the top of permeate member 408 is defined by raised portions 476 and traverses permeate member 408 for most of the length and width of permeate member 408 except for the portion of permeate member 408 that comprises the permeate and retentate reservoirs (note only one retentate reservoir 452 can be seen).
- reservoir gasket 458 is disposed upon the integrated reservoir cover 478 (cover not seen in this FIG. 4T ) of retentate member 404 .
- Gasket 458 comprises reservoir access apertures 432 a , 432 b , 432 c , and 432 d , as well as pneumatic ports 433 a , 433 b , 433 c and 433 d . Also at the far left end is support 470 . Disposed under permeate reservoir 452 can be seen one of two reservoir seals 462 . In addition to the retentate member being in cross section, the perforated member 401 and filter 403 (filter 403 is not seen in this FIG. 4T ) are in cross section.
- ultrasonic tabs 464 disposed at the right end of SWIIN module 450 and on raised portion 476 which defines the channel turns of serpentine channel 460 a , including ultrasonic tabs 464 extending through through-holes 466 of perforated member 401 .
- support 470 at the end distal reservoirs 452 , 454 of permeate member 408 .
- FIG. 4U is a side perspective view of an assembled SWIIIN module 450 , including, from right to left, reservoir gasket 458 disposed upon integrated reservoir cover 478 (not seen) of retentate member 404 .
- Gasket 458 may be fabricated from rubber, silicone, nitrile rubber, polytetrafluoroethylene, a plastic polymer such as polychlorotrifluoroethylene, or other flexible, compressible material.
- Gasket 458 comprises reservoir access apertures 432 a , 432 b , 432 c , and 432 d , as well as pneumatic ports 433 a , 433 b , 433 c and 433 d .
- support 470 of permeate member 408 is also at the far-left end.
- permeate reservoir 452 can be seen, as well as one reservoir seal 462 .
- a second support 470 is also at the far-right end.
- FIG. 4V is a side perspective view of the reservoir portion of permeate member 408 and retentate member 404 , including gasket 458 . Seen are permeate reservoirs 452 as the outside reservoirs, and retentate reservoirs 454 between permeate reservoirs 452 .
- this particular configuration of reservoirs may be changed with permeate 452 and retentate 454 reservoirs alternating in position; with both permeate reservoirs 452 on one side of SWIIN module 450 and both retentate reservoirs 454 on the other side of SWIIN module 450 , or the retentate reservoirs 454 may be positioned at the two sides with the permeate reservoirs 452 between the retentate reservoirs.
- gasket 458 comprises reservoir access apertures 432 a , 432 b , 432 c , and 432 d , as well as pneumatic ports 433 a , 433 b , 433 c and 433 d .
- two reservoir seals 462 can be seen, each sealing one permeate reservoir 452 and one retentate reservoir 454 .
- support 470 at the “reservoir end” of permeate member 408 .
- FIG. 4W is a side perspective cross sectional view of permeate reservoir 452 of permeate member 408 and retentate member 404 and gasket 458 .
- Reservoir access aperture 432 c and pneumatic aperture 433 c can be seen, as well as support 470 .
- perforated member 401 and filter 403 filter 403 is not seen clearly in this FIG. 4W but is sandwiched in between perforated member 401 and permeate member 408 ).
- a fluid path 472 from permeate reservoir 452 to serpentine channel 460 a in permeate member 408 can be seen, as can reservoir seal 462 .
- FIG. 4X is a small segment of a cross section of SWIIN module 450 , showing the retentate member 404 , perforated member 401 , filter 403 , and retentate member 408 .
- FIG. 4X also shows a fluid path 472 from a permeate reservoir to the serpentine channel 460 a disposed in permeate member 408 , and a fluid path 474 from a retentate reservoir to the serpentine channel 460 b disposed in permeate member 404 .
- the reservoir architecture of this embodiment is particularly advantageous as bubbling is minimized.
- Imaging of cell colonies growing in the wells of the SWIIN is desired in most implementations for, e.g., monitoring both cell growth and device performance and imaging is necessary for cherry-picking implementations.
- Real-time monitoring of cell growth in the SWIIN requires backlighting, retentate plate (top plate) condensation management and a system-level approach to temperature control, air flow, and thermal management.
- imaging employs a camera or CCD device with sufficient resolution to be able to image individual wells. For example, in some configurations a camera with a 9-pixel pitch is used (that is, there are 9 pixels center-to-center for each well).
- Processing the images may, in some implementations, utilize reading the images in grayscale, rating each pixel from low to high, where wells with no cells will be brightest (due to full or nearly-full light transmission from the backlight) and wells with cells will be dim (due to cells blocking light transmission from the backlight).
- thresholding is performed to determine which pixels will be called “bright” or “dim”
- spot finding is performed to find bright pixels and arrange them into blocks, and then the spots are arranged on a hexagonal grid of pixels that correspond to the spots.
- the measure of intensity of each well is extracted, by, e.g., looking at one or more pixels in the middle of the spot, looking at several to many pixels at random or pre-set positions, or averaging X number of pixels in the spot.
- background intensity may be subtracted.
- Thresholding is again used to call each well positive (e.g., containing cells) or negative (e.g., no cells in the well).
- the imaging information may be used in several ways, including taking images at time points for monitoring cell growth.
- Monitoring cell growth can be used to, e.g., remove the “muffin tops” of fast-growing cells followed by removal of all cells or removal of cells in “rounds” as described above, or recover cells from specific wells (e.g., slow-growing cell colonies); alternatively, wells containing fast-growing cells can be identified and areas of UV light covering the fast-growing cell colonies can be projected (or rastered with shutters) onto the SWIIN to irradiate or inhibit growth of those cells. Imaging may also be used to assure proper fluid flow in the serpentine channel 460 .
- FIG. 4Y depicts the embodiment of the SWIIN module in FIGS. 4Q-4X further comprising a heat management system including a heater and a heated cover.
- the heater cover facilitates the condensation management that is required for imaging.
- Assembly 498 comprises a SWIIN module 450 seen lengthwise in cross section, where one permeate reservoir 452 is seen. Disposed immediately upon SWIIN module 450 is cover 494 and disposed immediately below SWIIN module 450 is backlight 480 , which allows for imaging. Beneath and adjacent to the backlight and SWIIN module is insulation 482 , which is disposed over a heatsink 484 . In this FIG. 4Y , the fins of the heatsink would be in-out of the page.
- thermoelectric coolers 492 there is also axial fan 486 and heat sink 488 , as well as two thermoelectric coolers 492 , and a controller 490 to control the pneumatics, thermoelectric coolers, fan, solenoid valves, etc.
- the arrows denote cool air coming into the unit and hot air being removed from the unit. It should be noted that control of heating allows for growth of many different types of cells (prokaryotic and eukaryotic) as well as strains of cells that are, e.g., temperature sensitive, etc., and allows use of temperature-sensitive promoters. Temperature control allows for protocols to be adjusted to account for differences in transformation efficiency, cell growth and viability.
- FIG. 4Z is an exemplary pneumatic block diagram suitable for the SWIIN module depicted in FIGS. 4Q-4Y .
- Tables 3-5 relate to the pneumatic diagram in FIG. 4Z .
- Table 4 lists, for each step 1-32, the detection and threshold status for flow meters 1 and 2 as well as the duration of each step.
- FALL monitor for a falling signal
- RISE monitor for a rising signal
- “Requires pLLD” requires pressure-driven liquid level detection, such as, e.g., via air-displacement pipettor.
- Table 5 lists, for each step 1-32, the volumes for each reservoir, permeate reservoirs 1 and 2 , and retentate reservoirs 1 and 2 ; the temperature of the SWIIN; and notes for operation.
- FIG. 5A depicts an exemplary stand-alone automated multi-module cell processing instrument 500 to, e.g., perform one of the exemplary workflows described infra, where the automated multi-module cell processing instrument performs the processes of cell growth, cell concentration and buffer exchange to render the cells electrocompetent, cell transformation, cell selection, and cell editing all without human intervention.
- the instrument 500 may be and preferably is designed as a stand-alone desktop instrument for use within a laboratory environment.
- the instrument 500 may incorporate a mixture of reusable and disposable components for performing the various integrated processes in conducting automated genome cleavage and/or editing in cells.
- a gantry 502 providing an automated mechanical motion system (actuator) (not shown) that supplies XYZ axis motion control to, e.g., an automated (i.e., robotic) liquid handling system 558 including, e.g., an air displacement pipettor 532 which allows for cell processing among multiple modules without human intervention.
- an automated (i.e., robotic) liquid handling system 558 including, e.g., an air displacement pipettor 532 which allows for cell processing among multiple modules without human intervention.
- the air displacement pipettor 532 is moved by gantry 502 and the various modules and reagent cartridges remain stationary; however, in other embodiments, the liquid handling system 558 may stay stationary while the various modules and reagent cartridges are moved.
- reagent cartridge 510 comprising reservoirs 512 and transformation module 530 (e.g., a flow-through electroporation device as described in detail in relation to FIGS. 8A-8E ), as well as a wash cartridge 504 comprising reservoirs 506 .
- the wash cartridge 504 may be configured to accommodate large tubes, for example, wash solutions, or solutions that are used often throughout an iterative process. In one example, wash cartridge 504 may be configured to remain in place when two or more reagent cartridges 510 are sequentially used and replaced. Although reagent cartridge 510 and wash cartridge 504 are shown in FIG. 5A as separate cartridges, the contents of wash cartridge 504 may be incorporated into reagent cartridge 510 .
- transformation module 530 is contained within reagent cartridge 510 ; however, in alternative embodiments transformation module 530 is contained within its own module or may be part of another module, such as a growth module.
- the wash and reagent cartridges 504 and 510 comprise disposable kits (one or more of the various inserts and reagents) provided for use in the automated multi-module cell processing/editing instrument 500 .
- a user may open and position each of the reagent cartridge 510 and the wash cartridge 504 comprising various desired inserts and reagents within a chassis of the automated multi-module cell editing instrument 500 prior to activating cell processing.
- the robotic liquid handling system 558 including the gantry 502 and air displacement pipettor 532 .
- the robotic handling system 558 may include an automated liquid handling system such as those manufactured by Tecan Group Ltd. of Mannedorf, Switzerland, Hamilton Company of Reno, Nev. (see, e.g., WO2018015544A1), or Beckman Coulter, Inc. of Fort Collins, Colo. (see, e.g., US20160018427A1).
- Pipette tips may be provided in a pipette transfer tip supply (not shown) for use with the air displacement pipettor 532 .
- Inserts or components of the wash and reagent cartridges 504 , 510 are marked with machine-readable indicia (not shown), such as bar codes, for recognition by the robotic handling system 558 .
- the robotic liquid handling system 558 may scan one or more inserts within each of the wash and reagent cartridges 504 , 510 to confirm contents.
- machine-readable indicia may be marked upon each wash and reagent cartridge 504 , 510 , and a processing system (not shown, but see element 526 of FIG. 5B ) of the automated multi-module cell editing instrument 500 may identify a stored materials map based upon the machine-readable indicia.
- the cell growth module 534 comprises two cell growth vials 518 , 520 (described in greater detail below in relation to FIGS. 6A-6D ) as well as a cell concentration module 522 (described in detail in relation to FIGS. 7A-7K ).
- the cell concentration module 522 may be separate from cell growth module 534 , e.g., in a separate, dedicated module. Also illustrated as part of the automated multi-module cell processing instrument 500 of FIG.
- an isolation module 540 served by, e.g., robotic liquid handing system 558 and air displacement pipettor 532 .
- an optional nucleic acid assembly/desalting module 514 comprising a reaction chamber or tube receptacle (not shown) and a magnet 516 to allow for purification of nucleic acids using, e.g., magnetic solid phase reversible immobilization (SPRI) beads (Applied Biological Materials Inc., Richmond, BC.
- SPRI magnetic solid phase reversible immobilization
- the cell growth module, cell concentration module, transformation module, reagent cartridge, and nucleic acid assembly module are described in greater detail infra, and an exemplary isolation module (which may also serve as a recovery and growth module as well as an incubation and normalization module) is described in detail in relation to FIGS. 3A-3J and 4A-4Y supra.
- FIG. 5B is a plan view of the front of the exemplary multi-module cell processing instrument 500 depicted in FIG. 5A .
- Cartridge-based source materials such as in reagent cartridge 510
- the deck may include a protection sink 503 such that contaminants spilling, dripping, or overflowing from any of the modules of the instrument 500 are contained within a lip of the protection sink 503 .
- wash cartridge 504 also seen in FIG. 5B is wash cartridge 504 , isolation module 540 , and a portion of growth module 534 .
- touch screen display 550 transformation module controls 538 , electronics rack 536 , and processing system 526 .
- FIGS. 5C through 5D illustrate side and front views, respectively, of multi-module cell processing instrument 500 comprising chassis 590 for use in desktop versions of the automated multi-module cell editing instrument 500 .
- the chassis 590 may have a width of about 24-48 inches, a height of about 24-48 inches and a depth of about 24-48 inches.
- Chassis 590 may be and preferably is designed to hold all modules and disposable supplies used in automated cell processing and to perform all processes required without human intervention (that is, chassis 590 is configured to provide an integrated, stand-alone automated multi-module cell processing instrument).
- Chassis 590 may mount a robotic liquid handling system 558 for moving materials between modules. As illustrated in FIG.
- the chassis 590 includes a cover 552 having a handle 554 and hinge 556 a (hinges 556 b and 556 c are seen in FIG. 5D ) for lifting the cover 552 and accessing the interior of the chassis 590 .
- a cooling grate 564 FIG. 5C ) allows for air flow via an internal fan (not shown).
- the chassis 590 is lifted by adjustable feet 570 a , 570 c (feet 570 , 570 b are shown in FIG. 5D ). Adjustable feet 570 a - 570 c , for example, may provide additional air flow beneath the chassis 590 .
- a control button 566 allows for single-button automated start and/or stop of cell processing within the automated multi-module cell processing instrument 500 .
- a robotic liquid handling system 558 is disposed along a gantry 502 above wash cartridge 504 (reagent cartridge 510 is not seen in these figures).
- Control circuitry, liquid handling tubes, air pump controls, valves, thermal units (e.g., heating and cooling units) and other control mechanisms, in some embodiments, are disposed below a deck of the chassis 590 , in a control box region 568 .
- isolation device or module 540 is also seen in both FIGS. 5C and 5D .
- Nucleic acid assembly module 514 comprising a magnet 516 is seen in FIG. 5D .
- a display screen may be positioned on the front face of the chassis 590 , for example covering a portion of the cover (e.g., see display 550 in FIG. 5B ).
- the display screen may provide information to the user regarding the processing status of the automated multi-module cell editing instrument 500 .
- the display screen may accept inputs from the user for conducting the cell processing.
- FIG. 6A shows one embodiment of a rotating growth vial 600 for use with the cell growth device described herein.
- the rotating growth vial 600 is an optically-transparent container having an open end 604 for receiving liquid media and cells, a central vial region 606 that defines the primary container for growing cells, a tapered-to-constricted region 618 defining at least one light path 610 , a closed end 616 , and a drive engagement mechanism 612 .
- the rotating growth vial 600 has a central longitudinal axis 620 around which the vial rotates, and the light path 610 is generally perpendicular to the longitudinal axis of the vial.
- the first light path 610 is positioned in the lower constricted portion of the tapered-to-constricted region 618 .
- some embodiments of the rotating growth vial 600 have a second light path 608 in the tapered region of the tapered-to-constricted region 618 .
- Both light paths in this embodiment are positioned in a region of the rotating growth vial that is constantly filled with the cell culture (cells+growth media) and are not affected by the rotational speed of the growth vial.
- the first light path 610 is shorter than the second light path 608 allowing for sensitive measurement of OD values when the OD values of the cell culture in the vial are at a high level (e.g., later in the cell growth process), whereas the second light path 608 allows for sensitive measurement of OD values when the OD values of the cell culture in the vial are at a lower level (e.g., earlier in the cell growth process).
- the drive engagement mechanism 612 engages with a motor (not shown) to rotate the vial.
- the motor drives the drive engagement mechanism 612 such that the rotating growth vial 600 is rotated in one direction only, and in other embodiments, the rotating growth vial 600 is rotated in a first direction for a first amount of time or periodicity, rotated in a second direction (i.e., the opposite direction) for a second amount of time or periodicity, and this process may be repeated so that the rotating growth vial 600 (and the cell culture contents) are subjected to an oscillating motion. Further, the choice of whether the culture is subjected to oscillation and the periodicity therefor may be selected by the user.
- the first amount of time and the second amount of time may be the same or may be different.
- the amount of time may be 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, or more seconds, or may be 1, 2, 3, 4 or more minutes.
- the rotating growth vial 600 in an early stage of cell growth the rotating growth vial 600 may be oscillated at a first periodicity (e.g., every 60 seconds), and then a later stage of cell growth the rotating growth vial 600 may be oscillated at a second periodicity (e.g., every one second) different from the first periodicity.
- the rotating growth vial 600 may be reusable or, preferably, the rotating growth vial is consumable. In some embodiments, the rotating growth vial is consumable and is presented to the user pre-filled with growth medium, where the vial is hermetically sealed at the open end 604 with a foil seal.
- a medium-filled rotating growth vial packaged in such a manner may be part of a kit for use with a stand-alone cell growth device or with a cell growth module that is part of an automated multi-module cell processing system.
- Open end 604 may optionally include an extended lip 602 to overlap and engage with the cell growth device.
- the rotating growth vial 600 may be tagged with a barcode or other identifying means that can be read by a scanner or camera (not shown) that is part of the automated system.
- the volume of the rotating growth vial 600 and the volume of the cell culture (including growth medium) may vary greatly, but the volume of the rotating growth vial 600 must be large enough to generate a specified total number of cells.
- the volume of the rotating growth vial 600 may range from 1-250 mL, 2-100 mL, from 5-80 mL, 10-50 mL, or from 12-35 mL.
- the volume of the cell culture (cells+growth media) should be appropriate to allow proper aeration and mixing in the rotating growth vial 600 . Proper aeration promotes uniform cellular respiration within the growth media.
- the volume of the cell culture should be approximately 5-85% of the volume of the growth vial or from 20-60% of the volume of the growth vial. For example, for a 30 mL growth vial, the volume of the cell culture would be from about 1.5 mL to about 26 mL, or from 6 mL to about 18 mL.
- the rotating growth vial 600 preferably is fabricated from a bio-compatible optically transparent materialor at least the portion of the vial comprising the light path(s) is transparent. Additionally, material from which the rotating growth vial is fabricated should be able to be cooled to about 4° C. or lower and heated to about 55° C. or higher to accommodate both temperature-based cell assays and long-term storage at low temperatures. Further, the material that is used to fabricate the vial must be able to withstand temperatures up to 55° C. without deformation while spinning.
- Suitable materials include cyclic olefin copolymer (COC), glass, polyvinyl chloride, polyethylene, polyamide, polypropylene, polycarbonate, poly(methyl methacrylate (PMMA), polysulfone, polyurethane, and co-polymers of these and other polymers.
- Preferred materials include polypropylene, polycarbonate, or polystyrene.
- the rotating growth vial is inexpensively fabricated by, e.g., injection molding or extrusion.
- FIG. 6B is a perspective view of one embodiment of a cell growth device 630 .
- FIG. 6C depicts a cut-away view of the cell growth device 630 from FIG. 6B .
- the rotating growth vial 600 is seen positioned inside a main housing 636 with the extended lip 602 of the rotating growth vial 600 extending above the main housing 636 .
- end housings 652 , a lower housing 632 and flanges 634 are indicated in both figures.
- Flanges 634 are used to attach the cell growth device 630 to heating/cooling means or other structure (not shown).
- FIG. 6C depicts additional detail.
- upper bearing 642 and lower bearing 640 are shown positioned within main housing 636 .
- Upper bearing 642 and lower bearing 640 support the vertical load of rotating growth vial 600 .
- Lower housing 632 contains the drive motor 638 .
- the cell growth device 630 of FIG. 6C comprises two light paths: a primary light path 644 , and a secondary light path 650 .
- Light path 644 corresponds to light path 610 positioned in the constricted portion of the tapered-to-constricted portion of the rotating growth vial 600
- light path 650 corresponds to light path 608 in the tapered portion of the tapered-to-constricted portion of the rotating growth via 6001 .
- Light paths 610 and 608 are not shown in FIG. 6C but may be seen in FIG. 6A .
- the motor 638 engages with drive mechanism 612 and is used to rotate the rotating growth vial 600 .
- motor 638 is a brushless DC type drive motor with built-in drive controls that can be set to hold a constant revolution per minute (RPM) between 0 and about 3000 RPM.
- RPM revolution per minute
- other motor types such as a stepper, servo, brushed DC, and the like can be used.
- the motor 638 may also have direction control to allow reversing of the rotational direction, and a tachometer to sense and report actual RPM.
- the motor is controlled by a processor (not shown) according to, e.g., standard protocols programmed into the processor and/or user input, and the motor may be configured to vary RPM to cause axial precession of the cell culture thereby enhancing mixing, e.g., to prevent cell aggregation, increase aeration, and optimize cellular respiration.
- Main housing 636 , end housings 652 and lower housing 632 of the cell growth device 630 may be fabricated from any suitable, robust material including aluminum, stainless steel, and other thermally conductive materials, including plastics. These structures or portions thereof can be created through various techniques, e.g., metal fabrication, injection molding, creation of structural layers that are fused, etc. Whereas the rotating growth vial 600 is envisioned in some embodiments to be reusable, but preferably is consumable, the other components of the cell growth device 630 are preferably reusable and function as a stand-alone benchtop device or as a module in a multi-module cell processing system.
- the processor (not shown) of the cell growth device 630 may be programmed with information to be used as a “blank” or control for the growing cell culture.
- a “blank” or control is a vessel containing cell growth medium only, which yields 100% transmittance and 0 OD, while the cell sample will deflect light rays and will have a lower percent transmittance and higher OD. As the cells grow in the media and become denser, transmittance will decrease and OD will increase.
- the processor (not shown) of the cell growth device 630 may be programmed to use wavelength values for blanks commensurate with the growth media typically used in cell culture (whether, e.g., mammalian cells, bacterial cells, animal cells, yeast cells, etc.).
- a second spectrophotometer and vessel may be included in the cell growth device 630 , where the second spectrophotometer is used to read a blank at designated intervals.
- FIG. 6D illustrates a cell growth device 630 as part of an assembly comprising the cell growth device 630 of FIG. 6B coupled to light source 690 , detector 692 , and thermal components 694 .
- the rotating growth vial 600 is inserted into the cell growth device.
- Components of the light source 690 and detector 692 e.g., such as a photodiode with gain control to cover 5-log
- the lower housing 632 that houses the motor that rotates the rotating growth vial 600 is illustrated, as is one of the flanges 634 that secures the cell growth device 630 to the assembly.
- the thermal components 694 illustrated are a Peltier device or thermoelectric cooler.
- thermal control is accomplished by attachment and electrical integration of the cell growth device 630 to the thermal components 694 via the flange 634 on the base of the lower housing 632 .
- Thermoelectric coolers are capable of “pumping” heat to either side of a junction, either cooling a surface or heating a surface depending on the direction of current flow.
- a thermistor is used to measure the temperature of the main housing and then, through a standard electronic proportional-integral-derivative (PID) controller loop, the rotating growth vial 600 is controlled to approximately +/ ⁇ 0.5° C.
- cells are inoculated (cells can be pipetted, e.g., from an automated liquid handling system or by a user) into pre-filled growth media of a rotating growth vial 600 by piercing though the foil seal or film.
- the programmed software of the cell growth device 630 sets the control temperature for growth, typically 30° C., then slowly starts the rotation of the rotating growth vial 600 .
- the cell/growth media mixture slowly moves vertically up the wall due to centrifugal force allowing the rotating growth vial 600 to expose a large surface area of the mixture to a normal oxygen environment.
- the growth monitoring system takes either continuous readings of the OD or OD measurements at pre-set or pre-programmed time intervals.
- the software plots the measurements versus time to display a growth curve. If enhanced mixing is required, e.g., to optimize growth conditions, the speed of the vial rotation can be varied to cause an axial precession of the liquid, and/or a complete directional change can be performed at programmed intervals.
- the growth monitoring can be programmed to automatically terminate the growth stage at a pre-determined OD, and then quickly cool the mixture to a lower temperature to inhibit further growth.
- One application for the cell growth device 630 is to constantly measure the optical density of a growing cell culture.
- One advantage of the described cell growth device is that optical density can be measured continuously (kinetic monitoring) or at specific time intervals; e.g., every 5, 10, 15, 20, 30 45, or 60 seconds, or every 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, or 10 minutes. While the cell growth device 630 has been described in the context of measuring the optical density (OD) of a growing cell culture, it should, however, be understood by a skilled artisan given the teachings of the present specification that other cell growth parameters can be measured in addition to or instead of cell culture OD.
- spectroscopy using visible, UV, or near infrared (NIR) light allows monitoring the concentration of nutrients and/or wastes in the cell culture and other spectroscopic measurements may be made; that is, other spectral properties can be measured via, e.g., dielectric impedance spectroscopy, visible fluorescence, fluorescence polarization, or luminescence.
- the cell growth device 630 may include additional sensors for measuring, e.g., dissolved oxygen, carbon dioxide, pH, conductivity, and the like.
- FIGS. 7A-7K depict variations on one embodiment of a cell concentration/buffer exchange cassette and module that utilizes tangential flow filtration.
- a cell concentration device described herein operates using tangential flow filtration (TFF), also known as crossflow filtration, in which the majority of the feed flows tangentially over the surface of the filter thereby reducing cake (retentate) formation as compared to dead-end filtration, in which the feed flows into the filter.
- TMF tangential flow filtration
- Secondary flows relative to the main feed are also exploited to generate shear forces that prevent filter cake formation and membrane fouling thus maximizing particle recovery, as described below.
- FIG. 7A is a general model 750 of tangential flow filtration.
- the TFF device operates using tangential flow filtration, also known as cross-flow filtration.
- FIG. 7A shows cells flowing over a membrane 754 , where the feed flow of the cells 752 in medium or buffer is parallel to the membrane 754 .
- TFF is different from dead-end filtration where both the feed flow and the pressure drop are perpendicular to a membrane or filter.
- FIG. 7B depicts a top view of the lower member of one embodiment of a TFF device/module providing tangential flow filtration.
- TFF device 700 comprises a channel structure 716 comprising a flow channel 702 b through which a cell culture is flowed.
- the channel structure 716 comprises a single flow channel 702 b that is horizontally bifurcated by a membrane (not shown) through which buffer or medium may flow, but cells cannot.
- This particular embodiment comprises an undulating serpentine geometry 714 (i.e., the small “wiggles” in the flow channel 702 ) and a serpentine “zig-zag” pattern where the flow channel 702 crisscrosses the device from one end at the left of the device to the other end at the right of the device.
- the serpentine pattern allows for filtration over a high surface area relative to the device size and total channel volume, while the undulating contribution creates a secondary inertial flow to enable effective membrane regeneration preventing membrane fouling.
- an undulating geometry and serpentine pattern are exemplified here, other channel configurations may be used as long as the channel can be bifurcated by a membrane, and as long as the channel configuration provides for flow through the TFF module in alternating directions.
- portals 704 and 706 as part of the channel structure 716 can be seen, as well as recesses 708 .
- Portals 704 collect cells passing through the channel on one side of a membrane (not shown) (the “retentate”), and portals 706 collect the medium (“filtrate” or “permeate”) passing through the channel on the opposite side of the membrane (not shown).
- recesses 708 accommodate screws or other fasteners (not shown) that allow the components of the TFF device to be secured to one another.
- the length 710 and width 712 of the channel structure 716 may vary depending on the volume of the cell culture to be grown and the optical density of the cell culture to be concentrated.
- the length 710 of the channel structure 716 typically is from 1 mm to 300 mm, or from 50 mm to 250 mm, or from 60 mm to 200 mm, or from 70 mm to 150 mm, or from 80 mm to 100 mm.
- the width of the channel structure 716 typically is from 1 mm to 120 mm, or from 20 mm to 100 mm, or from 30 mm to 80 mm, or from 40 mm to 70 mm, or from 50 mm to 60 mm.
- the cross-section configuration of the flow channel 702 may be round, elliptical, oval, square, rectangular, trapezoidal, or irregular. If square, rectangular, or another shape with generally straight sides, the cross section may be from about 10 ⁇ m to 1000 ⁇ m wide, or from 200 ⁇ m to 800 ⁇ m wide, or from 300 ⁇ m to 700 ⁇ m wide, or from 400 ⁇ m to 600 ⁇ m wide; and from about 10 ⁇ m to 1000 m high, or from 200 ⁇ m to 800 ⁇ m high, or from 300 ⁇ m to 700 ⁇ m high, or from 400 m to 600 ⁇ m high.
- the radius of the channel may be from about 50 ⁇ m to 1000 ⁇ m in hydraulic radius, or from 5 ⁇ m to 800 ⁇ m in hydraulic radius, or from 200 ⁇ m to 700 ⁇ m in hydraulic radius, or from 300 ⁇ m to 600 ⁇ m wide in hydraulic radius, or from about 200 to 500 ⁇ m in hydraulic radius.
- retentate portals 704 and two filtrate portals 706 where there is one of each type portal at both ends (e.g., the narrow edge) of the device 700 .
- retentate and filtrate portals can on the same surface of the same member (e.g., upper or lower member), or they can be arranged on the side surfaces of the assembly.
- the TFF device/module described herein uses an alternating method for concentrating cells.
- the overall work flow for cell concentration using the TFF device/module involves flowing a cell culture or cell sample tangentially through the channel structure.
- the membrane bifurcating the flow channels retains the cells on one side of the membrane and allows unwanted medium or buffer to flow across the membrane into a filtrate side (e.g., lower member 720 ) of the device.
- a fixed volume of cells in medium or buffer is driven through the device until the cell sample is collected into one of the retentate portals 704 , and the medium/buffer that has passed through the membrane is collected through one or both of the filtrate portals 706 .
- All types of prokaryotic and eukaryotic cells both adherent and non-adherent cells—can be grown in the TFF device.
- Adherent cells may be grown on beads or other cell scaffolds suspended in medium that flow through the TFF device.
- the cell sample is collected by passing through the retentate portal 704 and into the retentate reservoir (not shown).
- the cell sample is passed again through the TFF device, this time in a flow direction that is reversed from the first pass.
- the cell sample is collected by passing through the retentate portal 704 and into retentate reservoir (not shown) on the opposite end of the device/module from the retentate portal 704 that was used to collect cells during the first pass.
- the medium/buffer that passes through the membrane on the second pass is collected through the filtrate portal 706 on the opposite end of the device/module from the filtrate portal 706 that was used to collect the filtrate during the first pass, or through both portals.
- This alternating process of passing the retentate (the concentrated cell sample) through the device/module is repeated until the cells have been concentrated to a desired volume, and both filtrate portals can be open during the passes to reduce operating time.
- buffer exchange may be effected by adding a desired buffer (or fresh medium) to the cell sample in the retentate reservoir, before initiating another “pass”, and repeating this process until the old medium or buffer is diluted and filtered out and the cells reside in fresh medium or buffer. Note that buffer exchange and cell concentration may (and typically do) take place simultaneously.
- FIG. 7C depicts a top view of upper ( 722 ) and lower ( 720 ) members of an exemplary TFF module. Again, portals 704 and 706 are seen.
- recesses-such as the recesses 708 seen in FIG. 7B provide a means to secure the components (upper member 722 , lower member 720 , and membrane 724 ) of the TFF device/membrane to one another during operation via, e.g., screws or other like fasteners.
- an adhesive such as a pressure sensitive adhesive, or ultrasonic welding, or solvent bonding, may be used to couple the upper member 722 , lower member 720 , and membrane 724 together.
- the retentate portal and filtrate portals on each “end” e.g., the narrow edges
- the retentate and filtrate portals on the left side of the device/module will collect cells (flow path at 760 ) and medium (flow path at 770 ), respectively, for the same pass.
- the retentate and filtrate portals on the right side of the device/module will collect cells (flow path at 760 ) and medium (flow path at 770 ), respectively, for the same pass.
- the retentate is collected from portals 704 on the top surface of the TFF device, and filtrate is collected from portals 706 on the bottom surface of the device.
- the cells are maintained in the TFF flow channel above the membrane 724 , while the filtrate (medium) flows through membrane 724 and then through portals 706 ; thus, the top/retentate portals and bottom/filtrate portals configuration is practical. It should be recognized, however, that other configurations of retentate and filtrate portals may be implemented such as positioning both the retentate and filtrate portals on the side (as opposed to the top and bottom surfaces) of the TFF device.
- the channel structure 702 b can be seen on the bottom member 720 of the TFF device 700 .
- retentate and filtrate portals can reside on the same of the TFF device.
- membrane or filter 724 is also seen in FIG. 7C .
- Filters or membranes appropriate for use in the TFF device/module are those that are solvent resistant, are contamination free during filtration, and are able to retain the types and sizes of cells of interest. For example, in order to retain small cell types such as bacterial cells, pore sizes can be as low as 0.2 ⁇ m, however for other cell types, the pore sizes can be as high as 5 m.
- the pore sizes useful in the TFF device/module include filters with sizes from 0.20 ⁇ m, 0.21 ⁇ m, 0.22 ⁇ m, 0.23 ⁇ m, 0.24 ⁇ m, 0.25 ⁇ m, 0.26 ⁇ m, 0.27 ⁇ m, 0.28 m, 0.29 ⁇ m, 0.30 ⁇ m, 0.31 ⁇ m, 0.32 ⁇ m, 0.33 ⁇ m, 0.34 ⁇ m, 0.35 ⁇ m, 0.36 ⁇ m, 0.37 ⁇ m, 0.38 ⁇ m, 0.39 ⁇ m, 0.40 ⁇ m, 0.41 ⁇ m, 0.42 ⁇ m, 0.43 ⁇ m, 0.44 ⁇ m, 0.45 ⁇ m, 0.46 ⁇ m, 0.47 ⁇ m, 0.48 ⁇ m, 0.49 ⁇ m, 0.50 ⁇ m and larger.
- the filters may be fabricated from any suitable non-reactive material including cellulose mixed ester (cellulose nitrate and acetate) (CME), polycarbonate (PC), polyvinylidene fluoride (PVDF), polyethersulfone (PES), polytetrafluoroethylene (PTFE), nylon, glass fiber, or metal substrates as in the case of laser or electrochemical etching.
- CME cellulose mixed ester
- PC polycarbonate
- PVDF polyvinylidene fluoride
- PES polyethersulfone
- PTFE polytetrafluoroethylene
- nylon glass fiber
- glass fiber or metal substrates as in the case of laser or electrochemical etching.
- the TFF device shown in FIGS. 7C and 7D do not show a seat in the upper 712 and lower 720 members where the filter 724 can be seated or secured (for example, a seat half the thickness of the filter in each of upper 712 and lower 720 members); however, such a seat is contemplated
- FIG. 7D depicts a bottom view of upper and lower components of the exemplary TFF module shown in FIG. 7C .
- FIG. 7D depicts a bottom view of upper ( 722 ) and lower ( 720 ) components of an exemplary TFF module. Again portals 704 and 706 are seen. Note again that there is one retentate portal and one filtrate portal on each end of the device/module. The retentate and filtrate portals on the left side of the device/module will collect cells (flow path at 760 ) and medium (flow path at 770 ), respectively, for the same pass.
- the retentate and filtrate portals on the right side of the device/module will collect cells (flow path at 760 ) and medium (flow path at 770 ), respectively, for the same pass.
- the channel structure 702 a can be seen on the upper member 722 of the TFF device 700 .
- the channel structure 702 of the upper 722 and lower 720 members ( 702 a and 702 b , respectively) mate to create the flow channel with the membrane 624 positioned horizontally between the upper and lower members of the flow channel thereby bifurcating the flow channel.
- Medium exchange (during cell growth) or buffer exchange (during cell concentration or rendering the cells competent) is performed on the TFF device/module by adding fresh medium to growing cells or a desired buffer to the cells concentrated to a desired volume; for example, after the cells have been concentrated at least 20-fold, 30-fold, 40-fold, 50-fold, 60-fold, 70-fold, 80-fold, 90-fold, 100-fold, 150-fold, 200-fold or more.
- a desired exchange medium or exchange buffer is added to the cells either by addition to the retentate reservoir or thorough the membrane from the filtrate side and the process of passing the cells through the TFF device 700 is repeated until the cells have been grown to a desired optical density or concentrated to a desired volume in the exchange medium or buffer.
- the exchange buffer may comprise, e.g., glycerol or sorbitol thereby rendering the cells competent for transformation in addition to decreasing the overall volume of the cell sample.
- the TFF device 700 may be fabricated from any robust material in which channels (and channel branches) may be milled including stainless steel, silicon, glass, aluminum, or plastics including cyclic-olefin copolymer (COC), cyclo-olefin polymer (COP), polystyrene, polyvinyl chloride, polyethylene, polyamide, polyethylene, polypropylene, acrylonitrile butadiene, polycarbonate, polyetheretheketone (PEEK), poly(methyl methylacrylate) (PMMA), polysulfone, and polyurethane, and co-polymers of these and other polymers. If the TFF device/module is disposable, preferably it is made of plastic.
- the material used to fabricate the TFF device/module is thermally-conductive so that the cell culture may be heated or cooled to a desired temperature.
- the TFF device is formed by precision mechanical machining, laser machining, electro discharge machining (for metal devices); wet or dry etching (for silicon devices); dry or wet etching, powder or sandblasting, photostructuring (for glass devices); or thermoforming, injection molding, hot embossing, or laser machining (for plastic devices) using the materials mentioned above that are amenable to this mass production techniques.
- FIGS. 7E-7K depict an alternative embodiment of a tangential flow filtration (TFF) device/module, where the module has the advantage of a reduced footprint, in, e.g., an automated multi-module cell processing instrument.
- FIG. 7E depicts a configuration of an upper (retentate) member 7022 (on left), a membrane or filter 7024 (middle), and a lower (permeate/filtrate) member 7020 (on the right). In the configuration shown in FIGS.
- retentate member 7022 is no longer “upper” and the permeate/filtrate member 7020 is no longer “lower”, as the retentate member 7022 and permeate/filtrate member 7020 are coupled side-to-side as seen in FIGS. 7J and 7K .
- retentate member 7022 comprises a tangential flow channel 7002 , which has a serpentine configuration that initiates at one lower corner of retentate member 7022 —specifically at retentate port 7028 —traverses across and up then down and across retentate member 7022 , ending in the other lower corner of retentate member 7022 at a second retentate port 7028 .
- energy director 7091 which circumscribes the region where membrane or filter 7024 is seated.
- Energy director 7091 in this embodiment mates with and serves to facilitate ultrasonic wending or bonding of retentate member 7022 with permeate/filtrate member 7020 via the energy director component on permeate/filtrate member 7020 .
- membrane or filter 7024 has through-holes for retentate ports 7028 , which is configured to seat within the circumference of energy directors 7091 between the retentate member 7022 and the permeate/filtrate member 7020 .
- Permeate/filtrate member 7020 comprises, in addition to energy director 7091 , through-holes for retentate port 7028 at each bottom corner (which mate with the through-holes for retentate ports 7028 at the bottom corners of membrane 7024 and retentate ports 7028 in retentate member 7022 ), as well as a tangential flow channel 7002 and a single permeate/filtrate port 7026 positioned at the top and center of permeate/filtrate member 7020 .
- the tangential flow channel 7002 structure in this embodiment has a serpentine configuration and an undulating geometry, although other geometries may be used.
- the length of the tangential flow channel is from 10 mm to 1000 mm, from 60 mm to 200 mm, or from 80 mm to 100 mm.
- the width of the channel structure is from 10 mm to 120 mm, from 40 mm to 70 mm, or from 50 mm to 60 mm.
- the cross section of the tangential flow channel 1202 is rectangular. In some aspects, the cross section of the tangential flow channel 1202 is 5 ⁇ m to 1000 ⁇ m wide and 5 ⁇ m to 1000 ⁇ m high, 300 ⁇ m to 700 m wide and 300 ⁇ m to 700 ⁇ m high, or 400 ⁇ m to 600 ⁇ m wide and 400 ⁇ m to 600 m high.
- the cross section of the tangential flow channel 1202 is circular, elliptical, trapezoidal, or oblong, and is 100 ⁇ m to 1000 ⁇ m in hydraulic radius, 300 m to 700 ⁇ m in hydraulic radius, or 400 ⁇ m to 600 ⁇ m in hydraulic radius.
- FIG. 7F is a side perspective view of a reservoir assembly 7050 .
- the retentate member is separate from the reservoir assembly.
- Reservoir assembly 7050 comprises retentate reservoirs 7052 on either side of a single permeate reservoir 7054 .
- Retentate reservoirs 7052 are used to contain the cells and medium as the cells are transferred through the cell concentration/growth device or module and into the retentate reservoirs during cell concentration and/or growth.
- Permeate/filtrate reservoir 7054 is used to collect the filtrate fluids removed from the cell culture during cell concentration, or old buffer or medium during cell growth. In the embodiment depicted in FIGS.
- buffer or medium is supplied to the permeate/filtrate member from a reagent reservoir separate from the device module.
- a reagent reservoir separate from the device module.
- grooves 7032 to accommodate pneumatic ports (not seen), permeate/filtrate port 7026 , and retentate port through-holes 7028 .
- the retentate reservoirs are fluidically coupled to the retentate ports 7028 , which in turn are fluidically coupled to the portion of the tangential flow channel disposed in the retentate member (not shown).
- the permeate/filtrate reservoir is fluidically coupled to the permeate/filtrate port 7026 which in turn are fluidically coupled to the portion of the tangential flow channel disposed in permeate/filtrate member (not shown), where the portions of the tangential flow channels are bifurcated by membrane (not shown).
- up to 120 mL of cell culture can be grown and/or filtered, or up to 100 mL, 90 mL, 80 mL, 70 mL, 60 mL, 50 mL, 40 mL, 30 mL or 20 mL of cell culture can be grown and/or concentrated.
- FIG. 7G depicts a top-down view of the reservoir assembly 7050 shown in FIG. 7F
- FIG. 7H depicts a cover 7044 for reservoir assembly 7050 shown in FIGS. 7F
- 7 I depicts a gasket 7045 that in operation is disposed on cover 7044 of reservoir assembly 7050 shown in FIG. 7F
- FIG. 7G is a top-down view of reservoir assembly 7050 , showing two retentate reservoirs 7052 , one on either side of permeate reservoir 7054 .
- FIG. 7H depicts a cover 7044 that is configured to be disposed upon the top of reservoir assembly 7050 .
- Cover 7044 has round cut-outs at the top of retentate reservoirs 7052 and permeate/filtrate reservoir 7054 .
- FIG. 7I depicts a gasket 7045 that is configures to be disposed upon the cover 7044 of reservoir assembly 7050 . Seen are three fluid transfer ports 7042 for each retentate reservoir 7052 and for permeate/filtrate reservoir 7054 . Again, three pneumatic ports 7030 , for each retentate reservoir 7052 and for permeate/filtrate reservoir 7054 , are shown.
- FIG. 7J depicts an exploded view of a TFF module 7000 .
- Seen are components reservoir assembly 7050 , a cover 7044 to be disposed on reservoir assembly 7050 , a gasket 7045 to be disposed on cover 7044 , retentate member 7022 , membrane or filter 7024 , and permeate/filtrate member 7020 .
- permeate/filtrate port 7026 which mates with permeate/filtrate port 7026 on permeate/filtrate reservoir 7054 , as well as two retentate ports 7028 , which mate with retentate ports 7028 on retentate reservoirs 7052 (where only one retentate reservoir 7052 can be seen clearly in this FIG. 7J ).
- Also seen are through-holes for retentate ports 7028 in membrane 7024 and permeate/filtrate member 7020 .
- FIG. 7K depicts an embodiment of assembled TFF module 7000 .
- the retentate member 7022 is no longer “upper”, and the permeate/filtrate member 7020 is no longer “lower”, as the retentate member 7022 and permeate/filtrate member 7020 are coupled side-to-side with membrane 7024 sandwiched between retentate member 7022 and permeate/filtrate member 7020 .
- retentate member 7022 , membrane member 7024 , and permeate/filtrate member 7020 are coupled side-to-side with reservoir assembly 7050 .
- Seen are two retentate ports 7028 (which couple the tangential flow channel 7002 in retentate member 7022 to the two retentate reservoirs (not shown), and one permeate/filtrate port 7026 , which couples the tangential flow channel 7002 in permeate/filtrate member 7020 to the permeate/filtrate reservoir (not shown). Also seen is tangential flow channel 7002 , which is formed by the mating of retentate member 7022 and permeate/filtrate member 7020 , with membrane 7024 sandwiched between and bifurcating tangential flow channel 7002 . Also seen is energy director 7091 , which in this FIG.
- FIG. 7K has been used to ultrasonically weld or couple retentate member 7022 and permeate/filtrate member 7020 , surrounding membrane 7024 .
- Cover 7044 can be seen on top of reservoir assembly 7050 , and gasket 7045 is disposed upon cover 7044 .
- Gasket 7045 engages with and provides a fluid-tight seal and pneumatic connections with fluid transfer ports 7042 and pneumatic ports 7030 , respectively.
- FIG. 7J also shows the length, height, and width dimensions of the TFF module 7000 .
- the assembled TFF device 7000 typically is from 50 to 175 mm in height, or from 75 to 150 mm in height, or from 90 to 120 mm in height; from 50 to 175 mm in length, or from 75 to 150 mm in length, or from 90 to 120 mm in length; and is from 30 to 90 mm in depth, or from 40 to 75 mm in depth, or from about 50 to 60 mm in depth.
- An exemplary TFF device is 110 mm in height, 120 mm in length, and 55 mm in depth.
- the TFF device or module depicted in FIGS. 7E-7K can constantly measure cell culture growth, and in some aspects cell culture growth is measured via optical density (OD) of the cell culture in one or both of the retentate reservoirs and/or in the flow channel of the TFF device.
- Optical density may be measured continuously (kinetic monitoring) or at specific time intervals; e.g., every 5, 10, 15, 20, 30 45, or 60 seconds, or every 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, or 10 or so on minutes.
- the TFF module can adjust growth parameters (temperature, aeration) to have the cells at a desired optical density at a desired time.
- FIG. 7L is an exemplary pneumatic block diagram suitable for the TFF module depicted in FIGS. 7E-7K .
- the pump is connected to two solenoid valves (SV5 and SV6) delivering positive pressure (P) or negative pressure (V).
- the two solenoid valves SV5 and SV6 couple the pump to the manifold, and two solenoid valves, SV1 and SV2, are connected to the reservoirs (RR1 and RR2).
- RR1 and RR2 reservoirs
- PV2 and PV2 proportional valve
- FM1 and FM2 flow meter
- Pressure Sensors 1 and 2 Pressure Sensors 1 and 2 positioned in between each of solenoid valves SV1 and SV2 connecting the pump to the system and the solenoid valves SV1 And SV2 to the reservoirs.
- the pressure sensors and prop valves work in concert in a feedback loop to maintain the required pressure.
- a cell concentration module comprising a hollow filter
- filters suitable for use in the present invention include membrane filters, ceramic filters and metal filters.
- the filter may be used in any shape; the filter may for example be cylindrical or essentially flat.
- the filter used is a membrane filter, preferably a hollow fiber filter.
- the term “hollow fiber” is meant a tubular membrane.
- the internal diameter of the tube is at least 0.1 mm, more preferably at least 0.5 mm, most preferably at least 0.75 mm and preferably the internal diameter of the tube is at most 10 mm, more preferably at most 6 mm, most preferably at most 1 mm.
- Filter modules comprising hollow fibers are commercially available from various companies, including G.E.
- hollow fiber filter systems that can be used, modified or adapted for use in the present methods and systems include, but are not limited to, U.S. Pat. Nos. 9,738,918; 9,593,359; 9,574,977; 9,534,989; 9,446,354; 9,295,824; 8,956,880; 8,758,623; 8,726,744; 8,677,839; 8,677,840; 8,584,536; 8,584,535; and 8,110,112.
- nucleic acid assembly module is configured to accept and assemble the nucleic acids necessary to facilitate the desired genome editing events.
- vector refers to a nucleic acid molecule capable of transporting a desired nucleic acid to which it has been linked into a cell.
- Vectors include, but are not limited to, nucleic acid molecules that are single-stranded, double-stranded, or partially double-stranded; nucleic acid molecules that include one or more free ends, no free ends (e.g., circular); nucleic acid molecules that include DNA, RNA, or both; and other varieties of polynucleotides known in the art.
- vector refers to a circular double stranded DNA loop into which additional DNA segments can be inserted, such as by standard molecular cloning techniques.
- viral vector where virally-derived DNA or RNA sequences are present in the vector for packaging into a virus (e.g. retroviruses, replication defective retroviruses, adenoviruses, replication defective adenoviruses, and adeno-associated viruses).
- Viral vectors also include polynucleotides carried by a virus for transfection into a host cell. Certain vectors are capable of autonomous replication in a host cell into which they are introduced (e.g.
- bacterial vectors having a bacterial origin of replication and episomal mammalian vectors.
- Other vectors e.g., non-episomal mammalian vectors
- Other vectors are integrated into the genome of a host cell upon introduction into the host cell, and thereby are replicated along with the host genome.
- certain vectors are capable of directing the expression of genes to which they are operatively-linked. Such vectors are referred to herein as “expression vectors” or “editing vectors.”
- Common expression vectors of utility in recombinant DNA techniques are often in the form of plasmids. Additional vectors include fosmids, phagemids, and synthetic chromosomes.
- Recombinant expression vectors can include a nucleic acid in a form suitable for transcription, and for some nucleic acid sequences, translation and expression of the nucleic acid in a host cell, which means that the recombinant expression vectors include one or more regulatory elements—which may be selected on the basis of the host cells to be used for expression—that are operatively-linked to the nucleic acid sequence to be expressed.
- operably linked is intended to mean that the nucleotide sequence of interest is linked to the regulatory element(s) in a manner that allows for transcription, and for some nucleic acid sequences, translation and expression of the nucleotide sequence (e.g., in an in vitro transcription/translation system or in a host cell when the vector is introduced into the host cell).
- Appropriate recombination and cloning methods are disclosed in US Pub. No. 2004/0171156, the contents of which are herein incorporated by reference in their entirety for all purposes.
- a regulatory element is operably linked to one or more elements of a targetable nuclease system so as to drive transcription, and for some nucleic acid sequences, translation and expression of the one or more components of the targetable nuclease system.
- the polynucleotide sequence encoding the nucleic acid-guided nuclease can be codon optimized for expression in particular cells, such as prokaryotic or eukaryotic cells.
- Eukaryotic cells can be yeast, fungi, algae, plant, animal, or human cells.
- Eukaryotic cells may be those of or derived from a particular organism, such as a mammal, including but not limited to human, mouse, rat, rabbit, dog, or non-human mammal including non-human primate.
- a vector may include a regulatory element operably liked to a polynucleotide sequence, which, when transcribed, forms a guide RNA.
- the nucleic acid assembly module can be configured to perform a wide variety of different nucleic acid assembly techniques in an automated fashion.
- Nucleic acid assembly techniques that can be performed in the nucleic acid assembly module of the disclosed automated multi-module cell editing instruments include, but are not limited to, those assembly methods that use restriction endonucleases, including PCR, BioBrick assembly (U.S. Pat. No. 9,361,427), Type IIS cloning (e.g., GoldenGate assembly, European Patent Application Publication EP 2 395 087 A1), and Ligase Cycling Reaction (de Kok, ACS Synth Biol., 3(2):97-106 (2014); Engler, et al., PLoS One, 3(11):e3647 (2008); and U.S.
- nucleic acid assembly techniques performed by the disclosed automated multi-module cell editing instruments are based on overlaps between adjacent parts of the nucleic acids, such as isothermal nucleic acid assembly, CPEC, SLIC, Ligase Cycling etc. Additional assembly methods include gap repair in yeast (Bessa, Yeast, 29(10):419-23 (2012)), gateway cloning (Ohtsuka, Curr Pharm Biotechnol, 10(2):244-51 (2009)); U.S. Pat. Nos.
- the nucleic acid assembly module is temperature controlled depending upon the type of nucleic acid assembly used in the automated multi-module cell editing instrument. For example, when PCR is utilized in the nucleic acid assembly module, the module includes a thermocycling capability allowing the temperatures to cycle between denaturation, annealing and extension steps. When single temperature assembly methods (e.g., isothermal assembly methods) are utilized in the nucleic acid assembly module, the module provides the ability to reach and hold at the temperature that optimizes the specific assembly process being performed. These temperatures and the duration for maintaining these temperatures can be determined by a preprogrammed set of parameters executed by a script, or manually controlled by the user using the processing system of the automated multi-module cell editing instrument.
- the nucleic acid assembly module is a module to perform assembly using a single, isothermal reaction.
- Certain isothermal assembly methods can combine simultaneously up to 15 nucleic acid fragments based on sequence identity.
- the assembly method provides, in some embodiments, nucleic acids to be assembled which include an approximate 20-40 base overlap with adjacent nucleic acid fragments.
- the fragments are mixed with a cocktail of three enzymes—an exonuclease, a polymerase, and a ligase—along with buffer components. Because the process is isothermal and can be performed in a 1-step or 2-step method using a single reaction vessel, isothermal assembly reactions are ideal for use in an automated multi-module cell editing instrument.
- the 1-step method allows for the assembly of up to five different fragments using a single step isothermal process.
- the fragments and the master mix of enzymes are combined and incubated at 50° C. for up to one hour.
- the 2-step is used, where the 2-step reaction requires two separate additions of master mix; one for the exonuclease and annealing step and a second for the polymerase and ligation steps.
- FIGS. 8A-8E depict variations on one embodiment of a cell transformation module (in this case, a flow-through electroporation device) that may be included in a cell growth/concentration/transformation instrument.
- FIGS. 8A and 8B are top perspective and bottom perspective views, respectively, of six co-joined flow-through electroporation devices 850 .
- FIG. 8A depicts six flow-through electroporation units 850 arranged on a single substrate 856 .
- Each of the six flow-through electroporation units 850 have inlet wells 852 that define cell sample inlets and outlet wells 854 that define cell sample outlets.
- FIG. 8B is a bottom perspective view of the six co-joined flow-through electroporation devices of FIG.
- FIG. 8A also depicting six flow-through electroporation units 850 arranged on a single substrate 856 .
- Six inlet wells 852 can be seen, one for each flow-through electroporation unit 850 , and one outlet well 854 can be seen (the outlet well of the left-most flow-through electroporation unit 850 ).
- FIG. 8B Additionally seen in FIG. 8B are an inlet 802 , outlet 804 , flow channel 806 and two electrodes 808 on either side of a constriction in flow channel 806 in each flow-through electroporation unit 850 .
- the six flow-through electroporation units 850 can be separated from one another (e.g., “snapped apart”) and used one at a time, or alternatively in embodiments where two or more flow-through electroporation units 850 can be used in parallel without separation.
- the flow-through electroporation devices 850 achieve high efficiency cell electroporation with low toxicity.
- the flow-through electroporation devices 850 of the disclosure allow for particularly easy integration with robotic liquid handling instrumentation that is typically used in automated systems such as air displacement pipettors.
- robotic liquid handling instrumentation includes, but is not limited to, off-the-shelf automated liquid handling systems from Tecan (Mannedorf, Switzerland), Hamilton (Reno, Nev.), Beckman Coulter (Fort Collins, Colo.), etc.
- microfluidic electroporation using cell suspension volumes of less than approximately 10 mL and as low as 1 ⁇ l—allows more precise control over a transfection or transformation process and permits flexible integration with other cell processing tools compared to bench-scale electroporation devices.
- Microfluidic electroporation thus provides unique advantages for, e.g., single cell transformation, processing and analysis; multi-unit electroporation device configurations; and integrated, automatic, multi-module cell processing and analysis.
- the toxicity level of the transformation results in greater than 10% viable cells after electroporation, preferably greater than 15%, 20%, 25%, 30%, 35%, 40%, 45%, 50%, 55%, 60%, 70%, 75%, 80%, 85%, 90%, or even 95% viable cells following transformation, depending on the cell type and the nucleic acids being introduced into the cells.
- the flow-through electroporation device 850 described in relation to FIGS. 8A-8E comprises a housing with an electroporation chamber, a first electrode and a second electrode configured to engage with an electric pulse generator, by which electrical contacts engage with the electrodes of the electroporation device 850 .
- the electroporation devices are autoclavable and/or disposable, and may be packaged with reagents in a reagent cartridge.
- the electroporation device 850 may be configured to electroporate cell sample volumes between 1 ⁇ l to 2 mL, 10 ⁇ l to 1 mL, 25 ⁇ l to 750 ⁇ l, or 50 ⁇ l to 500 ⁇ l.
- the cells that may be electroporated with the disclosed electroporation devices 850 include mammalian cells (including human cells), plant cells, yeasts, other eukaryotic cells, bacteria, archaea, and other cell types.
- FIG. 8C depicts a top view of a flow-through electroporation device 850 having an inlet 802 for introduction of cells and an exogenous reagent to be electroporated into the cells (“cell sample”) and an outlet 804 for the cell sample following electroporation. Electrodes 808 are introduced through electrode channels (not shown in this FIG. 8C ) in the device.
- FIG. 8D shows a cutaway view from the top of flow-through electroporation device 850 , with the inlet 802 , outlet 804 , and electrodes 808 positioned with respect to a constriction in flow channel 806 .
- electrodes 808 in this embodiment are positioned in electrode channels 810 and perpendicular to flow channel 806 such that the cell sample flows from the inlet channel 812 through the flow channel 806 to the outlet channel 814 , and in the process the cell sample flows into the electrode channels 810 to be in contact with electrodes 808 .
- the inlet channel 812 , outlet channel 814 and electrode channels 810 all originate from the top planar side of the device; however, the flow-through electroporation architecture depicted in FIGS. 8C-8E is but one architecture useful with the reagent cartridges described herein. Additional electrode architectures are described, e.g., in U.S. Ser. No. 16/147,120, filed 24 Sep. 2018; Ser. No. 16/147,865, filed 30 Sep. 2018; and Ser. No. 16/147,871, filed 30 Sep. 2018.
- FIG. 9 is a simplified block diagram of an embodiment of an exemplary automated multi-module cell processing instrument comprising an isolation or substantial isolation/incubation/editing and normalization or cherry-picking module for enrichment or selection of edited cells.
- the cell processing instrument 900 may include a housing 944 , a reservoir of cells to be transformed or transfected 902 , and a growth module (a cell growth device) 904 .
- the cells to be transformed are transferred from a reservoir to the growth module to be cultured until the cells hit a target OD. Once the cells hit the target OD, the growth module may cool or freeze the cells for later processing, or the cells may be transferred to a cell concentration module 930 where the cells are rendered electrocompetent and concentrated to a volume optimal for cell transformation.
- Exemplary cell concentration devices of use in the automated multi-module cell processing system include those described in U.S. Ser. No. 62/728,365, filed 7 Sep. 2018; 62/857,599, filed 5 Jun. 2019; and 62/867,415, filed 27 Jun. 2019, all of which are incorporated by reference in their entirety.
- the cells are then transferred to the electroporation device 908 (e.g., transformation/transfection module, with one exemplary module described above in relation to FIGS. 8A-8E ).
- Exemplary electroporation devices of use in the automated multi-module cell processing instruments include flow-through electroporation devices such as those described in U.S. Ser. No. 16/147,120, filed 28 Sep. 2018; Ser. No. 16/147,353, filed 28 Sep. 2018; Ser. No. 16/147,865, filed 30 Sep. 2018; and Ser. No. 16/147,871, filed 30 Sep. 2018 all of which are herein incorporated by reference in their entirety.
- the automated multi-module cell processing instrument 900 may include a reservoir for storing editing oligonucleotide cassettes 916 and a reservoir for storing an expression vector backbone 918 . Both the editing oligonucleotide cassettes and the expression vector backbone are transferred from a reagent cartridge to a nucleic acid assembly module 920 , where the editing oligonucleotide cassettes are inserted into the expression vector backbone.
- the assembled nucleic acids may be transferred into an optional purification module 922 for desalting and/or other purification and/or concentration procedures needed to prepare the assembled nucleic acids for transformation.
- pre-assembled nucleic acids may be stored within reservoir 916 or 918 .
- the assembled nucleic acids are transferred to, e.g., an electroporation device 908 , which already contains the cell culture grown to a target OD and rendered electrocompetent via cell concentration module 930 .
- electroporation device 908 the assembled nucleic acids are introduced into the cells.
- the cells are transferred into a combined recovery/selection module 910 .
- multi-module cell editing instruments see U.S. Pat. No. 10,253,316, filed 30 Jun. 2018; U.S. Pat. No.
- the cells are transferred to an isolation or substantial isolation, editing, and growth module 940 , where the cells are diluted and compartmentalized such that there is an average of one cell per compartment. Once substantially or largely isolated, the cells are allowed to grow for a pre-determined number of doublings. Once these initial colonies are established, editing proceeds and the edited cells are grown to establish colonies, which are grown to terminal size (e.g., the colonies are normalized).
- editing is induced by one or more of the editing components, preferably the gRNA, being under the control of an inducible promoter.
- the inducible promoter is activated by a rise in temperature and “deactivated” by lowering the temperature.
- the solid wall device can be transferred to a plate (e.g., an agar plate or even to liquid medium) comprising a medium with a component that activates or induces editing, then transferred to a medium that deactivates editing.
- a plate e.g., an agar plate or even to liquid medium
- induction of editing and deactivation of editing can take place by media exchange. Once the colonies are grown to terminal size, the colonies are pooled. Again, isolation or substantial isolation overcomes growth bias from unedited cells and growth bias resulting from fitness effects of different edits.
- the recovery, selection, and isolation/incubation/editing and normalization modules may all be separate, may be arranged and combined as shown in FIG. 9 , or may be arranged or combined in other configurations.
- all of recovery, selection, isolation or substantial isolation, growth (e.g., incubation), editing, and normalization are performed in a solid wall device described in relation to FIGS. 3A-3E and 4A-4Y .
- recovery, selection, and dilution if necessary, are performed in liquid medium in a separate vessel such as in a rotating growth vial (module), then transferred to the isolation/incubation/editing and normalization module.
- the multi-module cell processing instrument 900 is controlled by a processor 942 configured to operate the instrument based on user input, as directed by one or more scripts, or as a combination of user input or a script.
- the processor 942 may control the timing, duration, temperature, and operations of the various modules of the instrument 900 and the dispensing of reagents.
- the processor 942 may cool the cells post-transformation until editing is desired, upon which time the temperature may be raised to a temperature conducive of genome editing and cell growth.
- the processor may be programmed with standard protocol parameters from which a user may select, a user may specify one or more parameters manually or one or more scripts associated with the reagent cartridge may specify one or more operations and/or reaction parameters.
- the processor may notify the user (e.g., via an application to a smart phone or other device) that the cells have reached the target OD as well as update the user as to the progress of the cells in the various modules in the multi-module system.
- the automated multi-module cell processing instrument 900 is a nuclease-directed genome editing system and can be used in single editing systems (e.g., introducing one or more edits to a cellular genome in a single editing process).
- the system of FIG. 10 described below, is configured to perform sequential editing, e.g., using different nuclease-directed systems sequentially to provide two or more genome edits in a cell; and/or recursive editing, e.g. utilizing a single nuclease-directed system to introduce sequentially two or more genome edits in a cell.
- FIG. 10 illustrates another embodiment of an automated multi-module cell processing instrument configured to perform isolation or substantial isolation of cells, growth, incubation, editing and normalization of cell colonies.
- This embodiment depicts an exemplary system that performs recursive gene editing on a cell population.
- the cell processing instrument 1000 may include a housing 1044 , a reservoir for storing cells to be transformed or transfected 1002 , and a cell growth module (comprising, e.g., a rotating growth vial) 1004 .
- the cells to be transformed are transferred from a reservoir to the cell growth module to be cultured until the cells hit a target OD.
- the growth module may cool or freeze the cells for later processing or transfer the cells to a cell concentration module 1060 where the cells are subjected to buffer exchange and rendered electrocompetent, and the volume of the cells may be reduced substantially.
- the cells are transferred to electroporation device 1008 .
- the multi-module cell processing instrument 1000 includes a reservoir for storing the vector pre-assembled with editing oligonucleotide cassettes 1052 .
- the pre-assembled nucleic acid vectors are transferred to the electroporation device 1008 , which already contains the cell culture grown to a target OD.
- the electroporation device 1008 the nucleic acids are electroporated into the cells.
- the cells are transferred into an optional recovery module 1056 , where the cells are allowed to recover briefly post-transformation.
- the cells may be transferred to a storage unit or module 1012 , where the cells can be stored at, e.g., 4° C. for later processing, or the cells may be diluted and transferred to a solid wall selection, isolation or substantial isolation/incubation/editing and normalization module 1058 .
- the cells are arrayed such that there is an average of one cell per microwell.
- the arrayed cells may be in selection medium to select for cells that have been transformed or transfected with the editing vector(s). Once substantially or largely isolated, the cells grow through 2-50 doublings and establish colonies. Once colonies are established, editing proceeds.
- the gRNA and other editing components are under the control of an inducible promoter, and editing is induced by providing conditions (e.g., temperature, addition of an inducing or repressing chemical) to induce editing.
- conditions e.g., temperature, addition of an inducing or repressing chemical
- the cells are allowed to grow to terminal size (e.g., normalization of the colonies) in the microwells and then can be flushed out of the microwells and pooled, then transferred to the cell retrieval unit 1014 or can be transferred back to a growth module 1004 for another round of editing.
- terminal size e.g., normalization of the colonies
- the cell retrieval unit 1014 e.g., normalization of the colonies
- there may be one or more additional steps such as cell recovery, medium exchange, cell concentration, etc., by, e.g., tangential flow filtration.
- selection/isolation or substantial isolation/incubation/editing and normalization modules may be the same module, where all processes are performed in the solid wall device, or selection and/or dilution may take place in a separate vessel before the cells are transferred to the solid wall isolation or substantial isolation/incubation/editing and normalization module (SWIIN module).
- SWIIN module solid wall isolation or substantial isolation/incubation/editing and normalization module
- the cells selected from the first round of editing are transformed by a second set of editing oligos (or other type of oligos) and the cycle is repeated until the cells have been transformed and edited by a desired number of, e.g., editing cassettes.
- the multi-module cell processing instrument 1000 exemplified in FIG. 10 is controlled by a processor 1042 configured to operate the instrument based on user input or is controlled by one or more scripts including at least one script associated with the reagent cartridge.
- the processor 1042 may control the timing, duration, and temperature of various processes, the dispensing of reagents, and other operations of the various modules of the automated multi-module cell processing instrument 1000 .
- a script or the processor may control the dispensing of cells, reagents, vectors, and editing oligonucleotides; which editing oligonucleotides are used for cell editing and in what order; the time, temperature and other conditions used in the recovery and expression module; the wavelength at which OD is read in the cell growth module, the target OD to which the cells are grown, and the target time at which the cells will reach the target OD.
- the processor may be programmed to notify a user (e.g., via an application to a smart phone or other device) as to the progress of the cells in the automated multi-module cell processing instrument.
- the process described may be recursive and multiplexed; that is, cells may go through the workflow described in relation to FIG. 10 , then the resulting edited culture may go through another (or several or many) rounds of additional editing (e.g., recursive editing) with different editing vectors.
- the cells from round 1 of editing may be diluted and an aliquot of the edited cells edited by editing vector A may be combined with editing vector B, an aliquot of the edited cells edited by editing vector A may be combined with editing vector C, an aliquot of the edited cells edited by editing vector A may be combined with editing vector D, and so on for a second round of editing.
- an aliquot of each of the double-edited cells may be subjected to a third round of editing, where, e.g., aliquots of each of the AB-, AC-, AD-edited cells are combined with additional editing vectors, such as editing vectors X, Y, and Z.
- double-edited cells AB may be combined with and edited by vectors X, Y, and Z to produce triple-edited edited cells ABX, ABY, and ABZ
- double-edited cells AC may be combined with and edited by vectors X, Y, and Z to produce triple-edited cells ACX, ACY, and ACZ
- double-edited cells AD may be combined with and edited by vectors X, Y, and Z to produce triple-edited cells ADX, ADY, and ADZ, and so on.
- many permutations and combinations of edits can be executed, leading to very diverse cell populations and cell libraries.
- “cure” is a process in which one or more vectors used in the prior round of editing is eliminated from the transformed cells.
- Curing can be accomplished by, e.g., cleaving the vector(s) using a curing plasmid thereby rendering the editing and/or engine vector (or single, combined vector) nonfunctional; diluting the vector(s) in the cell population via cell growth (that is, the more growth cycles the cells go through, the fewer daughter cells will retain the editing or engine vector(s)), or by, e.g., utilizing a heat-sensitive origin of replication on the editing or engine vector (or combined engine+editing vector).
- the conditions for curing will depend on the mechanism used for curing; that is, in this example, how the curing plasmid cleaves the editing and/or engine plasmid. For details of curing protocols useful in the present methods, modules and instruments, see U.S. Ser. No. 62/857,967, filed 6 Jun. 2019.
- the present disclosure provides automated editing methods, modules, instruments, and automated multi-module cell editing instruments for creating a library of cells that vary the expression, levels and/or activity of RNAs and/or proteins of interest in various cell types using various editing strategies, as described herein in more detail. Accordingly, the disclosure is intended to cover edited cell libraries created by the automated editing methods, automated multi-module cell editing instruments of the disclosure.
- These cell libraries may have different targeted edits, including but not limited to gene knockouts, gene knock-ins, insertions, deletions, single nucleotide edits, short tandem repeat edits, frameshifts, triplet codon expansion, and the like in cells of various organisms. These edits can be directed to coding or non-coding regions of the genome and are preferably rationally designed.
- the present disclosure provides automated editing methods, automated multi-module cell editing instruments for creating a library of cells that vary DNA-linked processes.
- the cell library may include individual cells having edits in DNA binding sites to interfere with DNA binding of regulatory elements that modulate expression of selected genes.
- cell libraries may include edits in genomic DNA that impact on cellular processes such as heterochromatin formation, switch-class recombination and VDJ recombination.
- the cell libraries are created using multiplexed editing of individual cells within a cell population, with multiple cells within a cell population are edited in a single round of editing, i.e., multiple changes within the cells of the cell library are in a single automated operation.
- the libraries that can be created in a single multiplexed automated operation can comprise as many as 500 edited cells, 1000 edited cells, 2000 edited cells, 5000 edited cells, 10,000 edited cells, 50,000 edited cells, 100,000 edited cells, 200,000 edited cells, 300,000 edited cells, 400,000 edited cells, 500,000 edited cells, 600,000 edited cells, 700,000 edited cells, 800,000 edited cells, 900,000 edited cells, 1,000,000 edited cells, 2,000,000 edited cells, 3,000,000 edited cells, 4,000,000 edited cells, 5,000,000 edited cells, 6,000,000 edited cells, 7,000,000 edited cells, 8,000,000 edited cells, 9,000,000 edited cells, 10,000,000 edited cells or more.
- the cell libraries are created using recursive editing of individual cells within a cell population, with edits being added to the individual cells in two or more rounds of editing.
- the use of recursive editing results in the amalgamation of two or more edits targeting two or more sites in the genome in individual cells of the library.
- the libraries that can be created in an automated recursive operation can comprise as many as 500 edited cells, 1000 edited cells, 2000 edited cells, 5000 edited cells, 10,000 edited cells, 50,000 edited cells, 100,000 edited cells, 200,000 edited cells, 300,000 edited cells, 400,000 edited cells, 500,000 edited cells, 600,000 edited cells, 700,000 edited cells, 800,000 edited cells, 900,000 edited cells, 1,000,000 edited cells, 2,000,000 edited cells, 3,000,000 edited cells, 4,000,000 edited cells, 5,000,000 edited cells, 6,000,000 edited cells, 7,000,000 edited cells, 8,000,000 edited cells, 9,000,000 edited cells, 10,000,000 edited cells or more.,
- recursive editing can be used to first create a cell phenotype, and then later rounds of editing used to reverse the phenotype and/or accelerate other cell properties.
- the cell library comprises edits for the creation of unnatural amino acids in a cell.
- the disclosure provides edited cell libraries having edits in one or more regulatory elements created using the automated editing methods, automated multi-module cell editing instruments of the disclosure.
- regulatory element refers to nucleic acid molecules that can influence the transcription and/or translation of an operably linked coding sequence in a particular environment and/or context. This term is intended to include all elements that promote or regulate transcription, and RNA stability including promoters, core elements required for basic interaction of RNA polymerase and transcription factors, upstream elements, enhancers, and response elements (see, e.g., Lewin, “Genes V” (Oxford University Press, Oxford) pages 847-873).
- Exemplary regulatory elements in prokaryotes include, but are not limited to, promoters, operator sequences and a ribosome binding sites. Regulatory elements that are used in eukaryotic cells may include, but are not limited to, promoters, enhancers, insulators, splicing signals and polyadenylation signals.
- the edited cell library includes rationally designed edits that are designed based on predictions of protein structure, expression and/or activity in a particular cell type.
- rational design may be based on a system-wide biophysical model of genome editing with a particular nuclease and gene regulation to predict how different editing parameters including nuclease expression and/or binding, growth conditions, and other experimental conditions collectively control the dynamics of nuclease editing. See, e.g., Farasat and Salis, PLoS Comput Biol., 29:12(1):e1004724 (2016).
- the present disclosure provides the creation of a library of edited cells with various rationally designed regulatory sequences created using the automated editing instrumentation, systems and methods of the invention.
- the edited cell library can include prokaryotic cell populations created using set of constitutive and/or inducible promoters, enhancer sequences, operator sequences and/or ribosome binding sites.
- the edited cell library can include eukaryotic sequences created using a set of constitutive and/or inducible promoters, enhancer sequences, operator sequences, and/or different Kozak sequences for expression of proteins of interest.
- the disclosure provides cell libraries including cells with rationally designed edits comprising one or more classes of edits in sequences of interest across the genome of an organism.
- the disclosure provides cell libraries including cells with rationally designed edits comprising one or more classes of edits in sequences of interest across a subset of the genome.
- the cell library may include cells with rationally designed edits comprising one or more classes of edits in sequences of interest across the exome, e.g., every or most every open reading frame of the genome.
- the cell library may include cells with rationally designed edits comprising one or more classes of edits in sequences of interest across the kinome.
- the cell library may include cells with rationally designed edits comprising one or more classes of edits in sequences of interest across the secretome.
- the cell library may include cells with rationally designed edits created to analyze various isoforms of proteins encoded within the exome, and the cell libraries can be designed to control expression of one or more specific isoforms, e.g., for transcriptome analysis.
- the cell libraries may comprise edits using randomized sequences, e.g., randomized promoter sequences, to reduce similarity between expression of one or more proteins in individual cells within the library.
- the promoters in the cell library can be constitutive, inducible or both to enable strong and/or titratable expression.
- the present disclosure provides automated editing methods, automated multi-module cell editing instruments for creating a library of cells comprising edits to identify optimum expression of a selected gene target.
- production of biochemicals through metabolic engineering often requires the expression of pathway enzymes, and the best production yields are not always achieved by the highest amount of the target pathway enzymes in the cell, but rather by fine-tuning of the expression levels of the individual enzymes and related regulatory proteins and/or pathways.
- expression levels of heterologous proteins sometimes can be experimentally adjusted for optimal yields.
- the present disclosure provides methods for optimizing cellular gene transcription.
- Gene transcription is the result of several distinct biological phenomena, including transcriptional initiation (RNAp recruitment and transcriptional complex formation), elongation (strand synthesis/extension), and transcriptional termination (RNAp detachment and termination).
- Cell libraries can be created using the automated editing methods, modules, instruments, and systems employing site-directed mutagenesis, i.e., when the amino acid sequence of a protein or other genomic feature may be altered by deliberately and precisely by mutating the protein or genomic feature.
- site-directed mutagenesis can be useful for various purposes, e.g., for determining protein function within cells, the identification of enzymatic active sites within cells, and the design of novel proteins.
- site-directed mutagenesis can be used in a multiplexed fashion to exchange a single amino acid in the sequence of a protein for another amino acid with different chemical properties. This allows one to determine the effect of a rationally designed or randomly generated mutation in individual cells within a cell population. See, e.g., Berg, et al. Biochemistry, Sixth Ed. (New York: W.H. Freeman and Company) (2007).
- edits can be made to individual cells within a cell library to substitute amino acids in binding sites, such as substitution of one or more amino acids in a protein binding site for interaction within a protein complex or substitution of one or more amino acids in enzymatic pockets that can accommodate a cofactor or ligand.
- This class of edits allows the creation of specific manipulations to a protein to measure certain properties of one or more proteins, including interaction with other cofactors, ligands, etc. within a protein complex.
- various edit types can be made to individual cells within a cell library using site specific mutagenesis for studying expression quantitative trait loci (eQTLs).
- eQTL is a locus that explains a fraction of the genetic variance of a gene expression phenotype.
- the libraries of the invention would be useful to evaluate and link eQTLs to actual diseased states.
- the edits introduced into the cell libraries of the disclosure may be created using rational design based on known or predicted structures of proteins. See, e.g., Chronopoulou and Labrou, Curr Protoc Protein Sci.; Chapter 26:Unit 26.6 (2011).
- site-directed mutagenesis can provide individual cells within a library with one or more site-directed edits, and preferably two or more site-directed edits (e.g., combinatorial edits) within a cell population.
- cell libraries of the disclosure are created using site-directed codon mutation “scanning” of all or substantially all of the codons in the coding region of a gene. In this fashion, individual edits of specific codons can be examined for loss-of-function or gain-of-function based on specific polymorphisms in one or more codons of the gene.
- These libraries can be a powerful tool for determining which genetic changes are silent or causal of a specific phenotype in a cell or cell population.
- the edits of the codons may be randomly generated or may be rationally designed based on known polymorphisms and/or mutations that have been identified in the gene to be analyzed.
- using these techniques on two or more genes in a single in a pathway in a cell may determine potential protein:protein interactions or redundancies in cell functions or pathways.
- alanine scanning can be used to determine the contribution of a specific residue to the stability or function of given protein. See, e.g., Lefevre, et al., Nucleic Acids Research, Volume 25(2):447-448 (1997). Alanine is often used in this codon scanning technique because of its non-bulky, chemically inert, methyl functional group that can mimic the secondary structure preferences that many of the other amino acids possess. Codon scanning can also be used to determine whether the side chain of a specific residue plays a significant role in cell function and/or activity. Sometimes other amino acids such as valine or leucine can be used in the creation of codon scanning cell libraries if conservation of the size of mutated residues is needed.
- cell libraries can be created using the automated editing methods, automated multi-module cell editing instruments of the invention to determine the active site of a protein such as an enzyme or hormone, and to elucidate the mechanism of action of one or more of these proteins in a cell library.
- Site-directed mutagenesis associated with molecular modeling studies can be used to discover the active site structure of an enzyme and consequently its mechanism of action. Analysis of these cell libraries can provide an understanding of the role exerted by specific amino acid residues at the active sites of proteins, in the contacts between subunits of protein complexes, on intracellular trafficking and protein stability/half-life in various genetic backgrounds.
- the cell libraries created using the automated editing methods and automated multi-module cell editing instruments of the disclosure may be saturation mutagenesis libraries, in which a single codon or set of codons is randomized to produce all possible amino acids at the position of a particular gene or genes of interest.
- These cell libraries can be particularly useful to generate variants, e.g., for directed evolution. See, e.g., Chica, et al., Current Opinion in Biotechnology 16 (4): 378-384 (2005); and Shivange, Current Opinion in Chemical Biology, 13 (1): 19-25 (2009).
- edits comprising different degenerate codons can be used to encode sets of amino acids in the individual cells in the libraries. Because some amino acids are encoded by more codons than others, the exact ratio of amino acids cannot be equal. In certain aspects, more restricted degenerate codons are used. ‘NNK’ and ‘NNS’ have the benefit of encoding all 20 amino acids, but still encode a stop codon 3% of the time. Alternative codons such as ‘NDT’, ‘DBK’ avoid stop codons entirely, and encode a minimal set of amino acids that still encompass all the main biophysical types (anionic, cationic, aliphatic hydrophobic, aromatic hydrophobic, hydrophilic, small).
- non-redundant saturation mutagenesis in which the most commonly used codon for a particular organism is used in the saturation mutagenesis editing process.
- the cell libraries created using the methods, automated multi-module cell editing instruments of the disclosure may be promoter swap cell libraries, which can be used, e.g., to increase or decrease expression of a gene of interest to optimize a metabolic or genetic pathway.
- the promoter swap cell library can be used to identify an increase or reduction in the expression of a gene that affects cell vitality or viability, e.g., a gene encoding a protein that impacts on the growth rate or overall health of the cells.
- the promoter swap cell library can be used to create cells having dependencies and logic between the promoters to create synthetic gene networks.
- the promoter swaps can be used to control cell to cell communication between cells of both homogeneous and heterogeneous (complex tissues) populations in nature.
- the cell libraries can utilize any given number of promoters that have been grouped together based upon exhibition of a range of expression strengths and any given number of target genes.
- the ladder of promoter sequences vary expression of at least one locus under at least one condition. This ladder is then systematically applied to a group of genes in the organism using the automated editing methods, automated multi-module cell editing instruments of the disclosure.
- the cell library formed using the automated editing processes, modules and systems of the disclosure include individual cells that are representative of a given promoter operably linked to one or more target genes of interest in an otherwise identical genetic background. Examples of non-automated editing strategies that can be modified to utilize the automated systems can be found, e.g., in U.S. Pat. No. 9,988,624.
- the promoter swap cell library is produced by editing a set of target genes to be operably linked to a pre-selected set of promoters that act as a “promoter ladder” for expression of the genes of interest.
- the cells are edited so that one or more individual genes of interest are edited to be operably linked with the different promoters in the promoter ladder.
- an endogenous promoter does not exist, its sequence is unknown, or it has been previously changed in some manner, the individual promoters of the promoter ladder can be inserted in front of the genes of interest.
- These produced cell libraries have individual cells with an individual promoter of the ladder operably linked to one or more target genes in an otherwise identical genetic context.
- the promoters are generally selected to result in variable expression across different loci, and may include inducible promoters, constitutive promoters, or both.
- the set of target genes edited using the promoter ladder can include all or most open reading frames (ORFs) in a genome, or a selected subset of the genome, e.g., the ORFs of the kinome or a secretome.
- the target genes can include coding regions for various isoforms of the genes, and the cell libraries can be designed to expression of one or more specific isoforms, e.g., for transcriptome analysis using various promoters.
- the set of target genes can also be genes known or suspected to be involved in a particular cellular pathway, e.g. a regulatory pathway or signaling pathway.
- the set of target genes can be ORFs related to function, by relation to previously demonstrated beneficial edits (previous promoter swaps or previous SNP swaps), by algorithmic selection based on epistatic interactions between previously generated edits, other selection criteria based on hypotheses regarding beneficial ORF to target, or through random selection.
- the target genes can comprise non-protein coding genes, including non-coding RNAs.
- Editing of other functional genetic elements can also be used to systematically vary the expression level of a set of target genes, and can be introduced using the methods, automated multi-module cell editing instruments of the disclosure.
- a population of cells is edited using a ladder of enhancer sequences, either alone or in combination with selected promoters or a promoter ladder, to create a cell library having various edits in these enhancer elements.
- a population of cells is edited using a ladder of ribosome binding sequences, either alone or in combination with selected promoters or a promoter ladder, to create a cell library having various edits in these ribosome binding sequences.
- a population of cells is edited to allow the attachment of various mRNA and/or protein stabilizing or destabilizing sequences to the 5′ or 3′ end, or at any other location, of a transcript or protein.
- a population of cells of a previously established cell line may be edited using the automated editing methods, modules, instruments, and systems of the disclosure to create a cell library to improve the function, health and/or viability of the cells.
- many industrial strains currently used for large scale manufacturing have been developed using random mutagenesis processes iteratively over a period of many years, sometimes decades. Unwanted neutral and detrimental mutations were introduced into strains along with beneficial changes, and over time this resulted in strains with deficiencies in overall robustness and key traits such as growth rates.
- mammalian cell lines continue to mutate through the passage of the cells over periods of time, and likewise these cell lines can become unstable and acquire traits that are undesirable.
- the automated editing methods, automated multi-module cell editing instruments of the disclosure can use editing strategies such as SNP and/or STR swapping, indel creation, or other techniques to remove or change the undesirable genome sequences and/or introducing new genome sequences to address the deficiencies while retaining the desirable properties of the cells.
- editing strategies such as SNP and/or STR swapping, indel creation, or other techniques to remove or change the undesirable genome sequences and/or introducing new genome sequences to address the deficiencies while retaining the desirable properties of the cells.
- the editing in the individual cells in the edited cell library can incorporate the inclusion of “landing pads” in an ectopic site in the genome (e.g., a CarT locus) to optimize expression, stability and/or control.
- “landing pads” in an ectopic site in the genome (e.g., a CarT locus) to optimize expression, stability and/or control.
- each library produced having individual cells comprising one or more edits is cultured and analyzed under one or more criteria (e.g., production of a chemical or product of interest).
- the cells possessing the specific criteria are then associated, or correlated, with one or more particular edits in the cell.
- criteria e.g., production of a chemical or product of interest.
- the present disclosure provides automated editing methods, modules, instruments and systems for creating a library of cells having “knock-out” (KO) or “knock-in” (KI) edits of various genes of interest.
- the disclosure is intended to cover edited cell libraries created by the automated editing methods, automated multi-module cell editing instruments of the disclosure that have one or more mutations that remove or reduce the expression of selected genes of interest to interrogate the effect of these edits on gene function in individual cells within the cell library.
- the cell libraries can be created using targeted gene KO (e.g., via insertion/deletion) or KOs (e.g., via homologous directed repair). For example, double strand breaks are often repaired via the non-homologous end joining DNA repair pathway. The repair is known to be error prone, and thus insertions and deletions may be introduced that can disrupt gene function.
- the edits are rationally designed to specifically affect the genes of interest, and individual cells can be created having a KI or KI of one or more locus of interest. Cells having a KO or KI of two or more loci of interest can be created using automated recursive editing of the disclosure.
- the KO or KI cell libraries are created using simultaneous multiplexed editing of cells within a cell population, and multiple cells within a cell population are edited in a single round of editing, i.e., multiple changes within the cells of the cell library are in a single automated operation.
- the cell libraries are created using recursive editing of individual cells within a cell population, and results in the amalgamation of multiple edits of two or more sites in the genome into single cells.
- cell libraries are created using the automated editing methods, automated multi-module cell editing instruments of the disclosure by systematic introducing or substituting single nucleotide polymorphisms (“SNPs”) into the genomes of the individual cells to create a “SNP swap” cell library.
- SNPs single nucleotide polymorphisms
- the SNP swapping methods of the present disclosure include both the addition of beneficial SNPs, and removing detrimental and/or neutral SNPs.
- the SNP swaps may target coding sequences, non-coding sequences, or both.
- a cell library is created using the automated editing methods, modules, instruments, instruments, and systems of the disclosure by systematic introducing or substituting short tandem repeats (“STR”) into the genomes of the individual cells to create an “STR swap” cell library.
- the STR swapping methods of the present disclosure include both the addition of beneficial STRs, and removing detrimental and/or neutral STRs.
- the STR swaps may target coding sequences, non-coding sequences, or both.
- the SNP and/or STR swapping used to create the cell library is multiplexed, and multiple cells within a cell population are edited in a single round of editing, i.e., multiple changes within the cells of the cell library are in a single automated operation.
- the SNP and/or STR swapping used to create the cell library is recursive, and results in the amalgamation of multiple beneficial sequences and/or the removal of detrimental sequences into single cells. Multiple changes can be either a specific set of defined changes or a partly randomized, combinatorial library of mutations. Removal of detrimental mutations and consolidation of beneficial mutations can provide immediate improvements in various cellular processes. Removal of genetic burden or consolidation of beneficial changes into a strain with no genetic burden also provides a new, robust starting point for additional random mutagenesis that may enable further improvements.
- SNP swapping overcomes fundamental limitations of random mutagenesis approaches as it is not a random approach, but rather the systematic introduction or removal of individual mutations across cells.
- RNA splicing is the process during which introns are excised and exons are spliced together to create the mRNA that is translated into a protein.
- the precise recognition of splicing signals by cellular machinery is critical to this process.
- a population of cells is edited using a systematic editing to known and/or predicted splice donor and/or acceptor sites in various loci to create a library of splice site variants of various genes. Such editing can help to elucidate the biological relevance of various isoforms of genes in a cellular context.
- Sequences for rational design of splicing sites of various coding regions can be predicted using analysis techniques such as those found in Nalla and Rogan, Hum Mutat, 25:334-342 (2005); Divina, et al., Eur J Hum Genet, 17:759-765 (2009); Desmet, et el., Nucleic Acids Res, 37:e67 (2009); Faber, et al., BMC Bioinformatics, 12(suppl 4):S2 (2011).
- the present disclosure provides for the creation of cell libraries using the automated editing methods, modules, instruments and systems of the disclosure, where the libraries are created by swapping start and stop codon variants throughout the genome of an organism or for a selected subset of coding regions in the genome, e.g., the kinome or secretome.
- individual cells will have one or more start or stop codons replacing the native start or stop codon for one or more gene of interest.
- ATG ATG
- GAG GTG
- UUG TTG
- the cell library may include individual cells having substitutions for the native start codons for one or more genes of interest.
- the present disclosure provides for automated creation of a cell library by replacing ATG start codons with TTG in front of selected genes of interest. In other aspects, the present disclosure provides for automated creation of a cell library by replacing ATG start codons with GTG. In other aspects, the present disclosure provides for automated creation of a cell library by replacing GTG start codons with ATG. In other aspects, the present disclosure provides for automated creation of a cell library by replacing GTG start codons with TTG. In other aspects, the present disclosure provides for automated creation of a cell library by replacing TTG start codons with ATG. In other aspects, the present disclosure provides for automated creation of a cell library by replacing TTG start codons with GTG.
- typical stop codons for S. cerevisiae and mammals are TAA (UAA) and TGA (UGA), respectively.
- the typical stop codon for monocotyledonous plants is TGA (UGA)
- insects and E. coli commonly use TAA (UAA) as the stop codon (Dalphin. et al., Nucl. Acids Res., 24: 216-218 (1996)).
- the cell library may include individual cells having substitutions for the native stop codons for one or more genes of interest.
- the present disclosure provides for automated creation of a cell library by replacing TAA stop codons with TAG. In other aspects, the present disclosure provides for automated creation of a cell library by replacing TAA stop codons with TGA. In other aspects, the present disclosure provides for automated creation of a cell library by replacing TGA stop codons with TAA. In other aspects, the present disclosure provides for automated creation of a cell library by replacing TGA stop codons with TAG. In other aspects, the present disclosure provides for automated creation of a cell library by replacing TAG stop codons with TAA. In other aspects, the present invention teaches automated creation of a cell library by replacing TAG stop codons with TGA.
- One mechanism for identifying optimum termination of a pre-spliced mRNA of one or more genes of interest is through the creation of a “terminator swap” cell library, in which the cells comprise genetic edits that have specific terminator sequences linked to one or more genes of interest.
- the cell libraries created using the methods, modules, instruments and systems of the disclosure may be terminator swap cell libraries, which can be used, e.g., to affect mRNA stability by releasing transcripts from sites of synthesis.
- the terminator swap cell library can be used to identify an increase or reduction in the efficiency of transcriptional termination and thus accumulation of unspliced pre-mRNA (e.g., West and Proudfoot, Mol Cell.; 33(3-9); 354-364 (2009)) and/or 3′ end processing (e.g., West, et al., Mol Cell. 29(5):600-10 (2008)).
- unspliced pre-mRNA e.g., West and Proudfoot, Mol Cell.; 33(3-9); 354-364 (2009)
- 3′ end processing e.g., West, et al., Mol Cell. 29(5):600-10 (2008).
- the edits may edit a combination of edits to multiple terminators that are associated with a gene. Additional amino acids may also be added to the ends of proteins to determine the effect on the protein length on terminators.
- the cell libraries can utilize any given number of edits of terminators that have been selected for the terminator ladder based upon exhibition of a range of activity and any given number of target genes.
- the ladder of terminator sequences vary expression of at least one locus under at least one condition. This ladder is then systematically applied to a group of genes in the organism using the automated editing methods, modules, instruments and systems of the disclosure.
- the present disclosure provides for the creation of cell libraries using the automated editing methods, modules, instruments and systems of disclosure, where the libraries are created to edit terminator signals in one or more regions in the genome in the individual cells of the library.
- Transcriptional termination in eukaryotes operates through terminator signals that are recognized by protein factors associated with the RNA polymerase II.
- the cell library may contain individual eukaryotic cells with edits in genes encoding polyadenylation specificity factor (CPSF) and cleavage stimulation factor (CstF) and or gene encoding proteins recruited by CPSF and CstF factors to termination sites.
- CPSF polyadenylation specificity factor
- CstF cleavage stimulation factor
- Rho-independent and Rho-dependent termination mediate transcriptional termination.
- the cell library may contain individual prokaryotic cells with edits in genes encoding proteins that affect the binding, efficiency and/or activity of these termination pathways.
- the present disclosure provides methods of selecting termination sequences (“terminators”) with optimal properties.
- the present disclosure teaches provides methods for introducing and/or editing one or more terminators and/or generating variants of one or more terminators within a host cell, which exhibit a range of activity.
- a particular combination of terminators can be grouped together as a terminator ladder, and cell libraries of the disclosure include individual cells that are representative of terminators operably linked to one or more target genes of interest in an otherwise identical genetic background. Examples of non-automated editing strategies that can be modified to utilize the automated instruments can be found, e.g., in U.S. Pat. No. 9,988,624 to Serber et al., entitled “Microbial strain improvement by a HTP genomic engineering platform.”
- the terminator swap cell library is produced by editing a set of target genes to be operably linked to a pre-selected set of terminators that act as a “terminator ladder” for expression of the genes of interest.
- the cells are edited so that the endogenous promoter is operably linked to the individual genes of interest are edited with the different promoters in the promoter ladder.
- the individual promoters of the promoter ladder can be inserted in front of the genes of interest.
- the terminator ladder can be used to more generally affect termination of all or most ORFs in a genome, or a selected subset of the genome, e.g., the ORFs of a kinome or a secretome.
- the set of target genes can also be genes known or suspected to be involved in a particular cellular pathway, e.g. a regulatory pathway or signaling pathway.
- the set of target genes can be ORFs related to function, by relation to previously demonstrated beneficial edits (previous promoter swaps or previous SNP swaps), by algorithmic selection based on epistatic interactions between previously generated edits, other selection criteria based on hypotheses regarding beneficial ORF to target, or through random selection.
- the target genes can comprise non-protein coding genes, including non-coding RNAs.
- the model system comprised E. coli cells transformed with an engine vector, where the engine vector comprised a coding sequence for a MAD nuclease (i.e., MAD 4 or MAD 7 nuclease) under the control of the pL temperature inducible promoter, a chloramphenicol resistance marker, and the ⁇ Red recombineering system under the control of the pBAD promoter (induced by addition of arabinose to the growth medium).
- MAD nuclease i.e., MAD 4 or MAD 7 nuclease
- FIGS. 11A and 11B depict an exemplary engine vector ( FIG. 11A ) and editing vector ( FIG.
- the exemplary engine vector 1110 (p197) comprises an origin of replication 1112 , and a promoter 1114 driving expression of the gene coding for the c1857 repressor 1116 which regulates the pL promoter.
- a first pL promoter in this exemplary embodiment drives the transcription of the gRNA on the editing vector as described in relation to FIG. 11B below, and a second pL promoter 1118 on the engine vector drives expression of the nuclease 1120 .
- the promoter driving nuclease 1120 may be an inducible or a constitutive promoter; however, the tightest regulation of the nucleic acid-guided nuclease system is achieved by using an inducible promoter to drive expression of the nuclease as well as the guide nucleic acid. Again, like inducible promoters and different inducible promoters may be used to drive the transcription of the guide nucleic acid and the nuclease.
- the pL promoter can be regulated (e.g., repressed or induced) by the thermolabile c1857 repressor 1116 which is active at permissive temperatures (e.g., 30° C.) and inactive at higher temperatures (e.g., 42° C.). The regulation of the pL promoter is shown in more detail in relation to FIG. 1C above.
- the engine vector in FIG. 11A further comprises a pBAD promoter 1140 driving expression of the components of the ⁇ Red recombineering system 1142 .
- the pBAD promoter like the pL promoter, is an inducible promoter, where the pBAD promoter is regulated (induced) by the addition of arabinose to the growth medium.
- a recombineering system such as the ⁇ Red recombineering system is provided as a component of the nucleic acid-guided nuclease editing system to repair the DNA breaks that occur during editing.
- the cells to be edited may already comprise a recombineering system (e.g., episomally, integrated into the cellular genome, or naturally).
- a recombineering system e.g., episomally, integrated into the cellular genome, or naturally.
- the ⁇ Red recombineering system is exemplified here, it should be understood that other recombineering systems may be employed.
- cells-such as yeast, plant and animal cells-do not require a recombineering system equivalent to the ⁇ Red recombineering system to repair the DNA breaks that result from editing.
- the nucleic acid-guided nuclease editing components for, e.g., yeast, plant and animal cells do not need to include a heterologous recombineering system.
- exemplary engine vector 1110 comprises a promoter 1150 driving expression of a chloramphenicol selectable marker 1152 .
- the engine vector and all other vectors or constructs used in the disclosed method comprise appropriate control elements (e.g., polyadenylation signals, enhancers) operably-linked to the nucleic acid-guided nuclease editing system components.
- FIG. 11B depicts an exemplary editing vector 1130 (pLFORGE).
- Editing vector 1130 comprises an origin of replication 1132 , and a pL promoter 1134 driving expression of an editing cassette 1136 .
- the editing cassette comprises a coding sequence for a gRNA 1144 , a spacer 1146 , and a donor DNA 1158 (comprising homology arms flanking a desired edit to be made to the target sequence).
- Editing vector 1130 also comprises a promoter 1154 driving expression of a carbenicillin selectable marker 1156 .
- FIGS. 11A and 11B depict exemplary engine and editing vectors, respectively, but it should be recognized by one of ordinary skill in the art given the guidance of the present description that all elements of the nucleic acid-guided nuclease editing system may be contained on a single plasmid, or the elements shown on the engine and editing vectors of FIGS. 11A and 11B may reside on a different vector than shown.
- the pBAD promoter and ⁇ Red recombineering system may be contained on the editing vector rather than the engine vector; likewise, the gene for the c1857 repressor may be contained on the editing vector rather than the engine vector.
- FIG. 12 is a bar graph showing the transformation efficiencies observed for galK gRNA targeting cassettes under a variety of promoters. Transformation efficiency of uninduced promoters provides a proxy for promoter leakiness. If there is high basal expression of gRNA (e.g., “leakiness”), there will be low CFU. If there is a low basal expression of gRNA (e.g., tight regulation), there will be high CFU. The non-target gRNAs experiment was performed with a pool of cassettes designed to target inactive PAM sequences that are unable to promote gRNA and nuclease binding and cleavage.
- gRNA e.g., “leakiness”
- a cassette targeting galK with a TTTC PAM and a spacer configured to make a stop codon insertion at amino acid D70 was cloned downstream of the promoter. Plasmid concentrations were normalized to 50 ng/L and transformed in equal cell volumes. CFU from serial dilution platings were used to derive the transformation efficiencies expressed as CFU/g.
- the J23119 promoter is a constitutive promoter, the pL promoter is inducible by high temperature, the pBAD promoter is induced by the presence of arabinose in the growth medium, and the sigma32 promoter is induced in stationary phase cells. For the MAD7 nuclease, the sigma32 promoter shows leaky expression, while both the pL and pBAD promoters are tightly repressed.
- FIG. 13 is a graph showing the effects of thermal induction on cell viability.
- a pool of cassettes were designed to target an inactive PAM sequence.
- Cells were diluted 1/50 v:v into microtiter plates containing 200 ⁇ L LB+chlor/carb. Diluted cultures were induced for 1 hour at the indicated temperatures before shifting back to 30° C. with continuous shaking in an Infinite M Nano+plate reader. To corresponds to the time of the induction step and growth was monitored by measuring the OD600 at 10 minute intervals. Note that high temperature (42° C.) induction has no impact on cell viability or growth rate.
- FIG. 14 shows the results of pooled induction experiments using a single sequence verified editing cassette that targets the galK locus and introduces a stop codon at amino acid D70. Following a three-hour outgrowth, cells were either induced at 42° C. for 15 minutes or retained at 30° C. prior to serial dilution plating. CFU/mL was calculated based on the plating volumes. For reference the dashed line in FIG. 14 shows the typical CFU obtained in an equivalent experiment using the constitutive J23119 promoter (data not shown). As can be seen, the absence of induction (i.e., the absence of editing) enables high efficiency transformation (10-100 fold) due to the lack of toxic dsDNA breaks.
- FIG. 15 shows the growth profiles of randomly picked variants from a silent PAM mutation (SPM) library.
- SPM silent PAM mutation
- This 500-member library targets regions located across the entire E. coli organism and integrates synonymous mutations that have no expected fitness effects. Colonies were picked from agar plates of uninduced transformed cells. Cells were picked from an agar plate and grown up in 200 ⁇ L LB+chlor/carb overnight in a 96-well microtiter plate format. 10 ⁇ L of the well content of the parent microtiter plate was then transferred to two replica daughter microtiter plates that received either no induction (top) or gRNA and nuclease induction (via the pL inducible promoter) for 1 hour at 42° C. (bottom).
- top no induction
- gRNA and nuclease induction via the pL inducible promoter
- the well maps show the relative OD at 6 hours.
- the inserts show examples of the full growth curves for the indicated wells as a reference.
- the replica wells represent growth observed from the same cassette design with or without gRNA induction. While the majority of the wells for the no-induction plate show normal growth profiles, the induced plate shows that a large fraction of the gRNA designs are still active when induced, indicated by a large lag phase before the cells reach exponential growth. That is, the actively-editing cells have reduced viability due to DNA damage such that many in the colonies die off, and those edited cells that do survive grow slowly to begin with as the cellular machinery works to repair the edit. This characteristic of edited cells can be exploited to screen for active editing in a high-throughput manner.
- the beads were allowed to dry for 2 minutes, 50 ⁇ L 0.5 ⁇ TE pH 8.0 was added to the tubes, and the beads were vortexed to mix. The slurry was incubated at room temperature for 2 minutes, then subjected to the magnetic field for 2 minutes. The eluate was removed and the DNA quantified.
- a second amplification procedure was carried out using a dilution of the eluate from the SPRI cleanup. PCR was performed under the following conditions: 95° C. for 1 minute; 18 rounds of 95° C. for 30 seconds/72° C. for 2.5 minutes; with a final hold at 72° C. for 5 minutes. Amplicons were checked on a 2% agarose gel and pools with the cleanest output(s) were identified. Amplification products appearing to have heterodimers or chimeras were not used.
- Backbone Preparation A 10-fold serial dilution series of purified backbone was performed, and each of the diluted backbone series was amplified under the following conditions: 95° C. for 1 minute; then 30 rounds of 95° C. for 30 seconds/60° C. for 1.5 minutes/72° C. for 2.5 minutes; with a final hold at 72° C. for 5 minutes. After amplification, the amplified backbone was subjected to SPRI cleanup as described above in relation to the cassettes. The backbone was eluted into 100 ⁇ L ddH 2 O and quantified before isothermal nucleic acid assembly.
- Isothermal Nucleic Acid Assembly 150 ng backbone DNA was combined with 100 ng cassette DNA. An equal volume of 2 ⁇ isothermal assembly master mix was added, and the reaction was incubated for 45 minutes at 50° C. After assembly, the assembled backbone and cassettes were subjected to SPRI cleanup, as described above.
- Transformation with Engine Vector 1 ⁇ L of the engine vector DNA (comprising a coding sequence for MAD7 nuclease under the control of the pL inducible promoter, a chloramphenicol resistance gene, and the ⁇ Red recombineering system) was added to 50 ⁇ L EC1 strain E. coli cells. The transformed cells were plated on LB plates with 25 ⁇ g/mL chloramphenicol (chlor) and incubated overnight to accumulate clonal (or substantially clonal) isolates.
- the engine vector DNA comprising a coding sequence for MAD7 nuclease under the control of the pL inducible promoter, a chloramphenicol resistance gene, and the ⁇ Red recombineering system
- a colony was picked, grown overnight in LB+25 ⁇ g/mL chlor, and glycerol stocks were prepared from the saturated overnight culture by adding 500 ⁇ L 50% glycerol to 1000 ⁇ L culture.
- the stocks of EC1 comprising the engine vector were frozen at ⁇ 80° C.
- Transformation with Editing Vector A 1 mL aliquot of a freshly-grown overnight culture of EC1 cells transformed with the engine vector was added to a 250 mL flask containing 100 mL LB/SOB+25 ⁇ g/mL chlor medium. The cells were grown to 0.4-0.7 OD, and cell growth was halted by transferring the culture to ice for 10 minutes. The cells were pelleted at 8000 ⁇ g in a JA-18 rotor for 5 minutes, washed 3 ⁇ with 50 mL ice cold ddH 2 0 or 10% glycerol and pelleted at 8000 ⁇ g in JA-18 rotor for 5 minutes.
- the washed cells were resuspended in 5 mL ice cold 10% glycerol and aliquoted into 200 L portions. Optionally at this point the glycerol stocks could be stored at ⁇ 80° C. for later use.
- 20 ⁇ L of the prepared editing vector isothermal nucleic acid assembly reaction was added to 30 ⁇ L chilled water along with 10 ⁇ L E Vloni® (Lucigen, Middleton, Wis.) supreme competent cells. An aliquot of the transformed cells were spot plated to check the transformation efficiency, where >100 ⁇ coverage was required to continue.
- the transformed E Cloni® cells were outgrown in 25 mL SOB+100 ⁇ g/mL carbenicillin (carb).
- Glycerol stocks were generated from the saturated culture by adding 500 ⁇ L 50% glycerol to 1000 ⁇ L saturated overnight culture. The stocks were frozen at ⁇ 80° C. This step is optional, providing a ready stock of the cloned editing library. Alternatively, isothermal or another assembly of the editing cassettes and the vector backbone can be performed before each editing experiment.
- Transformation 100 ng of the editing vector cloned library or editing vector isothermal nucleic acid assembly reaction was transformed by electroporation into 100 ⁇ L competent EC1 cells containing the engine vector.
- the electroporator was set to 2400 V in 2 mm cuvette. Following transformation, the cells were allowed to recover for 3 hours in SOB medium. A 10-fold dilution series of recovered cells (in H 2 O) was spot plated and the resulting CFU counts/dilution ratios were used to calculate transformation efficiency.
- Plating and Colony Arraying 100 ⁇ L of the appropriate dilution was plated on LB medium+25 ⁇ g/mL chlor and grown at 30° C. overnight. Colonies were picked and grown overnight to saturation at 30° C. in 96-well microtiter plates.
- a replicator was used to transfer colonies in wells from the overnight growth to 200 ⁇ L fresh SOB+1% arabinose in replicate 96-well microtiter plates. The replicator transfers approximately 1-2 L per well resulting in a 100-fold dilution for outgrowth. The microtiter plates were incubated at 250 rpm shaking for 3-4 hours to allow the cells to reach mid-log phase. The plates were then transferred to a static incubator at 42° C. and incubated for 2 hours, then placed in a 30° C. incubator for 1 hour to recover. At this point, the replicate cells were ready for genomic prep and were validated via sequencing analysis. As described in relation to FIG. 2B , additional replica plates of fresh SOB without arabinose may be used to enable functional deconvolution of inactive cut designs from the population.
- Transformation 100 ng of the editing vector cloned library or isothermal nucleic acid assembly reaction was transformed by electroporation into 100 ⁇ L competent EC1 cells containing the engine vector.
- the electroporator was set to 2400 V in 2 mm cuvette. Following transformation, the cells were allowed to recover for 3 hours in SOB medium. A 10-fold dilution series of recovered cells (in H 2 O) was spot plated and the resulting CFU counts/dilution ratios were used to calculate transformation efficiency.
- Plating and Colony Arraying 100 ⁇ L of the appropriate dilution was plated on LB medium+25 ⁇ g/mL chlor and grown at 30° C. overnight. Colonies were picked and grown overnight to saturation in 1 mL SOB containing 25 ⁇ g/mL chlor and 100 ⁇ g/mL carb at 30° C. in 96-well microtiter plates.
- a replicator was used to transfer colonies in wells from the overnight growth to 200 ⁇ L fresh SOB without arabinose in replicate 96-well microtiter plates. The replicator transfers approximately 1-2 L per well resulting in a 100-fold dilution for outgrowth. The replicate microtiter plates were incubated at 250 rpm shaking for 3-4 hours to allow the cells to reach mid-log growth. The plates were then transferred to a static incubator at 42° C. and incubated for 2 hours, then placed in a 30° C. incubator for 1 hour to recover.
- the replicator was then used to transfer cells from the replicate microtiter plates to agar plates with LB medium+g/mL chlor/100 ⁇ g/mL carb and allowed to grow overnight.
- Wells with active gRNAs were identified and 50 ⁇ L of cells from these colonies from the original 96-well microtiter plate were re-arrayed into “functionally-corrected” plates (e.g., the cells identified as having functional gRNAs were transferred (cherry picked) into a 96-well plate).
- Transformation 100 ng of the editing vector cloned library or isothermal nucleic acid assembly reaction was transformed by electroporation into 100 ⁇ L competent EC1 cells containing the engine vector.
- the electroporator was set to 2400 V in 2 mm cuvette. Following transformation, the cells were allowed to recover for 3 hours in SOB medium. A 10-fold dilution series of recovered cells (in H 2 O) was spot plated and the resulting CFU counts/dilution ratios were used to calculate transformation efficiency.
- Plating and Colony Arraying 100 ⁇ L of the appropriate dilution was plated on LB medium+25 ⁇ g/mL chlor and grown at 30° C. overnight. Colonies were picked and grown overnight to saturation in 1 mL SOB containing 25 ⁇ g/mL chlor and 100 ⁇ g/mL carb at 30° C. in 96-well microtiter plates.
- a replicator was used to transfer colonies in wells from the overnight growth to 200 ⁇ L fresh SOB without arabinose in replicate 96-well microtiter plates. The replicator transfers approximately 1-2 L per well resulting in a 100-fold dilution for outgrowth. The replicate microtiter plates were incubated at 250 rpm shaking for 3-4 hours to allow the cells to reach mid-log growth. The plates were then transferred to a static incubator at 42° C. and incubated for 2 hours, then placed in a 30° C. incubator for 1 hour to recover.
- the replicator was then used to transfer cells from the replicate microtiter plates to plates with LB medium+25 g/mL chlor/100 ⁇ g/mL carb and allowed to grow overnight.
- Wells with active gRNAs were identified and 50 ⁇ L of cells from these colonies from the original 96-well microtiter plate were re-arrayed into “functionally-corrected” plates (e.g., the cells identified as having functional gRNAs were transferred into a 96-well plate).
- Library Re-amplification, Cloning, and Validation Cells identified as having functional gRNAs were pooled and DNA was extracted and isolated. Serial dilutions were made of the isolated DNA, and amplification was conducted with primers designed to amplify the editing cassettes.
- PCR was performed under the following conditions: 95° C. for 1 minute; 18 rounds of 95° C. for 30 seconds/60° C. for 30 seconds/72° C. for 2.5 minutes; with a final hold at 72° C. for 5 minutes. Amplicons were checked on a 1% agarose gel and pools with the cleanest output(s) were identified. The amplified cassettes were mini-prepped and eluted into 50 ⁇ L ddH 2 O. Next, an isothermal nucleic acid assembly reaction containing 150 ng backbone DNA with 100 ng cassette inserts was performed.
- Transformation 100 ng of the editing vector cloned library or isothermal nucleic acid assembly reaction was transformed by electroporation into 100 ⁇ L competent EC1 cells containing the engine vector.
- the electroporator was set to 2400 V in 2 mm cuvette. Following transformation, the cells were allowed to recover for 3 hours in SOB medium. A 10-fold dilution series of recovered cells (in H 2 0) was spot plated and the resulting CFU counts/dilution ratios were used to calculate transformation efficiency.
- Plating and Colony Arraying 100 ⁇ L of the appropriate dilution was plated on LB agar medium containing 25 ⁇ g/mL chlor and +1% arabinose and grown at 30° C. for 6-8 hours.
- the cells may be grown in liquid culture in LB medium+25 ⁇ g/mL chlor at 30° C. to saturation and diluted to the appropriate concentration before plating on LB agar medium containing 25 ⁇ g/mL chlor+1% arabinose and grown at 30° C. for 6-8 hours. Following the 6-8 hour growth, the temperature of the plate was adjusted to 42° C. and the plates were incubated for two hours. The temperature was then adjusted back to 30° C. and the cells were allowed to recover overnight.
- Edited Cell Identification Small-size colonies were identified. The small colony-size phenotype indicates cell viability was compromised during the induced-editing procedure. Efficient recovery of edited cells from the initial pool was accomplished by identifying and picking small colonies and arraying cells from these small colonies onto a 96-well plate to create a library of edited cells, or the cells from the colonies were pooled generating highly-edited cell populations for recursive editing. Editing was assessed/validated by sequencing. It was found that 85% of the small colonies were edited cells.
- Example 7 Assessing Loading and Normalization of E. coli in a Solid Wall Device
- Electrocompetent E. coli cells were transformed with a cloned library, an isothermal assembled library, or a process control sgRNA plasmid (escapee surrogate) as described in Examples 2-5 above.
- the E. coli strain carried the appropriate endonuclease and lambda red components and editing induction system (e.g., on an engine plasmid or integrated into the bacterial genome or a combination). Transformations routinely used 150 ng of plasmid DNA (or isothermal nucleic acid assembly reactions) with 150 ng of pL sgRNA backbone DNA. Following electroporation, the cells were allowed to recover in 3 mL SOB and incubated at 30° C. with shaking for 3 hours.
- samples were also processed with the solid plating protocol (see Example 10 above), so as to compare “normalization” in the sold wall device with the standard benchtop process.
- the 0.2 ⁇ m filter forming the bottom of the microwells was treated with a 0.1% TWEEN solution to effect proper spreading/distribution of the cells into the microwells of the solid wall device.
- the filters were placed into a Swinnex Filter Holder (47 mm, Millipore®, SX0004700) and 3 mL of a solution with 0.85% NaCl, and 0.1% TWEEN was pulled through the solid wall device and filter through using a vacuum.
- the transformed cells were diluted and a 3 mL volume of the diluted cells was processed through the TWEEN-treated solid wall device and filter, again using a vacuum.
- the number of successfully transformed cells was expected to be approximately 1.0E+06 to 1.0E+08, with the goal of loading approximately 10,000 transformed cells into the current 47 mm permeable-bottom solid wall device (having ⁇ 30,000 wells).
- Serial dilutions of 10 ⁇ 1 , 10 ⁇ 2 , and 10 ⁇ 3 were prepared, then 100 ⁇ L volumes of each of these dilutions were combined with 3 mL 0.85% NaCl, and the samples were loaded onto solid wall devices.
- Each permeable-bottom solid wall device was then removed from the Swinnex filter holder and transferred to an LB agar plate containing carbenicillin (100 ⁇ g/mL), chloramphenicol (25 ⁇ g/mL) and arabinose (1% final concentration).
- the solid wall devices were placed metal side “up,” so that the permeable-bottom membrane was touching the surface of the agar such that the nutrients from the plate could travel up through the filter “bottom” of the wells.
- the solid wall devices on the LB agar plates were incubated for 9 hours at 30° C., at 42° C. for 2 hours, then returned to incubation at 30° C., for 12-16 hour, and, in another experiment for 36-40 hours.
- the perforated disks and filters were removed from the supporting nutrient source (in this case an agar plate) and were photographed with a focused, “transilluminating” light source so that the number and distribution of loaded microwells on the solid wall device could be assessed (data not shown).
- the filter was transferred to a labeled sterile 100 mm petri dish which contained 15 mL of sterile 0.85% NaCl, then the petri dish was placed in a shaking incubator set to 30° C./80 RPM to gently remove the cells from the filter and resuspend the cells in the 0.85% NaCl.
- the cells were allowed cells to shake for 15 minutes, then were transferred to a sterile tube, e.g., a 50 mL conical centrifuge tube.
- a sterile tube e.g., a 50 mL conical centrifuge tube.
- the OD600 of the cell suspension was measured and at this point, the cells can be processed in different ways depending on the purpose of the study. For example, if the plasmids or libraries are designed to target a sugar metabolism pathway gene such as galK, then the resuspended cells can be spread onto MacConkey agar plates containing galactose (1% final concentration) and the appropriate antibiotics. On this differential medium, colonies that are the result of successfully-edited cells are expected to be phenotypically white in color, whereas unedited colonies are red in color.
- This red/white phenotype can then be used to assess the percentage of edited cells and the extent of normalization of edited and unedited cells.
- the results of one experiment are shown below in Table 6. In all replicates, the transformed cells were allowed to grow in the solid wall devices for 9 hours at 30° C., 2 hours at 42° C., and overnight at 30° C.
- FIG. 16 is a graph showing the extent of normalization of cells (% edited cells) for different dilutions of transformed cells, and no treatment with TWEEN vs. pre-treatment with TWEEN vs. pre-treatment with TWEEN+TWEEN in the buffer when loading the cells into the microwells of the solid wall device.
- a standard plating protocol SPP was conducted in parallel with the solid wall isolation experiments as a benchmark (first bar on the left in the graph). Note that the percentage of edits for the standard plating protocol was approximately 27.5%, and the percentage of edits for two replicates of the 10 ⁇ 3 dilution of cells with pre-treatment with TWEEN was approximately 20% and 26%, respectively.
- Example 8 Isolation of Yeast Colonies in a Solid Wall Device
- Electrocompetent Saccharomyces cerevisiae cells were prepared as follows: The afternoon before transformation was to occur, 10 mL of YPAD was inoculated with the selected Saccharomyces cerevisiae strain. The culture was shaken at 250 RPM and 30° C. overnight. The next day, 100 mL of YPAD was added to a 250-mL baffled flask and inoculated with the overnight culture (around 2 mL of overnight culture) until the OD600 reading reached 0.3+/ ⁇ 0.05. The culture was placed in the 30° C. incubator shaking at 250 RPM and allowed to grow for 4-5 hours, with the OD checked every hour.
- the cells were electrocompetent and could be transformed with a cloned library, an isothermal assembled library, or process control sgRNA plasmids.
- a required number of 2-mm gap electroporation cuvettes were prepared by labeling the cuvettes and then chilling on ice. The appropriate plasmid—or DNA mixture—was added to each corresponding cuvette and placed back on ice. 100 ⁇ L of electrocompetent cells was transferred to each labelled cuvette, and each sample was electroporated using appropriate electroporator conditions. 900 ⁇ L of room temperature YPAD Sorbitol media was then added to each cuvette.
- the cell suspension was transferred to a 14 mL culture tube and then shaken at 30° C., 250 RPM for 3 hours. After a 3 hour recovery, 9 mL of YPAD containing the appropriate antibiotic, e.g., geneticin or Hygromycin B, was added.
- the appropriate antibiotic e.g., geneticin or Hygromycin B
- the transformed cells were processed in parallel in the solid wall device and the standard plating protocol (see Example 10 above), so as to compare “normalization” in the solid wall device with the standard benchtop process.
- the 0.45 ⁇ m filter forming the bottom of the microwells was treated with a 0.1% TWEEN solution to effect proper spreading/distribution of the cells into the microwells of the solid wall device.
- the filters were placed into a Swinnex Filter Holder (47 mm, Millipore®, SX0004700) and 3 mL of a solution with 0.85% NaCl and 0.1% TWEEN was pulled through the solid wall device and filter through using a vacuum.
- Different TWEEN concentrations were evaluated, and it was determined that for a 47 mm diameter solid wall device with a 0.45 ⁇ m filter forming the bottom of the microwells, a pre-treatment of the solid wall device+filter with 0.1% TWEEN was preferred (data not shown).
- the transformed cells were diluted and a 3 mL volume of the diluted cells was processed through the TWEEN-treated solid wall device and filter, again using a vacuum.
- the number of successfully transformed cells was expected to be approximately 1.0E+06 to 1.0E+08, with the goal of loading approximately 10,000 transformed cells into the current 47 mm permeable-bottom solid wall device (having ⁇ 30,000 wells).
- Serial dilutions of 10 ⁇ 1 , 10 ⁇ 2 , and 10 ⁇ 3 were prepared, then 100 ⁇ L volumes of each of these dilutions were combined with 3 mL 0.85% NaCl, and the samples were loaded onto solid wall devices.
- Each permeable-bottom solid wall device was then removed from the Swinnex filter holder and transferred to an LB agar plate containing carbenicillin (100 ⁇ g/mL), chloramphenicol (25 ⁇ g/mL) and arabinose (1% final concentration).
- the solid wall devices were placed metal side “up,” so that the permeable-bottom membrane was touching the surface of the agar such that the nutrients from the plate could travel up through the filter “bottom” of the wells.
- the solid wall devices on the YPD agar plates were incubated for 2-3 days at 30° C.
- the perforated disks and filters were removed from the supporting nutrient source (in this case an agar plate) and were photographed with a focused, “transilluminating” light source so that the number and distribution of loaded microwells on the solid wall device could be assessed (see FIGS. 17A and 17B ).
- the filter was transferred to a labeled sterile 100 mm petri dish which contained 15 mL of sterile 0.85% NaCl, then the petri dish was placed in a shaking incubator set to 30° C./80 RPM to gently remove the cells from the filter and resuspend the cells in the 0.85% NaCl.
- the cells were allowed to shake for 15 minutes, then were transferred to a sterile tube, e.g., a 50 mL conical centrifuge tube.
- the OD600 of the cell suspension was measured; at this point the cells can be processed in different ways depending on the purpose of the study. For example, if an ADE2 stop codon mutagenesis library is used, successfully-edited cells should result in colonies with a red color phenotype when the resuspended cells are spread onto YPD agar plates and allowed to grow for 4-7 days. This phenotypic difference allows for a quantification of percentage of edited cells and the extent of normalization of edited and unedited cells.
- Example 9 Protocol Flow from mTFF to FTEP to SWIIN
- E. coli workflow Approximately 20 ml of E. coli was transferred from a rotating growth vial (RGV) in a cell growth module.
- the E. coli was EC83, an E. coli MG1655 strain comprising an engine vector coding for the XRed recombineering system and a MAD7 coding sequence (see, e.g., FIG. 11A ).
- the EC83 was grown in LB growth medium to an OD600 ⁇ 0.6 and having a conductivity of ⁇ 16,500 pS/cm.
- the cells were washed with a low-conductivity solution (10% glycerol) and concentrated in a small volume (approximately 0.80 ml) in the same low-conductivity solution. Both the input and output cell counts were determined by plating on solid media. The cell input was approximately 3.1E+09 and the cell output was approximately 2.3E+09. The output of the mTFF was used as input for the flow-through electroporation (FTEP) module.
- FTEP flow-through electroporation
- FTEP module, E. coli workflow Approximately 500 ⁇ l of the concentrated EC83 cells in 10% glycerol—e.g., an aliquot of the output of the mTFF—was combined with 100 ⁇ l of the assembled editing vector (see, e.g., FIG. 11B ) and a TWEEN solution (see Example 7 above). The cells and DNA were mixed and passed through the FTEP at a very high field strength in a high resistance solution. After transformation in the FTEP, the cells were transferred back to the cell growth module into a fresh RGV containing 3 ml SOB with chloramphenicol. The cells were incubated at 30° C. for 1 hour for recovery. The input CFU was approximately 2.3E+09 and the output CFU was approximately 9.8E+08 survival and 8.5E+05 uptake.
- SWIIN module E. coli workflow: Subsequent to the 1 hour recovery in the cell growth module, approximately 0.35 mL of the cells were combined with approximately 9.5 mL of a PBS/TWEEN solution and the cells were loaded onto the SWIIN. Once cells were loaded and growth medium (was LB with 1% arabinose, 25 ug/ml chloramphenicol and 100 ⁇ g/ml carbenicillin) was added to the permeate chamber of the SWIIN, the SWIIN was placed in a programmable incubator for the induction and editing stages. The script for the SWIIN protocol was set for a 9 hour incubation at 30° C., a 2.5 hour incubation at 42° C., then 9 additional hours at 30° C.
- growth medium was LB with 1% arabinose, 25 ug/ml chloramphenicol and 100 ⁇ g/ml carbenicillin
- the CFU input into the SWIIN was approximately 7.5E+04 and the CFU output was approximately 6.5E+06 in a 7.0 ml volume.
- the retentate channel was flooded to dislodge the cells with positive pressure applied to the permeate reservoirs, thus pushing fluid from the permeate reservoirs into the retentate reservoirs. Following this “push,” all fluid was swept to one of the retentate reservoirs by applying a vacuum to the other retentate reservoir. Finally, the cell solution from retentate reservoir into which the fluid was swept was transferred into a vial, and all liquid was aspirated out of both retentate reservoirs. (Also see Example 10, below.)
- Amplicon and Singleplex sequencing Cells were recovered from the SWIIN with a PBS solution, and 100 ⁇ l of the undiluted cell suspension was spread on an LB chlor/carb agar plate and incubated overnight at 30° C. This plate was then “scraped” and used as the amplicon DNA input. Dilutions were also prepared from the PBS/cell suspension and then plated on an LB chlor/carb agar plate and incubated overnight at 30° C.; isolated colonies were selected and used for singleplex sequencing.
- Example 10 Loading and Performing Editing on a SWIIN
- FIGS. 4AA 4 DD are simplified overviews of various parameters for loading cells onto a SWIIN module, performing editing, and removing or recovering the edited cells from the SWIIN module.
- the steps of FIGS. 4AA-4DD correspond to the steps listed in Tables 3-5, with the exception that step 1 (loading the SWIIN module into the automated multi-module cell processing instrument) and step 32 (unloading the SWIIN from the automated multi-module cell processing instrument) are not represented on FIGS. 4AA-4DD .
- FIG. 4AA begins with step 2, where 10 mL of PBS/0.01% Tween80 was transferred from a reagent cartridge to permeate reservoir 1.
- retentate reservoir 1, retentate reservoir 2, and permeate reservoir 1 were under positive pressure, flow sensor 1 detected a high flow rate and flow sensor 2 detected a low flow rate.
- additional PBS/0.01% Tween80 was loaded into the permeate channel and a bubble flush was performed.
- more PBS/0.01% Tween80 was loaded into the permeate channel to fill the permeate channel. Step 4 ended with a flow meter trigger, and flow sensor 1 returned to baseline once the permeate channel was filled with liquid.
- a vacuum was applied at retentate reservoirs 1 and 2 , and the retentate channel was flooded. Once the retentate channel was flooded (and there was minimal fluid remaining in the permeate reservoirs), the negative pressure (vacuum) was removed. At step 6, negative pressure was applied to retentate reservoir 2, thereby sweeping all liquid to retentate reservoir 2. At step 7, the liquid in retentate reservoirs 1 and 2 was removed by, e.g., an air displacement pipette.
- Step 8 9.5 mL of PBS/0.01% Tween80 was transferred from the reagent cartridge to retentate reservoir 1, and at step 9, 0.5 mL of transformed cells were transferred from the transformation module (the flow-through electroporation device) to retentate reservoir 1.
- the cell-containing liquid was pipetted up and down in retentate reservoir 1, and at step 11, the cell-containing liquid was pulled from retentate reservoir 1 into the retentate channel leaving minimal fluid in retentate reservoirs 1 and 2 .
- Step 11 is sensitive to timing and was thus controlled via air displacement pipette liquid level detection in retentate reservoir 1.
- FIG. 4BB begins with step 12, in which the fluid in the serpentine channel in the retentate member was pulled through the membrane or filter member on low vacuum; that is, negative pressure was applied to both permeate reservoirs 1 and 2 .
- step 13 the fluid in the serpentine channel in the retentate member was pulled through the filter member on high vacuum, with fluid pulled into the serpentine channel in the permeate member and then into permeate reservoirs 1 and 2 .
- step 14 all fluid was swept to permeate reservoir 1 by applying positive pressure to retentate reservoirs 1 and 2 and permeate reservoir 2. Remaining liquid was aspirated out of permeate reservoirs 1 and 2 at step 5, with the air displacement pipette accessing permeate reservoir 1.
- Step 16 10 mL medium was transferred from the reagent cartridge to permeate reservoir 1, and at step 17, the medium was transferred from permeate reservoir 1 into the permeate channel.
- Step 17 is sensitive to timing and thus was controlled via liquid level detection via a air displacement pipette in retentate reservoir 1.
- liquid (permeate) was aspirated out of permeate reservoirs 1 and 2 .
- Steps 19-23 are not represented in FIGS. 4AA-4DD .
- the SWIIN module was incubated at 30° C. with intermittent airflow and medium rinses/exchanges, as deemed necessary.
- the temperature of the SWIIN module was raised to 42° C., and at step 21 the SWIIN module was incubated for 2 hours.
- the temperature of the SWIIN module was ramped down from 42° C. to 30° C., and the SWIIN was then incubated at 30° C. for 9 hours. During this incubation the manifold arms of the SWIIN assembly may be unsealed and resealed to effect airflow. In addition, media rinses or exchanges may be performed.
- FIG. 4CC begins with step 24, where medium was pulled out of the permeate channel into permeate reservoir 2, by applying negative pressure to permeate reservoir 2. During this time, the flow rate for flow sensor 1 and flow sensor 2 are roughly the same at 0, then flow sensor 2 spiked to 0, rebounded, then spiked to 0 again triggering flow sensor 2.
- Step 24 ended with fluid in permeate reservoir 2. At step 25, the liquid was aspirated out of permeate reservoir 2 by applying a vacuum to permeate reservoir 2, and at step 26, 10 mL of medium containing 10% glycerol was transferred from the reagent cartridge to permeate reservoir 1.
- step 27 the medium/10% glycerol was pulled from permeate reservoir 1 into the permeate channel, and at the end of this step, a minimal amount of fluid remains in permeate reservoir 2.
- step 28 the retentate channel was flooded (filled) to dislodge the cells with positive pressure applied to permeate reservoirs 1 and 2 , thus pushing fluid from the permeate reservoirs into the retentate reservoirs.
- step 29 all fluid was swept to retentate reservoir 2 by applying a vacuum to retentate reservoir 2. Step 29 is controlled by the trigger of flow sensor 1.
- Step 30 involved aspirating the cell solution from retentate reservoir 2 into a vial, and step 31 involved aspirating all liquid out of both retentate reservoirs.
- the final step, step 32, is not represented on FIG. 4DD , but involved removing the SWIIN from the automated multi-module cell processing instrument.
- Singleplex automated genomic editing using MAD7 nuclease, a library with 94 different edits in a single gene (yagP) and employing a 200K SWIIN module (i.e., a SWIIN module with approximately 200K wells) such as those exemplified in FIGS. 4F-4R was successfully performed.
- the engine vector used was substantially similar to that depicted in FIG. 11A (with MAD7 under the control of the pL inducible promoter), and the editing vector used was substantially similar to that depicted in FIG.
- “Curing” is a process in which one or more editing vectors used in a prior round of editing is eliminated from the edited cells, or, as in this Example, a process in which the engine vector is removed from edited cells at the end of the editing process. Curing can be accomplished by “active” curing, which refers to cleaving a vector at a curing target sequence.
- a genetic element for example, a curing gRNA
- Curing can also be accomplished by “passive” curing which involves diluting the vector(s) to be cured in the cell population via cell growth; that is, the more growth cycles the cells go through, the fewer daughter cells will retain the editing or engine vector(s)).
- Passive curing can also be accomplished by, e.g., utilizing a heat-sensitive origin of replication on the vector to be cured, which essentially prevents the vector from replicating.
- the engine vector was “passively” cured once editing had taken place. Curing of the engine vector after one or more editing steps is desired to rid the cell population of the coding sequence for the nuclease.
- E. coli cells were transformed with an engine vector very similar to that described in relation to FIG. 11A in Example 1 above.
- the engine vector comprised the MAD7 nuclease coding sequence under the control of the inducible pL promoter (induced by an increase in temperature; e.g., see FIG.
- the “curing” engine vector used in this Example 12 also comprised a heat-sensitive origin of replication, which when the temperature is raised to 42° C. fails to bind the protein needed to replicate the engine vector. Preventing replication of the engine vector combined with active cell division thereby effectively dilutes the engine vector from the cell population.
- the editing vector used in this Example 12 was an editing vector similar to that described in relation to FIG. 11B in Example 1 above, where an edit changed coding for an amino acid residue in the XylA gene to a stop coding, allowing for a phenotypic read out to show editing.
- Protocols for preparing E. coli cells for editing are described in Example 9 above; a step-wise protocol for loading, performing editing, and unloading a SWIIN is described in Example 10 above; and protocols for isolation, growth and editing on the SWIIN is described in Example 11 above.
- Four different curing protocols were performed after cell editing on the SWIIN. Editing was performed with chloramphenicol in the growth medium to select for the engine vector.
- the first curing protocol comprised recovering cells from the SWIIN and growing the recovered cells in bulk liquid (without chloramphenicol) at 42° C. for six hours.
- the second curing protocol comprised recovering cells from the SWIIN and loading and growing the recovered cells on a fresh SWIIN (without chloramphenicol) at 42° C. for six hours.
- the third curing protocol comprised recovering a fraction of the cells from the SWIIN to make room for additional cell growth, performing medium exchange on the SWIIN for medium without chloramphenicol, then continuing to grow the cells on the SWIIN at 42° C. for six hours.
- the fourth curing protocol like the third curing protocol did not comprise a cell recovery step; instead, the cells remained on the SWIIN, medium exchange was performed, and the cells were grown at 42° C. for six hours. (Note that the data reported in FIG. 13 described above demonstrates that cell viability is not impacted by raising the temperature to 42° C.)
- the curing efficiency (%) for each of these curing protocols is shown in FIG. 19 . Note all protocols provided a curing efficiency of greater than 85%, where the first and second protocols provided a curing efficiency of 100%, the third protocol provided a curing efficiency of approximately 97%, and the fourth protocol provided a curing efficiency of approximately 85.5%.
- active curing may be performed as well, where, e.g., editing vectors are cleared between rounds of editing.
- a sequence on the vector to be cured (e.g., the editing vector between rounds of editing) comprises a curing target sequence that is subjected to a double-stranded cut by, e.g., a curing gRNA. See, e.g., U.S. Ser. No. 62/857,967, filed 6 Jun. 2019.
- FIG. 20A is a depletion plot showing that there is reduced activity at TCTV PAMS in E. coli , and a preference for TCTG over TCTA or TCTC.
- FIG. 20B is a bar graph showing TCTV PAMs lead to low efficiency editing from randomly-picked colonies following standard plating-based editing using a library targeting the galK locus in E. coli .
- the measurements correspond to the fraction of colonies with white phenotype on Mackonkey agar supplemented with galactose. Cherry-picking small colonies yielded an approximate 5-6 ⁇ gain in efficiency in identifying cells with edits located at TCTV PAMs.
- Sanger sequencing of the genomic amplicons from these edited clones confirmed TCTV PAM targeting, with many in the TCTG target set (data not shown).
- Table 8 below shows the PAM/Spacer sequences for which editing was observed in this experiment.
- lacZ_F172* An ampR plasmid backbone and a lacZ_F172* editing cassette were assembled via isothermal nucleic acid assembly into an “editing vector” in an isothermal nucleic acid assembly module included in the automated instrument.
- lacZ_F172 functionally knocks out the lacZ gene.
- lacZ_F172* indicates that the edit happens at the 172nd residue in the lacZ amino acid sequence.
- the product was de-salted in the isothermal nucleic acid assembly module using AMPure beads, washed with 80% ethanol, and eluted in buffer.
- the assembled editing vector and recombineering-ready, electrocompetent E. Coli cells were transferred into a transformation module for electroporation.
- the cells and nucleic acids were combined and allowed to mix for 1 minute, and electroporation was performed for 30 seconds.
- the parameters for the poring pulse were: voltage, 2400 V; length, 5 ms; interval, 50 ms; number of pulses, 1; polarity, +.
- the parameters for the transfer pulses were: Voltage, 150 V; length, 50 ms; interval, 50 ms; number of pulses, 20; polarity, +/ ⁇ .
- the cells were transferred to a recovery module (another growth module) and allowed to recover in SOC medium containing chloramphenicol. Carbenicillin was added to the medium after 1 hour, and the cells were allowed to recover for another 2 hours. After recovery, the cells were held at 4° C. until recovered by the user.
- the result of the automated processing was that approximately 1.0E ⁇ 03 total cells were transformed (comparable to conventional benchtop results), and the editing efficiency was 83.5%.
- the lacZ_172 edit in the white colonies was confirmed by sequencing of the edited region of the genome of the cells. Further, steps of the automated cell processing were observed remotely by webcam and text messages were sent to update the status of the automated processing procedure.
- Coli cells were transferred into a transformation module for electroporation.
- the cells and nucleic acids were combined and allowed to mix for 1 minute, and electroporation was performed for 30 seconds.
- the parameters for the poring pulse were: voltage, 2400 V; length, 5 ms; interval, 50 ms; number of pulses, 1; polarity, +.
- the parameters for the transfer pulses were: Voltage, 150 V; length, 50 ms; interval, 50 ms; number of pulses, 20; polarity, +/ ⁇ .
- the cells were transferred to a recovery module (another growth module) allowed to recover in SOC medium containing chloramphenicol. Carbenicillin was added to the medium after 1 hour, and the cells were grown for another 2 hours.
- the cells were then transferred to a centrifuge module and a media exchange was then performed. Cells were resuspended in TB containing chloramphenicol and carbenicillin where the cells were grown to OD600 of 2.7, then concentrated and rendered electrocompetent.
- a second editing vector was prepared in the isothermal nucleic acid assembly module.
- the second editing vector comprised a kanamycin resistance gene, and the editing cassette comprised a galK Y145* edit. If successful, the galK Y145* edit confers on the cells the ability to uptake and metabolize galactose.
- the edit generated by the galK Y154* cassette introduces a stop codon at the 154th amino acid residue, changing the tyrosine amino acid to a stop codon. This edit makes the galK gene product non-functional and inhibits the cells from being able to metabolize galactose.
- the second editing vector product was de-salted in the isothermal nucleic acid assembly module using AMPure beads, washed with 80% ethanol, and eluted in buffer.
- the assembled second editing vector and the electrocompetent E. Coli cells (that were transformed with and selected for the first editing vector) were transferred into a transformation module for electroporation, using the same parameters as detailed above.
- the cells were transferred to a recovery module (another growth module), allowed to recover in SOC medium containing carbenicillin. After recovery, the cells were held at 4° C. until retrieved, after which an aliquot of cells were plated on LB agar supplemented with chloramphenicol, and kanamycin.
- replica patch plates were generated on two media types: 1) MacConkey agar base supplemented with lactose (as the sugar substrate), chloramphenicol, and kanamycin, and 2) MacConkey agar base supplemented with galactose (as the sugar substrate), chloramphenicol, and kanamycin. All liquid transfers are performed by the automated liquid handling device of the automated multi-module cell processing system.
- SWIIN Design 1 Reservoir Volumes RR1 and RR3 RR2 and RR4 PR1 and PR3 PR2 and PR4 Temperature Description of step Step Step Initial/Final Initial/Final Initial/Final Initial/Final (° C.) Load SWIIN module on instrument 1 0/0 0/0 0/0 0/0 25 Load 7.5 ml of cell suspension into RR1 2 0/7.5 TBD/TBD 0/0 0/0 25 and RR3 Fill retentate layer with cell suspension 3 7.5/0 TBD/TBD 0/0 0/0 25 Let cells settle to the vicinity of the 4 0/0 TBD/TBD 0/0 0/0 4 perforated sheet and into microwells Drive medium in the retentate layer 5 0/0 TBD/TBD 0/1 0/1 30 across membrane Open manifold 6 0/0 TBD/TBD 1/1 1/1 30 Remove excess medium from PRs with 7 0/0 TBD
- NA NA NA NA NA NA 0 32400 intermittent airflow may require NA NA NA NA NA NA 0 32400 intermittent airflow, media rinses Ramp up (30 C. to 42 C.) NA NA NA NA NA NA 0 900 INCUBATE SWIIN 42 C.—may require NA NA NA NA NA NA 0 7200 intermittent airflow, media rinses Ramp down (42 C. to 30 C.) NA NA NA NA NA NA 0 900 INCUBATE SWIIN 30 C.
- SWIIN Volume 5mL
Abstract
Description
- This application is a continuation of U.S. Ser. No. 16/928,312, filed 14 Jul. 2020; which is a continuation of U.S. Ser. No. 16/844,330, filed 9 Apr. 2020, now U.S. Pat. No. 10,744,463; which is a continuation of U.S. Ser. No. 16/687,640, filed 18 Nov. 2019, now U.S. Pat. No. 10,625,212; which is a continuation of U.S. Ser. No. 16/540,606, filed 14 Aug. 2019, now U.S. Pat. No. 10,532,324; which claims priority to US Provisional Application Nos: 62/718,449, filed 14 Aug. 2018; 62/735,365, filed 24 Sep. 2018; 62/781,112, filed 18 Dec. 2018; 62/779,119, filed 13 Dec. 2018; 62/841,213, filed 30 Apr. 2019. This application is also a continuation U.S. Ser. No. 16/820,292, filed 16 Mar. 2020, now U.S. Pat. No. 10,723,995; which is a continuation of U.S. Ser. No. 16/597,826, filed 9 Oct. 2019, now U.S. Pat. No. 10,633,626; which is a continuation of U.S. Ser. No. 16/454,865, filed 27 Jun. 2019, now U.S. Pat. No. 10,550,363; which is a continuation of U.S. Ser. No. 16/399,988, filed 30 Apr. 2019, now U.S. Pat. No. 10,533,152.
- This invention relates to improved instruments, modules, and methods to screen, select and thus optimize detection of genome edits in live cells.
- In the following discussion certain articles and methods will be described for background and introductory purposes. Nothing contained herein is to be construed as an “admission” of prior art. Applicant expressly reserves the right to demonstrate, where appropriate, that the methods referenced herein do not constitute prior art under the applicable statutory provisions.
- The ability to make precise, targeted changes to the genome of living cells has been a long-standing goal in biomedical research and development. Recently, various nucleases have been identified that allow for manipulation of gene sequences, and hence gene function. The nucleases include nucleic acid-guided nucleases, which enable researchers to generate permanent edits in live cells. Current protocols employing nucleic acid-guided nuclease systems typically utilize constitutively-expressed nuclease components to drive high efficiency editing. However, in pooled or m multiplex formats constitutive expression of editing components can lead to rapid depletion of edited cell types and selective enrichment of cells that have not been edited. This occurs in most cell types because only a small fraction (<1-5%) of cells survive the introduction of double-strand DNA (dsDNA) breaks and thus these cells contribute fewer numbers to viable cell counts in the resulting populations compared to unedited cells that did not experience a dsDNA break.
- There is thus a need in the art of nucleic acid-guided nuclease gene editing for improved instruments, modules and methods for creating genome edits and for identifying and enriching cells that have been edited. The present invention satisfies this need.
- This Summary is provided to introduce a selection of concepts in a simplified form that are further described below in the Detailed Description. This Summary is not intended to identify key or essential features of the claimed subject matter, nor is it intended to be used to limit the scope of the claimed subject matter. Other features, details, utilities, and advantages of the claimed subject matter will be apparent from the following Detailed Description including those aspects illustrated in the accompanying drawings and defined in the appended claims.
- The present disclosure provides instruments, modules and methods to enable automated high-throughput and extremely sensitive screening to identify edited cells in populations of cells that have been subjected to nucleic acid-guided nuclease editing. The instruments, modules, and methods take advantage of isolation or substantial isolation, where the term “isolation” in this context refers to the process of separating cells and growing them into clonally-isolated formats. The term “substantial isolation” refers to the process of separating cells in a population of cells into “groups” of 2 to 100, or 2 to 50, and preferably 2 to 10 cells. Isolation (or substantial isolation), followed by an initial period of growth (e.g., incubation), editing, and growth normalization leads to enrichment of edited cells. Further, the instruments, modules, and methods described herein facilitate “cherry picking” of edited cell colonies, allowing for direct selection of edited cells.
- Isolation or substantial isolation assists in overcoming the growth bias from unedited cells that occurs under competitive growth regimes such as in bulk liquid culture. Indeed, it has been determined that removing growth rate bias via isolation or substantial isolation, incubation, editing and normalization improves the observed editing efficiency by up to 4× (from, e.g., 10% to 40% absolute efficiency at population scale) or more over conventional methods, and further that cherry-picking colonies using the methods described herein brings the observed editing efficiency up to 8× (from, e.g., 10% to 80% absolute efficiency at population scale) over conventional methods. In some embodiments the compositions and methods employ inducible guide RNA (gRNA) constructs leading to increased observed transformation efficiency and automation-friendly control over the timing and duration of the editing process.
- One particularly facile module or device for isolation or substantial isolation is a solid wall device where cells are substantially isolated, grown in a clonal (or substantially clonal) format, edited, and either normalization or cherry picking is employed. The solid wall devices or modules and the uses thereof are described in detail herein. The instruments, modules and methods in some embodiments allow for normalization of edited and unedited cell colonies. Normalization refers to growing colonies of cells—whether edited or unedited—to terminal size; that is, growing the cells until the cells in the colonies enter senescence due to, e.g., nutrient exhaustion or constrained space for further growth. Since unedited cells grow more quickly, unedited cell colonies will reach terminal size (e.g., senescence) before edited cell colonies; however, the unedited cell colonies eventually “catch up” in size and senescence. Normalization of cell colonies enriches for edited cells as edited cells get “equal billing” with unedited cells. Additionally, the instruments, modules, and methods facilitate “cherry picking” of colonies. Cherry picking allows for direct selection of edited cells by taking advantage of edit-induced growth delay in edited colonies. Cherry picking can be performed by selecting slow-growing cell colonies, or cherry picking can be performed by eliminating faster-growing cell colonies by, e.g., irradiating the faster-growing cell colonies. Cherry picking colonies using the instruments, modules, and methods described herein may more than double the observed editing efficiency as the result of isolation or substantial isolation alone.
- Certain embodiments of the instruments, modules, and methods provide for enriching for edited cells during nucleic acid-guided nuclease editing, where the methods comprise transforming cells with one or more vectors comprising a promoter driving expression of a nuclease, a promoter driving transcription of a guide nucleic acid and a donor DNA sequence; diluting the transformed cells to a cell concentration sufficient to substantially isolate the transformed cells on a substrate; growing (e.g., incubating) the substantially isolated cells on the substrate; providing conditions for editing; and either 1) growing the cell colonies to colonies of terminal size (e.g., normalizing the cell colonies) and harvesting the normalized cell colonies; or 2) monitoring the growth of cells colonies on the substrate then selecting slow-growing colonies. In some aspects at least the gRNA is optionally under the control of an inducible promoter.
- Thus in some embodiments there is provided a singulation assembly for a solid wall isolation or substantial isolation, incubation, editing, and normalization or cherry-picking (“solid wall insolation/incubation/normalization module” or “SWIIN”) module comprising: a solid wall isolation, induction and normalization (SWIIN) module comprising: a retentate member comprising: an upper surface and a lower surface and a first and second end, an upper portion of a serpentine channel defined by raised areas on the lower surface of the retentate member, wherein the upper portion of the serpentine channel traverses the lower surface of the retentate member for about 50% to about 90% of the length and width of the lower surface of the retentate member; at least one port fluidically connected to the upper portion of the serpentine channel; and a reservoir cover at the first end of the retentate member; a permeate member disposed under the retentate member comprising: an upper surface and a lower surface and a first and second end, a lower portion of a serpentine channel defined by raised areas on the upper surface of the permeate member, wherein the lower portion of the serpentine channel traverses the upper surface of the permeate member for about 50% to about 90% of the length and width of the upper surface of the permeate member, and wherein the lower portion of the serpentine channel is configured to mate with the upper portion of the serpentine channel to form a mated serpentine channel; at least one port fluidically connected to the lower portion of the serpentine channel; and a first and second reservoir at the first end of the permeate member, wherein the first reservoir is fluidically connected to the at least one port in the retentate member and the second reservoir is fluidically connected to the at least one port in the permeate member; a perforated member comprising at least 25,000 perforations disposed under and adjacent to the retentate member; a filter disposed disposed under and adjacent to the perforated member and above and adjacent to the permeate member; and a gasket disposed on top of the reservoir cover of the retentate member, wherein the gasket comprises a reservoir access aperture and a pneumatic access aperture for each reservoir.
- In some aspects of this embodiment, the permeate member further comprises ultrasonic tabs disposed on the raised areas on the upper surface of the permeate member and at the first and second end of the permeate member, the retentate member further comprises recesses for the ultrasonic tabs disposed in the raised areas on the lower surface and at the first and second end of the retentate member, the ultrasonic tabs are configured to mate with the recesses for the ultrasonic tabs, and the permeate member, retentate member, where the perforated member and the filter are coupled together by ultrasonic welding. In other aspects of this embodiment, the permeate member, retentate member, the perforated member and the filter are coupled together by solvent bonding.
- In some aspects, the first and second reservoirs are each fluidically coupled to a reservoir port into which fluids and/or cells flow from the first retentate reservoir into the first retentate port and from the first permeate reservoir into the first permeate port and into the serpentine channels in the retentate and permeate members.
- In some aspects of this embodiment, the SWIIN module further comprises a third and a fourth reservoir, wherein the third reservoir is 1) fluidically coupled to a second port in the retentate member, 2) fluidically coupled to a reservoir access aperture into which fluids and/or cells flow from outside the SWIIN module into the third reservoir, and 3) pneumatically coupled to a pressure source; and wherein the fourth reservoir is 1) fluidically coupled to a second port in the permeate member, 2) fluidically coupled to a reservoir access aperture into which fluids and/or cells flow from outside the SWIIN module into the fourth reservoir, and 3) pneumatically coupled to a pressure source.
- In some aspects of this embodiment, the perforated member comprises at least 100,000 perforations, or at least 200,000 perforations, or at least 250,000 perforations, or at least 300,000 perforations, or at least 350,000 perforations or at least 400,000 perforations, or at least 500,000 perforations or more. In some aspects, the volume of a well formed by a perforation is from 1-15 nl, or from 2-10 nl, or from 3-8 nl, or from 1-10 nl, or from 2-5 nl.
- In some aspects, the retentate member is fabricated from polycarbonate, cyclic olefin co-polymer, or poly(methyl methylacrylate).
- In some aspects of the SWIIN module, a serpentine channel portion of each of the retentate and permeate members is from 75 mm to 350 mm in length, from 50 mm to 250 mm in width, and from 2 mm to 15 mm in thickness, and from 150 mm to 250 mm in length, from 100 mm to 150 mm in width, and from 4 mm to 8 mm in thickness.
- In some aspects, the volume of the mated serpentine channel is from 4 to 40 mL, or from 6 mL to 30 mL, or from 10 mL to 20 mL. In some aspects, the volume of the first and second reservoir is from 4 to 50 mL, or from 8 to 40 mL, or from 10 to 30 mL.
- In some aspects of the SWIIN module, there is a support on each end of the permeate member configured to elevate the permeate and retentate members above the at least one port in the in retentate member and the at least one port in the permeate member.
- Certain embodiments of the SWIIN module further comprise imaging means to detect cells growing in the wells, and in some aspects, the imaging means is a camera with means to backlight the serpentine channel portion of the SWIIN. In some aspects, the SWIIN module is part of a SWIIN assembly comprising a heated cover, a heater, a fan, and a thermoelectric control device.
- Also provided herein is an automated multi-module cell editing instrument comprising: a SWIIN module, a housing configured to house all of some of the modules; a receptacle configured to receive cells; one or more receptacles configured to receive nucleic acids; a growth module; a transformation module configured to introduce the nucleic acids into the cells; and a processor configured to operate the automated multi-module cell editing instrument based on user input and/or selection of a pre-programmed script.
- In some aspects of the automated multi-module cell editing instrument, the transformation module comprises a flow-through electroporation device; and in some aspects the automated multi-module cell editing instrument further comprises a cell concentration module. In some aspects the cell concentration module is a tangential flow filtration module. In some aspects a liquid handling system transfers liquids between the modules. And in some aspects, the automated multi-module cell processing system performs the processes of growing cells, concentrating and rendering the cells electrocompetent, transforming the cells with nucleic acid-guided nuclease editing components, isolating the transformed cells, inducing editing in the isolated cells, and growing and enriching the cells, all without human intervention.
- Other embodiments provide a method for enriching edited cells during nucleic acid-guided nuclease editing comprising: transforming cells with one or more vectors comprising a promoter driving transcription of a coding sequence for a nuclease, a promoter driving transcription of a guide nucleic acid and a DNA donor sequence; diluting the transformed cells to a cell concentration to substantially isolate the transformed cells on a substrate; growing the cells and initiating editing; growing the edited cells into colonies; and selecting cells from the substantially isolated colonies from the substrate or pooling cells from the isolated colonies from the substrate, wherein the selected cells or pooled cells are enriched for edited cells. In optional aspects of this method, the gRNA is under the control of an inducible promoter and 1) the cells are allowed to grow from 2-200 doublings after isolation, and 2) there is an inducing step after the growth step and prior to the editing step.
- Yet other embodiments provide a method for enriching edited cells during nucleic acid-guided nuclease editing comprising: transforming cells with one or more vectors comprising a promoter driving transcription of a coding sequence for a nuclease, a promoter driving transcription of a guide nucleic acid and a DNA donor sequence; diluting the transformed cells to a cell concentration to substantially isolate the transformed cells on a substrate; growing the cells and allowing the cells to edit; growing the cells to form colonies; and selecting small colonies from the substantially isolated colonies from the substrate, wherein the selected cells are enriched for edited cells. In optional aspects of this method, the gRNA is under the control of an inducible promoter and 1) the cells are allowed to grow from 2-200 doublings after singulation, and 2) there is an inducing step after the growth step and prior to the editing step.
- Additionally, other embodiments provide a method for enriching edited cells during nucleic acid-guided nuclease editing comprising: transforming cells with one or more vectors comprising a promoter driving transcription of a coding sequence for a nuclease, a promoter driving transcription of a guide nucleic acid and a DNA donor sequence; diluting the transformed cells to a cell concentration to substantially isolate the transformed cells on a first substrate; growing the cells and allowing the cells to edit; and growing the cells to form colonies of terminal size. In some aspects, the terminal-size cell colonies are pooled, and in some aspects, the terminal-size colonies are picked. In optional aspects of this method, the gRNA is under the control of an inducible promoter and 1) the cells are allowed to grow from 2-200 doublings after singulation, and 2) there is an inducing step after the growth step and prior to the editing step.
- Thus in some embodiments there is provided a singulation assembly for a solid wall isolation or substantial isolation, growth, induction of editing, and normalization or cherry-picking (“solid wall insolation/induction/normalization module” or “SWIIN”) module comprising: a retentate member comprising an upper surface and a lower surface, wherein the retentate member comprises at least one retentate distribution channel which traverses the retentate member from its upper surface to its lower surface and for most of the length of retentate member; wherein the lower surface of the retentate member comprises retentate ridges between which are retentate flow directors; wherein the retentate member further comprises one or more retentate member ports configured to supply cells and fluid to and remove cells and fluid from the retentate member; and wherein the retentate member ports are fluidically-connected to the retentate distribution channel and retentate flow directors; a perforated member with an upper surface and a lower surface, wherein the upper surface of the perforated member is positioned beneath and adjacent to the lower surface of the retentate member and wherein the perforated member comprises at least 25,000 perforations; a filter with an upper surface and a lower surface, wherein the upper surface of the filter is positioned beneath and adjacent to the lower surface of the perforated member and wherein the lower surface of the filter is positioned above and adjacent to an upper surface of a permeate member; a gasket surrounding the perforated member and the filter; and the permeate member comprising the upper surface and a lower surface, wherein the permeate member comprises at least one permeate distribution channel which traverses the permeate member from its lower surface to its upper surface and for most of the length of permeate member; wherein the upper surface of the permeate member comprises permeate ridges between which are permeate flow directors; wherein the permeate member further comprises one or more permeate member ports configured to supply fluid to and remove fluid from the permeate member; and wherein the permeate member ports are fluidically-connected to the permeate distribution channel and permeate flow directors; and means to couple the retentate member, perforated member, filter, gasket and permeate member.
- In some aspects of the singulation assembly embodiment the means to couple the retentate member, perforated member, filter, gasket and permeate member comprises ultrasonic welding and in other aspects, the means comprises pressure sensitive adhesive, solvent bonding, mated fittings, or a combination of adhesives, welding, solvent bonding, and mated fittings; and other such fasteners and couplings. In some aspects of the singulation assembly, the perforated member comprises at least 50,000; 100,000; 150,000; 200,000, 250,000 perforations or more, and in some aspects, the SWIIN is a compound SWIIN and each part of the compound SWIIN comprises a perforated member with at least 50,000; 100,000; 150,000; 200,000, 250,000 perforations. In some aspects, the retentate and permeate members are fabricated from polycarbonate, cyclic olefin co-polymer, or poly(methyl methylacrylate); and in some aspects, the retentate and permeate members are from 75 mm to 350 mm in length, from 50 mm to 250 mm in width, and from 2 mm to 15 mm in thickness. In some aspects of the singulation assembly, the retentate and permeate members are from 150 mm to 250 mm in length, from 100 mm to 150 mm in width, and from 4 mm to 8 mm in thickness. In some aspects of the singulation assembly, there are two permeate distribution channels and/or two retentate distribution channels, and in some aspects the retentate distribution channels and or permeate distribution channels are approximately 150 mm in length and 1 mm in width. In some aspects, the retentate and/or permeate ridges are approximately 0.5 mm in height and 80 mm in length, and in some aspects, the retentate and/or permeate flow directors are approximately 5 mm across. In some aspects, the volume of the singulation assembly is from 15 mL to 100 mL.
- Some embodiments of the disclosure provide a SWIIN module comprising the singulation assembly and further comprising: a reservoir assembly comprising at least two reservoirs wherein a first reservoir is 1) fluidically-coupled to at least one reservoir port into which fluids and/or cells flow from outside the SWIIN module into the first reservoir, 2) fluidically-coupled to a reservoir/channel port from which fluids and/or cells flow into the one or more retentate member ports; and 3) pneumatically-coupled to a pressure source; a second reservoir is 1) fluidically-coupled to at least one reservoir port into which fluids flow from outside the SWIIN module into the second reservoir, 2) fluidically-coupled to a reservoir/channel port from which fluids flow into the one or more permeate member ports; and 3) pneumatically-coupled to a pressure source; and a SWIIN cover. In some aspects of the SWIIN module embodiment, the SWIIN module further comprises two additional reservoirs wherein a first and third reservoir are 1) fluidically-coupled to at least two reservoir ports into which fluids and/or cells flow from outside the SWIIN module into the first and third reservoirs, 2) fluidically-coupled to a reservoir/channel port from which fluids and/or cells flow into the at least two retentate member ports; and 3) pneumatically-coupled to a pressure source; and a second and fourth reservoir are 1) fluidically-coupled to at least two reservoir ports into which fluids flow from outside the SWIIN module into the second and fourth reservoirs, 2) fluidically-coupled to a reservoir/channel port from which fluids flow into the at least two permeate member ports; and 3) pneumatically-coupled to a pressure source.
- In some aspects of the SWIIN module embodiment, the SWIIN cover comprises a reservoir cover portion of the SWIIN cover, and wherein the reservoir cover portion comprises 1) at least two reservoir access apertures, wherein the reservoir access apertures provide access to the reservoir ports, and 2) at least two pneumatic access apertures, wherein the pneumatic access apertures provide access to the at least two reservoirs and provide negative and positive pressure to the at least two reservoirs. In some aspects the SWIIN module is configured to monitor cell colony growth after inducing editing, and further comprises means for cherry picking slow growing cell colonies. In some aspects of the SWIIN module, editing is induced by an inducible promoter that is a temperature inducible promoter, and temperature to induce transcription of the nuclease and/or guide nucleic acid is provided to the SWIIN module by a Peltier device.
- In some aspects of this embodiment, the SWIIN module is one module in an automated multi-module cell processing instrument.
- These aspects and other features and advantages of the invention are described below in more detail.
-
FIG. 1A is a simplified flow chart of exemplary methods for enriching and selecting edited cells.FIG. 1B is a plot of optical density vs. time showing the growth curves for edited cells (dotted line) and unedited cells (solid line).FIG. 1C depicts an exemplary inducible expression system for regulating gRNA and/or nuclease transcription. -
FIG. 2A depicts a prior art, standard protocol for performing nucleic acid-guided nuclease genome editing.FIGS. 2B-2F depict improved protocols for editing in bacterial systems employing isolation or substantial isolation, optional induction of editing, and either normalization or cherry picking (e.g., selection) for identifying edited cells in a population of cells that have undergone nucleic acid-guided nuclease genome editing. -
FIG. 2B depicts a protocol for functional deconvolution of the editing process, either by arraying cells in 96-well plates containing different media or by arraying cells on a culture dish containing different media.FIG. 2C depicts a protocol for picking colonies from a culture dish, arraying the colonies on a 96-well plate, then performing functional deconvolution.FIG. 2E depicts a protocol for cherry picking, andFIG. 2F depicts a protocol used for confirming that cherry-picking is extremely effective for selecting for edited cells. -
FIG. 3A depicts a simplified graphic of a workflow for isolating, editing and normalizing cells in a solid wall device. 3B depicts a simplified graphic of a workflow variation for substantially isolating, editing and normalizing cells in a solid wall device. -
FIG. 3C is a photograph of one embodiment of a solid wall device.FIGS. 3D-3F are photographs of E. coli cells largely isolated (via substantial Poisson distribution) and grown into colonies in microwells in a solid wall device with a permeable bottom at low, medium, and high magnification, respectively.FIGS. 3G-3J are photographs of the perforated member and the microwells therein. -
FIG. 4A-4H depict the components of two exemplary embodiments of a singulation assembly comprising retentate and permeate members, as well as a perforated member/filter/gasket assembly.FIG. 4I-4O depict an assembled isolation, incubation, editing and either normalization or cherry-picking module (e.g., “solid wall isolation/incubation/normalization module” or “SWIIN”) and a reservoir member to deliver fluids to the SWIIN module.FIG. 4P is an exemplary pneumatic architecture diagram for the SWIIN module described in relation toFIGS. 4A-4P , with the status of the components for the various steps listed in Tables 1 and 2.FIGS. 4Q-4X depict a different embodiment of a SWIIN module, where the retentate and permeate members are coincident with reservoir assembly.FIG. 4Y depicts the embodiment of the SWIIN module inFIGS. 4Q-4X further comprising a heater and a heated cover.FIG. 4Z is an exemplary pneumatic architecture diagram for the SWIIN module described in relation toFIGS. 4Q-4X , with the status of the components for the various steps listed in Tables 3-5.FIGS. 4AA-4DD are simplified depictions of the status of pressure and volume for each reservoir in the SWIIN depicted in relation toFIGS. 4Q-4X . -
FIGS. 5A-5D depict a stand-alone, integrated, automated multi-module instrument and components thereof, including an isolation module, with which to generate and identify edited cells. -
FIG. 6A depicts one embodiment of a rotating growth vial for use with a cell growth module described herein.FIG. 6B illustrates a perspective view of one embodiment of a rotating growth device in a cell growth module housing.FIG. 6C depicts a cut-away view of the cell growth module fromFIG. 6B .FIG. 6D illustrates the cell growth module ofFIG. 6B coupled to LED, detector, and temperature regulating components. -
FIG. 7A is a model of tangential flow filtration employed by the TFF device presented herein.FIG. 7B depicts a top view of a lower member of one embodiment of an exemplary TFF device.FIG. 7C depicts a top view of upper and lower members and a membrane of an exemplary TFF device.FIG. 7D depicts a bottom view of upper and lower members and a membrane of an exemplary TFF device.FIGS. 7E-7K depict various views of yet another embodiment of a TFF module having fluidically coupled reservoirs.FIG. 7L is an exemplary pneumatic architecture diagram for the TFF module described in relation toFIGS. 7E-7K . -
FIGS. 8A and 8B are top perspective and bottom perspective views, respectively, of flow-through electroporation devices (here, there are six such devices co-joined).FIG. 8C is a top view of one embodiment of an exemplary flow-through electroporation device.FIG. 8D depicts a top view of a cross section of the electroporation device ofFIG. 8C .FIG. 8E is a side view cross section of a lower portion of the electroporation devices ofFIGS. 8C and 8D . -
FIG. 9 is a simplified block diagram of an embodiment of an exemplary automated multi-module cell processing instrument comprising an isolation or substantial isolation/incubation/editing and normalization or cherry-picking module (“solid wall isolation/incubation/normalization module” or “SWIIN”). -
FIG. 10 is a simplified block diagram of an alternative embodiment of an exemplary automated multi-module cell processing instrument comprising an isolation or substantial isolation/incubation/editing and normalization or cherry-picking module (“solid wall isolation/incubation/normalization module” or “SWIIN”). -
FIG. 11A is a map of an exemplary bacterial engine vector that may be used in the methods described herein; andFIG. 11B is a map of an exemplary bacteria editing vector (with an editing cassette) that may be used in the methods described herein. -
FIG. 12 is a bar graph showing the transformation efficiencies observed for galK gRNA targeting cassettes under a variety of promoters. -
FIG. 13 is a plot of cell growth vs. time, demonstrating that thermal induction of editing does not impact bacterial cell growth or viability. -
FIG. 14 depicts results demonstrating repressed gRNA cassettes yield high cell viability/transformation efficiency for three exemplary nucleases. -
FIG. 15 illustrates heat maps and growth curves showing the OD at 6 hours for uninduced and induced cell populations. -
FIG. 16 shows the results of cell colony normalization for E. coli cells under various conditions. -
FIG. 17A is a photograph of a solid wall device with a permeable bottom on agar, on which yeast cells have been substantially isolated and grown into clonal colonies. -
FIG. 17B presents photographs of yeast colony growth at various time points. -
FIG. 18 is a graph comparing the percentage of editing obtained for a standard plating protocol (SPP), and replicate samples using two different conditions in a solid wall isolation, incubation, and normalization device (SWIIN): the first with LB+arabinose; and the second with SOB followed by SOB+arabinose. -
FIG. 19 is a bar graph showing the curing efficiency obtained with four different protocols performed for curing on the SWIIN. -
FIG. 20A shows two exemplary depletion maps for MAD7.FIG. 20B is a bar graph demonstrating that the cherry-picking methods described herein allow for identification of edits adjacent non-canonical PAMs. - All of the functionalities described in connection with one embodiment are intended to be applicable to the additional embodiments described herein except where expressly stated or where the feature or function is incompatible with the additional embodiments. For example, where a given feature or function is expressly described in connection with one embodiment but not expressly mentioned in connection with an alternative embodiment, it should be understood that the feature or function may be deployed, utilized, or implemented in connection with the alternative embodiment unless the feature or function is incompatible with the alternative embodiment.
- The practice of the techniques described herein may employ, unless otherwise indicated, conventional techniques and descriptions of organic chemistry, polymer technology, molecular biology (including recombinant techniques), cell biology, biochemistry, and sequencing technology, which are within the skill of those who practice in the art. Such conventional techniques include polymer array synthesis, hybridization and ligation of polynucleotides, and detection of hybridization using a label. Specific illustrations of suitable techniques can be had by reference to the examples herein. However, other equivalent conventional procedures can, of course, also be used. Such conventional techniques and descriptions can be found in standard laboratory manuals such as Green, et al., eds., Genome Analysis: A Laboratory Manual Series (Vols. I-IV) (1999); Weiner, Gabriel, Stephens, eds., Genetic Variation: A Laboratory Manual (2007); Dieffenbach, Dveksler, eds., PCR Primer: A Laboratory Manual (2003); Bowtell and Sambrook, DNA Microarrays: A Molecular Cloning Manual (2003); Mount, Bioinformatics: Sequence and Genome Analysis (2004); Sambrook and Russell, Condensed Protocols from Molecular Cloning: A Laboratory Manual (2006); Stryer, Biochemistry (4th Ed.) W.H. Freeman, New York N.Y. (1995); Gait, “Oligonucleotide Synthesis: A Practical Approach” (1984), IRL Press, London; Nelson and Cox, Lehninger, Principles of
Biochemistry 3rd Ed., W. H. Freeman Pub., New York, N.Y. (2000); Berg et al., Biochemistry, 5th Ed., W.H. Freeman Pub., New York, N.Y. (2002); Doyle & Griffiths, eds., Cell and Tissue Culture: Laboratory Procedures in Biotechnology, Doyle & Griffiths, eds., John Wiley & Sons (1998); G. Hadlaczky, ed. Mammalian Chromosome Engineering—Methods and Protocols, Humana Press (2011); and Lanza and Klimanskaya, eds., Essential Stem Cell Methods, Academic Press (2011), all of which are herein incorporated in their entirety by reference for all purposes. CRISPR-specific techniques can be found in, e.g., Appasani and Church, Genome Editing and Engineering from TALENs and CRISPRs to Molecular Surgery (2018); and Lindgren and Charpentier, CRISPR: Methods and Protocols (2015); both of which are herein incorporated in their entirety by reference for all purposes. - Note that as used herein and in the appended claims, the singular forms “a,” “an,” and “the” include plural referents unless the context clearly dictates otherwise. Thus, for example, reference to “a cell” refers to one or more cells, and reference to “the system” includes reference to equivalent steps, methods and devices known to those skilled in the art, and so forth. Additionally, it is to be understood that terms such as “left,” “right,” “top,” “bottom,” “front,” “rear,” “side,” “height,” “length,” “width,” “upper,” “lower,” “interior,” “exterior,” “inner,” and/or “outer” that may be used herein merely describe points of reference and do not necessarily limit embodiments of the present disclosure to any particular orientation or configuration. Furthermore, terms such as “first,” “second,” “third,” etc., merely identify one of a number of portions, components, steps, operations, functions, and/or points of reference as disclosed herein, and likewise do not necessarily limit embodiments of the present disclosure to any particular configuration or orientation.
- Additionally, the terms “approximately,” “proximate,” “minor,” and similar terms generally refer to ranges that include the identified value within a margin of 20%, 10% or preferably 5% in certain embodiments, and any values therebetween.
- Unless defined otherwise, all technical and scientific terms used herein have the same meaning as commonly understood by one of ordinary skill in the art to which this invention belongs. All publications mentioned herein are incorporated by reference for the purpose of describing and disclosing devices, methods and cell populations that may be used in connection with the presently described invention.
- Where a range of values is provided, it is understood that each intervening value, between the upper and lower limit of that range and any other stated or intervening value in that stated range is encompassed within the invention. The upper and lower limits of these smaller ranges may independently be included in the smaller ranges, and are also encompassed within the invention, subject to any specifically excluded limit in the stated range. Where the stated range includes one or both of the limits, ranges excluding either both of those included limits are also included in the invention.
- In the following description, numerous specific details are set forth to provide a more thorough understanding of the present invention. However, it will be apparent to one of ordinary skill in the art that the present invention may be practiced without one or more of these specific details. In other instances, features and procedures well known to those skilled in the art have not been described in order to avoid obscuring the invention.
- The term “complementary” as used herein refers to Watson-Crick base pairing between nucleotides and specifically refers to nucleotides that are hydrogen bonded to one another with thymine or uracil residues linked to adenine residues by two hydrogen bonds and cytosine and guanine residues linked by three hydrogen bonds. In general, a nucleic acid includes a nucleotide sequence described as having a “percent complementarity” or “percent homology” to a specified second nucleotide sequence. For example, a nucleotide sequence may have 80%, 90%, or 100% complementarity to a specified second nucleotide sequence, indicating that 8 of 10, 9 of 10 or 10 of 10 nucleotides of a sequence are complementary to the specified second nucleotide sequence. For instance, the
nucleotide sequence 3′-TCGA-5′ is 100% complementary to thenucleotide sequence 5′-AGCT-3′; and thenucleotide sequence 3′-TCGA-5′ is 100% complementary to a region of thenucleotide sequence 5′-TTAGCTGG-3′. - The term DNA “control sequences” refers collectively to promoter sequences, polyadenylation signals, transcription termination sequences, upstream regulatory domains, origins of replication, internal ribosome entry sites, nuclear localization sequences, enhancers, and the like, which collectively provide for the replication, transcription and translation of a coding sequence in a recipient cell. Not all of these types of control sequences need to be present so long as a selected coding sequence is capable of being replicated, transcribed and—for some components—translated in an appropriate host cell.
- As used herein the term “donor DNA” or “donor nucleic acid” refers to nucleic acid that is designed to introduce a DNA sequence modification (insertion, deletion, substitution) into a locus by homologous recombination using nucleic acid-guided nucleases. For homology-directed repair, the donor DNA must have sufficient homology to the regions flanking the “cut site” or site to be edited in the genomic target sequence. The length of the homology arm(s) will depend on, e.g., the type and size of the modification being made. For example, the donor DNA will have at least one region of sequence homology (e.g., one homology arm) to the genomic target locus. In many instances and preferably, the donor DNA will have two regions of sequence homology (e.g., two homology arms) to the genomic target locus. Preferably, an “insert” region or “DNA sequence modification” region—the nucleic acid modification that one desires to be introduced into a genome target locus in a cell—will be located between two regions of homology. The DNA sequence modification may change one or more bases of the target genomic DNA sequence at one specific site or multiple specific sites. A change may include changing 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 10, 15, 20, 25, 30, 35, 40, 50, 75, 100, 150, 200, 300, 400, or 500 or more base pairs of the target sequence. A deletion or insertion may be a deletion or insertion of 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 10, 15, 20, 25, 30, 35, 40, 50, 75, 100, 150, 200, 300, 400, or 500 or more base pairs of the target sequence. The donor DNA optionally further includes an alteration to the target sequence, e.g., a PAM mutation, that prevents binding of the nuclease at the PAM or spacer in the target sequence after editing has taken place.
- As used herein, “enrichment” refers to enriching for edited cells by isolation or substantial isolation of cells, initial growth of cells into cell colonies (e.g., incubation), editing (optionally induced, particularly in bacterial systems), and growing the cell colonies into terminal-sized colonies (e.g., saturation or normalization of colony growth). As used herein, “cherry picking” or “selection of edited cells” refers to the process of using a combination of isolation or substantial isolation, initial growth of cells into colonies (incubation), editing (optionally induced, particularly in bacterial systems), then using cell growth—measured by colony size, concentration of metabolites or waste products, or other characteristics that correlate with the rate of growth of the cells—to select for cells that have been edited based on editing-induced growth delay. Selection may entail picking or selecting slow-growing cell colonies; alternatively, selection may entail eliminating (by, e.g., eradicating or removing) the faster-growing cell colonies.
- The terms “guide nucleic acid” or “guide RNA” or “gRNA” refer to a polynucleotide comprising 1) a guide sequence capable of hybridizing to a genomic target locus, and 2) a scaffold sequence capable of interacting or complexing with a nucleic acid-guided nuclease.
- “Homology” or “identity” or “similarity” refers to sequence similarity between two peptides or, more often in the context of the present disclosure, between two nucleic acid molecules. The term “homologous region” or “homology arm” refers to a region on the donor DNA with a certain degree of homology with the target genomic DNA sequence. Homology can be determined by comparing a position in each sequence which may be aligned for purposes of comparison. When a position in the compared sequence is occupied by the same base or amino acid, then the molecules are homologous at that position. A degree of homology between sequences is a function of the number of matching or homologous positions shared by the sequences.
- As used herein, the terms “isolation” or “isolate” mean to separate individual cells so that each cell (and the colonies formed from each cell) will be separate from other cells; for example, a single cell in a single microwell, or 100 single cells each in its own microwell. “Isolation” or “isolated cells” result in one embodiment, from a Poisson distribution in arraying cells. The terms “substantially isolated”, “largely isolated”, and “substantial isolation” mean cells are largely separated from one another, in small groups or batches. That is, when 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 17, 18, 19, 20, 21, 22, 23, 24, 25, 26, 27, 28, 29, 30 or up to 50—but preferably 10 or less cells—are delivered to a microwell. “Substantially isolated” or “largely isolated” result, in one embodiment, from a “substantial Poisson distribution” in arraying cells. With more complex libraries of edits—or with libraries that may comprise lethal edits or edits with greatly-varying fitness effects—it is preferred that cells be isolated via a Poisson distribution.
- “Operably linked” refers to an arrangement of elements where the components so described are configured so as to perform their usual function. Thus, control sequences operably linked to a coding sequence are capable of effecting the transcription, and in some cases, the translation, of a coding sequence. The control sequences need not be contiguous with the coding sequence so long as they function to direct the expression of the coding sequence. Thus, for example, intervening untranslated yet transcribed sequences can be present between a promoter sequence and the coding sequence and the promoter sequence can still be considered “operably linked” to the coding sequence. In fact, such sequences need not reside on the same contiguous DNA molecule (i.e. chromosome) and may still have interactions resulting in altered regulation.
- A “promoter” or “promoter sequence” is a DNA regulatory region capable of binding RNA polymerase and initiating transcription of a polynucleotide or polypeptide coding sequence such as messenger RNA, ribosomal RNA, small nuclear or nucleolar RNA, guide RNA, or any kind of RNA transcribed by any class of any RNA polymerase I, II or III. Promoters may be constitutive or inducible. In the methods described herein optionally the promoters driving transcription of the gRNAs is inducible.
- As used herein the term “selectable marker” refers to a gene introduced into a cell, which confers a trait suitable for artificial selection. General use selectable markers are well-known to those of ordinary skill in the art. Drug selectable markers such as ampicillin/carbenicillin, kanamycin, chloramphenicol, erythromycin, tetracycline, gentamicin, bleomycin, streptomycin, puromycin, hygromycin, blasticidin, and G418 may be employed. In other embodiments, selectable markers include, but are not limited to human nerve growth factor receptor (detected with a MAb, such as described in U.S. Pat. No. 6,365,373); truncated human growth factor receptor (detected with MAb); mutant human dihydrofolate reductase (DHFR; fluorescent MTX substrate available); secreted alkaline phosphatase (SEAP; fluorescent substrate available); human thymidylate synthase (TS; confers resistance to anti-cancer agent fluorodeoxyuridine); human glutathione S-transferase alpha (GSTA1; conjugates glutathione to the stem cell selective alkylator busulfan; chemoprotective selectable marker in CD34+cells); CD24 cell surface antigen in hematopoietic stem cells; rhamnose; human CAD gene to confer resistance to N-phosphonacetyl-L-aspartate (PALA); human multi-drug resistance-1 (MDR-1; P-glycoprotein surface protein selectable by increased drug resistance or enriched by FACS); human CD25 (IL-2α; detectable by MAb-FITC); Methylguanine-DNA methyltransferase (MGMT; selectable by carmustine); and Cytidine deaminase (CD; selectable by Ara-C). “Selective medium” as used herein refers to cell growth medium to which has been added a chemical compound or biological moiety that selects for or against selectable markers.
- The terms “target genomic DNA sequence”, “target sequence”, or “genomic target locus” refer to any locus in vitro or in vivo, or in a nucleic acid (e.g., genome) of a cell or population of cells, in which a change of at least one nucleotide is desired using a nucleic acid-guided nuclease editing system. The target sequence can be a genomic locus or extrachromosomal locus.
- A “vector” is any of a variety of nucleic acids that comprise a desired sequence or sequences to be delivered to and/or expressed in a cell. Vectors are typically composed of DNA, although RNA vectors are also available. Vectors include, but are not limited to, plasmids, fosmids, phagemids, virus genomes, YACs, BACs, mammalian synthetic chromosomes, and the like. As used herein, the phrase “engine vector” comprises a coding sequence for a nuclease—optionally under the control of an inducible promoter—to be used in the nucleic acid-guided nuclease systems and methods of the present disclosure. The engine vector may also comprise, in a bacterial system, the λ Red recombineering system or an equivalent thereto, as well as a selectable marker. As used herein the phrase “editing vector” comprises a donor nucleic acid, including an alteration to the target sequence which prevents nuclease binding at a PAM or spacer in the target sequence after editing has taken place, and a coding sequence for a gRNA optionally under the control of an inducible promoter (and preferably under the control of an inducible promoter in bacterial systems). The editing vector may also comprise a selectable marker and/or a barcode. In some embodiments, the engine vector and editing vector may be combined; that is, the contents of the engine vector may be found on the editing vector.
- The present disclosure provides instruments, modules and methods for nucleic acid-guided nuclease genome editing that provide 1) enhanced observed editing efficiency of nucleic acid-guided nuclease editing methods, and 2) improvement in screening for and detecting cells whose genomes have been properly edited, including high-throughput screening techniques. In current protocols employing nuclease systems, bulk culture of cells with constitutively-expressed nuclease components typically are used to drive high-efficiency editing. However, pooled or multiplex formats can lead to selective enrichment of cells that are not edited due to the lack of double-strand DNA breaks that occur during editing.
- Presented herein are methods that take advantage of isolation (separating cells and growing them into clonal colonies) and either normalization of cell colonies or cherry picking of slow-growing colonies. Isolation or substantial isolation, incubation, followed by editing (optionally with a gRNA under the control of an inducible promoter) and normalization overcomes growth bias from unedited cells, and substituting cherry picking for normalization allows for direct selection of edited cells. The instruments, modules, and methods may be applied to all cell types including, archaeal, prokaryotic, and eukaryotic (e.g., yeast, fungal, plant and animal) cells.
- The instruments, modules, and methods described herein employ editing cassettes comprising a guide RNA (gRNA) sequence covalently linked to a donor DNA sequence where, particularly in bacterial systems, the gRNA optionally is under the control of an inducible promoter (e.g., the editing cassettes are CREATE cassettes; see U.S. Ser. No. 9/982,278, issued 29 May 2019 and Ser. No. 10/240,167, issued 26 Mar. 2019; Ser. No. 10/266,849, issued 23 Apr. 2019; and U.S. Ser. No. 15/948,785, filed 9 Apr. 2018; Ser. No. 16/275,439, filed 14 Feb. 2019; and Ser. No. 16/275,465, filed 14 Feb. 2019, all of which are incorporated by reference in their entirety). The disclosed methods allow for cells to be transformed, substantially isolated, grown for several doublings (e.g. incubation), after which editing is allowed. The isolation process effectively negates the effect of unedited cells taking over the cell population. The combination of substantially isolating cells, then allowing for initial growth followed by optionally inducing transcription of the gRNA (and optionally the nuclease) and either normalization of cell colonies or cherry picking cells leads to 2-2.50×, 10-225×, 25-200×, 40-175×, 50-150×, 60-100×, or 50-100× gains in identifying edited cells over prior art methods and allows for generation of arrayed or pooled edited cells comprising cell libraries with edited genomes. Additionally, the methods may be leveraged to create iterative editing systems to generate combinatorial libraries of cells with two to many edits in each cellular genome. Optionally using inducible gRNA constructs (and in some embodiments, inducible nuclease constructs) provides “pulsed” exposure of the cells to active editing components, which 1) allows for the cells to be arrayed (e.g., largely isolated) prior to initiation of the editing procedure, 2) decreases off-arget activity, 3) allows for identification of rare cell edits, and 4) enriches for edited cells or permit high-throughput screening applications to identify editing activity using cell growth as a proxy for editing, by, e.g., measuring optical density, colony size, or metabolic by-products or other characteristics thereby enriching the edited cell population.
- The instruments, compositions and methods described herein improve editing systems in which nucleic acid-guided nucleases (e.g., RNA-guided nucleases) are used to edit specific target regions in an organism's genome. A nucleic acid-guided nuclease complexed with an appropriate synthetic guide nucleic acid in a cell can cut the genome of the cell at a desired location. The guide nucleic acid helps the nucleic acid-guided nuclease recognize and cut the DNA at a specific target sequence. By manipulating the nucleotide sequence of the guide nucleic acid, the nucleic acid-guided nuclease may be programmed to target any DNA sequence for cleavage as long as an appropriate protospacer adjacent motif (PAM) is nearby. In certain aspects, the nucleic acid-guided nuclease editing system may use two separate guide nucleic acid molecules that combine to function as a guide nucleic acid, e.g., a CRISPR RNA (crRNA) and trans-activating CRISPR RNA (tracrRNA). In other aspects, the guide nucleic acid may be a single guide nucleic acid that includes both the crRNA and tracrRNA sequences or a single guide nucleic acid that does not require a tracrRNA.
- In general, a guide nucleic acid (e.g., gRNA) complexes with a compatible nucleic acid-guided nuclease and can then hybridize with a target sequence, thereby directing the nuclease to the target sequence. A guide nucleic acid can be DNA or RNA; alternatively, a guide nucleic acid may comprise both DNA and RNA. In some embodiments, a guide nucleic acid may comprise modified or non-naturally occurring nucleotides. In cases where the guide nucleic acid comprises RNA, the gRNA is encoded by a DNA sequence on a polynucleotide molecule such as a plasmid, linear construct, or resides within an editing cassette and is optionally—particularly in bacterial systems—under the control of an inducible promoter.
- A guide nucleic acid comprises a guide sequence, where the guide sequence is a polynucleotide sequence having sufficient complementarity with a target sequence to hybridize with the target sequence and direct sequence-specific binding of a complexed nucleic acid-guided nuclease to the target sequence. The degree of complementarity between a guide sequence and the corresponding target sequence, when optimally aligned using a suitable alignment algorithm, is about or more than about 50%, 60%, 75%, 80%, 85%, 90%, 95%, 97.5%, 99%, or more. Optimal alignment may be determined with the use of any suitable algorithm for aligning sequences. In some embodiments, a guide sequence (the portion of the guide nucleic acid that hybridizes with the target sequence) is about or more than about 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 17, 18, 19, 20, 21, 22, 23, 24, 25, 26, 27, 28, 29, 30, 35, 40, 45, 50, 75, or more nucleotides in length. In some embodiments, a guide sequence is less than about 75, 50, 45, 40, 35, 30, 25, 20 nucleotides in length. Preferably the guide sequence is 10-30 or 15-20 nucleotides long, or 15, 16, 17, 18, 19, or 20 nucleotides in length.
- In the present methods and compositions, the guide nucleic acid is provided as a sequence to be expressed from a plasmid or vector and comprises both the guide sequence and the scaffold sequence as a single transcript. Alternatively, the guide nucleic acids may be transcribed from two separate sequences. The guide nucleic acid can be engineered to target a desired target DNA sequence by altering the guide sequence so that the guide sequence is complementary to the target DNA sequence, thereby allowing hybridization between the guide sequence and the target DNA sequence. In general, to generate an edit in the target DNA sequence, the gRNA/nuclease complex binds to a target sequence as determined by the guide RNA, and the nuclease recognizes a protospacer adjacent notif (PAM) sequence adjacent to the target sequence. The target sequence can be any polynucleotide (either DNA or RNA) endogenous or exogenous to a prokaryotic or eukaryotic cell, or in vitro. For example, the target sequence can be a polynucleotide residing in the nucleus of a eukaryotic cell. A target sequence can be a sequence encoding a gene product (e.g., a protein) and/or a non-coding sequence (e.g., a regulatory polynucleotide, an intron, a PAM, or “junk” DNA).
- The guide nucleic acid may be part of an editing cassette that encodes the donor nucleic acid; that is, the editing cassette may be a CREATE cassette (see, e.g., U.S. Ser. No. 9/982,278, issued 29 May 2019 and Ser. No. 10/240,167, issued 26 Mar. 2019; Ser. No. 10/266,849, issued 23 Apr. 2019; and U.S. Ser. Nos. 15/948,785, filed 9 Apr. 2018; Ser. No. 16/275,439, filed 14 Feb. 2019; and Ser. No. 16/275,465, filed 14 Feb. 2019, all of which are incorporated by reference in their entirety). The guide nucleic acid and the donor nucleic acid may be and typically are under the control of a single (optionally inducible) promoter. Alternatively, the guide nucleic acid may not be part of the editing cassette and instead may be encoded on the engine or editing vector backbone. For example, a sequence coding for a guide nucleic acid can be assembled or inserted into a vector backbone first, followed by insertion of the donor nucleic acid. In other cases, the donor nucleic acid can be inserted or assembled into a vector backbone first, followed by insertion of the sequence coding for the guide nucleic acid. In yet other cases, the sequence encoding the guide nucleic acid and the donor nucleic acid (inserted, for example, in an editing cassette) are simultaneously but separately inserted or assembled into a vector. In yet other embodiments and preferably, the sequence encoding the guide nucleic acid and the sequence encoding the donor nucleic acid are both included in the editing cassette.
- The target sequence is associated with a PAM, which is a short nucleotide sequence recognized by the gRNA/nuclease complex. The precise PAM sequence and length requirements for different nucleic acid-guided nucleases vary; however, PAMs typically are 2-7 base-pair sequences adjacent or in proximity to the target sequence and, depending on the nuclease, can be 5′ or 3′ to the target sequence. Engineering of the PAM-interacting domain of a nucleic acid-guided nuclease may allow for alteration of PAM specificity, improve target site recognition fidelity, decrease target site recognition fidelity, and increase the versatility of a nucleic acid-guided nuclease. In certain embodiments, the genome editing of a target sequence both introduces a desired DNA change to a target sequence, e.g., the genomic DNA of a cell, and removes, mutates, or renders inactive a proto-spacer (PAM) region in the target sequence; that is, the donor DNA often includes an alteration to the target sequence that prevents binding of the nuclease at the PAM in the target sequence after editing has taken place. Rendering the PAM at the target sequence inactive precludes additional editing of the cell genome at that target sequence, e.g., upon subsequent exposure to a nucleic acid-guided nuclease complexed with a synthetic guide nucleic acid in later rounds of editing. Thus, cells having the desired target sequence edit and an altered PAM can be selected using a nucleic acid-guided nuclease complexed with a synthetic guide nucleic acid complementary to the target sequence. Cells that did not undergo the first editing event will be cut rendering a double-stranded DNA break, and thus will not continue to be viable. The cells containing the desired target sequence edit and PAM alteration will not be cut, as these edited cells no longer contain the necessary PAM site and will continue to grow and propagate.
- The range of target sequences that nucleic acid-guided nucleases can recognize is constrained by the need for a specific PAM to be located near the desired target sequence. As a result, it often can be difficult to target edits with the precision that is necessary for genome editing. It has been found that nucleases can recognize some PAMs very well (e.g., canonical PAMs), and other PAMs less well or poorly (e.g., non-canonical PAMs). Because the methods disclosed herein allow for identification of edited cells in a large background of unedited cells, the methods allow for identification of edited cells where the PAM is less than optimal; that is, the methods for identifying edited cells herein allow for identification of edited cells even if editing efficiency is very low. Additionally, the present methods expand the scope of target sequences that may be edited since edits are more readily identified, including cells where the genome edits are associated with less functional PAMs.
- As for the nuclease component of the nucleic acid-guided nuclease editing system, the polynucleotide sequence encoding the nucleic acid-guided nuclease can be codon optimized for expression in particular cells, such as archaeal, prokaryotic or eukaryotic cells. Eukaryotic cells can be yeast, fungi, algae, plant, animal, or human cells. Eukaryotic cells may be those of or derived from a particular organism, such as a mammal, including but not limited to human, mouse, rat, rabbit, dog, or non-human mammal including non-human primate. The choice of nucleic acid-guided nuclease to be employed depends on many factors, such as what type of edit is to be made in the target sequence and whether an appropriate PAM is located close to the desired target sequence. Nucleases of use in the methods described herein include but are not limited to
Cas 9,Cas 12/CpfI, MAD2, or MAD7 or other MADzymes. As with the guide nucleic acid, the nuclease may be encoded by a DNA sequence on a vector (e.g., the engine vector) and be under the control of a constitutive or an inducible promoter. Again, at least one of and preferably both of the nuclease and guide nucleic acid are under the control of an inducible promoter. - Another component of the nucleic acid-guided nuclease system is the donor nucleic acid. In some embodiments, the donor nucleic acid is on the same polynucleotide (e.g., vector or editing (CREATE) cassette) as the guide nucleic acid. The donor nucleic acid is designed to serve as a template for homologous recombination with a target sequence nicked or cleaved by the nucleic acid-guided nuclease as a part of the gRNA/nuclease complex. A donor nucleic acid polynucleotide may be of any suitable length, such as about or more than about 30, 35, 40, 45, 50, 75, 100, 150, 200, 500, 1000, 2500, 5000 nucleotides or more in length. In certain preferred aspects, the donor nucleic acid can be provided as an oligonucleotide of between 40-300 nucleotides, more preferably between 50-250 nucleotides. The donor nucleic acid comprises a region that is complementary to a portion of the target sequence (e.g., a homology arm). When optimally aligned, the donor nucleic acid overlaps with (is complementary to) the target sequence by, e.g., about 10, 15, 20, 25, 30, 35, 40, 50, 60, 70, 80, 90 or more nucleotides. In many embodiments, the donor nucleic acid comprises two homology arms (regions complementary to the target sequence) flanking the mutation or difference between the donor nucleic acid and the target template. The donor nucleic acid comprises at least one mutation or alteration compared to the target sequence, such as an insertion, deletion, modification, or any combination thereof compared to the target sequence.
- Often the donor nucleic acid is provided as an editing cassette, which is inserted into a vector backbone where the vector backbone may comprise a promoter driving transcription of the gRNA and the donor nucleic acid. Moreover, there may be more than one, e.g., two, three, four, or more guide nucleic acid/donor nucleic acid cassettes inserted into an engine vector, where the guide nucleic acids are under the control of separate, different promoters, separate, like promoters, or where all guide nucleic acid/donor nucleic acid pairs are under the control of a single promoter. (See, e.g., U.S. Ser. No. 16/275,465, filed 14 Feb. 2019, drawn to multiple CREATE cassettes.) The promoter driving transcription of the gRNA and the donor nucleic acid (or driving more than one gRNA/donor nucleic acid pair) is optionally an inducible promoter (and in bacterial systems is preferably an inducible promoter) and the promoter driving transcription of the nuclease is optionally an inducible promoter as well.
- Inducible editing is advantageous in that substantially or largely isolated cells can be grown for several to many cell doublings before editing is initiated, which increases the likelihood that cells with edits will survive, as the double-strand cuts caused by active editing are largely toxic to the cells. This toxicity results both in cell death in the edited colonies, as well as a lag in growth for the edited cells that do survive but must repair and recover following editing. However, once the edited cells have a chance to recover, the size of the colonies of the edited cells will eventually catch up to the size of the colonies of unedited cells (e.g., the process of “normalization” or growing colonies to “terminal size”; see, e.g.,
FIG. 1B described infra). - In addition to the donor nucleic acid, an editing cassette may comprise one or more primer sites. The primer sites can be used to amplify the editing cassette by using oligonucleotide primers; for example, if the primer sites flank one or more of the other components of the editing cassette.
- Also, as described above, the donor nucleic acid may comprise—in addition to the at least one mutation relative to a target sequence—one or more PAM sequence alterations that mutate, delete or render inactive the PAM site in the target sequence. The PAM sequence alteration in the target sequence renders the PAM site “immune” to the nucleic acid-guided nuclease and protects the target sequence from further editing in subsequent rounds of editing if the same nuclease is used.
- The editing cassette also may comprise a barcode. A barcode is a unique DNA sequence that corresponds to the donor DNA sequence such that the barcode can identify the edit made to the corresponding target sequence. The barcode can comprise greater than four nucleotides. In some embodiments, the editing cassettes comprise a collection of donor nucleic acids representing, e.g., gene-wide or genome-wide libraries of donor nucleic acids. The library of editing cassettes is cloned into vector backbones where, e.g., each different donor nucleic acid design is associated with a different barcode, or, alternatively, each different cassette molecule is associate with a different barcode.
- Additionally, in some embodiments, an expression vector or cassette encoding components of the nucleic acid-guided nuclease system further encodes a nucleic acid-guided nuclease comprising one or more nuclear localization sequences (NLSs), such as about or more than about 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, or more NLSs. In some embodiments, the engineered nuclease comprises NLSs at or near the amino-terminus, NLSs at or near the carboxy-terminus, or a combination.
- The methods described herein provide enhanced observed editing efficiency of nucleic acid-guided nuclease editing methods as the result of a combination of isolation or substantial isolation, initial cell growth (incubation), editing, and either normalization of the resulting cell colonies or cherry picking slow-growing cell colonies. The combination of the isolation or substantial isolation, initial cell growth, editing and normalization processes overcomes the growth bias in favor of unedited cells—and the fitness effects of editing (including differential editing rates)—thus allowing all cells “equal billing” with one another. The combination of isolation or substantial isolation, initial cell growth, editing, and cherry picking allows for direct selection of edited colonies of cells. The result of the methods described herein is that even in nucleic acid-guided nuclease systems where editing is not optimal—such as in systems where non-canonical PAMs are targeted—there is an increase in the observed editing efficiency; that is, edited cells can be identified even in a large background of unedited cells. Observed editing efficiency can be improved up to 80% or more. Isolating, incubating, editing, and normalization of cell colonies or cherry picking of cell colonies leads to 2-250×, 10-225×, 25-200×, 40-175×, 50-150×, 60-100×, or 5-100× gains in identifying edited cells over prior art methods and allows for the generation of arrayed or pooled edited cells comprising genome libraries, Additionally, the instruments, nodules and methods may be leveraged to create iterative editing systems to generate combinatorial libraries, identify rare cell edits, and enable high-throughput enrichment applications to identify editing activity.
-
FIG. 1A shows simplified flow charts for two alternativeexemplary methods FIG. 1A ,method 100 begins by transformingcells 110 with the components necessary to perform nucleic acid-guided nuclease editing. For example, the cells may be transformed simultaneously with separate engine and editing vectors; the cells may already be transformed with an engine vector expressing the nuclease (e.g., the cells may have already been transformed with an engine vector or the coding sequence for the nuclease may be stably integrated into the cellular genome) such that only the editing vector needs to be transformed into the cells; or the cells may be transformed with a single vector comprising all components required to perform nucleic acid-guided nuclease genome editing. - A variety of delivery systems can be used to introduce (e.g., transform or transfect) nucleic acid-guided nuclease editing system components into a
host cell 110. These delivery systems include the use of yeast systems, lipofection systems, microinjection systems, biolistic systems, virosomes, liposomes, immunoliposomes, polycations, lipid:nucleic acid conjugates, virions, artificial virions, viral vectors, electroporation, cell permeable peptides, nanoparticles, nanowires, exosomes. Alternatively, molecular trojan horse liposomes may be used to deliver nucleic acid-guided nuclease components across the blood brain barrier. Of interest, particularly in the context of an automated multi-module cell editing instrument is the use of electroporation, particularly flow-through electroporation (either as a stand-alone instrument or as a module in an automated multi-module system) as described in, e.g., U.S. Ser. No. 16/147,120, filed 28 Sep. 2018; Ser. No. 16/147,353, filed 28 Sep. 2018; Ser. No. 16/147,865, filed 30 Sep. 2018; and Ser. No. 16/147,871, filed 30 Sep. 2018. If the solid wall isolation or substantial isolation/incubation/editing and normalization module is one module in an automated multi-module cell editing instrument as described herein infra, the cells are likely transformed in an automated cell transformation module. - After the cells are transformed with the components necessary to perform nucleic acid-guided nuclease editing, the cells are substantially or largely isolated 120; that is, the cells are diluted (if necessary) in a liquid culture medium so that the cells, when delivered to a substrate for isolation, are substantially separated from one another and can form colonies that are substantially separated from one another. For example, if a solid wall device is used (described infra in relation to
FIGS. 3A-3E and 4A-4Z ), the cells are diluted such that when delivered to the solid wall device the cells fill the microwells of the solid wall device in a Poisson or substantial Poisson distribution. In one example (illustrated inFIG. 3A ), isolation is accomplished when an average of ½ cell is delivered to each microwell; that is, where some microwells contain one cell and other microwells contain no cells. Alternatively, a substantial Poisson distribution of cells occurs when two to several (2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 17, 18, 19, 20, 21, 22, 23, 24, 25, 26, 27, 28, 29, 30 or up to 50, but preferably 10 or less, or preferably 5 or less) cells are delivered to a microwell (illustrated inFIG. 3B ). - Once the cells have been isolated or substantially or largely isolated 120, the cells are allowed to grow to, e.g., between 2 and 130, or between 5 and 120, or between 10 and 100 doublings, establishing
clonal colonies 130. After colonies are established, editing proceeds 140. In some systems, for example, bacterial systems, an inducible system is used where at least the gRNA is under the control of an inducible promoter (seeFIG. 1C described in detail infra). Once editing is complete, inenrichment method 100 a the cells are grown into colonies ofterminal size 150; that is, the colonies arising from the substantially or largely isolated cells are grown into colonies to a point where cell growth has peaked and is normalized or saturated for both edited and unedited cells. Normalization occurs as the nutrients in the medium around a growing cell colony are depleted and/or cell growth fills the microwells and further growth is physically constrained. The terminal-size colonies are pooled 160 by, e.g., scraping the colonies off a plate comprising solid medium or other substrate or by flushing clonal cell colonies from microwells in a solid wall device or module to pool the cells from the normalized cell colonies. Again, because isolation or substantial isolation overcomes growth bias from unedited cells or cells exhibiting fitness effects as the result of edits made, isolation or substantial isolation, incubation, editing, and normalization alone enriches the total population of cells with cells that have been edited; that is, isolation or substantial isolation combined with incubation, editing and normalization (e.g., growing colonies to terminal size) allows for high-throughput enrichment of edited cells. -
Method 100 b shown inFIG. 1A is similar to themethod 100 a in that cells of interest are transformed 110 with the components necessary to perform nucleic acid-guided nuclease editing. As described above, the cells may be transformed simultaneously with both the engine and editing vectors, the cells may already be expressing the nuclease (e.g., the cells may have already been transformed with an engine vector or the coding sequence for the nuclease may be stably integrated into the cellular genome) such that only the editing vector needs to be transformed into the cells, or the cells may be transformed with a single vector comprising all components required to perform nucleic acid-guided nuclease genome editing. Further, if the isolation or substantial isolation of cells, incubation, editing, and either normalization or cherry-picking module (“solid wall isolation/incubation/normalization module” or “SWIIN”) is one module in an automated multi-module cell editing instrument (such as that shown inFIGS. 5A-5D and described below), cell transformation may be performed in an automated flow-through transformation module as described in relation toFIGS. 8A-8E below. - After the cells are transformed 110 with the components necessary to perform nucleic acid-guided nuclease editing, the cells are diluted (if necessary) in liquid medium so that the cells, when delivered to an isolation device or module, are separated from one another and can form colonies that are separated from one another. For example, if a solid wall device is used (described in relation to
FIGS. 3A-3J and 4A-4Y ) the cells are diluted such that when delivered to the solid wall device, the cells fill the microwells of the solid wall device in a Poisson or substantial Poisson distribution. - Once the cells have been substantially or largely isolated 120, the cells grown to, e.g., between 2 and 150, or between 5 and 120, or between 10 and 100 doublings, establishing
clonal colonies 130. After colonies are established, editing is allowed 140. In some embodiments such as in bacteria, editing is induced by, e.g., activating inducible promoters that control transcription of the gRNA and optionally the nuclease and a recombineering system. Once editing begins 140, many of the edited cells in the clonal colonies die due to the double-strand DNA breaks that occur during the editing process; however, in a percentage of edited cells, the genome is edited and the double-strand break is properly repaired. When allowed to recover, these edited cells start growing and re-establish cell populations within each isolated partition or colony; however, the growth of edited colonies tends to lag behind the growth of clonal colonies where an edit has not taken place (e.g., cell “escapees”). If growth of these colonies is monitored 170, the small or slow-growing colonies (edited cells) may be identified and then selected or cherry picked 180 based on the observable size differentials of the colonies. -
FIG. 1B is a plot of OD versus time for unedited cells (solid line) versus edited cells (dashed line).FIG. 1B shows how normalization of edited and non-edited colonies takes place. Note that the OD (e.g., growth) of the edited cells lags behind the unedited cells initially, but eventually catches up due, e.g., to unedited cells exhausting the nutrients in the medium, becoming physically constrained within a microwell or other confined growth area (such as a droplet), or otherwise exiting log-phase growth. The cell colonies are allowed to grow long enough for the growth of the edited colonies to catch up with (approximate the size of, e.g., number of cells in) the unedited colonies. -
FIG. 1C depicts an exemplary inducible expression system such as used in bacteria—in this example, the pL inducible system—for regulating gRNA activity. At the top ofFIG. 1C there is shown a portion of anexemplary engine vector 111 comprising an origin ofreplication 112, apromoter 114 driving expression of thec1857 repressor gene 116, and afirst pL promoter 118 driving expression of anuclease 121. At the top ofFIG. 1C there is also seen a portion of anexemplary editing vector 131, comprising an origin ofreplication 132, and asecond pL promoter 134 driving transcription of an editing cassette 136 (e.g., a CREATE cassette) which includes a coding sequences for both a gRNA and a donor DNA. The middle illustration ofFIG. 1C depicts theproduct 124 of thec1857 repressor gene 116 on theengine vector 111 actively repressing thefirst pL promoter 118 driving transcription of thenuclease 121 and thesecond pL promoter 134 driving transcription of theediting cassette 136 on theediting vector 131. Finally, the bottom illustration ofFIG. 1C depicts theprotein product 126 of thec1857 repressor gene 116 on theengine vector 111 unfolding/degrading due to increased temperature. The unfolded ordegraded protein product 126 cannot bindfirst pL promoter 118 orsecond pL promoter 134; thus,pL promoter 118 is active and drives transcription of thenuclease 121 onengine vector 111 andpL promoter 134 is active and drives transcription of theediting cassette 136 on theediting vector 131. - In
FIG. 1C , transcription of both the nuclease and the gRNA are under control of a pL promoter; however, in other embodiments, different inducible promoters may be used to drive transcription of the nuclease and gRNA or in some embodiments only the gRNA is under control of an inducible promoter. For example, the pL and pBAD promoters are shown in relation to the exemplary bacterial engine and editing vectors inFIGS. 11A and 11B , and a number of gene regulation control systems have been developed for the controlled expression of genes in plant, microbe and animal cells, including mammalian cells. These systems include the tetracycline-controlled transcriptional activation system (Tet-On/Tet-Off, Clontech, Inc. (Palo Alto, Calif.); Bujard and Gossen, PNAS, 89(12):5547-5551 (1992)), the Lac Switch Inducible system (Wyborski et al., Environ Mol Mutagen, 28(4):447-58 (1996); DuCoeur et al., Strategies 5(3):70-72 (1992); and U.S. Pat. No. 4,833,080), the ecdysone-inducible gene expression system (No et al., PNAS, 93(8):3346-3351 (1996)), the cumate gene-switch system (Mullick et al., BMC Biotechnology, 6:43 (2006)), and the tamoxifen-inducible gene expression (Zhang et al., Nucleic Acids Research, 24:543-548 (1996)) as well as others. However, the pL promoter is a particularly useful inducible promoter because the pL promoter is activated by an increase in temperature, to, e.g., 42° C., and deactivated by returning the temperature to, e.g., 30° C. With other inducible systems that are activated by the presence or absence of a particular molecular compound, activating the inducible promoter requires addition of or removal of a molecular compound from the culture medium, thus requiring liquid handling, medium exchange, wash steps and the like. -
FIG. 2A depicts a standard, conventional,prior art protocol 200 for performing nucleic acid-guided nuclease genome editing where constitutively-expressed nuclease components typically are used to drive high efficiency editing. InFIG. 2A , a library or collection ofediting vectors 202 is introduced 203 (e.g., electroporated) intocultured cells 204 that comprise a coding sequence for a nuclease under the control of a constitutive or inducible promoter. In some embodiments, the coding sequence for the nuclease is contained on an “engine vector”, although in other embodiments the coding sequence for the nuclease may be integrated into the cell genome. In yet another alternative, the components of the engine and editing vectors may be combined. Theediting vectors 202 comprise an editing sequence comprising a sequence for a desired edit in a nucleic acid sequence endogenous to the cell as well as an optional PAM-altering sequence (most often a sequence that disables the PAM at the target sequence in the genome), a coding sequence for a gRNA under the control of a constitutive promoter, and a selectable marker. Once the cells have been transformed with the editing vectors, the cells are plated 205 onselective medium 206 to select for cells that have both the engine and the editing vectors and the cells are grown until colonies form. Cells are then picked 207 from the colonies and grown in, e.g., 96-well plates 208 to be prepared for genome or plasmid sequencing. The cells that grow onplate 206 with the selective medium should comprise both the engine and editing vectors; however, it is likely that in some cells the nucleic acid-guided editing components may be non-functional. In pooled or multiplex formats, there is likely to be selective enrichment of the cells with a non-functional editing system since un-edited cells are not subjected to the double-strand DNA breaks that occur during editing. The strong selection for cells with non-functional nucleic acid-guided nuclease editing systems leads to a disproportionate representation of non-edited cells in the final cell population and compromises the integrity of libraries generated via multiplexed nuclease editing systems. -
FIGS. 2B-2F depict improved protocols for performing nucleic acid-guided nuclease genome editing.FIG. 2B depicts afirst embodiment 201 of an improved protocol for performing nucleic acid-guided nuclease genome editing using an optional inducible promoter to drive expression of the gRNA. InFIG. 2B , a library or collection ofediting vectors 202 is introduced 203 (e.g., electroporated) intocultured cells 204 that comprise a coding sequence for a nuclease under the control of a constitutive or inducible promoter; however, in bacteria the tightest regulation of the nucleic acid-guided nuclease system is achieved by using an inducible promoter to drive expression of the nuclease, thus it is preferred that an inducible promoter is used to drive transcription of the nuclease. In some embodiments, the coding sequence for the nuclease is contained on an “engine plasmid” (most often along with, e.g., a selectable marker) that has already been transformed into the cells, although in other embodiments the coding sequence for the nuclease may be integrated into the genome of the cells. In yet other embodiments such as in yeast, the coding sequence for the nuclease may be located on the editing vector (that is, a combined engine and editing vector). Theediting vectors 202 comprise an editing sequence, which optionally includes a PAM-altering sequence (most often a sequence that disables the PAM at the target site in the genome), a coding sequence for a gRNA under the control of an inducible promoter, and a selectable marker. - Once the
cells 204 have been transformed with the editing vectors, the cells are plated 205 on selective medium to select for cells that have both the engine and the editing vectors and grown untilcolonies 206 form. Cells are then picked 207 from the colonies and grown overnight in, e.g., first 96-well plate 208 in medium that selects for both the engine and editing vectors. In anext step 209, the cells from the first 96-well plate 208 are replicated into a second 96-well plate 210 into medium containing an additional selective component such as, e.g., arabinose, to drive strong induction of the λ red recombineering system (the homologous repair machinery). The inducible pBAD promoter-induced by the presence of arabinose in the growth medium-controls the λ red recombineering system and is described in relation toFIG. 11A below. Again, though a recombineering system is exemplified here in a bacterial editing system, recombineering systems generally are not needed in eukaryotic editing systems. After initial cell growth at 30° C., cutting and editing of the cellular genome is induced by increasing the temperature to 42° C. in the second 96-well plate 210 for, e.g., one-half to approximately two hours (depending on cell type), to activate the pL inducible promoters which drive transcription of the nuclease and the gRNA. Following induction of cutting and editing e.g., for approximately 2 hours the temperature is returned to 30° C. to allow the cells to recover. - In addition, in a
step 211 cells from the first 96-well plate 208 are replicated into a third 96-well plate 214 into medium that does not contain the selective component that induces the homologous repair machinery (here, arabinose, such that the λ Red recombineering system is not activated). However, the third 96-well plate 214—aside from not having arabinose added to the growth medium—is subjected to the same conditions as the second 96-well plate; that is, initial cell growth at 30° C., increasing the temperature to 42° C. for, e.g., two hours to activate the pL inducible promoter driving the expression of the nuclease and the gRNA, then reducing the temperature to 30° C. to allow the cells to recover. As an alternative to 96-well plates agar plates plate 206 are arrayed.Plate 212 corresponds to the second 96-well plate 210, containing growth medium with arabinose, andplate 216 corresponds to the third 96-well plate 214, containing growth medium without arabinose. Note that as an alternative to performing the method depicted inFIG. 2B with +/− arabinose, one may perform the method with −/+ temperature induction of cutting. For example, in a +/− temperature induction experiment,plate 210 would be the uninduced culture plate (no temp) andculture plate 214 would be the temperature-induced culture plate. The same overall interpretation applies; however, cut activity is isolated to avoid having to deconvolute cut from paste. - Looking at the second and third 96-well plates (210 and 214, respectively) and at
plates well plate 210, there are two types of colonies: 226 (white wells) and 228 (hatched wells). Looking at third 96-well plate 214, there are two types of colonies: 220 (black wells) and 226 (white wells). Replicate plating of cells from the first 96-well plate into the second and third 96-well plates with differential media allows for functional deconvolution of the resulting cell populations. In third 96-well plate 214, cells were cultured in a medium without arabinose. With no arabinose, the λ Red recombineering system is not active, and cells that have active gRNA and nuclease expression (induced by increasing the temperature of the cultured cells to 42° C.) are not viable due to the double-strand cuts made by the active gRNA and nuclease yet without repair by the λ Red recombineering system. Thesecell colonies 222 are denoted by white wells. Thecell colonies 220 denoted by black wells represent cells that have inactive gRNAs, such that the genomes of cells in these colonies are not cut by the gRNA and nuclease complex. Inactive gRNAs occur at a frequency of approximately 2-15% in a typical cell editing experiment, and typically are the result of errors in the guide sequence portion (homology portion) of the gRNA. - In second 96-
well plate 210, the cells were cultured in a medium with arabinose, thereby activating the λ Red recombineering system. Cells that have active gRNA and nuclease expression (induced by increasing the temperature of the cultured cells to 42° C.) are cut, edited, and the λ Red recombineering system repairs the double-strand DNA breaks and thus these cells are viable. However, also viable are cells with inactive gRNAs (or less frequently, inactive nucleases). All viable colonies inplate 210 are denoted by hatchedwells 228. Finally, cells that have active gRNAs but are not edited appropriately (due to, e.g., an inactive recombineering system) are denoted bywhite wells 226. By comparing the second 96-well plate to the third 96-well plate, the function of the nucleic acid-guided nuclease system in each colony can be determined. For example, if colonies of cells grow without arabinose (plate 214, black wells 220) and with arabinose (plate 210, hatched wells 228), the cells must not have an active gRNA. If the cells had an active gRNA, they would not have been viable in medium without arabinose (e.g., without an active λ Red recombineering system). If colonies of cells fail to grow in medium without arabinose (plate 214, white wells 226) and do grow when arabinose is added to the culture medium (plate 210, hatched wells 228), the cells in these wells comprise an active nucleic acid-guided nuclease system—with active gRNA and nuclease components—and are very likely to have been properly edited. Finally, if the colonies of cells fail to grow either without arabinose (plate 214, white wells 226) or with arabinose (plate 210, white wells 226), the gRNA is active, but the cells are not able to repair the cut for some reason. Thus, the method depicted inFIG. 2B allows for identification of edited cell colonies via functional deconvolution of the various components of the editing “machinery” in one experiment. - In
plates well plates well plate 210, the medium inculture dish 212 contains arabinose, and like 96-well plate 214, the medium inculture dish 216 does not contain arabinose. Thus, inculture dish 216 cells with inactive gRNAs grow, as there is no edit (double-strand break) to repair. However, in cells with an active gRNA, editing takes place but there is no active repair machinery to repair the edits, and the cells are not viable and do not form colonies. Inculture dish 212 that contains arabinose, cells that have inactive gRNAs form colonies, as do cells that have active gRNAs but are properly edited. Cells that are not viable for whatever reason do not form colonies. As with 96-well plates culture dishes culture dishes culture dish 212 but not onculture dish 214, the gRNA is likely active and proper editing has taken place. If cells fail to grow on eitherculture dish - Thus, the
method 201 depicted inFIG. 2B allows for identification of cells with nonfunctional gRNAs that, due to the lack of double-strand DNA breaks, have a growth advantage. Most importantly, themethod 201 depicted inFIG. 2B allows for identification of cells that have been properly edited. An aliquot of thecolonies 228 from either second 96-well plate 210 oragar plate 212—the colonies confirmed to have an active gRNA—can be picked and sequenced to confirm editing. 96-well plate 210 oragar plate 212 may be retained so that once proper editing is confirmed by, e.g., sequencing, one can go back toplate Plates method 201 depicted inFIG. 2B first substantially or largely isolates the cells by plating them on selective medium at an appropriate dilution such that single cells form single colonies. Again, isolation or substantial isolation overcomes growth the bias that is characteristic of unedited cells. The method then allows for functional deconvolution of the different colonies by replica plating colonies in 96-well microtiter plates under different section media to allow positive identification of edited colonies. A specific protocol for this exemplary method is described in Example 6 below. -
FIG. 2C depicts a second exemplary embodiment of an improved protocol 240 for performing nucleic acid-guided nuclease genome editing using an inducible promoter in a bacterial system to drive expression of the gRNA, and, preferably, the nuclease as well. InFIG. 2C as inFIG. 2B , a library or collection ofediting vectors 202 is introduced 203 (e.g., electroporated) intocultured cells 204 that comprise a coding sequence for a nuclease under the control of a constitutive or inducible promoter; however, the tightest regulation of the nucleic acid-guided nuclease system is achieved by using an inducible promoter to drive expression of the nuclease and thus is preferred. Also likeFIG. 2B , in some embodiments, the coding sequence for the nuclease is contained on an “engine plasmid” (most often along with, e.g., a selectable marker) that has already been transformed into the cells, although in other embodiments, the coding sequence for the nuclease may be integrated into the genome of the cells. In yet other embodiments such as in yeast, the coding sequence for the nuclease may be located on the editing vector (that is, a combined engine and editing vector). Theediting vectors 202 comprise an editing sequence with a desired edit vis-à-vis an endogenous nucleic acid sequence in the cell along with a PAM-altering sequence (most often a sequence that disables the PAM at the target site in the genome), a coding sequence for a gRNA under the control of, preferably, an inducible promoter, and a selectable marker. - Once the
cells 204 have been transformed with the editing vectors, the cells are plated 235 on selective medium on substrate orplate 236 to select for cells that have both the engine and the editing vectors. The cells are diluted before plating such that the cells are substantially or largely isolated—separated enough so that they and the colonies they form are separated from other cell colonies—and the cells are then grown 237 on plate orsubstrate 236 untilcolonies 238 begin to form. The cells are allowed to grow at, e.g., 30° C. for, e.g., between 2 and 150, or between 5 and 120, or between 10 and 50 doublings, establishing clonal colonies. This initial growth of cells is to accumulate enough clonal cells in a colony to survive induction of editing. Once colonies are established, cutting and editing of the cellular genome is induced by inducing or activating the promoters driving at least the gRNA (and in some instances the nuclease as well), and the λ Red recombineering system (if present). If the λ Red recombineering system is present and under the control of an inducible promoter, preferably this inducible promoter is different from the inducible promoter driving transcription of the gRNA and nuclease and is activated (induced) before induction of the gRNA and nuclease. The λ Red recombineering system works as the “band aid” or repair system for double-strand breaks in bacteria, and in some species of bacteria must be present for the double-strand breaks that occur during editing to resolve. The λ Red recombineering system may be under the control of, e.g., a pBAD promoter. The pBAD promoter, like the pL promoter, is an inducible promoter; however, the pBAD promoter is regulated (induced) by the addition of arabinose to the growth medium. Thus, if there is arabinose contained in the selective medium of substrate orplate 236, the λ Red recombineering system will be activated when the cells are grown 237. As for induction ofediting 239, if transcription of the gRNA and nuclease are both under control of the pL promoter, transcription of the gRNA and nuclease is induced by increasing the temperature to 42° C. for, e.g., a half-hour to two hours (or more, depending on the cell type), which activates the pL inducible promoter. Following induction of cutting and editing and a two-hour 42° C. incubation, the temperature is returned to 30° C. to allow the cells to recover and to disable the pL promoter system. - Once the cells have recovered and are growing at 30° C., the cells are grown on substrate or
plate 236 into colonies ofterminal size 244; that is, the colonies arising from the substantially or largely isolated cells are grown into colonies to a point where cell growth has peaked and becomes normalized (e.g., saturated) for both edited and unedited cells. As described supra, normalization occurs as the nutrients in the medium around a growing cell colony are depleted and/or cell growth fills the microwells or is otherwise constrained; that is, the cells are in senescence. The terminal-size colonies are then pooled 241 by, e.g., scraping the colonies off the substrate or plates (or by, e.g., flushing the clonal cell colonies from microwells in a solid wall device) topool 280 the cells from the normalized cell colonies. Note that the method 240 illustrated and described forFIG. 2C utilizes isolation or substantial isolation, initial growth (e.g., incubation), editing, normalization and pooling of the resulting cell colonies. Again, because isolation or substantial isolation overcomes growth bias from unedited cells or cells exhibiting fitness effects as the result of edits made, the combination of isolation or substantial isolation, incubation, editing, and normalization enriches the total population of cells with cells that have been edited. Note, however, unlike themethods FIG. 2B andFIG. 2D respectively, method 240 inFIG. 2C takes no steps to deconvolute the editing “machinery.” -
FIG. 2D depicts a third exemplary embodiment of animproved protocol 250 for performing nucleic acid-guided nuclease genome editing using an inducible promoter to drive expression of the gRNA, and in some embodiments and preferably, the nuclease as well.FIG. 2D depicts aprotocol 250 for activity-based error correction and re-arraying. InFIG. 2D as inFIGS. 2B and 2C , a library or collection ofediting vectors 202 is introduced 203 (e.g., electroporated) intocultured cells 204 that comprise a coding sequence for a nuclease under the control of a constitutive or inducible promoter (preferably inducible), either contained on an “engine plasmid” (e.g., along with, e.g., a selectable marker) that has already been transformed into the cells, or integrated into the genome of the cells. Alternatively, such as in yeast the coding sequence for the nuclease may be located on the editing vector. Theediting vectors 202 comprise an editing sequence, a PAM-altering sequence (most often a sequence that disables the PAM at the target site in the genome), a coding sequence for a gRNA under the control of, optionally, an inducible promoter, and a selectable marker. - Once the cells have been transformed with the editing vectors, the cells are diluted and plated 205 on
selective medium 206 to select for cells that have both the engine and the editing vectors (e.g., medium with chloramphenicol and carbenicillin) and grown until colonies form 221, again in a process that substantially or largely isolates the cells. Cells are then picked 207 from thecolonies 221 and grown overnight in, e.g., first 96-well plate 208 in medium that does not comprise a selective medium. In a next step, the cells from the first 96-well plate are replicated 211 into a second 96-well plate 214 in medium without arabinose, resulting in wells with colonies (black wells 220), and wells without cells colonies (white wells 222). This process identifies cells with active gRNAs, as cells with active gRNAs will not survive because without arabinose the λ Red recombineering system is not active to repair the cuts in the genome made by the gRNA. Thus, thewells 222 likely denote wells with active gRNAs. The colonies that do grow in this second 96-well plate 214 likely have inactive gRNAs, and thus there is no cut to repair and the cells remain viable (denoted by black wells 220). - Once the cells with the active gRNAs are identified (wells 222), these cells are then “cherry-picked” 213 from the first 96-well plate and arrayed into a third 96-
well plate 252 to be kept as a cell repository or “cell hotel.” All colonies in the third 96-well plate 252 are cells that have been identified as likely havingactive gRNAs 222. With thiscell repository 252, aliquots of these “cherry-picked” cells (e.g., here cells with active gRNAs) can then be arrayed 255 into a fourth 96-well plate 254 in medium with arabinose. After an initial growth period, the cells in this fourth 96-well plate 254 are subjected to cutting and editing conditions, e.g., increasing the temperature to 42° C. for, e.g., two hours, to induce the pL inducible promoter driving the expression of the gRNA. Once the cutting and editing processes take place, colonies containing cells that have been properly edited can be identified by monitoring growth of the colonies and selecting slow-growing colonies or by targeted or whole genome sequencing taking cells fromplate 254. Once cells with desired edits are identified, the cells with the desired edits can be retrieved from 96-well plate 252 (e.g., the cell repository or “cell hotel”). Alternatively, the cells colonies with the putatively active gRNAs onplate 252 can be pooled 253 into amixed cell culture 256 and either analyzed or subjected to an additional round of editing. -
FIG. 2E depicts yet another exemplary embodiment of animproved protocol 270 for performing nucleic acid-guided nuclease genome editing. Theprotocol 270 inFIG. 2D does not entail functional deconvolution of the editing “machinery” of the cells but depicts a protocol for high-throughput screening using colony morphology to identify edited cells. Again, in edited cells, cell viability is compromised in the period after editing begins. The present method takes advantage of the growth lag in colonies of edited cells to identify edited cells. In some embodiments, the colony size of the edited cells is 20% smaller than colonies of non-edited cells. In some aspects, the colony size of the edited cells is 30%, 40%, 50%, 60%, 70%, 80% or 90% smaller than the colonies of non-edited cells. In many embodiments, the colony size of the edited cells is 30-80% smaller than colonies of non-edited cells, and in some embodiments, the colony size of the edited cells is 40-70% smaller than colonies of non-edited cells. - In
FIG. 2E as inFIGS. 2B-2D , a library or collection ofediting vectors 202 is introduced 203 (e.g., electroporated) intocultured cells 204 that comprise a coding sequence for a nuclease, contained 1) on an “engine plasmid” (most often along with a selectable marker) that has already been transformed into the cells; 2) integrated into the genome of the cells being transformed; or 3) the coding sequence for the nuclease may be located on the editing vector. Theediting plasmids 202 comprise an editing sequence and optionally include a PAM-altering sequence (e.g., a sequence that disables the PAM at the target site in the genome), a coding sequence for a gRNA and a selectable marker. In many embodiments, a promoter is included in the editing vector backbone, and an editing cassette is inserted 3′ of the promoter where the editing cassette comprises, from 5′ to 3′: a coding sequence for a gRNA, and a donor DNA comprising a desired edit for a target sequence and the PAM-altering sequence (e.g., a CREATE cassette). - At
step 271, the transformed cells are diluted and plated (e.g., substantially or largely isolated) onto selective medium 272 that selects for both the engine and editing vectors (e.g., medium containing both chloramphenicol and carbenicillin) and, in bacterial systems, further contains arabinose so as to activate the λ Red recombineering system. Once plated, the cells are grown 273 at 30° C. for 12-16 hours so that the cells establish colonies, edit, and grow to re-establish colonies onplate 272. Once colonies appear, there are large 278 and small 276 colonies. The colonies withsmall size 276 are indicative of an active gRNA and likely to have been edited as the double-strand cuts caused by active editing are largely toxic to the cells, resulting both in cell death in the edited colonies as well as a lag in growth for the edited cells that do survive but must repair and recover following editing. The small colonies (edited cells) are cherry picked 277 and are arrayed on a 96-well plate 282 (or several to many 96-well plates). Cells in the 96-well plate 282 can be cultured, and aliquots from this 96-well plate 282 can be sequenced and colonies with desired edits identified. This 96-well plate may be kept as a cell hotel or cell repository, and once cells that have been properly edited are identified, one can retrieve the cells with the desired edit from “cell hotel” 96-well plate 282. - Alternatively,
small colonies 276 may be picked and pooled 275 for additional rounds of editing since the edited cells have been selected in the first round of editing and likely comprise edits from the first round. Note again, that this method does not provide functional deconvolution of the editing machinery; however, the method depicted inFIG. 2E employs both isolation or substantial isolation and cherry picking and thus enables for a high-throughput diagnostic method to identify cells based on the colony size morphology that have a high likelihood of being edited, and once identified, the edited cell population can be enriched. Screening out a large proportion of the cells with non-functional gRNAs allows for identification of edited cells more readily. It has been determined that removing growth rate bias via isolation or substantial isolation improves the observed editing efficiency by up to 2×, 3×, 4× or more over conventional methods, and further that cherry-picking colonies using the methods described herein increases by 1.5×, 1.75×, 2.0×, or 2.5× or more the observed editing efficiency of isolation. Thus, the combination of substantial isolation and cherry picking improve observed editing efficiency by 8× over conventional methods. Example 9 below provides materials and methods for this embodiment. - While the method for screening for edited cells using cell growth as a proxy for editing has been described herein in the context of measuring colony size of cell colonies on an agar plate, the optical density (OD) of growing cell colonies, such as in a microtiter plate or in a series of tubes may be measured instead. Moreover, other cell growth parameters can be measured in addition to or instead of cell colony size or OD. For example, spectroscopy using visible, UV, or near infrared (NIR) light allows monitoring the concentration of nutrients and/or wastes in the cell culture. Additionally, spectroscopic measurements may be used to quantify multiple chemical species simultaneously. Nonsymmetric chemical species may be quantified by identification of characteristic absorbance features in the NIR. Conversely, symmetric chemical species can be readily quantified using Raman spectroscopy. Many critical metabolites, such as glucose, glutamine, ammonia, and lactate have distinct spectral features in the IR, such that they may be easily quantified. The amount and frequencies of light absorbed by the sample can be correlated to the type and concentration of chemical species present in the sample. Each of these measurement types provides specific advantages. FT-NIR provides the greatest light penetration depth and so can be used for thicker sample so that they provide a higher degree of light scattering. FT-mid-IR (MIR) provides information that is more easily discernible as being specific for certain analytes as these wavelengths are closer to the fundamental IR absorptions. FT-Raman is advantageous when the interference due to water is to be minimized. Other spectral properties can be measured via, e.g., dielectric impedance spectroscopy, visibly fluorescence, fluorescence polarization, or luminescence. Additionally, sensors for measuring, e.g., dissolved oxygen, carbon dioxide, pH, and/or conductivity may be used to assess the rate of cell growth.
-
FIG. 2F depicts additional detail of the exemplary embodiment shown inFIG. 2E , using a specific example based on experiments performed (see Example 1, infra).FIG. 2F shows high-throughput screening 290 using colony morphology to identify or cherry pick edited cells. As described above, in edited cells cell viability is compromised in the period after editing is induced. The present method takes advantage of the growth lag in colonies of edited cells to identify edited cells. InFIG. 2F , transformed cells are diluted and plated on medium containing arabinose 274 and grown for a period of time at, e.g., 30° C. In one embodiment, editing is induced by, e.g., raising the temperature to 42° C. for a period of time, then the temperature is lowered to 30° C.; however, in other embodiments editing is not induced and instead is allowed to proceed as the cells grow. Colonies are allowed to grow and both small 276 and large 278 colonies result. Colonies from this plate are picked 291 and arrayed on asecond plate 292 containing selective medium, e.g., a medium to select for successful editing of galK, resulting in white (versus red) colonies when plated on MacConkey agar supplemented with galactose as the sole carbon source. Note that pickingsmall colonies 293 from the first plate results primarily in edited cells 296 (white colonies, shown here as open circles) and—at a much lower frequency—some cells in which the gRNA is inactive 294 (red colonies, shown here as filled-in circles). Confirmation of colonies in which the gRNA is inactive is shown by picking 295large colonies 278 from the first plate and plating them on the second plate (colonies 298) where these cells result in red colonies when grown on MacConkey agar supplemented with galactose as the sole carbon source thus confirming an inactive gRNA or other part of the editing machinery. Thus, using small and large colony morphology as a proxy for edited and non-edited cells, respectively, provides a high throughput and facile screening method for edited cells. Note that the methods depicted inFIGS. 2E and 2F employ both isolation or substantial isolation and cherry-picking strategies. - The exemplary workflows described herein employ the concept of isolation. Isolation overcomes the growth bias in favor of unedited cells, thus allowing edited cells “equal billing” with unedited cells. Further, in some embodiments the methods take advantage of a tightly-regulated inducible system to screen edited cells from non-edited cells (both cells where the gRNA is non-functional, and cells where the gRNAs are functional but some component of the nucleic acid-guided nuclease system is not functional). Screening may be performed using replica plates and identifying “escapees” or cells in which the gRNA is non-functional, screening may be performed by taking advantage of the growth lag of edited cells in comparison to non-edited cells, or enrichment can be performed by using a combination of isolation or substantial isolation, initial growth, optionally inducing editing followed by normalization. The result of the methods is that even in nucleic acid-guided nuclease systems where editing is not optimal (such as in systems where non-canonical PAMs are targeted), there is an increase in the observed editing efficiency; that is, edited cells can be identified even in a large background of unedited cells.
- Note that the methods depicted in
FIGS. 2B-2F show cell colony isolation, incubation, and editing on solid medium in cell culture dishes or in 96-well plates. It should be recognized by one of ordinary skill in the art given the discussion herein that isolation, incubation, and editing can be performed in other formats, such as, e.g., in the solid wall devices described in relation toFIGS. 3A-3F and 4A-4Z , or as described in U.S. Ser. No. 62/735,365, entitled “Detection of Nuclease Edited Sequences in Automated Modules and Systems”, filed 24 Sep. 2018, and U.S. Ser. No. 62/781,112, entitled “Improved Detection of Nuclease Edited Sequences in Automated Modules and Systems,” filed 18 Dec. 2018, which include descriptions of isolation or substantial isolation by isolating cells on functionalized islands, isolation or substantial isolation within aqueous droplets carried in a hydrophobic carrier fluid or Gel Beads-in-Emulsion (GEMs, see, e.g., 10× Genomics, Pleasanton, Calif.), or isolation or substantial isolation within a polymerized alginate scaffold (for this embodiment of isolation, also see U.S. Ser. No. 62/769,805, entitled “Improved Detection of Nuclease Edited Sequences in Automated Modules and Instruments via Bulk Cell Culture”, filed 20 Nov. 2018). - The instruments, methods, and modules described herein enable enhanced observed editing efficiency of nucleic acid-guided nuclease editing methods as the result of isolation or substantial isolation, incubation, editing, and normalization. The combination of the isolation or substantial isolation, incubation, editing and normalization processes overcomes the growth bias in favor of unedited cells—and the fitness effects of editing, including differential editing rates—thus allowing all cells “equal billing” with one another. The result of the instruments, modules, and methods described herein is that even in nucleic acid-guided nuclease systems where editing is not optimal (such as in systems where non-canonical PAMs are targeted), there is an increase in the observed editing efficiency; that is, edited cells can be identified even in a large background of unedited cells. Observed editing efficiency can be improved up to 80% or more.
-
FIG. 3A depicts asolid wall device 350 and a workflow for isolating cells in microwells in the solid wall device, where in this exemplary workflow one or both of the gRNA and nuclease may optionally be under the control of an inducible promoter. At the top left of the figure (i), there is depictedsolid wall device 350 withmicrowells 352. Asection 354 ofsubstrate 350 is shown at (ii), also depictingmicrowells 352. At (iii), a side cross-section ofsolid wall device 350 is shown, and microwells 352 have been loaded, where, in this embodiment, Poisson or substantial Poisson loading has taken place; that is, each microwell has one or no cells, and the likelihood that any one microwell has more than one cell is low. Notewells 356 have one cell loaded. At (iv),workflow 340 is illustrated wheresubstrate 350 havingmicrowells 352 shows microwells 356 with one cell per microwell,microwells 357 with no cells in the microwells, and onemicrowell 360 with two cells in the microwell. Instep 351, the cells in the microwells are allowed to double approximately 2-150 times to form clonal colonies (v), then editing optionally is induced 353 by heating the substrate (e.g., for temperature-induced editing) or flowing chemicals under or over the substrate (e.g., sugars, antibiotics for chemical-induced editing) or by moving the solid wall device to a different medium, particularly facile if the solid wall device is placed on a membrane which forms the bottom of microwells 352 (membrane not shown). - After optional induction of
editing 353, many cells in the colonies of cells that have been edited die as a result of the double-strand cuts caused by active editing and there is a lag in growth for the edited cells that do survive but must repair and recover following editing (microwells 358), where cells that do not undergo editing thrive (microwells 359) (vi). All cells are allowed to continue grow to establish colonies and normalize, where the colonies of edited cells inmicrowells 358 catch up in size and/or cell number with the cells inmicrowells 359 that do not undergo editing (vii). Once the cell colonies are normalized, either pooling 360 of all cells in the microwells can take place, in which case the cells are enriched for edited cells by eliminating the bias from non-editing cells and fitness effects from editing; alternatively, colony growth in the microwells is monitored after editing, and slow growing colonies (e.g., the cells in microwells 358) are identified and selected 361 (e.g., “cherry picked”) resulting in even greater enrichment of edited cells. - In growing the cells, the medium used will depend, of course, on the type of cells being edited—e.g., bacterial, yeast or mammalian. For example, medium for bacterial growth includes LB, SOC, M9 Minimal medium, and Magic medium; medium for yeast cell growth includes TPD, YPG, YPAD, and synthetic minimal medium; and medium for mammalian cell growth includes MEM, DMEM, IMDM, RPMI, and Hanks. For culture of adherent cells, cells may be disposed on beads or another type of scaffold suspended in medium. Most normal mammalian tissue-derived cells—except those derived from the hematopoietic system—are anchorage dependent and need a surface or cell culture support for normal proliferation. In the rotating growth vial described herein, microcarrier technology is leveraged. Microcarriers of particular use typically have a diameter of 100-300 μm and have a density slightly greater than that of the culture medium (thus facilitating an easy separation of cells and medium for, e.g., medium exchange) yet the density must also be sufficiently low to allow complete suspension of the carriers at a minimum stirring rate in order to avoid hydrodynamic damage to the cells. Many different types of microcarriers are available, and different microcarriers are optimized for different types of cells. There are positively charged carriers, such as Cytodex 1 (dextran-based, GE Healthcare), DE-52 (cellulose-based, Sigma-Aldrich Labware), DE-53 (cellulose-based, Sigma-Aldrich Labware), HLX 11-170 (polystyrene-based); collagen or ECM (extracellular matrix)-coated carriers, such as Cytodex 3 (dextran-based, GE Healthcare) or HyQ-sphere Pro-F 102-4 (polystyrene-based, Thermo Scientific); non-charged carriers, like HyQspheres P 102-4 (Thermo Scientific); or macroporous carriers based on gelatin (Cultisphere, Percell Biolytica) or cellulose (Cytopore, GE Healthcare).
- The solid wall devices can provide populations of cells with varying edits and/or percentages of clonality. It has been determined that flowing medium over the retentate side surface of the SWIIN, e.g., a tangential or sheer flow across the top of the perforate member of the SWIIN, will flush off the tops (“muffin tops”, see
FIG. 3F ) of the cell colonies over growing the wells of the SWIIN without contaminating the wells containing other cells; i.e., depositing flushed cells in wells. In one embodiment, cells are allowed to grow to a desired state, for example when some of the colonies—fast-growing colonies, which are likely to be unedited cells—have over-grown the wells, then the “muffin tops” are flushed off. In a next round, the cells again are allowed to grow again to a desired state, for example when some or many more of the colonies have over-grown the wells, then the “muffin tops” are flushed off, and additional rounds of cell growth and flushing/collection can continue as desired. After a desired number of rounds of cell growth and collection, 1) the cells can be collected and pooled, 2) certain collections may be discarded (such as the first collection of cells which are more likely to be unedited cells) and the rest of the collections pooled, or 3) each round of collection may be kept separate and analyzed for clonality, percentage of edited cells, etc. This embodiment requires monitoring of cell growth by, e.g., imaging, as described in relation toFIG. 4Y . -
FIG. 3B depicts asolid wall device 350 and a workflow for substantially isolating cells in microwells in a solid wall device, where in this workflow—as in the workflow depicted inFIG. 3A —optionally one or both of the gRNA and nuclease is under the control of an inducible promoter. At the top left of the figure (i), there is depicted asolid wall device 350 withmicrowells 352. Asection 354 ofsubstrate 350 is shown at (ii), also depictingmicrowells 352. At (iii), a side cross-section ofsolid wall device 350 is shown, and microwells 352 have been loaded, where, in this embodiment, substantial Poisson loading has taken place; that is, onemicrowell 357 has no cells, and somemicrowells FIG. 3B , cells with active gRNAs are shown as solid circles, and cells with inactive gRNAs are shown as open circles. At (iv)workflow 370 is illustrated wheresubstrate 350 havingmicrowells 352 shows threemicrowells 376 with several cells all with active gRNAs, microwell 357 with no cells, and twomicrowells 378 with some cells having active gRNAs and some cells having inactive gRNAs. Instep 371, the cells in the microwells are allowed to double approximately 2-150 times to form clonal colonies (v), then editing optionally is induced 373 by heating the substrate (e.g., for temperature-induced editing) or flowing chemicals under or over the substrate (e.g., sugars, antibiotics for chemical-induced editing) or by moving the solid wall device to a different medium, particularly facile if the solid wall device is placed on a membrane which forms the bottom ofmicrowells 352. - After editing 373, many cells in the colonies of cells that have been edited die as a result of the double-strand cuts caused by active editing and there is a lag in growth for the edited cells that do survive but must repair and recover following editing (microwells 378), where cells that do not undergo editing thrive (microwells 379) (vi). Thus, in
microwells 378 where only cells with active gRNAs reside (cells depicted by solid circles), most cells die off; however, inmicrowells 379 containing cells with inactive gRNAs (cells depicted by open circles), cells continue to grow and are not impacted by active editing. The cells in each microwell (378 and 379) are allowed to grow to continue to establish colonies and normalize, where the colonies of edited cells inmicrowells 378 catch up in size and/or cell number with the unedited cells inmicrowells 379 that do not undergo editing (vii). Note that in thisworkflow 370, the colonies of cells in the microwells are not clonal; that is, not all cells in a well arise from a single cell. Instead, the cell colonies in the well may be mixed colonies, arising in many wells from two to several different cells. Once the cell colonies are normalized, either pooling 390 of all cells in the microwells can take place, in which case the cells are enriched for edited cells by eliminating the bias from non-editing cells and fitness effects from editing or cells may be flushed from the SWIIN and collected at various time points; alternatively, colony growth in the microwells is monitored after editing, and slow growing colonies (e.g., the cells in microwells 378) are identified and selected 391 (e.g., “cherry picked”) resulting in even greater enrichment of edited cells. -
FIG. 3C is a photograph of one embodiment of a solid wall substrate comprising microwells for isolating cells. As can be seen from the photo, the solid wall substrate is a perforated disk of metal and is approximately 2 inches (˜47 mm) in diameter. The perforated disk seen in this photograph is fabricated 316 stainless steel, where the perforations form the walls of the microwells, and a filter or membrane is used to form the bottom of the microwells. Use of a filter or membrane (such as a 0.22 m PVDF Duropore™ woven membrane filter) allows for medium and/or nutrients to enter the microwells but prevents the cells from flowing down and out of the microwells. Filter or membrane members that may be used in the solid wall isolation/incubation/editing and normalization or cherry-picking devices and modules are those that are solvent resistant, are contamination free during filtration, and are able to retain the types and sizes of cells of interest. For example, in order to retain small cell types such as bacterial cells, pore sizes can be as low as 0.10 μm, however for other cell types (such as for mammalian cells), the pore sizes can be as high as 10.0 m. Indeed, the pore sizes useful in the cell concentration device/module include filters with sizes from 0.10 μm, 0.11 μm, 0.12 μm, 0.13 μm, 0.14 μm, 0.15 μm, 0.16 μm, 0.17 μm, 0.18 μm, 0.19 μm, 0.20 μm, 0.21 μm, 0.22 μm, 0.23 μm, 0.24 μm, 0.25 μm, 0.26 μm, 0.27 μm, 0.28 μm, 0.29 μm, 0.30 μm, 0.31 μm, 0.32 μm, 0.33 μm, 0.34 μm, 0.35 μm, 0.36 μm, 0.37 μm, 0.38 μm, 0.39 μm, 0.40 μm, 0.41 μm, 0.42 μm, 0.43 μm, 0.44 μm, 0.45 μm, 0.46 μm, 0.47 μm, 0.48 μm, 0.49 μm, 0.50 μm and larger. The filters may be fabricated from any suitable material including cellulose mixed ester (cellulose nitrate and acetate) (CME), polycarbonate (PC), polyvinylidene fluoride (PVDF), polyethersulfone (PES), polytetrafluoroethylene (PTFE), nylon, or glass fiber. - In the photograph shown in
FIG. 3C , the perforations are approximately 150 μm-200 μm in diameter, resulting in the microwells having a volume of approximately 2.5 nl, with a total in this embodiment of approximately 30,000 microwells. The distance between the microwells is approximately 279 nm center-to-center. Though here the microwells have a volume of approximately 2.5 nl, the volume of the microwells may be from 1 to 25 nl, or preferably from 2 to 10 nl, and even more preferably from 2 to 4 nl. The preferred size/volume of the microwells will depend of cell type (e.g., bacterial, yeast, mammalian). The perforated disk shown here is made of 316 stainless steel; however other bio-compatible metals and materials may be used. The solid wall device may be disposable or it may be reusable. The solid wall device shown inFIG. 3C is round, but can be of any shape, for example, square, rectangular, oval, etc. (See, e.g.,FIGS. 4A-4X .) Round perforated disks are useful if petri dishes are used to supply the solid wall module with nutrients via solid medium in, e.g., a petri or other cell culture dish. The filters used to form the bottom of the microwells of the solid wall device include 0.22 μm PVDF Duropore™ woven membrane filters. Further, though a 2-inch (˜47 mm) diameter perforated disk is shown, the perforated disks may be smaller or larger as desired and the configuration of the solid wall module will depend on how nutrients are supplied to the solid wall module, and how media exchange is performed. For example, see the perforated member in the embodiments of a solid wall module inFIGS. 4A-4T . -
FIGS. 3D-3F are photographs of E. coli cells substantially or largely isolated via Poisson or substantial Poisson distribution in microwells or perforations in a perforated disk with a membrane bottom at low, medium and high magnification, respectively.FIG. 3D shows digital growth at low magnification where the darker microwells are microwells where cells are growing.FIG. 3E is a top view of microwells in a perforated disk where the darker microwells are microwells where cells are growing.FIG. 3F is a photograph of microwells where the membrane (e.g., the permeable membrane that forms the bottom of the microwells) has been removed, where unpatterned (smooth) microwells are microwells where cells are not growing, and microwells with irregular pigment/patterned are microwells where cells are growing, and, in this photograph, have filled the microwells in which they are growing. In these photographs, a 0.2 μm filter (membrane) was swaged against the perforated disk under high pressure. The perforated disk formed the walls of the microwells, and the 0.2 m filter formed the bottom of the microwells. To load the perforated disk+filter, the E. coli cells were pulled into the microwells using a vacuum (see Example 11 for methods). The perforated disk+filter was then placed on an LB agar plate membrane-side down, and the cells were grown overnight at 30° C., then two days at room temperature. The membrane was removed and the bottomless microwells were photographed by light microscopy. Note the ease with which different selective media can be used to select for certain cell phenotypes; that is, one need only transfer the perforated disk+filter to a different plate or petri dish comprising a desired selective medium. Generally, the number of cells loaded into a singulation device or singulation assembly ranges from between approximately 0.1× to 2.5× the number of perforations or microwells, or from between approximately 0.3× to 2.0× the number of perforations or microwells, or from between approximately 0.5× to 1.5× the number of perforations or microwells. -
FIG. 3G shows a scanning electromicrograph of a perforated member. As with the perforated disk described in relation toFIGS. 3C-3F , perforatedmember 301 is fabricated from 316 stainless steel, where the perforations form the walls of microwells, and a filter or membrane (not seen in thisFIG. 3G ) is used to form the bottom of the microwells. In the scanning electromicrograph shown inFIG. 3G the perforations (microwells) are approximately 150 μm-200 μm in diameter, and the perforated member is approximately 125 μm deep, resulting in microwells having a volume of approximately 2.5 nl, with a total of approximately 200,000 microwells. The distance between the microwells is approximately 279 μm center-to-center. Though here the microwells have a volume of approximately 2.5 nl, the volume of the microwells may be from 1 to 25 nl, or preferably from 2 to 10 nl, and even more preferably from 2 to 4 nl. The perforated members used in the embodiments described in relation toFIGS. 4A-4T are approximately 14 cm long and 10 cm (140 mm×100 mm) wide; however, smaller perforated members (such as shown inFIG. 3C ) or larger perforated members may be used depending on the density of microwells in the perforated member and the number of microwells or partitions required. For example, the larger the plexity (e.g., complexity) of the library being used to edit a population of cells, a larger number of microwells or partitions is preferred. If, for example, a 10,000-plex library is used to edit a population of cells, a perforated member with 200,000 microwells or partitions would be more than adequate; however, if a 50,000-plex library is used to edit a population of cells, a perforated member (or two or more members in a compound SWIIN) with a total of 400,000 or more microwells or partitions may be preferred. The number of microwells in a single SWIIN module (e.g., not a compound SWIIN) may range from 20,000 to 500,000 microwells, or from 30,000 to 450,000 microwells, or from 50,000 to 400,000 microwells or from 100,000 to 300,000 microwells. For an even greater range of well number, compound SWIIN devices may be employed (see, e.g.,FIGS. 4CC and 4DD of U.S. Ser. No. 16/399,988, filed 30 Apr. 2019). - Generally the number of cells loaded into a singulation device or singulation assembly ranges from between approximately 0.1× to 2.5× the number of perforations or microwells, or from between approximately 0.3× to 2.0× the number of perforations or microwells, or from between approximately 0.5× to 1.5× the number of perforations or microwells; thus, the number of cells loaded onto a perforated member comprising approximately 200,000 perforations would range from about 20,000 cells to about 500,000 cells, or from about 60,000 cells to about 400,000 cells, or from about 100,000 cells to about 300,000 cells. The preferred size/volume of the microwells will depend on the cell type (e.g., archaeal, bacterial, yeast, non-mammalian eukaryotic, and/or mammalian being edited). The perforated member shown here is made of 316 stainless steel; however other bio-compatible metals and materials may be used, such as titanium, cobalt-based alloys, and ceramics. The SWIIN may be disposable or it may be reusable. If reused, the SWIIN may be heated to 55° C. or greater to sterilize the SWIIN alternatively, antibiotics maybe flushed through the SWIIN.
- Like
FIG. 3G ,FIGS. 3H-3J are scanning electromicrographs of a portion of a perforated member 301 (FIG. 3G ), a close up of onemicrowell 302 without (FIG. 3H ) and with (FIGS. 3I and 3J ) a filter membrane forming the bottom of themicrowell 302.FIG. 3G showsperforated member FIG. 3H also showsperforated member 301 and asingle microwell 302, where this microwell is approximately 172 μm in diameter.FIG. 3I showsperforated member 301 and approximately 8microwells 302, each of which has a portion of a filter ormembrane 303 forming the bottom of themicrowell 302.FIG. 3J is a higher magnification micrograph of one of themicrowells 302 from theperforated member 301 shown inFIG. 3I . - As described above in relation to
FIGS. 3C-3F , use of a filter or membrane (such as a 0.22 μm PVDF Duropore™ woven membrane filter) allows for medium and/or nutrients to enter the microwells but prevents cells from flowing down and out of the microwells. Filter or membrane members that may be used to form the bottom of the microwells of a perforated member in a solid wall isolation or substantial isolation/incubation/editing/normalization or cherry picking module are those that are solvent resistant, are contamination free during filtration, do not tear under pressures required to exchange media and load cells, and are able to retain the types and sizes of cells of interest. For example, in order to retain small cell types such as bacterial cells, pore sizes can be as low as 0.2 μm, however for other cell types, the pore sizes can be as high as 5.0 μm or larger. The filters may be fabricated from any suitable material including cellulose mixed ester (cellulose nitrate and acetate) (CME), polycarbonate (PC), polyvinylidene fluoride (PVDF), polyethersulfone (PES), polytetrafluoroethylene (PTFE), nylon, or glass fiber. Theperforated member 301 and filter 303 are swaged together; that is, theperforated member 301 and filter 303 are pressed together under high pressure (e.g., 20 kpsi). In some embodiments, the holes or partitions in the perforated member are etched with a slight taper and the filter material is pressed into the opening then relaxed to form an effective swage, allowing for an adhesive-free coupling. As an alternative, an adhesive could be employed. -
FIGS. 4A through 4Z depict various components of different embodiments and components of a solid wall isolation or substantial isolation, incubation, editing and either normalization or cherry picking module (“solid wall isolation/incubation/normalization module” or “SWIIN”) suitable for isolating (or substantially isolating) cells of all types, growing cells for an initial, e.g., 2-150 rounds of cell division, optionally inducing editing, and either normalizing or cherry picking the resulting cell colonies. The SWIIN modules presented may be stand-alone devices, or, often, one module in an automated multi-module cell processing instrument. -
FIG. 4A depicts an embodiment of asingulation assembly 420 a from a top perspective view, which presents the “retentate side” ofsingulation assembly 420 a. In thesingulation assembly 420 a embodiment seen inFIG. 4A ,retentate member 404 inFIGS. 4A-4C has twodistribution channels 405 disposed lengthwise on either side (left-right) ofretentate member 404; however, it should be understood by one of ordinary skill in the art given the present disclosure that instead of two distribution channels, a single distribution channel could be disposed, e.g., lengthwise down the middle ofretentate member 404 or in another configuration three distribution channels may be disposed lengthwise on either side and down the middle ofretentate member 404.Retentate member 404 ofFIGS. 4A-4C comprises a generally smooth upper surface; twodistribution channels 405 whichtraverse retentate member 404 from its top surface to its bottom surface and for most of the length ofretentate member 404; andridges 406 a, which are disposed on the bottom surface ofretentate member 404 and traverse the bottom ofretentate member 404 from side-to-side, left-to-right (in this embodiment, there are approximately 26retentate member ridges 406 a).Flow directors 406 are formed betweenridges 406 a onretentate member 404. In addition,retentate member 404 has twoports 407, which allow for cells and medium to be introduced into (and removed from)singulation assembly 420 a. There are also distribution channel covers 413, which cover the twodistribution channels 405 and provide the top surface and seal ofdistribution channels 405. - As used herein with respect to the distribution channels in the retentate member or permeate member, “most of the length” means about 95% of the length of the retentate member or permeate member, or about 90%, 85%, 80%, 75%, or 70% of the length of the retentate member or permeate member.
Flow directors 406 are formed betweenridges 406 a. In addition,retentate member 404 has asingle port 407, which allows for cells to be introduced intosingulation assembly 420 a; and there is also adistribution channel cover 413, which covers thesingle distribution channel 405 inretentate member 404 and provides a seal fordistribution channel 405. In this embodiment,distribution channel 405 is approximately 150 mm long and 1 mm wide;retentate member ridges 406 a are approximately 0.5 mm in height and 80 mm in length; and retentate member flowdirectors 406 are approximately 5 mm across. The volume of fluid in the singulation assembly ranges from 3 mL to 100 mL, or from 5 mL to 60 mL, or from 10 mL to 40 mL (note this is for a 200K perforation singulation assembly). - Retentate and permeate
members FIG. 4A-4N are transparent, and are approximately 200 mm long, 130 mm wide, and 4 mm thick, though in other embodiments, the retentate and permeate members can be from 75 mm to 350 mm in length, or from 100 mm to 300 mm in length, or from 150 mm to 250 mm in length; from 50 mm to 250 mm in width, or from 75 mm to 200 mm in width, or from 100 mm to 150 mm in width; and from 2 mm to 15 mm in thickness, or from 4 mm to 10 mm in thickness, or from 5 mm to 8 mm in thickness. In the embodiments depicted inFIGS. 4A-4N , the retentate (and permeate) members are fabricated from PMMA (poly(methyl methacrylate); however, other materials may be used, including polycarbonate, cyclic olefin co-polymer (COC), glass, polyvinyl chloride, polyethylene, polyamide, polypropylene, polysulfone, polyurethane, and co-polymers of these and other polymers. - In addition to
retentate member 404, also seen inFIG. 4A arefastener holes 412, a center “sandwich” layer comprising agasket 416 surroundingperforated member 401 swaged with (and positioned above) filter or membrane 403 (the individual components are not seen in thisFIG. 4A ). The bottom layer ofsingulation assembly 420 a seen inFIG. 4A is formed by apermeate member 408.Permeate member 408, likeretentate member 404, comprises one or more (as seen inFIG. 4B , there are two) permeate member distribution channels, a multiplicity of ridges, and flow directors, and one or more ports (none of which are shown inFIG. 4A but seeFIG. 4B ). Thesingulation assembly 420 a andSWIIN modules 400 comprising thesingulation assembly 420 a are fabricated from material that withstand temperature of 4° C. to 60° C. Heating and cooling of the SWIIN modules may be provided by a Peltier device or thermoelectric cooler or by reverse Rankine vapor-compression refrigeration or absorption heat pumps. - In the solid wall isolation or substantial isolation, incubation, editing and either normalization or cherry-picking modules (“solid wall isolation/incubation/normalization module” or “SWIIN”) described in
FIGS. 4A-4N , cells and medium (at a dilution appropriate for Poisson or substantial Poisson distribution of the cells in the microwells of the perforated member) are flowed intodistribution channels 405 from the twoports 407 inretentate member 404, and the cells settle in the microwells, again, resulting in a Poisson or substantial Poisson distribution of the cells in the microwells. The cells are retained in the microwells ofperforated member 401 as the cells cannot travel throughfilter 403. An appropriate medium is introduced intosingulation assembly 420 a throughpermeate member 408. The medium flows upward throughfilter 403 to nourish the cells. Thus, in operation, the cells are deposited into the microwells, are grown for an initial, e.g., 2-100 doublings, editing optionally is induced by, e.g., raising the temperature of the SWIIN to 42° C. to induce a temperature inducible promoter or by removing growth medium from the permeate member and replacing the growth medium with a medium comprising a chemical component that induces an inducible promoter. Once editing has been allowed to take place, the temperature of the SWIIN may be decreased, or the inducing medium may be removed and replaced with fresh medium lacking the chemical component thereby de-activating the inducible promoter. The cells then are allowed to continue to grow in the SWIIN until the growth of the cell colonies in the microwells is normalized. Once the colonies are normalized, the colonies are flushed from the microwells (by applying liquid or air pressure to the permeate member channels and flow directors and thus to the filter) and pooled; alternatively, the growth of the cell colonies in the microwells is monitored, and slow-growing colonies are directly selected by, e.g., pooling the cells from the slow-growing colonies. - Colony growth in the singulation assembly (and thus in the SWIIN module) can be monitored by automated devices such as those sold by JoVE (ScanLag™ system, Cambridge, Mass.) (also see Levin-Reisman, et al., Nature Methods, 7:737-39 (2010)). Cell growth for, e.g., mammalian cells may be monitored by, e.g., the growth monitor sold by IncuCyte (Ann Arbor, Mich.) (see also, Choudhry, PLos One, 11(2):e0148469 (2016)). Further, automated colony pickers may be employed, such as those sold by, e.g., TECAN (Pickolo™ system, Mannedorf, Switzerland); Hudson Inc. (RapidPick™, Springfield, N.J.); Molecular Devices (
QPix 400™ system, San Jose, Calif.); and Singer Instruments (PIXL™ system, Somerset, UK). -
FIG. 4B depicts the embodiment of thesingulation assembly 420 a inFIG. 4A from a bottom perspective view, which presents the bottom of thepermeate member 408 ofsingulation assembly 420 a.Permeate member 408 comprises a generally smooth lower surface (which inFIG. 4B , becausesingulation assembly 420 a is viewed from the bottom, the lower surface is toward the top ofFIG. 4B ); two distribution channels (not shown) covered by distribution channel covers 414 (here, located on either side (left-right) of permeate member 408);ridges 410 a disposed on the top surface of permeate member 408 (where the top surface of thepermeate member 408 inFIG. 4B is facing down) and traverse the top ofpermeate member 408 from side-to-side (in this embodiment, there are approximately 26ridges 410 a); and flowdirectors 410 that are formed betweenridges 410 a. In addition,permeate member 408 has twoports 411, which deliver fluids to (and remove fluids from) the distribution channels (not seen here as they are covered by distribution channel covers 414) and then to flowdirectors 410. - In addition to permeate
member 404, also seen inFIG. 4B arefastener holes 412, a center “sandwich” layer comprising agasket 416 surrounding aperforated member 401 swaged with and positioned above a filter or membrane 403 (the individual components are not seen in thisFIG. 4B ), and the bottom-most layer ofsingulation assembly 420 a seen inFIG. 4B isretentate member 404.Gasket 416 is made from rubber, silicone, nitrile rubber, polytetrafluoroethylene, a plastic polymer such as polychlorotrifluoroethylene, or other readily compressible material. It should be noted that in the embodiments depicted inFIGS. 4A-4H , fasteners are exemplified; however, other means can be used to secureretentate member 408,gasket 416, perforatedmember 401,filter 403, and permeatemember 408, such as adhesives, ultrasonic welding or bonding, solvent bonding, mated fittings, or a combination of adhesives, welding, solvent bonding, and mated fittings; and other such fasteners and couplings. Note in the embodiment exemplified inFIGS. 4Q-4X , ultrasonic welding is used. -
FIG. 4C depicts the embodiment of thesingulation assembly 420 a ofFIGS. 4A and 4B from a side exploded perspective view. From the top ofFIG. 4C is seenretentate member 404 comprising twodistribution channels 405 located on either side (left-right) ofretentate member 404, both of whichtraverse retentate member 404 from its top surface to its bottom surface and for most of the length ofretentate member 404;ridges 406 a, which are disposed on the bottom surface ofretentate member 404 and traverse the bottom surface ofretentate member 404 from side-to-side (in this embodiment, there are approximately 26ridges 406 a); and flowdirectors 406 that are formed betweenridges 406 a. In addition,retentate member 404 has twoports 407, which allow for cells and other fluids to be introduced into (and removed from)singulation assembly 420 a throughdistribution channels 405. There are also two distribution channel covers 413, which are configured to fit into, cover and seal the twodistribution channels 405. -
Gasket 416, perforatedmember 401 and filter 403 can be seen more clearly in this exploded view ofsingulation assembly 420 a, whereperforated member 401 and filter 403 are of very similar size andgasket 416 is configured to surroundperforated member 401 andfilter 403, to secureperforated member 401 andfilter 403, and to provide a leak-proof seal betweenretentate member 404 andpermeate member 408. InFIG. 4C ,permeate member 408 is seen from the top down wherepermeate member 408 comprises twodistribution channels 409 located lengthwise on either side (left-right) ofpermeate member 408, both of whichtraverse permeate member 408 from its bottom surface to its top surface and for most of the length ofpermeate member 408. Also seen areridges 410 a, which here are disposed on the top surface ofpermeate member 408 and traverse the top ofpermeate member 408 from side-to-side, and flowdirectors 410 that are formed betweenridges 410 a. In addition,permeate member 408 has twoports 411, seen in thisFIG. 4C as ports onretentate member 404, which whensingulation assembly 420 a is assembled are fluidically connected todistribution channels 409 onpermeate member 408, which are connected to flowdistributors 410, and thus to filter 403 disposed uponpermeate member 408. Also seen are distribution channel covers 414 that are separate fromsingulation assembly 420 a in this exploded view and not inserted intopermeate member 408 to coverdistribution channels 409. Also seen inFIG. 4C are holes for fasteners 412 (fasteners not shown), although again, other means aside from fasteners may be used for securing the components ofsingulation assembly 420 a. -
FIG. 4D depicts another embodiment of a singulation assembly, 420 b, from a top perspective view, which presents the “retentate side” ofsingulation assembly 420 b. Thesingulation assembly 420 b embodiment seen inFIG. 4D differs fromsingulation assembly 420 b seen inFIGS. 4A-4C in that the configuration of thedistribution channels 405 in retentate member 404 (anddistribution channels 409 in permeate member 408) inFIGS. 4D-4G is different. The distribution channels 405 (and distribution channels 409) inFIGS. 4D-4G are branched; that is, instead of aport 407 delivering fluids directly into adistribution channel 405 at the point whereport 407 intersects directly withdistribution channel 405, in the embodiment of the singulation assembly shown inFIGS. 4D-4G , fluids flow intoports 407, then into brancheddistribution channels 405 on either side (left-right) ofretentate member 407. The branched distribution channels in this embodiment have a first conduit which terminates approximately half-way down the length ofretentate member 404, where the first conduit then branches into two secondary conduits, the two secondary conduits branch into four tertiary conduits, and these tertiary conduits deliver fluids to a final conduit that travels the length of the retentate member, evenly distributing delivering fluids to theflow directors 406. - Note that any configuration of distribution channels (e.g.,
distribution channels 405 onretentate member 404 anddistribution channels 409 on permeate member 408) may be used onretentate member 404 orpermeate member 408, as long as the distribution channels adequately distribute fluids to flowdirectors 406 or flowdirectors 410. As inFIGS. 4A-4C ,retentate member 404 ofFIGS. 4D-4G comprises a generally smooth upper surface; twodistribution channels 405 one of the left and one on the right ofretentate member 404 whichtraverse retentate member 404 from its top surface to its bottom surface and are branched thus distributing fluid the length ofretentate member 404. -
Retentate member 404 also comprisesridges 406 a, which are disposed on the bottom surface ofretentate member 404 and traverse the bottom ofretentate member 404 from side-to-side. In addition—and as in the previous embodiment—there areflow directors 406 that are formed betweenridges 406 a onretentate member 404; and twoports 407, which introduce and distribute cells and medium into (and remove cells and medium from)retentate member 404 ofsingulation assembly 420 b. Also seen are distribution channel covers 413, which cover the two brancheddistribution channels 405 onretentate member 404 and actually provide the top surface and sealing of brancheddistribution channels 405. Note that the branching fordistribution channels 405 is a part ofretentate member 404 in this embodiment; however,retentate member 404 may not comprise the branches and the branching may be featured on distribution channel covers 413, which are mated toretentate member 404. - In addition to
retentate member 404, also seen inFIG. 4D arefastener holes 412, a center “sandwich” layer comprising agasket 416 surroundingperforated member 401 swaged with and positioned above filter ormembrane 403. The bottom layer ofsingulation assembly 420 b seen inFIG. 4D is formed bypermeate member 408.Permeate member 408, likeretentate member 404, comprises one or more (as seen inFIG. 4E , there are two) distribution channels (here, they are branched), ridges, flow directors, and one or more ports (none of which are shown inFIG. 4D but seeFIG. 4E ). -
FIG. 4E depicts the embodiment of thesingulation assembly 420 b inFIG. 4D from a bottom perspective view, which presents the bottom of thepermeate member 408 ofsingulation assembly 420 b at the top of thisFIG. 4E .Permeate member 408 comprises a generally smooth lower surface (which inFIG. 4E , becausesingulation assembly 420 b is viewed from the bottom, the lower surface is toward the top ofFIG. 4E ); two brancheddistribution channels 409 covered by distribution channel covers 414;ridges 410 a disposed on the top surface of permeate member 408 (where the top surface of thepermeate member 408 inFIG. 4E is facing down) and traverse the top surface ofpermeate member 408 from side-to-side; and flowdirectors 410 that are formed betweenridges 410 a. In addition,permeate member 408 has twoports 411, which deliver fluids to the brancheddistribution channels 409 and to flowdirectors 410. As withretentate member 404 and distribution channel covers 413, the branching fordistribution channels 409 inpermeate member 408 is a part ofpermeate member 408; however,permeate member 408 may not comprise the branches and the branching may instead be featured on distribution channel covers 414, which are mated to permeatemember 408. - In addition to permeate
member 404, also seen inFIG. 4E arefastener holes 412, a center “sandwich” layer comprising agasket 416 surrounding aperforated member 401 disposed above a filter or membrane 403 (the individual components are not seen in thisFIG. 4E ), and bottom-most layer ofsingulation assembly 420 b seen inFIG. 4E is theretentate member 404. -
FIG. 4F depicts the embodiment of thesingulation assembly 420 b ofFIGS. 4D and 4E from a side exploded perspective view. From the top ofFIG. 4F is seenretentate member 404 comprising two brancheddistribution channels 405 located on either side (left-right) ofretentate member 404, both of whichtraverse retentate member 404 from its top surface to its bottom surface where the branches traverse most of the length ofretentate member 404;ridges 406 a disposed on the bottom surface ofretentate member 404 and traverse the bottom surface ofretentate member 404 from side-to-side; and flowdirectors 406 that are formed betweenridges 406 a. In addition,retentate member 404 has twoports 407, which are fluidically coupled to brancheddistribution channels 405 and flowdirectors 406 and are configured to introduce cells and other fluids into (and remover cells and other fluids from)singulation assembly 420 b. There are also distribution channel covers 413, which are configured to fit into, cover and seal the two brancheddistribution channels 405. -
Gasket 416, perforatedmember 401 and filter 403 can be seen clearly in this exploded view ofsingulation assembly 420 b, whereperforated member 401 and filter 403 are of very similar size andgasket 416 is configured to surroundperforated member 401 andfilter 403 and to provide a leak-proof seal betweenretentate member 404 andpermeate member 408. InFIG. 4F ,permeate member 408 is seen from the top down wherepermeate member 408 comprises two brancheddistribution channels 409 located lengthwise on either side (left-right) ofpermeate member 408, both of whichtraverse permeate member 408 from its bottom surface to its top surface and provide branched conduits for most of the length ofpermeate member 408.Permeate member 408 further comprisesridges 410 a, which here are disposed on the top surface ofpermeate member 408 and traverse the top ofpermeate member 408 from side-to-side and flowdirectors 410 that are formed betweenpermeate member ridges 410 a. In addition,permeate member 408 has two ports 411 (only oneport 411 can be seen inFIG. 4F ). Also seen are distribution channel covers 414 that are separate fromsingulation assembly 420 b in this exploded view and not inserted to cover brancheddistribution channels 409. Also seen inFIG. 4F arefastener holes 412 andfasteners 412 a, although again, other means aside from fasteners may be used for securing the components ofsingulation assembly 420 b. -
FIG. 4G is a close-up top view from the top ofretentate member 404 as shown inFIGS. 4D and 4F . Seen areridges 406 a, which are disposed on the bottom surface ofretentate member 404 and traverse the bottom surface ofretentate member 404 from side-to-side, and flowdirectors 406 that are formed betweenridges 406 a. Additionally seen isdistribution channel 405 comprising flow director holes 415 configured to distribute fluid intoflow directors 406, wheredistribution channel 405 is covered bydistribution channel cover 413. -
FIG. 4H is a close-up cross-sectional view ofretentate member 404, withridges 406 a and flowdirectors 406 that are formed betweenridges 406 a. Also seen is permeatemember 408, withridges 410 a and flowdirectors 410 that are formed betweenpermeate member ridges 410 a. Interposed betweenretentate member 404 andpermeate member 408 are gasket 416, perforatedmember 401, andfilter 403. Note thatridges 406 a onretentate member 404 andridges 410 a are coincident with one another, separated only byperforated member 401 andfilter 403. As stated previously,ridges 406 a andridges 410 a provide support toperforated member 401 andfilter 403 and reduce the likelihood that filter 403 will tear during, e.g., cell loading or medium exchange. -
FIGS. 4I-4M depict different views of one embodiment of a solid wall isolation or substantial isolation, incubation, editing and normalization (SWIIN)module 400.FIG. 4I presents a side perspective view ofSWIIN module 400.SWIIN module 400 comprises, e.g., one of the exemplary singulation assemblies seen inFIGS. 4A-4C and 4D-4F which are housed in aSWIIN cover 440 and are one part of the SWIIN module. Various components ofSWIIN cover 440 includereservoir cover 442,grip 441, windows 444 (shown are six windows),feet 443, and barcode (or other identifying information) 445. Note that in the embodiments depicted inFIGS. 4I and 4J the windows are round; however, it should be recognized by one of ordinary skill in the art given the present disclosure that the windows can be any shape. Typically, it is desirable for 30% or more of the retentate member be available for viewing, or 50% more, or 60% more, or 70%, 80% or 90% more of the retentate member be available for viewing to get a reasonable sub-sample statistic on cell loading. Also seen isreservoir assembly cover 430 a, which in this embodiment is not molded withSWIIN cover 440 but resides within thereservoir cover portion 442 ofSWIIN cover 440.Reservoir assembly cover 430 a comprises four reservoir access apertures (432 a, 432 b, 432 c, and 432 d) and four pneumatic access apertures (433 a, 433 b, 433 c, and 433 d).Pneumatic access apertures -
Windows 444 may be used to monitor cell loading and/or cell growth via camera (e.g., video camera). For example, a video camera may be used to monitor cell growth by, e.g., density change measurements based on an image of an empty well, with phase contrast, or if, e.g., a chromogenic marker, such as a chromogenic protein, is used to add a distinguishable color to the cells. Chromogenic markers such as blitzen blue, dreidel teal, virginia violet, vixen purple, prancer purple, tinsel purple, maccabee purple, donner magenta, cupid pink, seraphina pink, scrooge orange, and leor orange (the Chromogenic Protein Paintbox, all available from ATUM (Newark, Calif.)) obviate the need to use fluorescence, although fluorescent cell markers, fluorescent proteins, and chemiluminescent cell markers may also be used. -
FIG. 4J is a top-down view ofSWIIN module 400, showingSWIIN cover 440 and various components thereof includingreservoir cover 442,grip 441, windows 444 (shown are six windows),feet 443, and barcode (or other identifying information) 445. Also seen isreservoir assembly cover 430 a residing within thereservoir cover portion 442 ofSWIIN cover 440, wherereservoir assembly cover 430 a comprises four reservoir access apertures (432 a, 432 b, 432 c, and 432 d) and four pneumatic access apertures (433 a, 433 b, 433 c, and 433 d). -
FIG. 4K is a side view ofSWIIN module 400, depictingSWIIN cover 440,reservoir cover 442,grip 441, andfeet 443.FIG. 4L is a view from the barcode “end” ofSWIIN module 400 toward the reservoir “end” ofSWIIN module 400. Seen areSWIIN cover 400,reservoir cover 442,grip 441, andfeet 443.FIG. 4M is a bottom perspective view ofSWIIN module 400, showingSWIIN cover 440,reservoir cover 442,feet 443, as well as distribution channel covers 414 disposed on the bottom ofpermeate member 408. -
FIGS. 4N and 4O depict views of areservoir assembly 430. InFIG. 4N ,reservoir assembly 430 is disposed upon asingulation assembly 420 a comprisingretentate member 404; distribution channel covers 413; a gasket, perforated member, and filter assembly (not shown clearly), and a permeate member (also not shown clearly)Reservoir assembly 430 comprisesreservoir assembly cover 430 a, wherereservoir assembly cover 430 a comprises four reservoir access apertures (432 a, 432 b, 432 c, and 432 d) and four pneumatic access apertures (433 a, 433 b, 433 c, and 433 d). -
FIG. 4O is a top perspective view of a cross section ofreservoir assembly 430 taken through the “reservoir” end ofSWIIN cover 440. Seen arefeet 443 ofSWIIN cover 440.Reservoirs channel ports Reservoirs reservoirs reservoirs reservoirs retentate member 404 orpermeate member 408.Reservoirs reservoirs channel ports reservoirs -
FIG. 4P is an exemplary pneumatic block diagram suitable for the SWIIN module depicted inFIGS. 4I-4M and, e.g., utilizing the singulation assemblies described in relation toFIGS. 4A-4F . Note that there are two solenoid valves (SV) for each reservoir—two retentate reservoirs (RR1 and RR2) and two permeate reservoirs (PR1 and PR2)—where one of the valves is for pneumatic actuation, and one of the valves serves to block the line. Note there is a flow meter for each pair of solenoid valves. Also, in this embodiment there is a single manifold serving all reservoirs; however, other embodiments may employ two manifolds, with PR1 and RR1 served by one manifold and PR2 and RR2 served by another manifold, or each reservoir (PR1, RR1, PR2, RR2) served by a separate manifold. Tables 1 and 2 provide the valve status, pressures, and reservoir volumes for each step of the initial fluid flow, cell loading, growth, editing, and cell collection processes for the pneumatic block diagram inFIG. 4P . -
FIG. 4Q depicts yet another embodiment of aSWIIN module 450 from an exploded top perspective view. The SWIIN module embodiment described in relation toFIGS. 4Q-4Z provides advantages over the previously-described SWIIN modules. For example, the positioning of the reservoirs and reservoir ports below the retentate and permeate serpentine channels minimizes instantaneous flow of fluid in the reservoirs through the reservoir ports and into channels that connect the reservoir ports to the retentate and permeate channels. Instead, flow is controlled by the application of pressure (positive or negative) and an appropriate time chosen by the user. Additionally, unlike the previous SWIIN embodiments described herein,SWIIN module 450 does not have a “singulation assembly” comprising the retentate and permeate members and a gasket surrounding the perforated member and filter sandwiched between the retentate and permeate members that is separate from a SWIIN cover and reservoir assembly; instead, inSWIIN module 450 the retentate member is formed on the bottom of a top of a SWIIN module component and the permeate member is formed on the top of the bottom of a SWIIN module component. Eliminating a “singulation assembly”, SWIIN cover, SWIIN grip, etc., vastly simplifies manufacture and assembly of the SWIIN module and decreases costs. In addition, a SWIIN assembly comprising theSWIIN module 450 comprises features to manage condensation, which allows for improved imaging of the wells. These features are described infra. - Thus, the
SWIIN module 450 inFIG. 4Q comprises from the top down, a reservoir gasket or cover 458, a retentate member 404 (where a retentate flow channel cannot be seen in thisFIG. 4Q ), aperforated member 401 swaged with a filter (filter not seen inFIG. 4Q ), apermeate member 408 comprising integrated reservoirs (permeatereservoirs 452 and retentate reservoirs 454), and tworeservoir seals 462, which seal the bottom ofpermeate reservoirs 452 andretentate reservoirs 454. Apermeate channel 460 a can be seen disposed on the top ofpermeate member 408, defined by a raisedportion 476 ofserpentine channel 460 a, andultrasonic tabs 464 can be seen disposed on the top ofpermeate member 408 as well. The perforations that form the wells onperforated member 401 are not seen in thisFIG. 4Q ; however, through-holes 466 to accommodate theultrasonic tabs 464 are seen. In addition, supports 470 are disposed at either end ofSWIIN module 450 to supportSWIIN module 450 and to elevatepermeate member 408 andretentate member 404 abovereservoirs serpentine channel 460 a or the fluid path from the retentate reservoir toserpentine channel 460 b (neither fluid path is seen in thisFIG. 4Q , but seeFIG. 4X ). - In this
FIG. 4Q , it can be seen that theserpentine channel 460 a that is disposed on the top ofpermeate member 408 traverses permeatemember 408 for most of the length ofpermeate member 408 except for the portion ofpermeate member 408 that comprisespermeate reservoirs 452 andretentate reservoirs 454 and for most of the width ofpermeate member 408. As used herein with respect to the distribution channels in the retentate member or permeate member, “most of the length” means about 95% of the length of the retentate member or permeate member, or about 90%, 85%, 80%, 75%, or 70% of the length of the retentate member or permeate member. As used herein with respect to the distribution channels in the retentate member or permeate member, “most of the width” means about 95% of the width of the retentate member or permeate member, or about 90%, 85%, 80%, 75%, or 70% of the width of the retentate member or permeate member. - In this embodiment of a SWIIN module, the perforated member is similar to the perforated member described in relation to the SWIIN singulation assembly in
FIGS. 4A-4H with the exception that the perforated member in this embodiment includes through-holes to accommodate ultrasonic tabs disposed on the permeate member. Thus, in this embodiment the perforated member is fabricated from 316 stainless steel, and the perforations form the walls of microwells while a filter or membrane is used to form the bottom of the microwells. Typically, the perforations (microwells) are approximately 150 μm-200 μm in diameter, and the perforated member is approximately 125 μm deep, resulting in microwells having a volume of approximately 2.5 nl, with a total of approximately 200,000 microwells. The distance between the microwells is approximately 279 μm center-to-center. Though here the microwells have a volume of approximately 2.5 nl, the volume of the microwells may be from 1 to 25 nl, or preferably from 2 to 10 nl, and even more preferably from 2 to 4 nl. As for the filter or membrane, like the filter described previously, filters appropriate for use are solvent resistant, contamination free during filtration, and are able to retain the types and sizes of cells of interest. For example, in order to retain small cell types such as bacterial cells, pore sizes can be as low as 0.10 μm, however for other cell types (e.g., such as for mammalian cells), the pore sizes can be as high as 10.0 μm-20.0 μm or more. Indeed, the pore sizes useful in the cell concentration device/module include filters with sizes from 0.10 μm, 0.11 μm, 0.12 μm, 0.13 μm, 0.14 μm, 0.15 μm, 0.16 μm, 0.17 μm, 0.18 μm, 0.19 μm, 0.20 μm, 0.21 μm, 0.22 μm, 0.23 μm, 0.24 μm, 0.25 μm, 0.26 μm, 0.27 μm, 0.28 μm, 0.29 μm, 0.30 μm, 0.31 μm, 0.32 μm, 0.33 μm, 0.34 μm, 0.35 μm, 0.36 μm, 0.37 μm, 0.38 μm, 0.39 μm, 0.40 μm, 0.41 μm, 0.42 μm, 0.43 μm, 0.44 μm, 0.45 μm, 0.46 μm, 0.47 μm, 0.48 μm, 0.49 μm, 0.50 μm and larger. The filters may be fabricated from any suitable material including cellulose mixed ester (cellulose nitrate and acetate) (CME), polycarbonate (PC), polyvinylidene fluoride (PVDF), polyethersulfone (PES), polytetrafluoroethylene (PTFE), nylon, or glass fiber. -
FIG. 4R is a top-down view ofpermeate member 408, showingserpentine channel 460 a (the portion of the serpentine channel disposed in permeate member 408) defined by raisedportion 476 ofserpentine channel 460 a,permeate reservoirs 452,retentate reservoirs 454, reservoir ports 456 (two of the four of which are labeled),ultrasonic tabs 464 disposed at each end ofpermeate member 408 and on the raisedportion 476 ofserpentine channel 460 a ofpermeate member 408, two permeateports 411, and tworetentate ports 407 are also seen. -
FIG. 4S is a bottom-up view ofretentate member 404, showingserpentine channel 460 b (the portion of the serpentine channel disposed in retentate member 408) defined by the raisedportion 476 of theserpentine channel 460 b. Also seen is anintegrated reservoir cover 478 for the permeate and retentate reservoirs that mate withpermeate reservoirs 452 andretentate reservoirs 454 on the permeate member. Theintegrated reservoir cover 478 comprisesreservoir access apertures pneumatic ports serpentine channel 460 a ofpermeate member 408 and theserpentine channel 460 b ofretentate member 404 mate to form the top (retentate member) and bottom (permeate member) of a mated serpentine channel. The footprint length of the serpentine channel structure is from, e.g., from 80 mm to 500 mm, from 100 mm to 400 mm, or from 150 mm to 250 mm. In some aspects, the entire footprint width of the channel structure is from 50 mm to 200 mm, from 75 mm to 175 mm, or from 100 mm to 150 mm. - The cross-section configuration of the mated serpentine channel may be round, elliptical, oval, square, rectangular, trapezoidal, or irregular. If square, rectangular, or another shape with generally straight sides, the cross section may be from about 2 mm to 15 mm wide, or from 3 mm to 12 mm wide, or from 5 mm to 10 mm wide. If the cross section of the mated serpentine channel is generally round, oval or elliptical, the radius of the channel may be from about 3 mm to 20 mm in hydraulic radius, or from 5 mm to 15 mm in hydraulic radius, or from 8 mm to 12 mm in hydraulic radius.
- As in previous embodiments, disposed between
serpentine channels filter 403 is swaged withperforated member 401.Serpentine channels portion serpentine channel 460 a ofpermeate member 408 may have a volume of 2 mL, and theserpentine channel 460 b ofretentate member 404 may have a volume of, e.g., 3 mL. The volume of fluid in the serpentine channel may range from about 2 mL to about 80 mL, or about 4 mL to 60 mL, or from 5 mL to 40 mL, or from 6 mL to 20 mL (note these volumes apply to a SWIIN module comprising a, e.g., 50-500K perforation member). The volume of the reservoirs may range from 5 mL to 50 mL, or from 7 mL to 40 mL, or from 8 mL to 30 mL or from 10 mL to 20 mL, and the volumes of all reservoirs may be the same or the volumes of the reservoirs may differ (e.g., the volume of the permeate reservoirs is greater than that of the retentate reservoirs). - The
serpentine channel portions permeate member 408 andretentate member 404, respectively, are approximately 200 mm long, 130 mm wide, and 4 mm thick, though in other embodiments, the retentate and permeate members can be from 75 mm to 400 mm in length, or from 100 mm to 300 mm in length, or from 150 mm to 250 mm in length; from 50 mm to 250 mm in width, or from 75 mm to 200 mm in width, or from 100 mm to 150 mm in width; and from 2 mm to 15 mm in thickness, or from 4 mm to 10 mm in thickness, or from 5 mm to 8 mm in thickness. As in previously described embodiments the retentate (and permeate) members may be fabricated from PMMA (poly(methyl methacrylate) or other materials may be used, including polycarbonate, cyclic olefin co-polymer (COC), glass, polyvinyl chloride, polyethylene, polyamide, polypropylene, polysulfone, polyurethane, and co-polymers of these and other polymers. Preferably at least the retentate member is fabricated from a transparent material so that the cells can be visualized (see, e.g.,FIG. 4Y and the description thereof). For example, a video camera may be used to monitor cell growth by, e.g., density change measurements based on an image of an empty well, with phase contrast, or if, e.g., a chromogenic marker, such as a chromogenic protein, is used to add a distinguishable color to the cells. Chromogenic markers such as blitzen blue, dreidel teal, virginia violet, vixen purple, prancer purple, tinsel purple, maccabee purple, donner magenta, cupid pink, seraphina pink, scrooge orange, and leor orange (the Chromogenic Protein Paintbox, all available from ATUM (Newark, Calif.)) obviate the need to use fluorescence, although fluorescent cell markers, fluorescent proteins, and chemiluminescent cell markers may also be used. - Because the retentate member preferably is transparent, colony growth in the SWIIN module can be monitored by automated devices such as those sold by JoVE (ScanLag™ system, Cambridge, Mass.) (also see Levin-Reisman, et al., Nature Methods, 7:737-39 (2010)). Cell growth for, e.g., mammalian cells may be monitored by, e.g., the growth monitor sold by IncuCyte (Ann Arbor, Mich.) (see also, Choudhry, PLos One, 11(2):e0148469 (2016)). Further, automated colony pickers may be employed, such as those sold by, e.g., TECAN (Pickolo™ system, Mannedorf, Switzerland); Hudson Inc. (RapidPick™, Springfield, N.J.); Molecular Devices (
QPix 400™ system, San Jose, Calif.); and Singer Instruments (PIXL™ system, Somerset, UK). - Due to the heating and cooling of the SWIIN module, condensation may accumulate on the retentate member which may interfere with accurate visualization of the growing cell colonies. Condensation of the
SWIIN module 450 may be controlled by, e.g., moving heated air over the top of (e.g., retentate member) of theSWIIN module 450, or by applying a transparent heated lid over at least theserpentine channel portion 460 b of theretentate member 404. See, e.g.,FIG. 4Y and the description thereof infra. - As with the embodiments described previously, in
SWIIN module 450 cells and medium—at a dilution appropriate for Poisson or substantial Poisson distribution of the cells in the microwells of the perforated member—are flowed intoserpentine channel 460 b from ports inretentate member 404, and the cells settle in the microwells while the medium passes through the filter intoserpentine channel 460 a inpermeate member 408. The cells are retained in the microwells ofperforated member 401 as the cells cannot travel throughfilter 403. Appropriate medium may be introduced intopermeate member 408 throughpermeate ports 411. The medium flows upward throughfilter 403 to nourish the cells in the microwells (perforations) ofperforated member 401. Additionally, buffer exchange can be effected by cycling medium through the retentate and permeate members. In operation, the cells are deposited into the microwells, are grown for an initial, e.g., 2-100 doublings, editing is induced by, e.g., raising the temperature of the SWIIN to 42° C. to induce a temperature inducible promoter or by removing growth medium from the permeate member and replacing the growth medium with a medium comprising a chemical component that induces an inducible promoter. - Once editing has taken place, the temperature of the SWIIN may be decreased, or the inducing medium may be removed and replaced with fresh medium lacking the chemical component thereby de-activating the inducible promoter. The cells then continue to grow in the
SWIIN module 450 until the growth of the cell colonies in the microwells is normalized. For the normalization protocol, once the colonies are normalized, the colonies are flushed from the microwells by applying fluid or air pressure (or both) to the permeatemember serpentine channel 460 a and thus to filter 403 and pooled. Alternatively, if cherry picking is desired, the growth of the cell colonies in the microwells is monitored, and slow-growing colonies are directly selected; or, fast-growing colonies are eliminated. -
FIG. 4T is a top perspective view of a SWIIN module with the retentate and perforated members in partial cross section. In thisFIG. 4T , it can be seen thatserpentine channel 460 a is disposed on the top ofpermeate member 408 is defined by raisedportions 476 and traverses permeatemember 408 for most of the length and width ofpermeate member 408 except for the portion ofpermeate member 408 that comprises the permeate and retentate reservoirs (note only oneretentate reservoir 452 can be seen). Moving from left to right,reservoir gasket 458 is disposed upon the integrated reservoir cover 478 (cover not seen in thisFIG. 4T ) ofretentate member 404.Gasket 458 comprisesreservoir access apertures pneumatic ports support 470. Disposed underpermeate reservoir 452 can be seen one of two reservoir seals 462. In addition to the retentate member being in cross section, theperforated member 401 and filter 403 (filter 403 is not seen in thisFIG. 4T ) are in cross section. Note that there are a number ofultrasonic tabs 464 disposed at the right end ofSWIIN module 450 and on raisedportion 476 which defines the channel turns ofserpentine channel 460 a, includingultrasonic tabs 464 extending through through-holes 466 ofperforated member 401. There is also asupport 470 at the enddistal reservoirs permeate member 408. -
FIG. 4U is a side perspective view of an assembledSWIIIN module 450, including, from right to left,reservoir gasket 458 disposed upon integrated reservoir cover 478 (not seen) ofretentate member 404.Gasket 458 may be fabricated from rubber, silicone, nitrile rubber, polytetrafluoroethylene, a plastic polymer such as polychlorotrifluoroethylene, or other flexible, compressible material.Gasket 458 comprisesreservoir access apertures pneumatic ports support 470 ofpermeate member 408. In addition,permeate reservoir 452 can be seen, as well as onereservoir seal 462. At the far-right end is asecond support 470. -
FIG. 4V is a side perspective view of the reservoir portion ofpermeate member 408 andretentate member 404, includinggasket 458. Seen arepermeate reservoirs 452 as the outside reservoirs, andretentate reservoirs 454 betweenpermeate reservoirs 452. It should be apparent to one of ordinary skill in the art given the present description, however, that this particular configuration of reservoirs may be changed withpermeate 452 and retentate 454 reservoirs alternating in position; with both permeatereservoirs 452 on one side ofSWIIN module 450 and bothretentate reservoirs 454 on the other side ofSWIIN module 450, or theretentate reservoirs 454 may be positioned at the two sides with thepermeate reservoirs 452 between the retentate reservoirs. Again,gasket 458 comprisesreservoir access apertures pneumatic ports reservoir seals 462 can be seen, each sealing onepermeate reservoir 452 and oneretentate reservoir 454. Also seen issupport 470 at the “reservoir end” ofpermeate member 408. -
FIG. 4W is a side perspective cross sectional view ofpermeate reservoir 452 ofpermeate member 408 andretentate member 404 andgasket 458.Reservoir access aperture 432 c andpneumatic aperture 433 c can be seen, as well assupport 470. Also seen is perforatedmember 401 and filter 403 (filter 403 is not seen clearly in thisFIG. 4W but is sandwiched in betweenperforated member 401 and permeate member 408). Afluid path 472 frompermeate reservoir 452 toserpentine channel 460 a inpermeate member 408 can be seen, ascan reservoir seal 462. -
FIG. 4X is a small segment of a cross section ofSWIIN module 450, showing theretentate member 404, perforatedmember 401,filter 403, andretentate member 408.FIG. 4X also shows afluid path 472 from a permeate reservoir to theserpentine channel 460 a disposed inpermeate member 408, and afluid path 474 from a retentate reservoir to theserpentine channel 460 b disposed inpermeate member 404. As mentioned previously, the reservoir architecture of this embodiment is particularly advantageous as bubbling is minimized. That is, because the reservoirs and reservoir ports are positioned below the retentate and permeate serpentine channels, there is no instantaneous flow of fluid in the reservoirs into channels that connect the reservoir ports to the retentate and permeate channels. Instead, flow is controlled by the application of pressure (positive or negative) and an appropriate time chosen by the user. - Imaging of cell colonies growing in the wells of the SWIIN is desired in most implementations for, e.g., monitoring both cell growth and device performance and imaging is necessary for cherry-picking implementations. Real-time monitoring of cell growth in the SWIIN requires backlighting, retentate plate (top plate) condensation management and a system-level approach to temperature control, air flow, and thermal management. In some implementations, imaging employs a camera or CCD device with sufficient resolution to be able to image individual wells. For example, in some configurations a camera with a 9-pixel pitch is used (that is, there are 9 pixels center-to-center for each well). Processing the images may, in some implementations, utilize reading the images in grayscale, rating each pixel from low to high, where wells with no cells will be brightest (due to full or nearly-full light transmission from the backlight) and wells with cells will be dim (due to cells blocking light transmission from the backlight). After processing the images, thresholding is performed to determine which pixels will be called “bright” or “dim”, spot finding is performed to find bright pixels and arrange them into blocks, and then the spots are arranged on a hexagonal grid of pixels that correspond to the spots. Once arranged, the measure of intensity of each well is extracted, by, e.g., looking at one or more pixels in the middle of the spot, looking at several to many pixels at random or pre-set positions, or averaging X number of pixels in the spot. In addition, background intensity may be subtracted. Thresholding is again used to call each well positive (e.g., containing cells) or negative (e.g., no cells in the well). The imaging information may be used in several ways, including taking images at time points for monitoring cell growth. Monitoring cell growth can be used to, e.g., remove the “muffin tops” of fast-growing cells followed by removal of all cells or removal of cells in “rounds” as described above, or recover cells from specific wells (e.g., slow-growing cell colonies); alternatively, wells containing fast-growing cells can be identified and areas of UV light covering the fast-growing cell colonies can be projected (or rastered with shutters) onto the SWIIN to irradiate or inhibit growth of those cells. Imaging may also be used to assure proper fluid flow in the serpentine channel 460.
-
FIG. 4Y depicts the embodiment of the SWIIN module inFIGS. 4Q-4X further comprising a heat management system including a heater and a heated cover. The heater cover facilitates the condensation management that is required for imaging.Assembly 498 comprises aSWIIN module 450 seen lengthwise in cross section, where onepermeate reservoir 452 is seen. Disposed immediately uponSWIIN module 450 iscover 494 and disposed immediately belowSWIIN module 450 isbacklight 480, which allows for imaging. Beneath and adjacent to the backlight and SWIIN module isinsulation 482, which is disposed over aheatsink 484. In thisFIG. 4Y , the fins of the heatsink would be in-out of the page. In addition there is alsoaxial fan 486 andheat sink 488, as well as twothermoelectric coolers 492, and acontroller 490 to control the pneumatics, thermoelectric coolers, fan, solenoid valves, etc. The arrows denote cool air coming into the unit and hot air being removed from the unit. It should be noted that control of heating allows for growth of many different types of cells (prokaryotic and eukaryotic) as well as strains of cells that are, e.g., temperature sensitive, etc., and allows use of temperature-sensitive promoters. Temperature control allows for protocols to be adjusted to account for differences in transformation efficiency, cell growth and viability. -
FIG. 4Z is an exemplary pneumatic block diagram suitable for the SWIIN module depicted inFIGS. 4Q-4Y . In this configuration, there are two manifold arms that are controlled independently, the pressure regulator and vacuum regulator seen inFIG. 4P have been eliminated, and there are two proportional valves instead of one, one each for the manifold arms. Tables 3-5 relate to the pneumatic diagram inFIG. 4Z . Table 3 lists, for each step 1-32, the manifold arm status (open=arm open, closed=arm closed, motor engaged for pressurization); pump status (1: on, 0: off); energy status (1: energized, 0: de-energized) for each solenoid valve 1-4; and the pressure in psi for each proportional valve. Table 4 lists, for each step 1-32, the detection and threshold status forflow meters reservoirs retentate reservoirs -
FIG. 5A depicts an exemplary stand-alone automated multi-modulecell processing instrument 500 to, e.g., perform one of the exemplary workflows described infra, where the automated multi-module cell processing instrument performs the processes of cell growth, cell concentration and buffer exchange to render the cells electrocompetent, cell transformation, cell selection, and cell editing all without human intervention. Theinstrument 500, for example, may be and preferably is designed as a stand-alone desktop instrument for use within a laboratory environment. Theinstrument 500 may incorporate a mixture of reusable and disposable components for performing the various integrated processes in conducting automated genome cleavage and/or editing in cells. Illustrated is agantry 502, providing an automated mechanical motion system (actuator) (not shown) that supplies XYZ axis motion control to, e.g., an automated (i.e., robotic)liquid handling system 558 including, e.g., anair displacement pipettor 532 which allows for cell processing among multiple modules without human intervention. In some automated multi-module cell processing instruments, theair displacement pipettor 532 is moved bygantry 502 and the various modules and reagent cartridges remain stationary; however, in other embodiments, theliquid handling system 558 may stay stationary while the various modules and reagent cartridges are moved. Also included in the automated multi-modulecell processing instrument 500 isreagent cartridge 510 comprising reservoirs 512 and transformation module 530 (e.g., a flow-through electroporation device as described in detail in relation toFIGS. 8A-8E ), as well as awash cartridge 504 comprisingreservoirs 506. Thewash cartridge 504 may be configured to accommodate large tubes, for example, wash solutions, or solutions that are used often throughout an iterative process. In one example, washcartridge 504 may be configured to remain in place when two ormore reagent cartridges 510 are sequentially used and replaced. Althoughreagent cartridge 510 and washcartridge 504 are shown inFIG. 5A as separate cartridges, the contents ofwash cartridge 504 may be incorporated intoreagent cartridge 510. Thereagent cartridge 510 and washcartridge 504 may be identical except for the consumables (reagents or other components contained within the various inserts) inserted therein. Note in thisembodiment transformation module 530 is contained withinreagent cartridge 510; however, in alternativeembodiments transformation module 530 is contained within its own module or may be part of another module, such as a growth module. - In some implementations, the wash and
reagent cartridges editing instrument 500. For example, a user may open and position each of thereagent cartridge 510 and thewash cartridge 504 comprising various desired inserts and reagents within a chassis of the automated multi-modulecell editing instrument 500 prior to activating cell processing. - Also illustrated in
FIG. 5A is the roboticliquid handling system 558 including thegantry 502 andair displacement pipettor 532. In some examples, therobotic handling system 558 may include an automated liquid handling system such as those manufactured by Tecan Group Ltd. of Mannedorf, Switzerland, Hamilton Company of Reno, Nev. (see, e.g., WO2018015544A1), or Beckman Coulter, Inc. of Fort Collins, Colo. (see, e.g., US20160018427A1). Pipette tips may be provided in a pipette transfer tip supply (not shown) for use with theair displacement pipettor 532. - Inserts or components of the wash and
reagent cartridges robotic handling system 558. For example, the roboticliquid handling system 558 may scan one or more inserts within each of the wash andreagent cartridges reagent cartridge element 526 ofFIG. 5B ) of the automated multi-modulecell editing instrument 500 may identify a stored materials map based upon the machine-readable indicia. The exemplary automated multi-modulecell processing instrument 500 ofFIG. 5A further comprises acell growth module 534. (Note, all modules recited briefly here are described in greater detail below.) In the embodiment illustrated inFIG. 5A , thecell growth module 534 comprises twocell growth vials 518, 520 (described in greater detail below in relation toFIGS. 6A-6D ) as well as a cell concentration module 522 (described in detail in relation toFIGS. 7A-7K ). In alternative embodiments, thecell concentration module 522 may be separate fromcell growth module 534, e.g., in a separate, dedicated module. Also illustrated as part of the automated multi-modulecell processing instrument 500 ofFIG. 5A is anisolation module 540, served by, e.g., roboticliquid handing system 558 andair displacement pipettor 532. Also seen are an optional nucleic acid assembly/desalting module 514 comprising a reaction chamber or tube receptacle (not shown) and amagnet 516 to allow for purification of nucleic acids using, e.g., magnetic solid phase reversible immobilization (SPRI) beads (Applied Biological Materials Inc., Richmond, BC. The cell growth module, cell concentration module, transformation module, reagent cartridge, and nucleic acid assembly module are described in greater detail infra, and an exemplary isolation module (which may also serve as a recovery and growth module as well as an incubation and normalization module) is described in detail in relation toFIGS. 3A-3J and 4A-4Y supra. -
FIG. 5B is a plan view of the front of the exemplary multi-modulecell processing instrument 500 depicted inFIG. 5A . Cartridge-based source materials (such as in reagent cartridge 510), for example, may be positioned in designated areas on adeck 502 of theinstrument 500 for access by a robotic handling instrument (not shown in this figure). As illustrated inFIG. 5B , the deck may include aprotection sink 503 such that contaminants spilling, dripping, or overflowing from any of the modules of theinstrument 500 are contained within a lip of theprotection sink 503. In addition toreagent cartridge 510, also seen inFIG. 5B iswash cartridge 504,isolation module 540, and a portion ofgrowth module 534. Also seen in this view istouch screen display 550, transformation module controls 538, electronics rack 536, andprocessing system 526. -
FIGS. 5C through 5D illustrate side and front views, respectively, of multi-modulecell processing instrument 500 comprisingchassis 590 for use in desktop versions of the automated multi-modulecell editing instrument 500. For example, thechassis 590 may have a width of about 24-48 inches, a height of about 24-48 inches and a depth of about 24-48 inches.Chassis 590 may be and preferably is designed to hold all modules and disposable supplies used in automated cell processing and to perform all processes required without human intervention (that is,chassis 590 is configured to provide an integrated, stand-alone automated multi-module cell processing instrument).Chassis 590 may mount a roboticliquid handling system 558 for moving materials between modules. As illustrated inFIG. 5C , thechassis 590 includes acover 552 having ahandle 554 and hinge 556 a (hinges 556 b and 556 c are seen inFIG. 5D ) for lifting thecover 552 and accessing the interior of thechassis 590. A cooling grate 564 (FIG. 5C ) allows for air flow via an internal fan (not shown). Further, thechassis 590 is lifted byadjustable feet feet 570, 570 b are shown inFIG. 5D ). Adjustable feet 570 a-570 c, for example, may provide additional air flow beneath thechassis 590. Acontrol button 566, in some embodiments, allows for single-button automated start and/or stop of cell processing within the automated multi-modulecell processing instrument 500. - Inside the
chassis 590, in some implementations, a roboticliquid handling system 558 is disposed along agantry 502 above wash cartridge 504 (reagent cartridge 510 is not seen in these figures). Control circuitry, liquid handling tubes, air pump controls, valves, thermal units (e.g., heating and cooling units) and other control mechanisms, in some embodiments, are disposed below a deck of thechassis 590, in acontrol box region 568. Also seen in bothFIGS. 5C and 5D is isolation device ormodule 540. Nucleicacid assembly module 514 comprising amagnet 516 is seen inFIG. 5D . - Although not illustrated, in some embodiments a display screen may be positioned on the front face of the
chassis 590, for example covering a portion of the cover (e.g., seedisplay 550 inFIG. 5B ). The display screen may provide information to the user regarding the processing status of the automated multi-modulecell editing instrument 500. In another example, the display screen may accept inputs from the user for conducting the cell processing. - The Rotating Growth Module
-
FIG. 6A shows one embodiment of arotating growth vial 600 for use with the cell growth device described herein. Therotating growth vial 600 is an optically-transparent container having anopen end 604 for receiving liquid media and cells, acentral vial region 606 that defines the primary container for growing cells, a tapered-to-constrictedregion 618 defining at least onelight path 610, aclosed end 616, and adrive engagement mechanism 612. Therotating growth vial 600 has a centrallongitudinal axis 620 around which the vial rotates, and thelight path 610 is generally perpendicular to the longitudinal axis of the vial. The firstlight path 610 is positioned in the lower constricted portion of the tapered-to-constrictedregion 618. Optionally, some embodiments of therotating growth vial 600 have a secondlight path 608 in the tapered region of the tapered-to-constrictedregion 618. Both light paths in this embodiment are positioned in a region of the rotating growth vial that is constantly filled with the cell culture (cells+growth media) and are not affected by the rotational speed of the growth vial. The firstlight path 610 is shorter than the secondlight path 608 allowing for sensitive measurement of OD values when the OD values of the cell culture in the vial are at a high level (e.g., later in the cell growth process), whereas the secondlight path 608 allows for sensitive measurement of OD values when the OD values of the cell culture in the vial are at a lower level (e.g., earlier in the cell growth process). - The
drive engagement mechanism 612 engages with a motor (not shown) to rotate the vial. In some embodiments, the motor drives thedrive engagement mechanism 612 such that therotating growth vial 600 is rotated in one direction only, and in other embodiments, the rotatinggrowth vial 600 is rotated in a first direction for a first amount of time or periodicity, rotated in a second direction (i.e., the opposite direction) for a second amount of time or periodicity, and this process may be repeated so that the rotating growth vial 600 (and the cell culture contents) are subjected to an oscillating motion. Further, the choice of whether the culture is subjected to oscillation and the periodicity therefor may be selected by the user. The first amount of time and the second amount of time may be the same or may be different. The amount of time may be 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, or more seconds, or may be 1, 2, 3, 4 or more minutes. In another embodiment, in an early stage of cell growth therotating growth vial 600 may be oscillated at a first periodicity (e.g., every 60 seconds), and then a later stage of cell growth therotating growth vial 600 may be oscillated at a second periodicity (e.g., every one second) different from the first periodicity. - The
rotating growth vial 600 may be reusable or, preferably, the rotating growth vial is consumable. In some embodiments, the rotating growth vial is consumable and is presented to the user pre-filled with growth medium, where the vial is hermetically sealed at theopen end 604 with a foil seal. A medium-filled rotating growth vial packaged in such a manner may be part of a kit for use with a stand-alone cell growth device or with a cell growth module that is part of an automated multi-module cell processing system. To introduce cells into the vial, a user need only pipette up a desired volume of cells and use the pipette tip to punch through the foil seal of the vial.Open end 604 may optionally include anextended lip 602 to overlap and engage with the cell growth device. In automated systems, the rotatinggrowth vial 600 may be tagged with a barcode or other identifying means that can be read by a scanner or camera (not shown) that is part of the automated system. - The volume of the
rotating growth vial 600 and the volume of the cell culture (including growth medium) may vary greatly, but the volume of therotating growth vial 600 must be large enough to generate a specified total number of cells. In practice, the volume of therotating growth vial 600 may range from 1-250 mL, 2-100 mL, from 5-80 mL, 10-50 mL, or from 12-35 mL. Likewise, the volume of the cell culture (cells+growth media) should be appropriate to allow proper aeration and mixing in therotating growth vial 600. Proper aeration promotes uniform cellular respiration within the growth media. Thus, the volume of the cell culture should be approximately 5-85% of the volume of the growth vial or from 20-60% of the volume of the growth vial. For example, for a 30 mL growth vial, the volume of the cell culture would be from about 1.5 mL to about 26 mL, or from 6 mL to about 18 mL. - The
rotating growth vial 600 preferably is fabricated from a bio-compatible optically transparent materialor at least the portion of the vial comprising the light path(s) is transparent. Additionally, material from which the rotating growth vial is fabricated should be able to be cooled to about 4° C. or lower and heated to about 55° C. or higher to accommodate both temperature-based cell assays and long-term storage at low temperatures. Further, the material that is used to fabricate the vial must be able to withstand temperatures up to 55° C. without deformation while spinning. Suitable materials include cyclic olefin copolymer (COC), glass, polyvinyl chloride, polyethylene, polyamide, polypropylene, polycarbonate, poly(methyl methacrylate (PMMA), polysulfone, polyurethane, and co-polymers of these and other polymers. Preferred materials include polypropylene, polycarbonate, or polystyrene. In some embodiments, the rotating growth vial is inexpensively fabricated by, e.g., injection molding or extrusion. -
FIG. 6B is a perspective view of one embodiment of acell growth device 630.FIG. 6C depicts a cut-away view of thecell growth device 630 fromFIG. 6B . In both figures, the rotatinggrowth vial 600 is seen positioned inside amain housing 636 with theextended lip 602 of therotating growth vial 600 extending above themain housing 636. Additionally, endhousings 652, alower housing 632 andflanges 634 are indicated in both figures.Flanges 634 are used to attach thecell growth device 630 to heating/cooling means or other structure (not shown).FIG. 6C depicts additional detail. InFIG. 6C ,upper bearing 642 andlower bearing 640 are shown positioned withinmain housing 636.Upper bearing 642 andlower bearing 640 support the vertical load ofrotating growth vial 600.Lower housing 632 contains thedrive motor 638. Thecell growth device 630 ofFIG. 6C comprises two light paths: a primarylight path 644, and a secondarylight path 650.Light path 644 corresponds tolight path 610 positioned in the constricted portion of the tapered-to-constricted portion of therotating growth vial 600, andlight path 650 corresponds tolight path 608 in the tapered portion of the tapered-to-constricted portion of the rotating growth via 6001.Light paths FIG. 6C but may be seen inFIG. 6A . In addition tolight paths emission board 648 to illuminate the light path(s), anddetector board 646 to detect the light after the light travels through the cell culture liquid in therotating growth vial 600. - The
motor 638 engages withdrive mechanism 612 and is used to rotate therotating growth vial 600. In some embodiments,motor 638 is a brushless DC type drive motor with built-in drive controls that can be set to hold a constant revolution per minute (RPM) between 0 and about 3000 RPM. Alternatively, other motor types such as a stepper, servo, brushed DC, and the like can be used. Optionally, themotor 638 may also have direction control to allow reversing of the rotational direction, and a tachometer to sense and report actual RPM. The motor is controlled by a processor (not shown) according to, e.g., standard protocols programmed into the processor and/or user input, and the motor may be configured to vary RPM to cause axial precession of the cell culture thereby enhancing mixing, e.g., to prevent cell aggregation, increase aeration, and optimize cellular respiration. -
Main housing 636,end housings 652 andlower housing 632 of thecell growth device 630 may be fabricated from any suitable, robust material including aluminum, stainless steel, and other thermally conductive materials, including plastics. These structures or portions thereof can be created through various techniques, e.g., metal fabrication, injection molding, creation of structural layers that are fused, etc. Whereas therotating growth vial 600 is envisioned in some embodiments to be reusable, but preferably is consumable, the other components of thecell growth device 630 are preferably reusable and function as a stand-alone benchtop device or as a module in a multi-module cell processing system. - The processor (not shown) of the
cell growth device 630 may be programmed with information to be used as a “blank” or control for the growing cell culture. A “blank” or control is a vessel containing cell growth medium only, which yields 100% transmittance and 0 OD, while the cell sample will deflect light rays and will have a lower percent transmittance and higher OD. As the cells grow in the media and become denser, transmittance will decrease and OD will increase. The processor (not shown) of thecell growth device 630—may be programmed to use wavelength values for blanks commensurate with the growth media typically used in cell culture (whether, e.g., mammalian cells, bacterial cells, animal cells, yeast cells, etc.). Alternatively, a second spectrophotometer and vessel may be included in thecell growth device 630, where the second spectrophotometer is used to read a blank at designated intervals. -
FIG. 6D illustrates acell growth device 630 as part of an assembly comprising thecell growth device 630 ofFIG. 6B coupled tolight source 690,detector 692, andthermal components 694. Therotating growth vial 600 is inserted into the cell growth device. Components of thelight source 690 and detector 692 (e.g., such as a photodiode with gain control to cover 5-log) are coupled to the main housing of the cell growth device. Thelower housing 632 that houses the motor that rotates therotating growth vial 600 is illustrated, as is one of theflanges 634 that secures thecell growth device 630 to the assembly. Also, thethermal components 694 illustrated are a Peltier device or thermoelectric cooler. In this embodiment, thermal control is accomplished by attachment and electrical integration of thecell growth device 630 to thethermal components 694 via theflange 634 on the base of thelower housing 632. Thermoelectric coolers are capable of “pumping” heat to either side of a junction, either cooling a surface or heating a surface depending on the direction of current flow. In one embodiment, a thermistor is used to measure the temperature of the main housing and then, through a standard electronic proportional-integral-derivative (PID) controller loop, the rotatinggrowth vial 600 is controlled to approximately +/−0.5° C. - In use, cells are inoculated (cells can be pipetted, e.g., from an automated liquid handling system or by a user) into pre-filled growth media of a
rotating growth vial 600 by piercing though the foil seal or film. The programmed software of thecell growth device 630 sets the control temperature for growth, typically 30° C., then slowly starts the rotation of therotating growth vial 600. The cell/growth media mixture slowly moves vertically up the wall due to centrifugal force allowing therotating growth vial 600 to expose a large surface area of the mixture to a normal oxygen environment. The growth monitoring system takes either continuous readings of the OD or OD measurements at pre-set or pre-programmed time intervals. These measurements are stored in internal memory and if requested the software plots the measurements versus time to display a growth curve. If enhanced mixing is required, e.g., to optimize growth conditions, the speed of the vial rotation can be varied to cause an axial precession of the liquid, and/or a complete directional change can be performed at programmed intervals. The growth monitoring can be programmed to automatically terminate the growth stage at a pre-determined OD, and then quickly cool the mixture to a lower temperature to inhibit further growth. - One application for the
cell growth device 630 is to constantly measure the optical density of a growing cell culture. One advantage of the described cell growth device is that optical density can be measured continuously (kinetic monitoring) or at specific time intervals; e.g., every 5, 10, 15, 20, 30 45, or 60 seconds, or every 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, or 10 minutes. While thecell growth device 630 has been described in the context of measuring the optical density (OD) of a growing cell culture, it should, however, be understood by a skilled artisan given the teachings of the present specification that other cell growth parameters can be measured in addition to or instead of cell culture OD. As with optional measure of cell growth in relation to the solid wall device or module described supra, spectroscopy using visible, UV, or near infrared (NIR) light allows monitoring the concentration of nutrients and/or wastes in the cell culture and other spectroscopic measurements may be made; that is, other spectral properties can be measured via, e.g., dielectric impedance spectroscopy, visible fluorescence, fluorescence polarization, or luminescence. Additionally, thecell growth device 630 may include additional sensors for measuring, e.g., dissolved oxygen, carbon dioxide, pH, conductivity, and the like. -
FIGS. 7A-7K depict variations on one embodiment of a cell concentration/buffer exchange cassette and module that utilizes tangential flow filtration. One embodiment of a cell concentration device described herein operates using tangential flow filtration (TFF), also known as crossflow filtration, in which the majority of the feed flows tangentially over the surface of the filter thereby reducing cake (retentate) formation as compared to dead-end filtration, in which the feed flows into the filter. Secondary flows relative to the main feed are also exploited to generate shear forces that prevent filter cake formation and membrane fouling thus maximizing particle recovery, as described below. - The TFF device described herein was designed to take into account two primary design considerations. First, the geometry of the TFF device leads to filtering the cell culture over a large surface area so as to minimize processing time. Second, the design of the TFF device is configured to minimize filter fouling.
FIG. 7A is ageneral model 750 of tangential flow filtration. The TFF device operates using tangential flow filtration, also known as cross-flow filtration.FIG. 7A shows cells flowing over amembrane 754, where the feed flow of thecells 752 in medium or buffer is parallel to themembrane 754. TFF is different from dead-end filtration where both the feed flow and the pressure drop are perpendicular to a membrane or filter. -
FIG. 7B depicts a top view of the lower member of one embodiment of a TFF device/module providing tangential flow filtration. As can be seen in the embodiment of the TFF device ofFIG. 7B ,TFF device 700 comprises achannel structure 716 comprising aflow channel 702 b through which a cell culture is flowed. Thechannel structure 716 comprises asingle flow channel 702 b that is horizontally bifurcated by a membrane (not shown) through which buffer or medium may flow, but cells cannot. This particular embodiment comprises an undulating serpentine geometry 714 (i.e., the small “wiggles” in the flow channel 702) and a serpentine “zig-zag” pattern where the flow channel 702 crisscrosses the device from one end at the left of the device to the other end at the right of the device. The serpentine pattern allows for filtration over a high surface area relative to the device size and total channel volume, while the undulating contribution creates a secondary inertial flow to enable effective membrane regeneration preventing membrane fouling. Although an undulating geometry and serpentine pattern are exemplified here, other channel configurations may be used as long as the channel can be bifurcated by a membrane, and as long as the channel configuration provides for flow through the TFF module in alternating directions. In addition to theflow channel 702 b,portals channel structure 716 can be seen, as well as recesses 708.Portals 704 collect cells passing through the channel on one side of a membrane (not shown) (the “retentate”), andportals 706 collect the medium (“filtrate” or “permeate”) passing through the channel on the opposite side of the membrane (not shown). In this embodiment, recesses 708 accommodate screws or other fasteners (not shown) that allow the components of the TFF device to be secured to one another. - The
length 710 andwidth 712 of thechannel structure 716 may vary depending on the volume of the cell culture to be grown and the optical density of the cell culture to be concentrated. Thelength 710 of thechannel structure 716 typically is from 1 mm to 300 mm, or from 50 mm to 250 mm, or from 60 mm to 200 mm, or from 70 mm to 150 mm, or from 80 mm to 100 mm. The width of thechannel structure 716 typically is from 1 mm to 120 mm, or from 20 mm to 100 mm, or from 30 mm to 80 mm, or from 40 mm to 70 mm, or from 50 mm to 60 mm. The cross-section configuration of the flow channel 702 may be round, elliptical, oval, square, rectangular, trapezoidal, or irregular. If square, rectangular, or another shape with generally straight sides, the cross section may be from about 10 μm to 1000 μm wide, or from 200 μm to 800 μm wide, or from 300 μm to 700 μm wide, or from 400 μm to 600 μm wide; and from about 10 μm to 1000 m high, or from 200 μm to 800 μm high, or from 300 μm to 700 μm high, or from 400 m to 600 μm high. If the cross section of theflow channel 602 is generally round, oval or elliptical, the radius of the channel may be from about 50 μm to 1000 μm in hydraulic radius, or from 5 μm to 800 μm in hydraulic radius, or from 200 μm to 700 μm in hydraulic radius, or from 300 μm to 600 μm wide in hydraulic radius, or from about 200 to 500 μm in hydraulic radius. - When looking at the top view of the TFF device/module of
FIG. 7B , note that there are tworetentate portals 704 and twofiltrate portals 706, where there is one of each type portal at both ends (e.g., the narrow edge) of thedevice 700. In other embodiments, retentate and filtrate portals can on the same surface of the same member (e.g., upper or lower member), or they can be arranged on the side surfaces of the assembly. Unlike other TFF devices that operate continuously, the TFF device/module described herein uses an alternating method for concentrating cells. The overall work flow for cell concentration using the TFF device/module involves flowing a cell culture or cell sample tangentially through the channel structure. The membrane bifurcating the flow channels retains the cells on one side of the membrane and allows unwanted medium or buffer to flow across the membrane into a filtrate side (e.g., lower member 720) of the device. In this process, a fixed volume of cells in medium or buffer is driven through the device until the cell sample is collected into one of theretentate portals 704, and the medium/buffer that has passed through the membrane is collected through one or both of thefiltrate portals 706. All types of prokaryotic and eukaryotic cells—both adherent and non-adherent cells—can be grown in the TFF device. Adherent cells may be grown on beads or other cell scaffolds suspended in medium that flow through the TFF device. - In the cell concentration process, passing the cell sample through the TFF device and collecting the cells in one of the
retentate portals 704 while collecting the medium in one of thefiltrate portals 706 is considered “one pass” of the cell sample. The transfer between retentate reservoirs “flips” the culture, The retentate and filtrate portals collecting the cells and medium, respectively, for a given pass reside on the same end of TFF device/module 700 with fluidic connections arranged so that there are two distinct flow layers for the retentate and filtrate sides, but if theretentate portal 704 resides on the upper member of device/module 700 (that is, the cells are driven through the channel above the membrane and the filtrate (medium) passes to the portion of the channel below the membrane), thefiltrate portal 706 will reside on the lower member of device/module 100 and vice versa (that is, if the cell sample is driven through the channel below the membrane, the filtrate (medium) passes to the portion of the channel above the membrane). This configuration can be seen more clearly inFIGS. 7C-7D , where the retentate flows 760 from theretentate portals 704 and the filtrate flows 770 from thefiltrate portals 706. - At the conclusion of a “pass” in the growth concentration process, the cell sample is collected by passing through the
retentate portal 704 and into the retentate reservoir (not shown). To initiate another “pass”, the cell sample is passed again through the TFF device, this time in a flow direction that is reversed from the first pass. The cell sample is collected by passing through theretentate portal 704 and into retentate reservoir (not shown) on the opposite end of the device/module from theretentate portal 704 that was used to collect cells during the first pass. Likewise, the medium/buffer that passes through the membrane on the second pass is collected through thefiltrate portal 706 on the opposite end of the device/module from thefiltrate portal 706 that was used to collect the filtrate during the first pass, or through both portals. This alternating process of passing the retentate (the concentrated cell sample) through the device/module is repeated until the cells have been concentrated to a desired volume, and both filtrate portals can be open during the passes to reduce operating time. In addition, buffer exchange may be effected by adding a desired buffer (or fresh medium) to the cell sample in the retentate reservoir, before initiating another “pass”, and repeating this process until the old medium or buffer is diluted and filtered out and the cells reside in fresh medium or buffer. Note that buffer exchange and cell concentration may (and typically do) take place simultaneously. -
FIG. 7C depicts a top view of upper (722) and lower (720) members of an exemplary TFF module. Again,portals recesses 708 seen inFIG. 7B provide a means to secure the components (upper member 722,lower member 720, and membrane 724) of the TFF device/membrane to one another during operation via, e.g., screws or other like fasteners. However, in alterative embodiments an adhesive, such as a pressure sensitive adhesive, or ultrasonic welding, or solvent bonding, may be used to couple theupper member 722,lower member 720, andmembrane 724 together. Indeed, one of ordinary skill in the art given the guidance of the present disclosure can find yet other configurations for coupling the components of the TFF device, such as e.g., clamps; mated fittings disposed on the upper and lower members; combination of adhesives, welding, solvent bonding, and mated fittings; and other such fasteners and couplings. - Note that there is one retentate portal and one filtrate portal on each “end” (e.g., the narrow edges) of the TFF device/module. The retentate and filtrate portals on the left side of the device/module will collect cells (flow path at 760) and medium (flow path at 770), respectively, for the same pass. Likewise, the retentate and filtrate portals on the right side of the device/module will collect cells (flow path at 760) and medium (flow path at 770), respectively, for the same pass. In this embodiment, the retentate is collected from
portals 704 on the top surface of the TFF device, and filtrate is collected fromportals 706 on the bottom surface of the device. The cells are maintained in the TFF flow channel above themembrane 724, while the filtrate (medium) flows throughmembrane 724 and then throughportals 706; thus, the top/retentate portals and bottom/filtrate portals configuration is practical. It should be recognized, however, that other configurations of retentate and filtrate portals may be implemented such as positioning both the retentate and filtrate portals on the side (as opposed to the top and bottom surfaces) of the TFF device. InFIG. 7C , thechannel structure 702 b can be seen on thebottom member 720 of theTFF device 700. However, in other embodiments, retentate and filtrate portals can reside on the same of the TFF device. - Also seen in
FIG. 7C is membrane orfilter 724. Filters or membranes appropriate for use in the TFF device/module are those that are solvent resistant, are contamination free during filtration, and are able to retain the types and sizes of cells of interest. For example, in order to retain small cell types such as bacterial cells, pore sizes can be as low as 0.2 μm, however for other cell types, the pore sizes can be as high as 5 m. Indeed, the pore sizes useful in the TFF device/module include filters with sizes from 0.20 μm, 0.21 μm, 0.22 μm, 0.23 μm, 0.24 μm, 0.25 μm, 0.26 μm, 0.27 μm, 0.28 m, 0.29 μm, 0.30 μm, 0.31 μm, 0.32 μm, 0.33 μm, 0.34 μm, 0.35 μm, 0.36 μm, 0.37 μm, 0.38 μm, 0.39 μm, 0.40 μm, 0.41 μm, 0.42 μm, 0.43 μm, 0.44 μm, 0.45 μm, 0.46 μm, 0.47 μm, 0.48 μm, 0.49 μm, 0.50 μm and larger. The filters may be fabricated from any suitable non-reactive material including cellulose mixed ester (cellulose nitrate and acetate) (CME), polycarbonate (PC), polyvinylidene fluoride (PVDF), polyethersulfone (PES), polytetrafluoroethylene (PTFE), nylon, glass fiber, or metal substrates as in the case of laser or electrochemical etching. The TFF device shown inFIGS. 7C and 7D do not show a seat in the upper 712 and lower 720 members where thefilter 724 can be seated or secured (for example, a seat half the thickness of the filter in each of upper 712 and lower 720 members); however, such a seat is contemplated in some embodiments. -
FIG. 7D depicts a bottom view of upper and lower components of the exemplary TFF module shown inFIG. 7C .FIG. 7D depicts a bottom view of upper (722) and lower (720) components of an exemplary TFF module. Againportals FIG. 7D , thechannel structure 702 a can be seen on theupper member 722 of theTFF device 700. Thus, looking atFIGS. 7C and 7D , note that there is a channel structure 702 (702 a and 702 b) in both the upper and lower members, with amembrane 724 between the upper and lower portions of the channel structure. The channel structure 702 of the upper 722 and lower 720 members (702 a and 702 b, respectively) mate to create the flow channel with the membrane 624 positioned horizontally between the upper and lower members of the flow channel thereby bifurcating the flow channel. - Medium exchange (during cell growth) or buffer exchange (during cell concentration or rendering the cells competent) is performed on the TFF device/module by adding fresh medium to growing cells or a desired buffer to the cells concentrated to a desired volume; for example, after the cells have been concentrated at least 20-fold, 30-fold, 40-fold, 50-fold, 60-fold, 70-fold, 80-fold, 90-fold, 100-fold, 150-fold, 200-fold or more. A desired exchange medium or exchange buffer is added to the cells either by addition to the retentate reservoir or thorough the membrane from the filtrate side and the process of passing the cells through the
TFF device 700 is repeated until the cells have been grown to a desired optical density or concentrated to a desired volume in the exchange medium or buffer. This process can be repeated any number of desired times so as to achieve a desired level of exchange of the buffer and a desired volume of cells. The exchange buffer may comprise, e.g., glycerol or sorbitol thereby rendering the cells competent for transformation in addition to decreasing the overall volume of the cell sample. - The
TFF device 700 may be fabricated from any robust material in which channels (and channel branches) may be milled including stainless steel, silicon, glass, aluminum, or plastics including cyclic-olefin copolymer (COC), cyclo-olefin polymer (COP), polystyrene, polyvinyl chloride, polyethylene, polyamide, polyethylene, polypropylene, acrylonitrile butadiene, polycarbonate, polyetheretheketone (PEEK), poly(methyl methylacrylate) (PMMA), polysulfone, and polyurethane, and co-polymers of these and other polymers. If the TFF device/module is disposable, preferably it is made of plastic. In some embodiments, the material used to fabricate the TFF device/module is thermally-conductive so that the cell culture may be heated or cooled to a desired temperature. In certain embodiments, the TFF device is formed by precision mechanical machining, laser machining, electro discharge machining (for metal devices); wet or dry etching (for silicon devices); dry or wet etching, powder or sandblasting, photostructuring (for glass devices); or thermoforming, injection molding, hot embossing, or laser machining (for plastic devices) using the materials mentioned above that are amenable to this mass production techniques. -
FIGS. 7E-7K depict an alternative embodiment of a tangential flow filtration (TFF) device/module, where the module has the advantage of a reduced footprint, in, e.g., an automated multi-module cell processing instrument.FIG. 7E depicts a configuration of an upper (retentate) member 7022 (on left), a membrane or filter 7024 (middle), and a lower (permeate/filtrate) member 7020 (on the right). In the configuration shown inFIGS. 7E-7K , theretentate member 7022 is no longer “upper” and the permeate/filtrate member 7020 is no longer “lower”, as theretentate member 7022 and permeate/filtrate member 7020 are coupled side-to-side as seen inFIGS. 7J and 7K . InFIG. 7E ,retentate member 7022 comprises atangential flow channel 7002, which has a serpentine configuration that initiates at one lower corner ofretentate member 7022—specifically atretentate port 7028—traverses across and up then down and acrossretentate member 7022, ending in the other lower corner ofretentate member 7022 at asecond retentate port 7028. Also seen onretentate member 7022 isenergy director 7091, which circumscribes the region where membrane orfilter 7024 is seated.Energy director 7091 in this embodiment mates with and serves to facilitate ultrasonic wending or bonding ofretentate member 7022 with permeate/filtrate member 7020 via the energy director component on permeate/filtrate member 7020. Also seen is membrane orfilter 7024 has through-holes forretentate ports 7028, which is configured to seat within the circumference ofenergy directors 7091 between theretentate member 7022 and the permeate/filtrate member 7020. Permeate/filtrate member 7020 comprises, in addition toenergy director 7091, through-holes forretentate port 7028 at each bottom corner (which mate with the through-holes forretentate ports 7028 at the bottom corners ofmembrane 7024 andretentate ports 7028 in retentate member 7022), as well as atangential flow channel 7002 and a single permeate/filtrate port 7026 positioned at the top and center of permeate/filtrate member 7020. Thetangential flow channel 7002 structure in this embodiment has a serpentine configuration and an undulating geometry, although other geometries may be used. In some aspects, the length of the tangential flow channel is from 10 mm to 1000 mm, from 60 mm to 200 mm, or from 80 mm to 100 mm. In some aspects, the width of the channel structure is from 10 mm to 120 mm, from 40 mm to 70 mm, or from 50 mm to 60 mm. In some aspects, the cross section of the tangential flow channel 1202 is rectangular. In some aspects, the cross section of the tangential flow channel 1202 is 5 μm to 1000 μm wide and 5 μm to 1000 μm high, 300 μm to 700 m wide and 300 μm to 700 μm high, or 400 μm to 600 μm wide and 400 μm to 600 m high. In other aspects, the cross section of the tangential flow channel 1202 is circular, elliptical, trapezoidal, or oblong, and is 100 μm to 1000 μm in hydraulic radius, 300 m to 700 μm in hydraulic radius, or 400 μm to 600 μm in hydraulic radius. -
FIG. 7F is a side perspective view of areservoir assembly 7050. The embodiment ofFIG. 7F , the retentate member is separate from the reservoir assembly.Reservoir assembly 7050 comprisesretentate reservoirs 7052 on either side of asingle permeate reservoir 7054.Retentate reservoirs 7052 are used to contain the cells and medium as the cells are transferred through the cell concentration/growth device or module and into the retentate reservoirs during cell concentration and/or growth. Permeate/filtrate reservoir 7054 is used to collect the filtrate fluids removed from the cell culture during cell concentration, or old buffer or medium during cell growth. In the embodiment depicted inFIGS. 7E-7L , buffer or medium is supplied to the permeate/filtrate member from a reagent reservoir separate from the device module. Additionally seen inFIG. 7F aregrooves 7032 to accommodate pneumatic ports (not seen), permeate/filtrate port 7026, and retentate port through-holes 7028. The retentate reservoirs are fluidically coupled to theretentate ports 7028, which in turn are fluidically coupled to the portion of the tangential flow channel disposed in the retentate member (not shown). The permeate/filtrate reservoir is fluidically coupled to the permeate/filtrate port 7026 which in turn are fluidically coupled to the portion of the tangential flow channel disposed in permeate/filtrate member (not shown), where the portions of the tangential flow channels are bifurcated by membrane (not shown). In embodiments including the present embodiment, up to 120 mL of cell culture can be grown and/or filtered, or up to 100 mL, 90 mL, 80 mL, 70 mL, 60 mL, 50 mL, 40 mL, 30 mL or 20 mL of cell culture can be grown and/or concentrated. -
FIG. 7G depicts a top-down view of thereservoir assembly 7050 shown inFIG. 7F ,FIG. 7H depicts acover 7044 forreservoir assembly 7050 shown inFIGS. 7F , and 7I depicts agasket 7045 that in operation is disposed oncover 7044 ofreservoir assembly 7050 shown inFIG. 7F .FIG. 7G is a top-down view ofreservoir assembly 7050, showing tworetentate reservoirs 7052, one on either side ofpermeate reservoir 7054. Also seen aregrooves 7032 that will mate with a pneumatic port (not shown), andfluid channels 7034 that reside at the bottom ofretentate reservoirs 7052, which fluidically couple theretentate reservoirs 7052 with the retentate ports 7028 (not shown), via the through-holes for the retentate ports in permeate/filtrate member 7220 and membrane 7024 (also not shown).FIG. 7H depicts acover 7044 that is configured to be disposed upon the top ofreservoir assembly 7050.Cover 7044 has round cut-outs at the top ofretentate reservoirs 7052 and permeate/filtrate reservoir 7054. Again, at the bottom ofretentate reservoirs 7052fluid channels 7034 can be seen, wherefluid channels 7034 fluidicallycouple retentate reservoirs 7052 with the retentate ports 7028 (not shown). Also shown are threepneumatic ports 7030 for eachretentate reservoir 7052 and permeate/filtrate reservoir 7054.FIG. 7I depicts agasket 7045 that is configures to be disposed upon thecover 7044 ofreservoir assembly 7050. Seen are threefluid transfer ports 7042 for eachretentate reservoir 7052 and for permeate/filtrate reservoir 7054. Again, threepneumatic ports 7030, for eachretentate reservoir 7052 and for permeate/filtrate reservoir 7054, are shown. -
FIG. 7J depicts an exploded view of aTFF module 7000. Seen arecomponents reservoir assembly 7050, acover 7044 to be disposed onreservoir assembly 7050, agasket 7045 to be disposed oncover 7044,retentate member 7022, membrane orfilter 7024, and permeate/filtrate member 7020. Also seen is permeate/filtrate port 7026, which mates with permeate/filtrate port 7026 on permeate/filtrate reservoir 7054, as well as tworetentate ports 7028, which mate withretentate ports 7028 on retentate reservoirs 7052 (where only oneretentate reservoir 7052 can be seen clearly in thisFIG. 7J ). Also seen are through-holes forretentate ports 7028 inmembrane 7024 and permeate/filtrate member 7020. -
FIG. 7K depicts an embodiment of assembledTFF module 7000. Note that in this embodiment of a TFF module theretentate member 7022 is no longer “upper”, and the permeate/filtrate member 7020 is no longer “lower”, as theretentate member 7022 and permeate/filtrate member 7020 are coupled side-to-side withmembrane 7024 sandwiched betweenretentate member 7022 and permeate/filtrate member 7020. Also,retentate member 7022,membrane member 7024, and permeate/filtrate member 7020 are coupled side-to-side withreservoir assembly 7050. Seen are two retentate ports 7028 (which couple thetangential flow channel 7002 inretentate member 7022 to the two retentate reservoirs (not shown), and one permeate/filtrate port 7026, which couples thetangential flow channel 7002 in permeate/filtrate member 7020 to the permeate/filtrate reservoir (not shown). Also seen istangential flow channel 7002, which is formed by the mating ofretentate member 7022 and permeate/filtrate member 7020, withmembrane 7024 sandwiched between and bifurcatingtangential flow channel 7002. Also seen isenergy director 7091, which in thisFIG. 7K has been used to ultrasonically weld orcouple retentate member 7022 and permeate/filtrate member 7020, surroundingmembrane 7024.Cover 7044 can be seen on top ofreservoir assembly 7050, andgasket 7045 is disposed uponcover 7044.Gasket 7045 engages with and provides a fluid-tight seal and pneumatic connections withfluid transfer ports 7042 andpneumatic ports 7030, respectively.FIG. 7J also shows the length, height, and width dimensions of theTFF module 7000. The assembledTFF device 7000 typically is from 50 to 175 mm in height, or from 75 to 150 mm in height, or from 90 to 120 mm in height; from 50 to 175 mm in length, or from 75 to 150 mm in length, or from 90 to 120 mm in length; and is from 30 to 90 mm in depth, or from 40 to 75 mm in depth, or from about 50 to 60 mm in depth. An exemplary TFF device is 110 mm in height, 120 mm in length, and 55 mm in depth. - Like in other embodiments described herein, the TFF device or module depicted in
FIGS. 7E-7K can constantly measure cell culture growth, and in some aspects cell culture growth is measured via optical density (OD) of the cell culture in one or both of the retentate reservoirs and/or in the flow channel of the TFF device. Optical density may be measured continuously (kinetic monitoring) or at specific time intervals; e.g., every 5, 10, 15, 20, 30 45, or 60 seconds, or every 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, or 10 or so on minutes. Further, the TFF module can adjust growth parameters (temperature, aeration) to have the cells at a desired optical density at a desired time. -
FIG. 7L is an exemplary pneumatic block diagram suitable for the TFF module depicted inFIGS. 7E-7K . The pump is connected to two solenoid valves (SV5 and SV6) delivering positive pressure (P) or negative pressure (V). The two solenoid valves SV5 and SV6 couple the pump to the manifold, and two solenoid valves, SV1 and SV2, are connected to the reservoirs (RR1 and RR2). There are also two solenoid valves in reserve (SV3 and SV4). There is a proportional valve (PV2 and PV2), a flow meter (FM1 and FM2), and a pressure sensor (Pressure Sensors 1 and 2) positioned in between each of solenoid valves SV1 and SV2 connecting the pump to the system and the solenoid valves SV1 And SV2 to the reservoirs. The pressure sensors and prop valves work in concert in a feedback loop to maintain the required pressure. - As an alternative to the TFF module described above, a cell concentration module comprising a hollow filter may be employed. Examples of filters suitable for use in the present invention include membrane filters, ceramic filters and metal filters. The filter may be used in any shape; the filter may for example be cylindrical or essentially flat. Preferably, the filter used is a membrane filter, preferably a hollow fiber filter. The term “hollow fiber” is meant a tubular membrane. The internal diameter of the tube is at least 0.1 mm, more preferably at least 0.5 mm, most preferably at least 0.75 mm and preferably the internal diameter of the tube is at most 10 mm, more preferably at most 6 mm, most preferably at most 1 mm. Filter modules comprising hollow fibers are commercially available from various companies, including G.E. Life Sciences (Marlborough, Mass.) and InnovaPrep (Drexel, Mo.). Specific examples of hollow fiber filter systems that can be used, modified or adapted for use in the present methods and systems include, but are not limited to, U.S. Pat. Nos. 9,738,918; 9,593,359; 9,574,977; 9,534,989; 9,446,354; 9,295,824; 8,956,880; 8,758,623; 8,726,744; 8,677,839; 8,677,840; 8,584,536; 8,584,535; and 8,110,112.
- Certain embodiments of the automated multi-module cell editing instruments of the present disclosure optionally include a nucleic acid assembly module. The nucleic acid assembly module is configured to accept and assemble the nucleic acids necessary to facilitate the desired genome editing events. In general, the term “vector” refers to a nucleic acid molecule capable of transporting a desired nucleic acid to which it has been linked into a cell. Vectors include, but are not limited to, nucleic acid molecules that are single-stranded, double-stranded, or partially double-stranded; nucleic acid molecules that include one or more free ends, no free ends (e.g., circular); nucleic acid molecules that include DNA, RNA, or both; and other varieties of polynucleotides known in the art. One type of vector is a “plasmid,” which refers to a circular double stranded DNA loop into which additional DNA segments can be inserted, such as by standard molecular cloning techniques. Another type of vector is a viral vector, where virally-derived DNA or RNA sequences are present in the vector for packaging into a virus (e.g. retroviruses, replication defective retroviruses, adenoviruses, replication defective adenoviruses, and adeno-associated viruses). Viral vectors also include polynucleotides carried by a virus for transfection into a host cell. Certain vectors are capable of autonomous replication in a host cell into which they are introduced (e.g. bacterial vectors having a bacterial origin of replication and episomal mammalian vectors). Other vectors (e.g., non-episomal mammalian vectors) are integrated into the genome of a host cell upon introduction into the host cell, and thereby are replicated along with the host genome. Moreover, certain vectors are capable of directing the expression of genes to which they are operatively-linked. Such vectors are referred to herein as “expression vectors” or “editing vectors.” Common expression vectors of utility in recombinant DNA techniques are often in the form of plasmids. Additional vectors include fosmids, phagemids, and synthetic chromosomes.
- Recombinant expression vectors can include a nucleic acid in a form suitable for transcription, and for some nucleic acid sequences, translation and expression of the nucleic acid in a host cell, which means that the recombinant expression vectors include one or more regulatory elements—which may be selected on the basis of the host cells to be used for expression—that are operatively-linked to the nucleic acid sequence to be expressed. Within a recombinant expression vector, “operably linked” is intended to mean that the nucleotide sequence of interest is linked to the regulatory element(s) in a manner that allows for transcription, and for some nucleic acid sequences, translation and expression of the nucleotide sequence (e.g., in an in vitro transcription/translation system or in a host cell when the vector is introduced into the host cell). Appropriate recombination and cloning methods are disclosed in US Pub. No. 2004/0171156, the contents of which are herein incorporated by reference in their entirety for all purposes.
- In some embodiments, a regulatory element is operably linked to one or more elements of a targetable nuclease system so as to drive transcription, and for some nucleic acid sequences, translation and expression of the one or more components of the targetable nuclease system.
- In addition, the polynucleotide sequence encoding the nucleic acid-guided nuclease can be codon optimized for expression in particular cells, such as prokaryotic or eukaryotic cells. Eukaryotic cells can be yeast, fungi, algae, plant, animal, or human cells. Eukaryotic cells may be those of or derived from a particular organism, such as a mammal, including but not limited to human, mouse, rat, rabbit, dog, or non-human mammal including non-human primate. In addition or alternatively, a vector may include a regulatory element operably liked to a polynucleotide sequence, which, when transcribed, forms a guide RNA.
- The nucleic acid assembly module can be configured to perform a wide variety of different nucleic acid assembly techniques in an automated fashion. Nucleic acid assembly techniques that can be performed in the nucleic acid assembly module of the disclosed automated multi-module cell editing instruments include, but are not limited to, those assembly methods that use restriction endonucleases, including PCR, BioBrick assembly (U.S. Pat. No. 9,361,427), Type IIS cloning (e.g., GoldenGate assembly, European Patent
Application Publication EP 2 395 087 A1), and Ligase Cycling Reaction (de Kok, ACS Synth Biol., 3(2):97-106 (2014); Engler, et al., PLoS One, 3(11):e3647 (2008); and U.S. Pat. No. 6,143,527). In other embodiments, the nucleic acid assembly techniques performed by the disclosed automated multi-module cell editing instruments are based on overlaps between adjacent parts of the nucleic acids, such as isothermal nucleic acid assembly, CPEC, SLIC, Ligase Cycling etc. Additional assembly methods include gap repair in yeast (Bessa, Yeast, 29(10):419-23 (2012)), gateway cloning (Ohtsuka, Curr Pharm Biotechnol, 10(2):244-51 (2009)); U.S. Pat. Nos. 5,888,732; and 6,277,608), and topoisomerase-mediated cloning (Udo, PLoS One, 10(9):e0139349 (2015); and U.S. Pat. No. 6,916,632). These and other nucleic acid assembly techniques are described, e.g., in Sands and Brent, Curr Protoc Mol Biol., 113:3.26.1-3.26.20 (2016). - The nucleic acid assembly module is temperature controlled depending upon the type of nucleic acid assembly used in the automated multi-module cell editing instrument. For example, when PCR is utilized in the nucleic acid assembly module, the module includes a thermocycling capability allowing the temperatures to cycle between denaturation, annealing and extension steps. When single temperature assembly methods (e.g., isothermal assembly methods) are utilized in the nucleic acid assembly module, the module provides the ability to reach and hold at the temperature that optimizes the specific assembly process being performed. These temperatures and the duration for maintaining these temperatures can be determined by a preprogrammed set of parameters executed by a script, or manually controlled by the user using the processing system of the automated multi-module cell editing instrument.
- In one embodiment, the nucleic acid assembly module is a module to perform assembly using a single, isothermal reaction. Certain isothermal assembly methods can combine simultaneously up to 15 nucleic acid fragments based on sequence identity. The assembly method provides, in some embodiments, nucleic acids to be assembled which include an approximate 20-40 base overlap with adjacent nucleic acid fragments. The fragments are mixed with a cocktail of three enzymes—an exonuclease, a polymerase, and a ligase—along with buffer components. Because the process is isothermal and can be performed in a 1-step or 2-step method using a single reaction vessel, isothermal assembly reactions are ideal for use in an automated multi-module cell editing instrument. The 1-step method allows for the assembly of up to five different fragments using a single step isothermal process. The fragments and the master mix of enzymes are combined and incubated at 50° C. for up to one hour. For the creation of more complex constructs with up to fifteen fragments or for incorporating fragments from 100 bp up to 10 kb, typically the 2-step is used, where the 2-step reaction requires two separate additions of master mix; one for the exonuclease and annealing step and a second for the polymerase and ligation steps.
-
FIGS. 8A-8E depict variations on one embodiment of a cell transformation module (in this case, a flow-through electroporation device) that may be included in a cell growth/concentration/transformation instrument.FIGS. 8A and 8B are top perspective and bottom perspective views, respectively, of six co-joined flow-throughelectroporation devices 850.FIG. 8A depicts six flow-throughelectroporation units 850 arranged on asingle substrate 856. Each of the six flow-throughelectroporation units 850 haveinlet wells 852 that define cell sample inlets andoutlet wells 854 that define cell sample outlets.FIG. 8B is a bottom perspective view of the six co-joined flow-through electroporation devices ofFIG. 8A also depicting six flow-throughelectroporation units 850 arranged on asingle substrate 856. Sixinlet wells 852 can be seen, one for each flow-throughelectroporation unit 850, and one outlet well 854 can be seen (the outlet well of the left-most flow-through electroporation unit 850). Additionally seen inFIG. 8B are aninlet 802,outlet 804,flow channel 806 and twoelectrodes 808 on either side of a constriction inflow channel 806 in each flow-throughelectroporation unit 850. Once the six flow-throughelectroporation units 850 are fabricated, they can be separated from one another (e.g., “snapped apart”) and used one at a time, or alternatively in embodiments where two or more flow-throughelectroporation units 850 can be used in parallel without separation. - The flow-through
electroporation devices 850 achieve high efficiency cell electroporation with low toxicity. The flow-throughelectroporation devices 850 of the disclosure allow for particularly easy integration with robotic liquid handling instrumentation that is typically used in automated systems such as air displacement pipettors. Such automated instrumentation includes, but is not limited to, off-the-shelf automated liquid handling systems from Tecan (Mannedorf, Switzerland), Hamilton (Reno, Nev.), Beckman Coulter (Fort Collins, Colo.), etc. - Generally speaking, microfluidic electroporation—using cell suspension volumes of less than approximately 10 mL and as low as 1 μl—allows more precise control over a transfection or transformation process and permits flexible integration with other cell processing tools compared to bench-scale electroporation devices. Microfluidic electroporation thus provides unique advantages for, e.g., single cell transformation, processing and analysis; multi-unit electroporation device configurations; and integrated, automatic, multi-module cell processing and analysis.
- In specific embodiments of the flow-through
electroporation devices 850 of the disclosure, the toxicity level of the transformation results in greater than 10% viable cells after electroporation, preferably greater than 15%, 20%, 25%, 30%, 35%, 40%, 45%, 50%, 55%, 60%, 70%, 75%, 80%, 85%, 90%, or even 95% viable cells following transformation, depending on the cell type and the nucleic acids being introduced into the cells. - The flow-through
electroporation device 850 described in relation toFIGS. 8A-8E comprises a housing with an electroporation chamber, a first electrode and a second electrode configured to engage with an electric pulse generator, by which electrical contacts engage with the electrodes of theelectroporation device 850. In certain embodiments, the electroporation devices are autoclavable and/or disposable, and may be packaged with reagents in a reagent cartridge. Theelectroporation device 850 may be configured to electroporate cell sample volumes between 1 μl to 2 mL, 10 μl to 1 mL, 25 μl to 750 μl, or 50 μl to 500 μl. The cells that may be electroporated with the disclosedelectroporation devices 850 include mammalian cells (including human cells), plant cells, yeasts, other eukaryotic cells, bacteria, archaea, and other cell types. - In one exemplary embodiment,
FIG. 8C depicts a top view of a flow-throughelectroporation device 850 having aninlet 802 for introduction of cells and an exogenous reagent to be electroporated into the cells (“cell sample”) and anoutlet 804 for the cell sample following electroporation.Electrodes 808 are introduced through electrode channels (not shown in thisFIG. 8C ) in the device.FIG. 8D shows a cutaway view from the top of flow-throughelectroporation device 850, with theinlet 802,outlet 804, andelectrodes 808 positioned with respect to a constriction inflow channel 806. A side cutaway view of a lower portion of flow-throughelectroporation device 850 inFIG. 8E illustrates thatelectrodes 808 in this embodiment are positioned inelectrode channels 810 and perpendicular to flowchannel 806 such that the cell sample flows from theinlet channel 812 through theflow channel 806 to theoutlet channel 814, and in the process the cell sample flows into theelectrode channels 810 to be in contact withelectrodes 808. In this aspect, theinlet channel 812,outlet channel 814 andelectrode channels 810 all originate from the top planar side of the device; however, the flow-through electroporation architecture depicted inFIGS. 8C-8E is but one architecture useful with the reagent cartridges described herein. Additional electrode architectures are described, e.g., in U.S. Ser. No. 16/147,120, filed 24 Sep. 2018; Ser. No. 16/147,865, filed 30 Sep. 2018; and Ser. No. 16/147,871, filed 30 Sep. 2018. -
FIG. 9 is a simplified block diagram of an embodiment of an exemplary automated multi-module cell processing instrument comprising an isolation or substantial isolation/incubation/editing and normalization or cherry-picking module for enrichment or selection of edited cells. Thecell processing instrument 900 may include ahousing 944, a reservoir of cells to be transformed or transfected 902, and a growth module (a cell growth device) 904. The cells to be transformed are transferred from a reservoir to the growth module to be cultured until the cells hit a target OD. Once the cells hit the target OD, the growth module may cool or freeze the cells for later processing, or the cells may be transferred to acell concentration module 930 where the cells are rendered electrocompetent and concentrated to a volume optimal for cell transformation. Exemplary cell concentration devices of use in the automated multi-module cell processing system include those described in U.S. Ser. No. 62/728,365, filed 7 Sep. 2018; 62/857,599, filed 5 Jun. 2019; and 62/867,415, filed 27 Jun. 2019, all of which are incorporated by reference in their entirety. Once concentrated, the cells are then transferred to the electroporation device 908 (e.g., transformation/transfection module, with one exemplary module described above in relation toFIGS. 8A-8E ). Exemplary electroporation devices of use in the automated multi-module cell processing instruments include flow-through electroporation devices such as those described in U.S. Ser. No. 16/147,120, filed 28 Sep. 2018; Ser. No. 16/147,353, filed 28 Sep. 2018; Ser. No. 16/147,865, filed 30 Sep. 2018; and Ser. No. 16/147,871, filed 30 Sep. 2018 all of which are herein incorporated by reference in their entirety. - In addition to the reservoir for storing the
cells 930, the automated multi-modulecell processing instrument 900 may include a reservoir for storingediting oligonucleotide cassettes 916 and a reservoir for storing anexpression vector backbone 918. Both the editing oligonucleotide cassettes and the expression vector backbone are transferred from a reagent cartridge to a nucleicacid assembly module 920, where the editing oligonucleotide cassettes are inserted into the expression vector backbone. The assembled nucleic acids may be transferred into anoptional purification module 922 for desalting and/or other purification and/or concentration procedures needed to prepare the assembled nucleic acids for transformation. Alternatively, pre-assembled nucleic acids, e.g., an editing vector, may be stored withinreservoir purification module 922 are complete, the assembled nucleic acids are transferred to, e.g., anelectroporation device 908, which already contains the cell culture grown to a target OD and rendered electrocompetent viacell concentration module 930. Inelectroporation device 908, the assembled nucleic acids are introduced into the cells. Following electroporation, the cells are transferred into a combined recovery/selection module 910. For examples of multi-module cell editing instruments, see U.S. Pat. No. 10,253,316, filed 30 Jun. 2018; U.S. Pat. No. 10,329,559, filed 7 Feb. 2019; and U.S. Pat. No. 10,323,242, filed 7 Feb. 2019; and U.S. Ser. No. 16/412,175, filed 14 May 2019; Ser. No. 16/412,195, filed 14 May 2019; and Ser. No. 16/423,289, filed 28 May 2019, all of which are herein incorporated by reference in their entirety. - Following recovery, and, optionally, selection, the cells are transferred to an isolation or substantial isolation, editing, and
growth module 940, where the cells are diluted and compartmentalized such that there is an average of one cell per compartment. Once substantially or largely isolated, the cells are allowed to grow for a pre-determined number of doublings. Once these initial colonies are established, editing proceeds and the edited cells are grown to establish colonies, which are grown to terminal size (e.g., the colonies are normalized). In some embodiments, editing is induced by one or more of the editing components, preferably the gRNA, being under the control of an inducible promoter. In some embodiments, the inducible promoter is activated by a rise in temperature and “deactivated” by lowering the temperature. Similarly, in embodiments where the solid wall device comprises a filter forming the bottom of the microwell, the solid wall device can be transferred to a plate (e.g., an agar plate or even to liquid medium) comprising a medium with a component that activates or induces editing, then transferred to a medium that deactivates editing. In solid wall devices such as those described herein, induction of editing and deactivation of editing can take place by media exchange. Once the colonies are grown to terminal size, the colonies are pooled. Again, isolation or substantial isolation overcomes growth bias from unedited cells and growth bias resulting from fitness effects of different edits. - The recovery, selection, and isolation/incubation/editing and normalization modules may all be separate, may be arranged and combined as shown in
FIG. 9 , or may be arranged or combined in other configurations. In certain embodiments, all of recovery, selection, isolation or substantial isolation, growth (e.g., incubation), editing, and normalization are performed in a solid wall device described in relation toFIGS. 3A-3E and 4A-4Y . Alternatively, recovery, selection, and dilution, if necessary, are performed in liquid medium in a separate vessel such as in a rotating growth vial (module), then transferred to the isolation/incubation/editing and normalization module. - Once the normalized cell colonies are pooled, and the cells may be stored, e.g., in a storage unit or
module 912, where the cells can be kept at, e.g., 4° C. until the cells are retrieved forfurther study 914. Alternatively, the cells may be used in another round of editing. The multi-modulecell processing instrument 900 is controlled by aprocessor 942 configured to operate the instrument based on user input, as directed by one or more scripts, or as a combination of user input or a script. Theprocessor 942 may control the timing, duration, temperature, and operations of the various modules of theinstrument 900 and the dispensing of reagents. For example, theprocessor 942 may cool the cells post-transformation until editing is desired, upon which time the temperature may be raised to a temperature conducive of genome editing and cell growth. The processor may be programmed with standard protocol parameters from which a user may select, a user may specify one or more parameters manually or one or more scripts associated with the reagent cartridge may specify one or more operations and/or reaction parameters. In addition, the processor may notify the user (e.g., via an application to a smart phone or other device) that the cells have reached the target OD as well as update the user as to the progress of the cells in the various modules in the multi-module system. - The automated multi-module
cell processing instrument 900 is a nuclease-directed genome editing system and can be used in single editing systems (e.g., introducing one or more edits to a cellular genome in a single editing process). The system ofFIG. 10 , described below, is configured to perform sequential editing, e.g., using different nuclease-directed systems sequentially to provide two or more genome edits in a cell; and/or recursive editing, e.g. utilizing a single nuclease-directed system to introduce sequentially two or more genome edits in a cell. -
FIG. 10 illustrates another embodiment of an automated multi-module cell processing instrument configured to perform isolation or substantial isolation of cells, growth, incubation, editing and normalization of cell colonies. This embodiment depicts an exemplary system that performs recursive gene editing on a cell population. As with the embodiment shown inFIG. 9 , thecell processing instrument 1000 may include ahousing 1044, a reservoir for storing cells to be transformed or transfected 1002, and a cell growth module (comprising, e.g., a rotating growth vial) 1004. The cells to be transformed are transferred from a reservoir to the cell growth module to be cultured until the cells hit a target OD. Once the cells hit the target OD, the growth module may cool or freeze the cells for later processing or transfer the cells to acell concentration module 1060 where the cells are subjected to buffer exchange and rendered electrocompetent, and the volume of the cells may be reduced substantially. Once the cells have been concentrated to an appropriate volume, the cells are transferred toelectroporation device 1008. In addition to the reservoir for storing cells, the multi-modulecell processing instrument 1000 includes a reservoir for storing the vector pre-assembled withediting oligonucleotide cassettes 1052. The pre-assembled nucleic acid vectors are transferred to theelectroporation device 1008, which already contains the cell culture grown to a target OD. In theelectroporation device 1008, the nucleic acids are electroporated into the cells. Following electroporation, the cells are transferred into anoptional recovery module 1056, where the cells are allowed to recover briefly post-transformation. - After recovery, the cells may be transferred to a storage unit or
module 1012, where the cells can be stored at, e.g., 4° C. for later processing, or the cells may be diluted and transferred to a solid wall selection, isolation or substantial isolation/incubation/editing andnormalization module 1058. In themulti-process module 1058, the cells are arrayed such that there is an average of one cell per microwell. The arrayed cells may be in selection medium to select for cells that have been transformed or transfected with the editing vector(s). Once substantially or largely isolated, the cells grow through 2-50 doublings and establish colonies. Once colonies are established, editing proceeds. As described above, in some embodiments the gRNA and other editing components are under the control of an inducible promoter, and editing is induced by providing conditions (e.g., temperature, addition of an inducing or repressing chemical) to induce editing. Once editing is allowed to proceed, the cells are allowed to grow to terminal size (e.g., normalization of the colonies) in the microwells and then can be flushed out of the microwells and pooled, then transferred to thecell retrieval unit 1014 or can be transferred back to agrowth module 1004 for another round of editing. In between pooling and transfer to a growth module, there may be one or more additional steps, such as cell recovery, medium exchange, cell concentration, etc., by, e.g., tangential flow filtration. Note that the selection/isolation or substantial isolation/incubation/editing and normalization modules may be the same module, where all processes are performed in the solid wall device, or selection and/or dilution may take place in a separate vessel before the cells are transferred to the solid wall isolation or substantial isolation/incubation/editing and normalization module (SWIIN module). Once the putatively-edited cells are pooled, they may be subjected to another round of editing, beginning with growth, cell concentration and treatment to render electrocompetent, and transformation by yet another donor nucleic acid in another editing cassette via theelectroporation module 1008. - In
electroporation device 1008, the cells selected from the first round of editing are transformed by a second set of editing oligos (or other type of oligos) and the cycle is repeated until the cells have been transformed and edited by a desired number of, e.g., editing cassettes. The multi-modulecell processing instrument 1000 exemplified inFIG. 10 is controlled by aprocessor 1042 configured to operate the instrument based on user input or is controlled by one or more scripts including at least one script associated with the reagent cartridge. Theprocessor 1042 may control the timing, duration, and temperature of various processes, the dispensing of reagents, and other operations of the various modules of the automated multi-modulecell processing instrument 1000. For example, a script or the processor may control the dispensing of cells, reagents, vectors, and editing oligonucleotides; which editing oligonucleotides are used for cell editing and in what order; the time, temperature and other conditions used in the recovery and expression module; the wavelength at which OD is read in the cell growth module, the target OD to which the cells are grown, and the target time at which the cells will reach the target OD. In addition, the processor may be programmed to notify a user (e.g., via an application to a smart phone or other device) as to the progress of the cells in the automated multi-module cell processing instrument. - It should be apparent to one of ordinary skill in the art given the present disclosure that the process described may be recursive and multiplexed; that is, cells may go through the workflow described in relation to
FIG. 10 , then the resulting edited culture may go through another (or several or many) rounds of additional editing (e.g., recursive editing) with different editing vectors. For example, the cells fromround 1 of editing may be diluted and an aliquot of the edited cells edited by editing vector A may be combined with editing vector B, an aliquot of the edited cells edited by editing vector A may be combined with editing vector C, an aliquot of the edited cells edited by editing vector A may be combined with editing vector D, and so on for a second round of editing. After round two, an aliquot of each of the double-edited cells may be subjected to a third round of editing, where, e.g., aliquots of each of the AB-, AC-, AD-edited cells are combined with additional editing vectors, such as editing vectors X, Y, and Z. That is to say that double-edited cells AB may be combined with and edited by vectors X, Y, and Z to produce triple-edited edited cells ABX, ABY, and ABZ; double-edited cells AC may be combined with and edited by vectors X, Y, and Z to produce triple-edited cells ACX, ACY, and ACZ; and double-edited cells AD may be combined with and edited by vectors X, Y, and Z to produce triple-edited cells ADX, ADY, and ADZ, and so on. In this process, many permutations and combinations of edits can be executed, leading to very diverse cell populations and cell libraries. In any recursive process, it is advantageous to “cure” the previous engine and editing vectors (or single engine+editing vector in a single vector system). “Curing” is a process in which one or more vectors used in the prior round of editing is eliminated from the transformed cells. Curing can be accomplished by, e.g., cleaving the vector(s) using a curing plasmid thereby rendering the editing and/or engine vector (or single, combined vector) nonfunctional; diluting the vector(s) in the cell population via cell growth (that is, the more growth cycles the cells go through, the fewer daughter cells will retain the editing or engine vector(s)), or by, e.g., utilizing a heat-sensitive origin of replication on the editing or engine vector (or combined engine+editing vector). The conditions for curing will depend on the mechanism used for curing; that is, in this example, how the curing plasmid cleaves the editing and/or engine plasmid. For details of curing protocols useful in the present methods, modules and instruments, see U.S. Ser. No. 62/857,967, filed 6 Jun. 2019. - Production of Cell Libraries using Automated Editing Methods, Modules, and Instruments
- In one aspect, the present disclosure provides automated editing methods, modules, instruments, and automated multi-module cell editing instruments for creating a library of cells that vary the expression, levels and/or activity of RNAs and/or proteins of interest in various cell types using various editing strategies, as described herein in more detail. Accordingly, the disclosure is intended to cover edited cell libraries created by the automated editing methods, automated multi-module cell editing instruments of the disclosure. These cell libraries may have different targeted edits, including but not limited to gene knockouts, gene knock-ins, insertions, deletions, single nucleotide edits, short tandem repeat edits, frameshifts, triplet codon expansion, and the like in cells of various organisms. These edits can be directed to coding or non-coding regions of the genome and are preferably rationally designed.
- In other aspects, the present disclosure provides automated editing methods, automated multi-module cell editing instruments for creating a library of cells that vary DNA-linked processes. For example, the cell library may include individual cells having edits in DNA binding sites to interfere with DNA binding of regulatory elements that modulate expression of selected genes. In addition, cell libraries may include edits in genomic DNA that impact on cellular processes such as heterochromatin formation, switch-class recombination and VDJ recombination.
- In specific aspects, the cell libraries are created using multiplexed editing of individual cells within a cell population, with multiple cells within a cell population are edited in a single round of editing, i.e., multiple changes within the cells of the cell library are in a single automated operation. The libraries that can be created in a single multiplexed automated operation can comprise as many as 500 edited cells, 1000 edited cells, 2000 edited cells, 5000 edited cells, 10,000 edited cells, 50,000 edited cells, 100,000 edited cells, 200,000 edited cells, 300,000 edited cells, 400,000 edited cells, 500,000 edited cells, 600,000 edited cells, 700,000 edited cells, 800,000 edited cells, 900,000 edited cells, 1,000,000 edited cells, 2,000,000 edited cells, 3,000,000 edited cells, 4,000,000 edited cells, 5,000,000 edited cells, 6,000,000 edited cells, 7,000,000 edited cells, 8,000,000 edited cells, 9,000,000 edited cells, 10,000,000 edited cells or more.
- In other specific aspects, the cell libraries are created using recursive editing of individual cells within a cell population, with edits being added to the individual cells in two or more rounds of editing. The use of recursive editing results in the amalgamation of two or more edits targeting two or more sites in the genome in individual cells of the library. The libraries that can be created in an automated recursive operation can comprise as many as 500 edited cells, 1000 edited cells, 2000 edited cells, 5000 edited cells, 10,000 edited cells, 50,000 edited cells, 100,000 edited cells, 200,000 edited cells, 300,000 edited cells, 400,000 edited cells, 500,000 edited cells, 600,000 edited cells, 700,000 edited cells, 800,000 edited cells, 900,000 edited cells, 1,000,000 edited cells, 2,000,000 edited cells, 3,000,000 edited cells, 4,000,000 edited cells, 5,000,000 edited cells, 6,000,000 edited cells, 7,000,000 edited cells, 8,000,000 edited cells, 9,000,000 edited cells, 10,000,000 edited cells or more.,
- Examples of non-automated editing strategies that can be modified based on the present specification to utilize the automated systems can be found, e.g., U.S. Pat. Nos. 8,110,360, 8,332,160, 9,988,624, 20170316353, and 20120277120.
- In specific aspects, recursive editing can be used to first create a cell phenotype, and then later rounds of editing used to reverse the phenotype and/or accelerate other cell properties.
- In some aspects, the cell library comprises edits for the creation of unnatural amino acids in a cell.
- In specific aspects, the disclosure provides edited cell libraries having edits in one or more regulatory elements created using the automated editing methods, automated multi-module cell editing instruments of the disclosure. The term “regulatory element” refers to nucleic acid molecules that can influence the transcription and/or translation of an operably linked coding sequence in a particular environment and/or context. This term is intended to include all elements that promote or regulate transcription, and RNA stability including promoters, core elements required for basic interaction of RNA polymerase and transcription factors, upstream elements, enhancers, and response elements (see, e.g., Lewin, “Genes V” (Oxford University Press, Oxford) pages 847-873). Exemplary regulatory elements in prokaryotes include, but are not limited to, promoters, operator sequences and a ribosome binding sites. Regulatory elements that are used in eukaryotic cells may include, but are not limited to, promoters, enhancers, insulators, splicing signals and polyadenylation signals.
- Preferably, the edited cell library includes rationally designed edits that are designed based on predictions of protein structure, expression and/or activity in a particular cell type. For example, rational design may be based on a system-wide biophysical model of genome editing with a particular nuclease and gene regulation to predict how different editing parameters including nuclease expression and/or binding, growth conditions, and other experimental conditions collectively control the dynamics of nuclease editing. See, e.g., Farasat and Salis, PLoS Comput Biol., 29:12(1):e1004724 (2016).
- In one aspect, the present disclosure provides the creation of a library of edited cells with various rationally designed regulatory sequences created using the automated editing instrumentation, systems and methods of the invention. For example, the edited cell library can include prokaryotic cell populations created using set of constitutive and/or inducible promoters, enhancer sequences, operator sequences and/or ribosome binding sites. In another example, the edited cell library can include eukaryotic sequences created using a set of constitutive and/or inducible promoters, enhancer sequences, operator sequences, and/or different Kozak sequences for expression of proteins of interest.
- In some aspects, the disclosure provides cell libraries including cells with rationally designed edits comprising one or more classes of edits in sequences of interest across the genome of an organism. In specific aspects, the disclosure provides cell libraries including cells with rationally designed edits comprising one or more classes of edits in sequences of interest across a subset of the genome. For example, the cell library may include cells with rationally designed edits comprising one or more classes of edits in sequences of interest across the exome, e.g., every or most every open reading frame of the genome. For example, the cell library may include cells with rationally designed edits comprising one or more classes of edits in sequences of interest across the kinome. In yet another example, the cell library may include cells with rationally designed edits comprising one or more classes of edits in sequences of interest across the secretome. In yet other aspects, the cell library may include cells with rationally designed edits created to analyze various isoforms of proteins encoded within the exome, and the cell libraries can be designed to control expression of one or more specific isoforms, e.g., for transcriptome analysis.
- Importantly, in certain aspects the cell libraries may comprise edits using randomized sequences, e.g., randomized promoter sequences, to reduce similarity between expression of one or more proteins in individual cells within the library. Additionally, the promoters in the cell library can be constitutive, inducible or both to enable strong and/or titratable expression.
- In other aspects, the present disclosure provides automated editing methods, automated multi-module cell editing instruments for creating a library of cells comprising edits to identify optimum expression of a selected gene target. For example, production of biochemicals through metabolic engineering often requires the expression of pathway enzymes, and the best production yields are not always achieved by the highest amount of the target pathway enzymes in the cell, but rather by fine-tuning of the expression levels of the individual enzymes and related regulatory proteins and/or pathways. Similarly, expression levels of heterologous proteins sometimes can be experimentally adjusted for optimal yields.
- The most obvious way that transcription impacts on gene expression levels is through the rate of Pol II initiation, which can be modulated by combinations of promoter or enhancer strength and trans-activating factors (Kadonaga, et al., Cell, 116(2):247-57 (2004)). In eukaryotes, elongation rate may also determine gene expression patterns by influencing alternative splicing (Cramer et al., PNAS USA, 94(21):11456-60 (1997)). Failed termination on a gene can impair the expression of downstream genes by reducing the accessibility of the promoter to Pol II (Greger, et al., PNAS USA, 97(15):8415-20 (2000)). This process, known as transcriptional interference, is particularly relevant in lower eukaryotes, as they often have closely spaced genes.
- In some embodiments the present disclosure provides methods for optimizing cellular gene transcription. Gene transcription is the result of several distinct biological phenomena, including transcriptional initiation (RNAp recruitment and transcriptional complex formation), elongation (strand synthesis/extension), and transcriptional termination (RNAp detachment and termination).
- Cell libraries can be created using the automated editing methods, modules, instruments, and systems employing site-directed mutagenesis, i.e., when the amino acid sequence of a protein or other genomic feature may be altered by deliberately and precisely by mutating the protein or genomic feature. These cell lines can be useful for various purposes, e.g., for determining protein function within cells, the identification of enzymatic active sites within cells, and the design of novel proteins. For example, site-directed mutagenesis can be used in a multiplexed fashion to exchange a single amino acid in the sequence of a protein for another amino acid with different chemical properties. This allows one to determine the effect of a rationally designed or randomly generated mutation in individual cells within a cell population. See, e.g., Berg, et al. Biochemistry, Sixth Ed. (New York: W.H. Freeman and Company) (2007).
- In another example, edits can be made to individual cells within a cell library to substitute amino acids in binding sites, such as substitution of one or more amino acids in a protein binding site for interaction within a protein complex or substitution of one or more amino acids in enzymatic pockets that can accommodate a cofactor or ligand. This class of edits allows the creation of specific manipulations to a protein to measure certain properties of one or more proteins, including interaction with other cofactors, ligands, etc. within a protein complex.
- In yet another examples, various edit types can be made to individual cells within a cell library using site specific mutagenesis for studying expression quantitative trait loci (eQTLs). An eQTL is a locus that explains a fraction of the genetic variance of a gene expression phenotype. The libraries of the invention would be useful to evaluate and link eQTLs to actual diseased states.
- In specific aspects, the edits introduced into the cell libraries of the disclosure may be created using rational design based on known or predicted structures of proteins. See, e.g., Chronopoulou and Labrou, Curr Protoc Protein Sci.; Chapter 26:Unit 26.6 (2011). Such site-directed mutagenesis can provide individual cells within a library with one or more site-directed edits, and preferably two or more site-directed edits (e.g., combinatorial edits) within a cell population.
- In other aspects, cell libraries of the disclosure are created using site-directed codon mutation “scanning” of all or substantially all of the codons in the coding region of a gene. In this fashion, individual edits of specific codons can be examined for loss-of-function or gain-of-function based on specific polymorphisms in one or more codons of the gene. These libraries can be a powerful tool for determining which genetic changes are silent or causal of a specific phenotype in a cell or cell population. The edits of the codons may be randomly generated or may be rationally designed based on known polymorphisms and/or mutations that have been identified in the gene to be analyzed. Moreover, using these techniques on two or more genes in a single in a pathway in a cell may determine potential protein:protein interactions or redundancies in cell functions or pathways.
- For example, alanine scanning can be used to determine the contribution of a specific residue to the stability or function of given protein. See, e.g., Lefevre, et al., Nucleic Acids Research, Volume 25(2):447-448 (1997). Alanine is often used in this codon scanning technique because of its non-bulky, chemically inert, methyl functional group that can mimic the secondary structure preferences that many of the other amino acids possess. Codon scanning can also be used to determine whether the side chain of a specific residue plays a significant role in cell function and/or activity. Sometimes other amino acids such as valine or leucine can be used in the creation of codon scanning cell libraries if conservation of the size of mutated residues is needed.
- In other specific aspects, cell libraries can be created using the automated editing methods, automated multi-module cell editing instruments of the invention to determine the active site of a protein such as an enzyme or hormone, and to elucidate the mechanism of action of one or more of these proteins in a cell library. Site-directed mutagenesis associated with molecular modeling studies can be used to discover the active site structure of an enzyme and consequently its mechanism of action. Analysis of these cell libraries can provide an understanding of the role exerted by specific amino acid residues at the active sites of proteins, in the contacts between subunits of protein complexes, on intracellular trafficking and protein stability/half-life in various genetic backgrounds.
- In some aspects, the cell libraries created using the automated editing methods and automated multi-module cell editing instruments of the disclosure may be saturation mutagenesis libraries, in which a single codon or set of codons is randomized to produce all possible amino acids at the position of a particular gene or genes of interest. These cell libraries can be particularly useful to generate variants, e.g., for directed evolution. See, e.g., Chica, et al., Current Opinion in Biotechnology 16 (4): 378-384 (2005); and Shivange, Current Opinion in Chemical Biology, 13 (1): 19-25 (2009).
- In some aspects, edits comprising different degenerate codons can be used to encode sets of amino acids in the individual cells in the libraries. Because some amino acids are encoded by more codons than others, the exact ratio of amino acids cannot be equal. In certain aspects, more restricted degenerate codons are used. ‘NNK’ and ‘NNS’ have the benefit of encoding all 20 amino acids, but still encode a
stop codon 3% of the time. Alternative codons such as ‘NDT’, ‘DBK’ avoid stop codons entirely, and encode a minimal set of amino acids that still encompass all the main biophysical types (anionic, cationic, aliphatic hydrophobic, aromatic hydrophobic, hydrophilic, small). - In specific aspects, the non-redundant saturation mutagenesis, in which the most commonly used codon for a particular organism is used in the saturation mutagenesis editing process.
- One mechanism for analyzing and/or optimizing expression of one or more genes of interest is through the creation of a “promoter swap” cell library, in which the cells comprise genetic edits that have specific promoters linked to one or more genes of interest. Accordingly, the cell libraries created using the methods, automated multi-module cell editing instruments of the disclosure may be promoter swap cell libraries, which can be used, e.g., to increase or decrease expression of a gene of interest to optimize a metabolic or genetic pathway. In some aspects, the promoter swap cell library can be used to identify an increase or reduction in the expression of a gene that affects cell vitality or viability, e.g., a gene encoding a protein that impacts on the growth rate or overall health of the cells. In some aspects, the promoter swap cell library can be used to create cells having dependencies and logic between the promoters to create synthetic gene networks. In some aspects, the promoter swaps can be used to control cell to cell communication between cells of both homogeneous and heterogeneous (complex tissues) populations in nature.
- The cell libraries can utilize any given number of promoters that have been grouped together based upon exhibition of a range of expression strengths and any given number of target genes. The ladder of promoter sequences vary expression of at least one locus under at least one condition. This ladder is then systematically applied to a group of genes in the organism using the automated editing methods, automated multi-module cell editing instruments of the disclosure.
- In specific aspects, the cell library formed using the automated editing processes, modules and systems of the disclosure include individual cells that are representative of a given promoter operably linked to one or more target genes of interest in an otherwise identical genetic background. Examples of non-automated editing strategies that can be modified to utilize the automated systems can be found, e.g., in U.S. Pat. No. 9,988,624.
- In specific aspects, the promoter swap cell library is produced by editing a set of target genes to be operably linked to a pre-selected set of promoters that act as a “promoter ladder” for expression of the genes of interest. For example, the cells are edited so that one or more individual genes of interest are edited to be operably linked with the different promoters in the promoter ladder. When an endogenous promoter does not exist, its sequence is unknown, or it has been previously changed in some manner, the individual promoters of the promoter ladder can be inserted in front of the genes of interest. These produced cell libraries have individual cells with an individual promoter of the ladder operably linked to one or more target genes in an otherwise identical genetic context.
- The promoters are generally selected to result in variable expression across different loci, and may include inducible promoters, constitutive promoters, or both.
- The set of target genes edited using the promoter ladder can include all or most open reading frames (ORFs) in a genome, or a selected subset of the genome, e.g., the ORFs of the kinome or a secretome. In some aspects, the target genes can include coding regions for various isoforms of the genes, and the cell libraries can be designed to expression of one or more specific isoforms, e.g., for transcriptome analysis using various promoters.
- The set of target genes can also be genes known or suspected to be involved in a particular cellular pathway, e.g. a regulatory pathway or signaling pathway. The set of target genes can be ORFs related to function, by relation to previously demonstrated beneficial edits (previous promoter swaps or previous SNP swaps), by algorithmic selection based on epistatic interactions between previously generated edits, other selection criteria based on hypotheses regarding beneficial ORF to target, or through random selection. In specific embodiments, the target genes can comprise non-protein coding genes, including non-coding RNAs.
- Editing of other functional genetic elements, including insulator elements and other genomic organization elements, can also be used to systematically vary the expression level of a set of target genes, and can be introduced using the methods, automated multi-module cell editing instruments of the disclosure. In one aspect, a population of cells is edited using a ladder of enhancer sequences, either alone or in combination with selected promoters or a promoter ladder, to create a cell library having various edits in these enhancer elements. In another aspect, a population of cells is edited using a ladder of ribosome binding sequences, either alone or in combination with selected promoters or a promoter ladder, to create a cell library having various edits in these ribosome binding sequences.
- In another aspect, a population of cells is edited to allow the attachment of various mRNA and/or protein stabilizing or destabilizing sequences to the 5′ or 3′ end, or at any other location, of a transcript or protein.
- In certain aspects, a population of cells of a previously established cell line may be edited using the automated editing methods, modules, instruments, and systems of the disclosure to create a cell library to improve the function, health and/or viability of the cells. For example, many industrial strains currently used for large scale manufacturing have been developed using random mutagenesis processes iteratively over a period of many years, sometimes decades. Unwanted neutral and detrimental mutations were introduced into strains along with beneficial changes, and over time this resulted in strains with deficiencies in overall robustness and key traits such as growth rates. In another example, mammalian cell lines continue to mutate through the passage of the cells over periods of time, and likewise these cell lines can become unstable and acquire traits that are undesirable. The automated editing methods, automated multi-module cell editing instruments of the disclosure can use editing strategies such as SNP and/or STR swapping, indel creation, or other techniques to remove or change the undesirable genome sequences and/or introducing new genome sequences to address the deficiencies while retaining the desirable properties of the cells.
- When recursive editing is used, the editing in the individual cells in the edited cell library can incorporate the inclusion of “landing pads” in an ectopic site in the genome (e.g., a CarT locus) to optimize expression, stability and/or control.
- In some embodiments, each library produced having individual cells comprising one or more edits (either introducing or removing) is cultured and analyzed under one or more criteria (e.g., production of a chemical or product of interest). The cells possessing the specific criteria are then associated, or correlated, with one or more particular edits in the cell. In this manner, the effect of a given edit on any number of genetic or phenotypic traits of interest can be determined. The identification of multiple edits associated with particular criteria or enhanced functionality/robustness may lead to cells with highly desirable characteristics.
- In certain aspects, the present disclosure provides automated editing methods, modules, instruments and systems for creating a library of cells having “knock-out” (KO) or “knock-in” (KI) edits of various genes of interest. Thus, the disclosure is intended to cover edited cell libraries created by the automated editing methods, automated multi-module cell editing instruments of the disclosure that have one or more mutations that remove or reduce the expression of selected genes of interest to interrogate the effect of these edits on gene function in individual cells within the cell library.
- The cell libraries can be created using targeted gene KO (e.g., via insertion/deletion) or KOs (e.g., via homologous directed repair). For example, double strand breaks are often repaired via the non-homologous end joining DNA repair pathway. The repair is known to be error prone, and thus insertions and deletions may be introduced that can disrupt gene function. Preferably the edits are rationally designed to specifically affect the genes of interest, and individual cells can be created having a KI or KI of one or more locus of interest. Cells having a KO or KI of two or more loci of interest can be created using automated recursive editing of the disclosure.
- In specific aspects, the KO or KI cell libraries are created using simultaneous multiplexed editing of cells within a cell population, and multiple cells within a cell population are edited in a single round of editing, i.e., multiple changes within the cells of the cell library are in a single automated operation. In other specific aspects, the cell libraries are created using recursive editing of individual cells within a cell population, and results in the amalgamation of multiple edits of two or more sites in the genome into single cells.
- In one aspect, cell libraries are created using the automated editing methods, automated multi-module cell editing instruments of the disclosure by systematic introducing or substituting single nucleotide polymorphisms (“SNPs”) into the genomes of the individual cells to create a “SNP swap” cell library. In some embodiments, the SNP swapping methods of the present disclosure include both the addition of beneficial SNPs, and removing detrimental and/or neutral SNPs. The SNP swaps may target coding sequences, non-coding sequences, or both.
- In another aspect, a cell library is created using the automated editing methods, modules, instruments, instruments, and systems of the disclosure by systematic introducing or substituting short tandem repeats (“STR”) into the genomes of the individual cells to create an “STR swap” cell library. In some embodiments, the STR swapping methods of the present disclosure include both the addition of beneficial STRs, and removing detrimental and/or neutral STRs. The STR swaps may target coding sequences, non-coding sequences, or both.
- In some embodiments, the SNP and/or STR swapping used to create the cell library is multiplexed, and multiple cells within a cell population are edited in a single round of editing, i.e., multiple changes within the cells of the cell library are in a single automated operation. In other embodiments, the SNP and/or STR swapping used to create the cell library is recursive, and results in the amalgamation of multiple beneficial sequences and/or the removal of detrimental sequences into single cells. Multiple changes can be either a specific set of defined changes or a partly randomized, combinatorial library of mutations. Removal of detrimental mutations and consolidation of beneficial mutations can provide immediate improvements in various cellular processes. Removal of genetic burden or consolidation of beneficial changes into a strain with no genetic burden also provides a new, robust starting point for additional random mutagenesis that may enable further improvements.
- SNP swapping overcomes fundamental limitations of random mutagenesis approaches as it is not a random approach, but rather the systematic introduction or removal of individual mutations across cells.
- RNA splicing is the process during which introns are excised and exons are spliced together to create the mRNA that is translated into a protein. The precise recognition of splicing signals by cellular machinery is critical to this process. Accordingly, in some aspects, a population of cells is edited using a systematic editing to known and/or predicted splice donor and/or acceptor sites in various loci to create a library of splice site variants of various genes. Such editing can help to elucidate the biological relevance of various isoforms of genes in a cellular context. Sequences for rational design of splicing sites of various coding regions, including actual or predicted mutations associated with various mammalian disorders, can be predicted using analysis techniques such as those found in Nalla and Rogan, Hum Mutat, 25:334-342 (2005); Divina, et al., Eur J Hum Genet, 17:759-765 (2009); Desmet, et el., Nucleic Acids Res, 37:e67 (2009); Faber, et al., BMC Bioinformatics, 12(suppl 4):S2 (2011).
- In some aspects, the present disclosure provides for the creation of cell libraries using the automated editing methods, modules, instruments and systems of the disclosure, where the libraries are created by swapping start and stop codon variants throughout the genome of an organism or for a selected subset of coding regions in the genome, e.g., the kinome or secretome. In the cell library, individual cells will have one or more start or stop codons replacing the native start or stop codon for one or more gene of interest.
- For example, typical start codons used by eukaryotes are ATG (AUG) and prokaryotes use ATG (AUG) the most, followed by GTG (GUG) and TTG (UUG). The cell library may include individual cells having substitutions for the native start codons for one or more genes of interest.
- In some aspects, the present disclosure provides for automated creation of a cell library by replacing ATG start codons with TTG in front of selected genes of interest. In other aspects, the present disclosure provides for automated creation of a cell library by replacing ATG start codons with GTG. In other aspects, the present disclosure provides for automated creation of a cell library by replacing GTG start codons with ATG. In other aspects, the present disclosure provides for automated creation of a cell library by replacing GTG start codons with TTG. In other aspects, the present disclosure provides for automated creation of a cell library by replacing TTG start codons with ATG. In other aspects, the present disclosure provides for automated creation of a cell library by replacing TTG start codons with GTG.
- In other examples, typical stop codons for S. cerevisiae and mammals are TAA (UAA) and TGA (UGA), respectively. The typical stop codon for monocotyledonous plants is TGA (UGA), whereas insects and E. coli commonly use TAA (UAA) as the stop codon (Dalphin. et al., Nucl. Acids Res., 24: 216-218 (1996)). The cell library may include individual cells having substitutions for the native stop codons for one or more genes of interest.
- In some aspects, the present disclosure provides for automated creation of a cell library by replacing TAA stop codons with TAG. In other aspects, the present disclosure provides for automated creation of a cell library by replacing TAA stop codons with TGA. In other aspects, the present disclosure provides for automated creation of a cell library by replacing TGA stop codons with TAA. In other aspects, the present disclosure provides for automated creation of a cell library by replacing TGA stop codons with TAG. In other aspects, the present disclosure provides for automated creation of a cell library by replacing TAG stop codons with TAA. In other aspects, the present invention teaches automated creation of a cell library by replacing TAG stop codons with TGA.
- One mechanism for identifying optimum termination of a pre-spliced mRNA of one or more genes of interest is through the creation of a “terminator swap” cell library, in which the cells comprise genetic edits that have specific terminator sequences linked to one or more genes of interest. Accordingly, the cell libraries created using the methods, modules, instruments and systems of the disclosure may be terminator swap cell libraries, which can be used, e.g., to affect mRNA stability by releasing transcripts from sites of synthesis. In other embodiments, the terminator swap cell library can be used to identify an increase or reduction in the efficiency of transcriptional termination and thus accumulation of unspliced pre-mRNA (e.g., West and Proudfoot, Mol Cell.; 33(3-9); 354-364 (2009)) and/or 3′ end processing (e.g., West, et al., Mol Cell. 29(5):600-10 (2008)). In the case where a gene is linked to multiple termination sites, the edits may edit a combination of edits to multiple terminators that are associated with a gene. Additional amino acids may also be added to the ends of proteins to determine the effect on the protein length on terminators.
- The cell libraries can utilize any given number of edits of terminators that have been selected for the terminator ladder based upon exhibition of a range of activity and any given number of target genes. The ladder of terminator sequences vary expression of at least one locus under at least one condition. This ladder is then systematically applied to a group of genes in the organism using the automated editing methods, modules, instruments and systems of the disclosure.
- In some aspects, the present disclosure provides for the creation of cell libraries using the automated editing methods, modules, instruments and systems of disclosure, where the libraries are created to edit terminator signals in one or more regions in the genome in the individual cells of the library. Transcriptional termination in eukaryotes operates through terminator signals that are recognized by protein factors associated with the RNA polymerase II. For example, the cell library may contain individual eukaryotic cells with edits in genes encoding polyadenylation specificity factor (CPSF) and cleavage stimulation factor (CstF) and or gene encoding proteins recruited by CPSF and CstF factors to termination sites. In prokaryotes, two principal mechanisms, termed Rho-independent and Rho-dependent termination, mediate transcriptional termination. For example, the cell library may contain individual prokaryotic cells with edits in genes encoding proteins that affect the binding, efficiency and/or activity of these termination pathways.
- In certain aspects, the present disclosure provides methods of selecting termination sequences (“terminators”) with optimal properties. For example, in some embodiments, the present disclosure teaches provides methods for introducing and/or editing one or more terminators and/or generating variants of one or more terminators within a host cell, which exhibit a range of activity. A particular combination of terminators can be grouped together as a terminator ladder, and cell libraries of the disclosure include individual cells that are representative of terminators operably linked to one or more target genes of interest in an otherwise identical genetic background. Examples of non-automated editing strategies that can be modified to utilize the automated instruments can be found, e.g., in U.S. Pat. No. 9,988,624 to Serber et al., entitled “Microbial strain improvement by a HTP genomic engineering platform.”
- In specific aspects, the terminator swap cell library is produced by editing a set of target genes to be operably linked to a pre-selected set of terminators that act as a “terminator ladder” for expression of the genes of interest. For example, the cells are edited so that the endogenous promoter is operably linked to the individual genes of interest are edited with the different promoters in the promoter ladder. When the endogenous promoter does not exist, its sequence is unknown, or it has been previously changed in some manner, the individual promoters of the promoter ladder can be inserted in front of the genes of interest. These produced cell libraries have individual cells with an individual promoter of the ladder operably linked to one or more target genes in an otherwise identical genetic context. The terminator ladder in question is then associated with a given gene of interest.
- The terminator ladder can be used to more generally affect termination of all or most ORFs in a genome, or a selected subset of the genome, e.g., the ORFs of a kinome or a secretome. The set of target genes can also be genes known or suspected to be involved in a particular cellular pathway, e.g. a regulatory pathway or signaling pathway. The set of target genes can be ORFs related to function, by relation to previously demonstrated beneficial edits (previous promoter swaps or previous SNP swaps), by algorithmic selection based on epistatic interactions between previously generated edits, other selection criteria based on hypotheses regarding beneficial ORF to target, or through random selection. In specific embodiments, the target genes can comprise non-protein coding genes, including non-coding RNAs.
- The following examples are put forth so as to provide those of ordinary skill in the art with a complete disclosure and description of how to make and use the present invention and are not intended to limit the scope of what the inventors regard as their invention nor are they intended to represent that the experiments below are all or the only experiments performed. Other equivalent methods, steps and compositions are intended to be included in the scope of the invention. Efforts have been made to ensure accuracy with respect to numbers used (e.g. amounts, temperature, etc.) but some experimental errors and deviations should be accounted for. Unless indicated otherwise, parts are parts by weight, molecular weightisweight average molecular weight, temperature is in degrees Celsius, and pressure is at or near atmospheric.
- Basic components of a model system were assessed. The model system comprised E. coli cells transformed with an engine vector, where the engine vector comprised a coding sequence for a MAD nuclease (i.e.,
MAD 4 or MAD 7 nuclease) under the control of the pL temperature inducible promoter, a chloramphenicol resistance marker, and the λ Red recombineering system under the control of the pBAD promoter (induced by addition of arabinose to the growth medium). The E. coli cells were also transformed with an editing vector comprising an editing oligonucleotide, which in this model system was a library of editing oligonucleotides each configured to inactivate galK, where successful editing results in white (versus red) colonies when plated on MacConkey agar supplemented with galactose as the sole carbon source. In addition, the editing vector comprised a gRNA coding sequence under the control of the pL temperature inducible promoter, a carbenicillin resistance marker, and a sequence to remove, mutate, or otherwise render inactive the PAM region in the target sequence.FIGS. 11A and 11B depict an exemplary engine vector (FIG. 11A ) and editing vector (FIG. 11B ) that may be employed in the exemplary editing workflows described herein. InFIG. 11A , the exemplary engine vector 1110 (p197) comprises an origin ofreplication 1112, and apromoter 1114 driving expression of the gene coding for thec1857 repressor 1116 which regulates the pL promoter. A first pL promoter in this exemplary embodiment drives the transcription of the gRNA on the editing vector as described in relation toFIG. 11B below, and asecond pL promoter 1118 on the engine vector drives expression of thenuclease 1120. Thepromoter driving nuclease 1120 may be an inducible or a constitutive promoter; however, the tightest regulation of the nucleic acid-guided nuclease system is achieved by using an inducible promoter to drive expression of the nuclease as well as the guide nucleic acid. Again, like inducible promoters and different inducible promoters may be used to drive the transcription of the guide nucleic acid and the nuclease. The pL promoter can be regulated (e.g., repressed or induced) by thethermolabile c1857 repressor 1116 which is active at permissive temperatures (e.g., 30° C.) and inactive at higher temperatures (e.g., 42° C.). The regulation of the pL promoter is shown in more detail in relation toFIG. 1C above. - The engine vector in
FIG. 11A further comprises apBAD promoter 1140 driving expression of the components of the λRed recombineering system 1142. The pBAD promoter, like the pL promoter, is an inducible promoter, where the pBAD promoter is regulated (induced) by the addition of arabinose to the growth medium. Note that in this exemplary bacterial editing system, a recombineering system such as the λ Red recombineering system is provided as a component of the nucleic acid-guided nuclease editing system to repair the DNA breaks that occur during editing. In some embodiments, however, the cells to be edited may already comprise a recombineering system (e.g., episomally, integrated into the cellular genome, or naturally). Also, although the λ Red recombineering system is exemplified here, it should be understood that other recombineering systems may be employed. Further, cells-such as yeast, plant and animal cells-do not require a recombineering system equivalent to the λ Red recombineering system to repair the DNA breaks that result from editing. Thus the nucleic acid-guided nuclease editing components for, e.g., yeast, plant and animal cells do not need to include a heterologous recombineering system. Finally,exemplary engine vector 1110 comprises apromoter 1150 driving expression of achloramphenicol selectable marker 1152. Additionally, the engine vector and all other vectors or constructs used in the disclosed method comprise appropriate control elements (e.g., polyadenylation signals, enhancers) operably-linked to the nucleic acid-guided nuclease editing system components. -
FIG. 11B depicts an exemplary editing vector 1130 (pLFORGE).Editing vector 1130 comprises an origin ofreplication 1132, and apL promoter 1134 driving expression of anediting cassette 1136. The editing cassette comprises a coding sequence for agRNA 1144, aspacer 1146, and a donor DNA 1158 (comprising homology arms flanking a desired edit to be made to the target sequence).Editing vector 1130 also comprises apromoter 1154 driving expression of a carbenicillinselectable marker 1156. Note that thepL inducible promoter 1134 is encoded on the vector backbone and is not part of theediting cassette 1136; however, in other embodiments the inducible promoter driving transcription of the gRNA may be part of the editing cassette.FIGS. 11A and 11B depict exemplary engine and editing vectors, respectively, but it should be recognized by one of ordinary skill in the art given the guidance of the present description that all elements of the nucleic acid-guided nuclease editing system may be contained on a single plasmid, or the elements shown on the engine and editing vectors ofFIGS. 11A and 11B may reside on a different vector than shown. For example, the pBAD promoter and λ Red recombineering system may be contained on the editing vector rather than the engine vector; likewise, the gene for the c1857 repressor may be contained on the editing vector rather than the engine vector. -
FIG. 12 is a bar graph showing the transformation efficiencies observed for galK gRNA targeting cassettes under a variety of promoters. Transformation efficiency of uninduced promoters provides a proxy for promoter leakiness. If there is high basal expression of gRNA (e.g., “leakiness”), there will be low CFU. If there is a low basal expression of gRNA (e.g., tight regulation), there will be high CFU. The non-target gRNAs experiment was performed with a pool of cassettes designed to target inactive PAM sequences that are unable to promote gRNA and nuclease binding and cleavage. For each of the promoters depicted (pL, pBAD, and sigma32) a cassette targeting galK with a TTTC PAM and a spacer configured to make a stop codon insertion at amino acid D70 was cloned downstream of the promoter. Plasmid concentrations were normalized to 50 ng/L and transformed in equal cell volumes. CFU from serial dilution platings were used to derive the transformation efficiencies expressed as CFU/g. The J23119 promoter is a constitutive promoter, the pL promoter is inducible by high temperature, the pBAD promoter is induced by the presence of arabinose in the growth medium, and the sigma32 promoter is induced in stationary phase cells. For the MAD7 nuclease, the sigma32 promoter shows leaky expression, while both the pL and pBAD promoters are tightly repressed. -
FIG. 13 is a graph showing the effects of thermal induction on cell viability. In this experiment, a pool of cassettes were designed to target an inactive PAM sequence. Cells were diluted 1/50 v:v into microtiter plates containing 200 μL LB+chlor/carb. Diluted cultures were induced for 1 hour at the indicated temperatures before shifting back to 30° C. with continuous shaking in an Infinite M Nano+plate reader. To corresponds to the time of the induction step and growth was monitored by measuring the OD600 at 10 minute intervals. Note that high temperature (42° C.) induction has no impact on cell viability or growth rate. -
FIG. 14 shows the results of pooled induction experiments using a single sequence verified editing cassette that targets the galK locus and introduces a stop codon at amino acid D70. Following a three-hour outgrowth, cells were either induced at 42° C. for 15 minutes or retained at 30° C. prior to serial dilution plating. CFU/mL was calculated based on the plating volumes. For reference the dashed line inFIG. 14 shows the typical CFU obtained in an equivalent experiment using the constitutive J23119 promoter (data not shown). As can be seen, the absence of induction (i.e., the absence of editing) enables high efficiency transformation (10-100 fold) due to the lack of toxic dsDNA breaks. -
FIG. 15 shows the growth profiles of randomly picked variants from a silent PAM mutation (SPM) library. This 500-member library targets regions located across the entire E. coli organism and integrates synonymous mutations that have no expected fitness effects. Colonies were picked from agar plates of uninduced transformed cells. Cells were picked from an agar plate and grown up in 200 μL LB+chlor/carb overnight in a 96-well microtiter plate format. 10 μL of the well content of the parent microtiter plate was then transferred to two replica daughter microtiter plates that received either no induction (top) or gRNA and nuclease induction (via the pL inducible promoter) for 1 hour at 42° C. (bottom). The well maps show the relative OD at 6 hours. The inserts show examples of the full growth curves for the indicated wells as a reference. The replica wells represent growth observed from the same cassette design with or without gRNA induction. While the majority of the wells for the no-induction plate show normal growth profiles, the induced plate shows that a large fraction of the gRNA designs are still active when induced, indicated by a large lag phase before the cells reach exponential growth. That is, the actively-editing cells have reduced viability due to DNA damage such that many in the colonies die off, and those edited cells that do survive grow slowly to begin with as the cellular machinery works to repair the edit. This characteristic of edited cells can be exploited to screen for active editing in a high-throughput manner. - Editing Cassette Preparation: 5 nM oligonucleotides synthesized on a chip were amplified using Q5 polymerase in 50 μL volumes. The PCR conditions were 95° C. for 1 minute; 8 rounds of 95° C. for 30 seconds/60° C. for 30 seconds/72° C. for 2.5 minutes; with a final hold at 72° C. for 5 minutes. Following amplification, the PCR products were subjected to SPRI cleanup, where 30 μL SPRI mix was added to the 50 μL PCR reactions and incubated for 2 minutes. The tubes were subjected to a magnetic field for 2 minutes, the liquid was removed, and the beads were washed 2× with 80% ethanol, allowing 1 minute between washes. After the final wash, the beads were allowed to dry for 2 minutes, 50 μL 0.5× TE pH 8.0 was added to the tubes, and the beads were vortexed to mix. The slurry was incubated at room temperature for 2 minutes, then subjected to the magnetic field for 2 minutes. The eluate was removed and the DNA quantified.
- Following quantification, a second amplification procedure was carried out using a dilution of the eluate from the SPRI cleanup. PCR was performed under the following conditions: 95° C. for 1 minute; 18 rounds of 95° C. for 30 seconds/72° C. for 2.5 minutes; with a final hold at 72° C. for 5 minutes. Amplicons were checked on a 2% agarose gel and pools with the cleanest output(s) were identified. Amplification products appearing to have heterodimers or chimeras were not used.
- Backbone Preparation: A 10-fold serial dilution series of purified backbone was performed, and each of the diluted backbone series was amplified under the following conditions: 95° C. for 1 minute; then 30 rounds of 95° C. for 30 seconds/60° C. for 1.5 minutes/72° C. for 2.5 minutes; with a final hold at 72° C. for 5 minutes. After amplification, the amplified backbone was subjected to SPRI cleanup as described above in relation to the cassettes. The backbone was eluted into 100 μL ddH2O and quantified before isothermal nucleic acid assembly.
- Isothermal Nucleic Acid Assembly: 150 ng backbone DNA was combined with 100 ng cassette DNA. An equal volume of 2× isothermal assembly master mix was added, and the reaction was incubated for 45 minutes at 50° C. After assembly, the assembled backbone and cassettes were subjected to SPRI cleanup, as described above.
- Transformation with Engine Vector: 1 μL of the engine vector DNA (comprising a coding sequence for MAD7 nuclease under the control of the pL inducible promoter, a chloramphenicol resistance gene, and the λ Red recombineering system) was added to 50 μL EC1 strain E. coli cells. The transformed cells were plated on LB plates with 25 μg/mL chloramphenicol (chlor) and incubated overnight to accumulate clonal (or substantially clonal) isolates. The next day, a colony was picked, grown overnight in LB+25 μg/mL chlor, and glycerol stocks were prepared from the saturated overnight culture by adding 500 μL 50% glycerol to 1000 μL culture. The stocks of EC1 comprising the engine vector were frozen at −80° C.
- Transformation with Editing Vector: A 1 mL aliquot of a freshly-grown overnight culture of EC1 cells transformed with the engine vector was added to a 250 mL flask containing 100 mL LB/SOB+25 μg/mL chlor medium. The cells were grown to 0.4-0.7 OD, and cell growth was halted by transferring the culture to ice for 10 minutes. The cells were pelleted at 8000×g in a JA-18 rotor for 5 minutes, washed 3× with 50 mL
ice cold ddH - The following protocols address cell growth/survival bias due to dsDNA breaks:
- Transformation: 100 ng of the editing vector cloned library or editing vector isothermal nucleic acid assembly reaction was transformed by electroporation into 100 μL competent EC1 cells containing the engine vector. The electroporator was set to 2400 V in 2 mm cuvette. Following transformation, the cells were allowed to recover for 3 hours in SOB medium. A 10-fold dilution series of recovered cells (in H2O) was spot plated and the resulting CFU counts/dilution ratios were used to calculate transformation efficiency.
- Plating and Colony Arraying: 100 μL of the appropriate dilution was plated on LB medium+25 μg/mL chlor and grown at 30° C. overnight. Colonies were picked and grown overnight to saturation at 30° C. in 96-well microtiter plates.
- Induced Cutting, Editing, and Edit Validation: A replicator was used to transfer colonies in wells from the overnight growth to 200 μL fresh SOB+1% arabinose in replicate 96-well microtiter plates. The replicator transfers approximately 1-2 L per well resulting in a 100-fold dilution for outgrowth. The microtiter plates were incubated at 250 rpm shaking for 3-4 hours to allow the cells to reach mid-log phase. The plates were then transferred to a static incubator at 42° C. and incubated for 2 hours, then placed in a 30° C. incubator for 1 hour to recover. At this point, the replicate cells were ready for genomic prep and were validated via sequencing analysis. As described in relation to
FIG. 2B , additional replica plates of fresh SOB without arabinose may be used to enable functional deconvolution of inactive cut designs from the population. - Transformation: 100 ng of the editing vector cloned library or isothermal nucleic acid assembly reaction was transformed by electroporation into 100 μL competent EC1 cells containing the engine vector. The electroporator was set to 2400 V in 2 mm cuvette. Following transformation, the cells were allowed to recover for 3 hours in SOB medium. A 10-fold dilution series of recovered cells (in H2O) was spot plated and the resulting CFU counts/dilution ratios were used to calculate transformation efficiency.
- Plating and Colony Arraying: 100 μL of the appropriate dilution was plated on LB medium+25 μg/mL chlor and grown at 30° C. overnight. Colonies were picked and grown overnight to saturation in 1 mL SOB containing 25 μg/mL chlor and 100 μg/mL carb at 30° C. in 96-well microtiter plates.
- Identification of Active Cassettes and Rearray: A replicator was used to transfer colonies in wells from the overnight growth to 200 μL fresh SOB without arabinose in replicate 96-well microtiter plates. The replicator transfers approximately 1-2 L per well resulting in a 100-fold dilution for outgrowth. The replicate microtiter plates were incubated at 250 rpm shaking for 3-4 hours to allow the cells to reach mid-log growth. The plates were then transferred to a static incubator at 42° C. and incubated for 2 hours, then placed in a 30° C. incubator for 1 hour to recover. The replicator was then used to transfer cells from the replicate microtiter plates to agar plates with LB medium+g/mL chlor/100 μg/mL carb and allowed to grow overnight. Wells with active gRNAs were identified and 50 μL of cells from these colonies from the original 96-well microtiter plate were re-arrayed into “functionally-corrected” plates (e.g., the cells identified as having functional gRNAs were transferred (cherry picked) into a 96-well plate).
- Pooled Editing Using Pooled Cassettes Identified as Active: 100 μL of cells identified as having functional gRNAs were transferred into 5 mL SOB medium and grown until the culture was saturated. 1% arabinose was added to the tube and the tube was incubated for 2 hours at 30° C. Cutting/editing was induced by transferring the tube to a 42° C. shaking water bath for 2 hours. The tube was then removed from the water bath and allowed to recover for 2 hours at 30° C. in a 250 rpm shaking incubator. A diluted culture (approximately 10−4 to 10−5) was plated on LB medium containing 25 g/mL chlor and 100 μg/mL carb resulting in isolated clonal colonies. Editing was assessed/validated by targeted or whole genome sequencing.
- Transformation: 100 ng of the editing vector cloned library or isothermal nucleic acid assembly reaction was transformed by electroporation into 100 μL competent EC1 cells containing the engine vector. The electroporator was set to 2400 V in 2 mm cuvette. Following transformation, the cells were allowed to recover for 3 hours in SOB medium. A 10-fold dilution series of recovered cells (in H2O) was spot plated and the resulting CFU counts/dilution ratios were used to calculate transformation efficiency.
- Plating and Colony Arraying: 100 μL of the appropriate dilution was plated on LB medium+25 μg/mL chlor and grown at 30° C. overnight. Colonies were picked and grown overnight to saturation in 1 mL SOB containing 25 μg/mL chlor and 100 μg/mL carb at 30° C. in 96-well microtiter plates.
- Identification of Active Cassettes and Rearray: A replicator was used to transfer colonies in wells from the overnight growth to 200 μL fresh SOB without arabinose in replicate 96-well microtiter plates. The replicator transfers approximately 1-2 L per well resulting in a 100-fold dilution for outgrowth. The replicate microtiter plates were incubated at 250 rpm shaking for 3-4 hours to allow the cells to reach mid-log growth. The plates were then transferred to a static incubator at 42° C. and incubated for 2 hours, then placed in a 30° C. incubator for 1 hour to recover. The replicator was then used to transfer cells from the replicate microtiter plates to plates with LB medium+25 g/mL chlor/100 μg/mL carb and allowed to grow overnight. Wells with active gRNAs were identified and 50 μL of cells from these colonies from the original 96-well microtiter plate were re-arrayed into “functionally-corrected” plates (e.g., the cells identified as having functional gRNAs were transferred into a 96-well plate). Library Re-amplification, Cloning, and Validation: Cells identified as having functional gRNAs were pooled and DNA was extracted and isolated. Serial dilutions were made of the isolated DNA, and amplification was conducted with primers designed to amplify the editing cassettes. PCR was performed under the following conditions: 95° C. for 1 minute; 18 rounds of 95° C. for 30 seconds/60° C. for 30 seconds/72° C. for 2.5 minutes; with a final hold at 72° C. for 5 minutes. Amplicons were checked on a 1% agarose gel and pools with the cleanest output(s) were identified. The amplified cassettes were mini-prepped and eluted into 50 μL ddH2O. Next, an isothermal nucleic acid assembly reaction containing 150 ng backbone DNA with 100 ng cassette inserts was performed. An
equal volume 2× Master Mix was added to the backbone and insert, and the reaction was incubated for 45 min @ 50° C., then dialyzed for 30 min in sitting droplet with 0.25 μm filter disc. 100 ng of the isothermal nucleic acid assembly reaction was transformed by electroporation into competent EC1 cells containing the engine vector as described above. Following transformation, the cells were allowed to recover for 3 hours in SOB medium. A 10-fold dilution series of recovered cells (in H20) was spot plated and the resulting CFU counts/dilution ratios were used to calculate transformation efficiency. 100 μL of an appropriate dilution of cells were plated on LB medium+25 μg/mL chlor and grown at 30° C. overnight. Editing was assessed/validated by, e.g., sequencing. - Transformation: 100 ng of the editing vector cloned library or isothermal nucleic acid assembly reaction was transformed by electroporation into 100 μL competent EC1 cells containing the engine vector. The electroporator was set to 2400 V in 2 mm cuvette. Following transformation, the cells were allowed to recover for 3 hours in SOB medium. A 10-fold dilution series of recovered cells (in H20) was spot plated and the resulting CFU counts/dilution ratios were used to calculate transformation efficiency.
- Plating and Colony Arraying: 100 μL of the appropriate dilution was plated on LB agar medium containing 25 μg/mL chlor and +1% arabinose and grown at 30° C. for 6-8 hours. Alternatively, the cells may be grown in liquid culture in LB medium+25 μg/mL chlor at 30° C. to saturation and diluted to the appropriate concentration before plating on LB agar medium containing 25 μg/mL chlor+1% arabinose and grown at 30° C. for 6-8 hours. Following the 6-8 hour growth, the temperature of the plate was adjusted to 42° C. and the plates were incubated for two hours. The temperature was then adjusted back to 30° C. and the cells were allowed to recover overnight.
- Edited Cell Identification: Small-size colonies were identified. The small colony-size phenotype indicates cell viability was compromised during the induced-editing procedure. Efficient recovery of edited cells from the initial pool was accomplished by identifying and picking small colonies and arraying cells from these small colonies onto a 96-well plate to create a library of edited cells, or the cells from the colonies were pooled generating highly-edited cell populations for recursive editing. Editing was assessed/validated by sequencing. It was found that 85% of the small colonies were edited cells.
- Electrocompetent E. coli cells were transformed with a cloned library, an isothermal assembled library, or a process control sgRNA plasmid (escapee surrogate) as described in Examples 2-5 above. The E. coli strain carried the appropriate endonuclease and lambda red components and editing induction system (e.g., on an engine plasmid or integrated into the bacterial genome or a combination). Transformations routinely used 150 ng of plasmid DNA (or isothermal nucleic acid assembly reactions) with 150 ng of pL sgRNA backbone DNA. Following electroporation, the cells were allowed to recover in 3 mL SOB and incubated at 30° C. with shaking for 3 hours. In parallel with processing samples through the solid wall device, samples were also processed with the solid plating protocol (see Example 10 above), so as to compare “normalization” in the sold wall device with the standard benchtop process. Immediately before the cells were introduced to the permeable-bottom solid wall device, the 0.2 μm filter forming the bottom of the microwells was treated with a 0.1% TWEEN solution to effect proper spreading/distribution of the cells into the microwells of the solid wall device. The filters were placed into a Swinnex Filter Holder (47 mm, Millipore®, SX0004700) and 3 mL of a solution with 0.85% NaCl, and 0.1% TWEEN was pulled through the solid wall device and filter through using a vacuum. Different TWEEN concentrations were evaluated, and it was determined that for a 47 mm diameter solid wall device with a 0.2 M filter forming the bottom of the microwells, a pre-treatment of the solid wall device+filter with 0.1% TWEEN was preferred (data not shown).
- After the 3-hour recovery in SOB, the transformed cells were diluted and a 3 mL volume of the diluted cells was processed through the TWEEN-treated solid wall device and filter, again using a vacuum. The number of successfully transformed cells was expected to be approximately 1.0E+06 to 1.0E+08, with the goal of loading approximately 10,000 transformed cells into the current 47 mm permeable-bottom solid wall device (having ˜30,000 wells). Serial dilutions of 10−1, 10−2, and 10−3 were prepared, then 100 μL volumes of each of these dilutions were combined with 3 mL 0.85% NaCl, and the samples were loaded onto solid wall devices. Each permeable-bottom solid wall device was then removed from the Swinnex filter holder and transferred to an LB agar plate containing carbenicillin (100 μg/mL), chloramphenicol (25 μg/mL) and arabinose (1% final concentration). The solid wall devices were placed metal side “up,” so that the permeable-bottom membrane was touching the surface of the agar such that the nutrients from the plate could travel up through the filter “bottom” of the wells. The solid wall devices on the LB agar plates were incubated for 9 hours at 30° C., at 42° C. for 2 hours, then returned to incubation at 30° C., for 12-16 hour, and, in another experiment for 36-40 hours.
- At the end of the incubation the perforated disks and filters (still assembled) were removed from the supporting nutrient source (in this case an agar plate) and were photographed with a focused, “transilluminating” light source so that the number and distribution of loaded microwells on the solid wall device could be assessed (data not shown). To retrieve cells from the permeable-bottom solid wall device, the filter was transferred to a labeled sterile 100 mm petri dish which contained 15 mL of sterile 0.85% NaCl, then the petri dish was placed in a shaking incubator set to 30° C./80 RPM to gently remove the cells from the filter and resuspend the cells in the 0.85% NaCl. The cells were allowed cells to shake for 15 minutes, then were transferred to a sterile tube, e.g., a 50 mL conical centrifuge tube. The OD600 of the cell suspension was measured and at this point, the cells can be processed in different ways depending on the purpose of the study. For example, if the plasmids or libraries are designed to target a sugar metabolism pathway gene such as galK, then the resuspended cells can be spread onto MacConkey agar plates containing galactose (1% final concentration) and the appropriate antibiotics. On this differential medium, colonies that are the result of successfully-edited cells are expected to be phenotypically white in color, whereas unedited colonies are red in color. This red/white phenotype can then be used to assess the percentage of edited cells and the extent of normalization of edited and unedited cells. The results of one experiment are shown below in Table 6. In all replicates, the transformed cells were allowed to grow in the solid wall devices for 9 hours at 30° C., 2 hours at 42° C., and overnight at 30° C.
-
TABLE 6 Dilution Red White % Tween? counted colonies colonies edit No tween 10−4 72 5 6% No tween 10−4 89 3 3% No tween 10−3 64 5 7% Pre-treatment tween 10−4 71 5 7% Pre-treatment tween 10−3 443 29 6% Pre-treatment tween 10−3 149 12 7% Pre-treatment tween 10−3 83 21 20% Pre-treatment tween 10−2 318 112 26% Pre-treatment tween + 10−3 163 25 13% tween in cell loading buffer Pre-treatment tween + 10−4 132 10 7% tween in cell loading buffer Pre-treatment tween + 10−4 31 9 23% tween in cell loading buffer Pre-treatment tween + 10−3 147 18 10.9% tween in cell loading buffer Pre-treatment tween + 10−2 720 150 17% tween in cell loading buffer Pre-treatment tween + 10−3 55 15 21% tween in cell loading buffer -
FIG. 16 is a graph showing the extent of normalization of cells (% edited cells) for different dilutions of transformed cells, and no treatment with TWEEN vs. pre-treatment with TWEEN vs. pre-treatment with TWEEN+TWEEN in the buffer when loading the cells into the microwells of the solid wall device. A standard plating protocol (SPP) was conducted in parallel with the solid wall isolation experiments as a benchmark (first bar on the left in the graph). Note that the percentage of edits for the standard plating protocol was approximately 27.5%, and the percentage of edits for two replicates of the 10−3 dilution of cells with pre-treatment with TWEEN was approximately 20% and 26%, respectively. - Electrocompetent Saccharomyces cerevisiae cells were prepared as follows: The afternoon before transformation was to occur, 10 mL of YPAD was inoculated with the selected Saccharomyces cerevisiae strain. The culture was shaken at 250 RPM and 30° C. overnight. The next day, 100 mL of YPAD was added to a 250-mL baffled flask and inoculated with the overnight culture (around 2 mL of overnight culture) until the OD600 reading reached 0.3+/−0.05. The culture was placed in the 30° C. incubator shaking at 250 RPM and allowed to grow for 4-5 hours, with the OD checked every hour. When the culture reached an OD600 of approximately 1.5, 50 mL volumes were poured into two 50-mL conical vials, then centrifuged at 4300 RPM for 2 minutes at room temperature. The supernatant was removed from all 50 ml conical tubes, while avoiding disturbing the cell pellet. 50 mL of a Lithium Acetate/Dithiothreitol solution was added to each conical tube and the pellet was gently resuspended. Both suspensions were transferred to a 250 mL flask and placed in the shaker; then shaken at 30° C. and 200 RPM for 30 minutes. After incubation was complete, the suspension was transferred to two 50-mL conical vials. The suspensions then were centrifuged at 4300 RPM for 3 minutes, then the supernatant was discarded.
- Following the Lithium Acetate/Dithiothreitol treatment step, cold liquids were used and the cells were kept on ice until electroporation. 50 mL of 1 M sorbitol was added and the pellet was resuspended, centrifuged at 4300 RPM, 3 minutes, 4° C., after which the supernatant was discarded. The 1M sorbitol wash was repeated twice for a total of three washes. 50 μL of 1 M sorbitol was added to one pellet, cells were resuspended, then transferred to the other tube to suspend the second pellet. The volume of the cell suspension was measured and brought to 1 mL with cold 1 M sorbitol. At this point the cells were electrocompetent and could be transformed with a cloned library, an isothermal assembled library, or process control sgRNA plasmids. In brief, a required number of 2-mm gap electroporation cuvettes were prepared by labeling the cuvettes and then chilling on ice. The appropriate plasmid—or DNA mixture—was added to each corresponding cuvette and placed back on ice. 100 μL of electrocompetent cells was transferred to each labelled cuvette, and each sample was electroporated using appropriate electroporator conditions. 900 μL of room temperature YPAD Sorbitol media was then added to each cuvette. The cell suspension was transferred to a 14 mL culture tube and then shaken at 30° C., 250 RPM for 3 hours. After a 3 hour recovery, 9 mL of YPAD containing the appropriate antibiotic, e.g., geneticin or Hygromycin B, was added.
- At this point the transformed cells were processed in parallel in the solid wall device and the standard plating protocol (see Example 10 above), so as to compare “normalization” in the solid wall device with the standard benchtop process. Immediately before cells the cells were introduced to the permeable-bottom solid wall device, the 0.45 μm filter forming the bottom of the microwells (note that a larger-pore filter is used for yeast) was treated with a 0.1% TWEEN solution to effect proper spreading/distribution of the cells into the microwells of the solid wall device. The filters were placed into a Swinnex Filter Holder (47 mm, Millipore®, SX0004700) and 3 mL of a solution with 0.85% NaCl and 0.1% TWEEN was pulled through the solid wall device and filter through using a vacuum. Different TWEEN concentrations were evaluated, and it was determined that for a 47 mm diameter solid wall device with a 0.45 μm filter forming the bottom of the microwells, a pre-treatment of the solid wall device+filter with 0.1% TWEEN was preferred (data not shown).
- After the 3-hour recovery in SOB, the transformed cells were diluted and a 3 mL volume of the diluted cells was processed through the TWEEN-treated solid wall device and filter, again using a vacuum. The number of successfully transformed cells was expected to be approximately 1.0E+06 to 1.0E+08, with the goal of loading approximately 10,000 transformed cells into the current 47 mm permeable-bottom solid wall device (having ˜30,000 wells). Serial dilutions of 10−1, 10−2, and 10−3 were prepared, then 100 μL volumes of each of these dilutions were combined with 3 mL 0.85% NaCl, and the samples were loaded onto solid wall devices. Each permeable-bottom solid wall device was then removed from the Swinnex filter holder and transferred to an LB agar plate containing carbenicillin (100 μg/mL), chloramphenicol (25 μg/mL) and arabinose (1% final concentration). The solid wall devices were placed metal side “up,” so that the permeable-bottom membrane was touching the surface of the agar such that the nutrients from the plate could travel up through the filter “bottom” of the wells. The solid wall devices on the YPD agar plates were incubated for 2-3 days at 30° C.
- At the end of the incubation, the perforated disks and filters (still assembled) were removed from the supporting nutrient source (in this case an agar plate) and were photographed with a focused, “transilluminating” light source so that the number and distribution of loaded microwells on the solid wall device could be assessed (see
FIGS. 17A and 17B ). To retrieve cells from the permeable-bottom solid wall device, the filter was transferred to a labeled sterile 100 mm petri dish which contained 15 mL of sterile 0.85% NaCl, then the petri dish was placed in a shaking incubator set to 30° C./80 RPM to gently remove the cells from the filter and resuspend the cells in the 0.85% NaCl. The cells were allowed to shake for 15 minutes, then were transferred to a sterile tube, e.g., a 50 mL conical centrifuge tube. The OD600 of the cell suspension was measured; at this point the cells can be processed in different ways depending on the purpose of the study. For example, if an ADE2 stop codon mutagenesis library is used, successfully-edited cells should result in colonies with a red color phenotype when the resuspended cells are spread onto YPD agar plates and allowed to grow for 4-7 days. This phenotypic difference allows for a quantification of percentage of edited cells and the extent of normalization of edited and unedited cells. - mTFF module, E. coli workflow: Approximately 20 ml of E. coli was transferred from a rotating growth vial (RGV) in a cell growth module. Specially, the E. coli was EC83, an E. coli MG1655 strain comprising an engine vector coding for the XRed recombineering system and a MAD7 coding sequence (see, e.g.,
FIG. 11A ). In the RGV, the EC83 was grown in LB growth medium to an OD600 ˜0.6 and having a conductivity of ˜16,500 pS/cm. In the mTFF the cells were washed with a low-conductivity solution (10% glycerol) and concentrated in a small volume (approximately 0.80 ml) in the same low-conductivity solution. Both the input and output cell counts were determined by plating on solid media. The cell input was approximately 3.1E+09 and the cell output was approximately 2.3E+09. The output of the mTFF was used as input for the flow-through electroporation (FTEP) module. - FTEP module, E. coli workflow: Approximately 500 μl of the concentrated EC83 cells in 10% glycerol—e.g., an aliquot of the output of the mTFF—was combined with 100 μl of the assembled editing vector (see, e.g.,
FIG. 11B ) and a TWEEN solution (see Example 7 above). The cells and DNA were mixed and passed through the FTEP at a very high field strength in a high resistance solution. After transformation in the FTEP, the cells were transferred back to the cell growth module into a fresh RGV containing 3 ml SOB with chloramphenicol. The cells were incubated at 30° C. for 1 hour for recovery. The input CFU was approximately 2.3E+09 and the output CFU was approximately 9.8E+08 survival and 8.5E+05 uptake. - SWIIN module, E. coli workflow: Subsequent to the 1 hour recovery in the cell growth module, approximately 0.35 mL of the cells were combined with approximately 9.5 mL of a PBS/TWEEN solution and the cells were loaded onto the SWIIN. Once cells were loaded and growth medium (was LB with 1% arabinose, 25 ug/ml chloramphenicol and 100 μg/ml carbenicillin) was added to the permeate chamber of the SWIIN, the SWIIN was placed in a programmable incubator for the induction and editing stages. The script for the SWIIN protocol was set for a 9 hour incubation at 30° C., a 2.5 hour incubation at 42° C., then 9 additional hours at 30° C. The CFU input into the SWIIN was approximately 7.5E+04 and the CFU output was approximately 6.5E+06 in a 7.0 ml volume. To recover the cells from the SWIIN, the retentate channel was flooded to dislodge the cells with positive pressure applied to the permeate reservoirs, thus pushing fluid from the permeate reservoirs into the retentate reservoirs. Following this “push,” all fluid was swept to one of the retentate reservoirs by applying a vacuum to the other retentate reservoir. Finally, the cell solution from retentate reservoir into which the fluid was swept was transferred into a vial, and all liquid was aspirated out of both retentate reservoirs. (Also see Example 10, below.)
- Amplicon and Singleplex sequencing: Cells were recovered from the SWIIN with a PBS solution, and 100 μl of the undiluted cell suspension was spread on an LB chlor/carb agar plate and incubated overnight at 30° C. This plate was then “scraped” and used as the amplicon DNA input. Dilutions were also prepared from the PBS/cell suspension and then plated on an LB chlor/carb agar plate and incubated overnight at 30° C.; isolated colonies were selected and used for singleplex sequencing.
- In addition to loading, growing and editing cells on the SWIIN module, curing can be performed on the SWIIN module as well. (See, e.g., Example 12, below.)
-
FIGS. 4AA 4DD are simplified overviews of various parameters for loading cells onto a SWIIN module, performing editing, and removing or recovering the edited cells from the SWIIN module. The steps ofFIGS. 4AA-4DD correspond to the steps listed in Tables 3-5, with the exception that step 1 (loading the SWIIN module into the automated multi-module cell processing instrument) and step 32 (unloading the SWIIN from the automated multi-module cell processing instrument) are not represented onFIGS. 4AA-4DD .FIG. 4AA begins withstep 2, where 10 mL of PBS/0.01% Tween80 was transferred from a reagent cartridge to permeatereservoir 1. At this initial step,retentate reservoir 1,retentate reservoir 2, and permeatereservoir 1 were under positive pressure,flow sensor 1 detected a high flow rate and flowsensor 2 detected a low flow rate. Atstep 3, additional PBS/0.01% Tween80 was loaded into the permeate channel and a bubble flush was performed. Atstep 4, more PBS/0.01% Tween80 was loaded into the permeate channel to fill the permeate channel.Step 4 ended with a flow meter trigger, and flowsensor 1 returned to baseline once the permeate channel was filled with liquid. - At
step 5, a vacuum was applied atretentate reservoirs step 6, negative pressure was applied toretentate reservoir 2, thereby sweeping all liquid toretentate reservoir 2. Atstep 7, the liquid inretentate reservoirs step 8, 9.5 mL of PBS/0.01% Tween80 was transferred from the reagent cartridge toretentate reservoir 1, and atstep 9, 0.5 mL of transformed cells were transferred from the transformation module (the flow-through electroporation device) toretentate reservoir 1. Atstep 10, the cell-containing liquid was pipetted up and down inretentate reservoir 1, and atstep 11, the cell-containing liquid was pulled fromretentate reservoir 1 into the retentate channel leaving minimal fluid inretentate reservoirs Step 11 is sensitive to timing and was thus controlled via air displacement pipette liquid level detection inretentate reservoir 1. -
FIG. 4BB begins withstep 12, in which the fluid in the serpentine channel in the retentate member was pulled through the membrane or filter member on low vacuum; that is, negative pressure was applied to both permeatereservoirs permeate reservoirs step 14, all fluid was swept to permeatereservoir 1 by applying positive pressure toretentate reservoirs reservoir 2. Remaining liquid was aspirated out ofpermeate reservoirs step 5, with the air displacement pipette accessingpermeate reservoir 1. Atstep 16, 10 mL medium was transferred from the reagent cartridge to permeatereservoir 1, and at step 17, the medium was transferred frompermeate reservoir 1 into the permeate channel. Step 17 is sensitive to timing and thus was controlled via liquid level detection via a air displacement pipette inretentate reservoir 1. At the end of step 17, some amount of liquid resided inpermeate reservoir 2, and atstep 18, liquid (permeate) was aspirated out ofpermeate reservoirs - Steps 19-23 are not represented in
FIGS. 4AA-4DD . At step 19, the SWIIN module was incubated at 30° C. with intermittent airflow and medium rinses/exchanges, as deemed necessary. Instep 20, the temperature of the SWIIN module was raised to 42° C., and at step 21 the SWIIN module was incubated for 2 hours. At step 22, the temperature of the SWIIN module was ramped down from 42° C. to 30° C., and the SWIIN was then incubated at 30° C. for 9 hours. During this incubation the manifold arms of the SWIIN assembly may be unsealed and resealed to effect airflow. In addition, media rinses or exchanges may be performed. -
FIG. 4CC begins withstep 24, where medium was pulled out of the permeate channel intopermeate reservoir 2, by applying negative pressure to permeatereservoir 2. During this time, the flow rate forflow sensor 1 and flowsensor 2 are roughly the same at 0, then flowsensor 2 spiked to 0, rebounded, then spiked to 0 again triggeringflow sensor 2.Step 24 ended with fluid inpermeate reservoir 2. At step 25, the liquid was aspirated out ofpermeate reservoir 2 by applying a vacuum to permeatereservoir 2, and atstep reservoir 1. At step 27 the medium/10% glycerol was pulled frompermeate reservoir 1 into the permeate channel, and at the end of this step, a minimal amount of fluid remains inpermeate reservoir 2. At step 28 (seeFIG. 4DD ), the retentate channel was flooded (filled) to dislodge the cells with positive pressure applied to permeatereservoirs retentate reservoir 2 by applying a vacuum toretentate reservoir 2. Step 29 is controlled by the trigger offlow sensor 1.Step 30 involved aspirating the cell solution fromretentate reservoir 2 into a vial, and step 31 involved aspirating all liquid out of both retentate reservoirs. The final step,step 32, is not represented onFIG. 4DD , but involved removing the SWIIN from the automated multi-module cell processing instrument. - Singleplex automated genomic editing using MAD7 nuclease, a library with 94 different edits in a single gene (yagP) and employing a 200K SWIIN module (i.e., a SWIIN module with approximately 200K wells) such as those exemplified in
FIGS. 4F-4R was successfully performed. The engine vector used was substantially similar to that depicted inFIG. 11A (with MAD7 under the control of the pL inducible promoter), and the editing vector used was substantially similar to that depicted inFIG. 11B —including the editing cassette being under the control of the pL inducible promoter, and the λ Red recombineering system under control of the pBAD inducible promoter pBAD—with the exception that the editing cassette comprises the 94 yagP gene edits (donor DNAs) and the appropriate corresponding gRNAs. Two SWIIN workflows were compared, and further were benchmarked against the standard plating protocol (see Example 7). The SWIIN protocols different from one another that in one set of replicates LB medium containing arabinose was used to distribute the cells in the SWIIN (arabinose was used to induce the λ Red recombineering system (which allows for repair of double-strand breaks in E. coli that are created during editing), and in the other set of replicates SOB medium without arabinose was used to distribute the cells in the SWIIN and for initial growth, with medium exchange performed to replace the SOB medium without arabinose with SOB medium with arabinose. Approximately 70K cells were loaded into the 200K SWIIN. - In all protocols (standard plating, LB-SWIIN, and SOB-SWIIN), the cells were allowed to grow at 30° C. for 9 hours and editing was induced by raising the temperature to 42° C. for 2.5 hours, then the temperature was returned to 30° C. and the cells were grown overnight. The results of this experiment are shown in
FIG. 18 and in Table 7 below. Note that similar editing performance was observed with the four replicates of the two SWIIN workflows, indicating that the performance of SWIIN plating with and without arabinose in the initial medium is similar. Editing percentage in the standard plating protocol was approximately 77%, in bulk liquid was approximately 67%, and for the SWIIN replicates ranged from approximately 63% to 71%. Note that the percentage of unique edit cassettes divided by the total number of edit cassettes was similar for each protocol. -
TABLE 7 SWIIN SWIIN SWIIN SWIIN SOB then SOB then Standard LB/Ara LB/Ara SOB/Ara SOB/Ara Plating Rep. A Rep. B Rep. A Rep. B 40006 edit calls/ 0.777 0.633 0.719 0.663 0.695 identified wells Unique edit 0.49 0.49 0.43 0.50 0.51 cassettes/ total edit cassettes - Experiments were carried out to determine whether curing could be performed on the SWIIN. “Curing” is a process in which one or more editing vectors used in a prior round of editing is eliminated from the edited cells, or, as in this Example, a process in which the engine vector is removed from edited cells at the end of the editing process. Curing can be accomplished by “active” curing, which refers to cleaving a vector at a curing target sequence. In active curing, in addition to a curing target sequence, there is also provided a genetic element (for example, a curing gRNA) on the vector to be cured or on another vector that targets the curing target sequence with the result of rendering the vector to be cured nonfunctional by, e.g., double-stranded that is not repaired. Curing can also be accomplished by “passive” curing which involves diluting the vector(s) to be cured in the cell population via cell growth; that is, the more growth cycles the cells go through, the fewer daughter cells will retain the editing or engine vector(s)). Passive curing can also be accomplished by, e.g., utilizing a heat-sensitive origin of replication on the vector to be cured, which essentially prevents the vector from replicating.
- In this curing protocol, the engine vector was “passively” cured once editing had taken place. Curing of the engine vector after one or more editing steps is desired to rid the cell population of the coding sequence for the nuclease. In the curing protocol used in this Example 12, E. coli cells were transformed with an engine vector very similar to that described in relation to
FIG. 11A in Example 1 above. The engine vector comprised the MAD7 nuclease coding sequence under the control of the inducible pL promoter (induced by an increase in temperature; e.g., seeFIG. 1C and the description thereof supra), the XRed recombineering system under the control of the pBAD promoter (induced by the addition of arabinose to the growth medium), and a selective marker comprising the coding sequence for chloramphenicol resistance. The “curing” engine vector used in this Example 12, however, also comprised a heat-sensitive origin of replication, which when the temperature is raised to 42° C. fails to bind the protein needed to replicate the engine vector. Preventing replication of the engine vector combined with active cell division thereby effectively dilutes the engine vector from the cell population. The editing vector used in this Example 12 was an editing vector similar to that described in relation toFIG. 11B in Example 1 above, where an edit changed coding for an amino acid residue in the XylA gene to a stop coding, allowing for a phenotypic read out to show editing. - Protocols for preparing E. coli cells for editing are described in Example 9 above; a step-wise protocol for loading, performing editing, and unloading a SWIIN is described in Example 10 above; and protocols for isolation, growth and editing on the SWIIN is described in Example 11 above. Four different curing protocols were performed after cell editing on the SWIIN. Editing was performed with chloramphenicol in the growth medium to select for the engine vector. The first curing protocol comprised recovering cells from the SWIIN and growing the recovered cells in bulk liquid (without chloramphenicol) at 42° C. for six hours. The second curing protocol comprised recovering cells from the SWIIN and loading and growing the recovered cells on a fresh SWIIN (without chloramphenicol) at 42° C. for six hours. The third curing protocol comprised recovering a fraction of the cells from the SWIIN to make room for additional cell growth, performing medium exchange on the SWIIN for medium without chloramphenicol, then continuing to grow the cells on the SWIIN at 42° C. for six hours. The fourth curing protocol like the third curing protocol did not comprise a cell recovery step; instead, the cells remained on the SWIIN, medium exchange was performed, and the cells were grown at 42° C. for six hours. (Note that the data reported in
FIG. 13 described above demonstrates that cell viability is not impacted by raising the temperature to 42° C.) - The curing efficiency (%) for each of these curing protocols is shown in
FIG. 19 . Note all protocols provided a curing efficiency of greater than 85%, where the first and second protocols provided a curing efficiency of 100%, the third protocol provided a curing efficiency of approximately 97%, and the fourth protocol provided a curing efficiency of approximately 85.5%. - In addition to passive curing on the SWIIN, active curing may be performed as well, where, e.g., editing vectors are cleared between rounds of editing. In active curing, a sequence on the vector to be cured (e.g., the editing vector between rounds of editing) comprises a curing target sequence that is subjected to a double-stranded cut by, e.g., a curing gRNA. See, e.g., U.S. Ser. No. 62/857,967, filed 6 Jun. 2019.
- As described above, because the present methods and modules allow edited cells to be detected in a background of unedited cells, cellular target sites located near non-canonical PAMs can be detected. The present experiments were performed with MAD7, a nucleic acid-guided nuclease that prefers the T-rich PAMs TTTV and CTTV.
FIG. 20A is a depletion plot showing that there is reduced activity at TCTV PAMS in E. coli, and a preference for TCTG over TCTA or TCTC.FIG. 20B is a bar graph showing TCTV PAMs lead to low efficiency editing from randomly-picked colonies following standard plating-based editing using a library targeting the galK locus in E. coli. The measurements correspond to the fraction of colonies with white phenotype on Mackonkey agar supplemented with galactose. Cherry-picking small colonies yielded an approximate 5-6× gain in efficiency in identifying cells with edits located at TCTV PAMs. Sanger sequencing of the genomic amplicons from these edited clones confirmed TCTV PAM targeting, with many in the TCTG target set (data not shown). Table 8 below shows the PAM/Spacer sequences for which editing was observed in this experiment. -
TABLE 8 Spacer Distance Cassette Target GC from PAM Description PAM Spacer Sequence Content to cut galK_C46_TGC- TCTG CCCTGCGCGATTGATTATCAA 0.48 13 TAA_TCTG-GTTA_145_7 SEQ ID No. 1 galK_A47_GCG- TCTG CCCTGCGCGATTGATTATCAA 0.48 10 TAA_TCTG-GTTA_145_10 SEQ ID No. 2 galK_I48_ATT- TCTG CCCTGCGCGATTGATTATCAA 0.48 7 TAA_TCTG-GTTA_155_13 SEQ ID No. 3 galK_R97_CGT- TCTG CAACTGCGTAACAACAGCTTC 0.48 37 TAA_TCTG-GTTA_145_17 SEQ ID No. 4 galK_D150_GAC- TCTG CCGCTCCACGGCGCACAAATC 0.67 10 TAA_TCTG-GTTA_145_10 SEQ ID No. 5 galK_A161_GCA- TCTG CCGCTGGACGGCGCACAAATC 0.57 16 TAA_TCTG-GTTA_145_7 SEQ ID No. 6 - Singleplex automated genomic editing using MAD7 nuclease was successfully performed with an automated multi-module instrument such as that shown in
FIGS. 5A-5D . See U.S. Pat. No. 9,982,279, issued 29 May 2018 and Ser. No. 10/240,167, issued 9 Apr. 2019. - An ampR plasmid backbone and a lacZ_F172* editing cassette were assembled via isothermal nucleic acid assembly into an “editing vector” in an isothermal nucleic acid assembly module included in the automated instrument. lacZ_F172 functionally knocks out the lacZ gene. “lacZ_F172*” indicates that the edit happens at the 172nd residue in the lacZ amino acid sequence. Following assembly, the product was de-salted in the isothermal nucleic acid assembly module using AMPure beads, washed with 80% ethanol, and eluted in buffer. The assembled editing vector and recombineering-ready, electrocompetent E. Coli cells were transferred into a transformation module for electroporation. The cells and nucleic acids were combined and allowed to mix for 1 minute, and electroporation was performed for 30 seconds. The parameters for the poring pulse were: voltage, 2400 V; length, 5 ms; interval, 50 ms; number of pulses, 1; polarity, +. The parameters for the transfer pulses were: Voltage, 150 V; length, 50 ms; interval, 50 ms; number of pulses, 20; polarity, +/−. Following electroporation, the cells were transferred to a recovery module (another growth module) and allowed to recover in SOC medium containing chloramphenicol. Carbenicillin was added to the medium after 1 hour, and the cells were allowed to recover for another 2 hours. After recovery, the cells were held at 4° C. until recovered by the user.
- After the automated process and recovery, an aliquot of cells was plated on MacConkey agar base supplemented with lactose (as the sugar substrate), chloramphenicol and carbenicillin and grown until colonies appeared. White colonies represented functionally edited cells, purple colonies represented un-edited cells. All liquid transfers were performed by the automated liquid handling device of the automated multi-module cell processing instrument.
- The result of the automated processing was that approximately 1.0E−03 total cells were transformed (comparable to conventional benchtop results), and the editing efficiency was 83.5%. The lacZ_172 edit in the white colonies was confirmed by sequencing of the edited region of the genome of the cells. Further, steps of the automated cell processing were observed remotely by webcam and text messages were sent to update the status of the automated processing procedure.
- Recursive editing was successfully achieved using the automated multi-module cell processing system. An ampR plasmid backbone and a lacZ_V10* editing cassette were assembled via isothermal nucleic acid assembly into an “editing vector” in an isothermal nucleic acid assembly module included in the automated system. Similar to the lacZ_F172 edit, the lacZ_V10 edit functionally knocks out the lacZ gene. “lacZ_V10” indicates that the edit happens at
amino acid position 10 in the lacZ amino acid sequence. Following assembly, the product was de-salted in the isothermal nucleic acid assembly module using AMPure beads, washed with 80% ethanol, and eluted in buffer. The first assembled editing vector and the recombineering-ready electrocompetent E. Coli cells were transferred into a transformation module for electroporation. The cells and nucleic acids were combined and allowed to mix for 1 minute, and electroporation was performed for 30 seconds. The parameters for the poring pulse were: voltage, 2400 V; length, 5 ms; interval, 50 ms; number of pulses, 1; polarity, +. The parameters for the transfer pulses were: Voltage, 150 V; length, 50 ms; interval, 50 ms; number of pulses, 20; polarity, +/−. Following electroporation, the cells were transferred to a recovery module (another growth module) allowed to recover in SOC medium containing chloramphenicol. Carbenicillin was added to the medium after 1 hour, and the cells were grown for another 2 hours. The cells were then transferred to a centrifuge module and a media exchange was then performed. Cells were resuspended in TB containing chloramphenicol and carbenicillin where the cells were grown to OD600 of 2.7, then concentrated and rendered electrocompetent. - During cell growth, a second editing vector was prepared in the isothermal nucleic acid assembly module. The second editing vector comprised a kanamycin resistance gene, and the editing cassette comprised a galK Y145* edit. If successful, the galK Y145* edit confers on the cells the ability to uptake and metabolize galactose. The edit generated by the galK Y154* cassette introduces a stop codon at the 154th amino acid residue, changing the tyrosine amino acid to a stop codon. This edit makes the galK gene product non-functional and inhibits the cells from being able to metabolize galactose. Following assembly, the second editing vector product was de-salted in the isothermal nucleic acid assembly module using AMPure beads, washed with 80% ethanol, and eluted in buffer. The assembled second editing vector and the electrocompetent E. Coli cells (that were transformed with and selected for the first editing vector) were transferred into a transformation module for electroporation, using the same parameters as detailed above. Following electroporation, the cells were transferred to a recovery module (another growth module), allowed to recover in SOC medium containing carbenicillin. After recovery, the cells were held at 4° C. until retrieved, after which an aliquot of cells were plated on LB agar supplemented with chloramphenicol, and kanamycin. To quantify both lacZ and galK edits, replica patch plates were generated on two media types: 1) MacConkey agar base supplemented with lactose (as the sugar substrate), chloramphenicol, and kanamycin, and 2) MacConkey agar base supplemented with galactose (as the sugar substrate), chloramphenicol, and kanamycin. All liquid transfers are performed by the automated liquid handling device of the automated multi-module cell processing system.
- In this recursive editing experiment, 41% of the colonies screened had both the lacZ and galK edits, the results of which were comparable to the double editing efficiencies obtained using a “benchtop” or manual approach.
- While this invention is satisfied by embodiments in many different forms, as described in detail in connection with preferred embodiments of the invention, it is understood that the present disclosure is to be considered as exemplary of the principles of the invention and is not intended to limit the invention to the specific embodiments illustrated and described herein. Numerous variations may be made by persons skilled in the art without departure from the spirit of the invention. The scope of the invention will be measured by the appended claims and their equivalents. The abstract and the title are not to be construed as limiting the scope of the present invention, as their purpose is to enable the appropriate authorities, as well as the general public, to quickly determine the general nature of the invention. In the claims that follow, unless the term “means” is used, none of the features or elements recited therein should be construed as means-plus-function limitations pursuant to 35 U.S.C. § 112, ¶6.
-
TABLE 1 SWIIN Design 1 Valve Status and Pressure Mani- SV9- SV10- Description fold/ SV1- SV2- SV3- SV4- SV5- SV6- SV7- SV8- PUMP PUMP of step Step arm pump PR1 PR2 RR1 RR2 PR3 PR4 PR5 RR4 “P” “V” psi Load SWIIN 1 open 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 module on instrument Load 7.5 ml of 2 open 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 cell suspension into RR1 and RR3 Fill retentate 3 closed 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0.5 layer with cell suspension Let cells settle to 4 closed 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 the vicinity of the perforated sheet and into microwells Drive medium in 5 closed 1 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 −5 the retentate layer across membrane Open manifold 6 open 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Remove excess 7 open 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 medium from PRs with pipettor Load 7.5 ml 8 open 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 growth medium into PR1 and PR3 Close manifold 9 closed 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Flush permeate 10 closed 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 layer with growth medium from PR1 to PR2 and PR3 Open manifold 11 open 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Remove excess 12 open 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0.5 medium from PRs with pipettor Load 7.5 ml 13 open 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 growth medium into PR1 and PR3 Close manifold 14 closed 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 1 −5 Flush permeate 15 closed 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 layer with growth medium from PR1 to PR2 and PR3 to PR4 via gravity Open manifold 16 open 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Remove excess 17 open 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 medium from PRs with pipettor Close manifold 18 closed 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Incubate at 30° C. 19 closed 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0.25 for 4.5 hours Open manifold 20 open 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Load 7.5 ml 21 open 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 growth medium into PR1 and PR3 Close manifold 22 closed 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Incubate at 30° C. 23 closed 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0.25 for 4.5 hours Induce at 42° C. 24 closed 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0.25 for 2 hours Incubate at 30° C. 25 closed 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0.25 for 9 hours Aspirate cells 26 closed 1 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 1 1 −5 into RR1 and RR2 Open manifold 27 open 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Recover cells 28 open 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 from RR1 and RR3 with pipettor Remove 29 open 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 remaining medium from PR1 and PR2 and PR3 and PR4 -
TABLE 2 SWIIN Design 1: Reservoir Volumes RR1 and RR3 RR2 and RR4 PR1 and PR3 PR2 and PR4 Temperature Description of step Step Initial/Final Initial/Final Initial/Final Initial/Final (° C.) Load SWIIN module on instrument 1 0/0 0/0 0/0 0/0 25 Load 7.5 ml of cell suspension into RR1 2 0/7.5 TBD/TBD 0/0 0/0 25 and RR3 Fill retentate layer with cell suspension 3 7.5/0 TBD/TBD 0/0 0/0 25 Let cells settle to the vicinity of the 4 0/0 TBD/TBD 0/0 0/0 4 perforated sheet and into microwells Drive medium in the retentate layer 5 0/0 TBD/TBD 0/1 0/1 30 across membrane Open manifold 6 0/0 TBD/TBD 1/1 1/1 30 Remove excess medium from PRs with 7 0/0 TBD/TBD 1/0 1/0 30 pipettor Load 7.5 ml growth medium into PR1 8 0/0 TBD/TBD 0/7.5 0/0 30 and PR3 Close manifold 9 0/0 TBD/TBD 7.5/7.5 0/0 30 Flush permeate layer with growth 10 0/0 TBD/TBD 7.5/3.75 0/3.75 30 medium from PR1 to PR2 and PR3 Open manifold 11 0/0 TBD/TBD 3.75/3.75 3.75/3.75 30 Remove excess medium from PRs with 12 0/0 TBD/TBD 3.75/0 3.75/0 30 pipettor Load 7.5 ml growth medium into PR1 13 0/0 TBD/TBD 0/7.5 0/0 30 and PR3 Close manifold 14 0/0 TBD/TBD 7.5/7.5 0/0 30 Flush permeate layer with growth 15 0/0 TBD/TBD 7.5/3.75 0/3.75 30 medium from PR1 to PR2 and PR3 to PR4 via gravity Open manifold 16 0/0 TBD/TBD 3.75/3.75 3.75/3.75 30 Remove excess medium from PRs with 17 0/0 TBD/TBD 3.75/0 3.75/0 30 pipettor Close manifold 18 0/0 TBD/TBD 0/0 0/0 30 Incubate at 30° C. for 4.5 hours 19 0/0 TBD/TBD 0/0 0/0 30 Open manifold 20 0/0 TBD/TBD 0/0 0/0 30 Load 7.5 ml growth medium into PR1 21 0/0 TBD/TBD 0/7.5 0/0 30 and PR3 Close manifold 22 0/0 TBD/TBD 7.5/3.75 0/3.75 30 Incubate at 30° C. for 4.5 hours 23 0/0 TBD/TBD 3.75/3.75 3.75/3.75 30 Induce at 42° C. for 2 hours 24 0/0 TBD/TBD 3.75/3.75 3.75/3.75 42 Incubate at 30° C. for 9 hours 25 0/0 TBD/TBD 3.75/3.75 3.75/3.75 30 Aspirate cells into RR1 and RR2 26 0/5 TBD/TBD 3.75/1.25 3.75/1.25 RT Open manifold 27 5/5 TBD/TBD 1.25/1.25 1.25/1.25 RT Recover cells from RR1 and RR3 with 28 5/0 TBD/TBD 1.25/1.25 1.25/1.25 RT pipettor Remove remaining medium from PR1 29 0/0 TBD/TBD 1.25/0 1.25/0 RT and PR2 and PR3 and PR4 -
TABLE 3 SWIIN Design 2 Valve Status and Prop Valve PSIProp Prop Manifold Manifold SV- SV- SV1 SV2 SV3 SV4 Valve 1 Valve 2Description of step Step ARM 1 ARM 2Pump POS NEG (RR1) (PR1) (PR2) (RR2) (psi) (psi) Load SWIIN cartridge 1 open open 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 on the instrument Transfer 10 mL PBS- 2 open closed 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0.01% Tween80 from Reagent Strip to PR1 Load PBS- 3 closed sealed 1 1 0 0 1 0 0 0.5 0.5 0.01% Tween80 into Permeate channel— Bubble Flush Load PBS- 4 closed sealed 1 1 0 1 1 0 1 0.5 0.5 0.01% Tween80 into Permeate channel— Fill Channel Flood Retentate— 5 sealed sealed 1 0 1 1 0 0 1 −0.7 −0.7 Symmetrically Apply Vacuum to Retentate Flood Retentate— 6 sealed sealed 1 0 1 0 0 0 1 0 −0.7 Sweep to RR2 Aspirate liquid out of 7 open open 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 RR1 & RR2 Transfer 9.5 mL of 8 open closed 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 PBS-0.01% Tween80 from Reagent Strip to RR1 Transfer 0.5 mL cell 9 open closed 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Solution from FTEP to RR1 Pipette cell solution 10 open closed 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 up/down in RR1 Pull cell solution 11 open sealed 1 0 1 0 0 0 1 0 −0.7 from RR1 into Retentate Channel Pull retentate 12 sealed sealed 1 0 1 0 1 1 0 −0.7 −0.7 through membrane (low vac) Pull retentate 13 sealed sealed 1 0 1 0 1 1 0 −1 −1 through membrane (high vac) Sweep all fluid to PR1 14 sealed sealed 1 1 0 1 0 1 1 0.5 .05 Aspirate liquid out of 15 open open 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 PR1 & PR2 Transfer 10 mL media 16 open closed 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 from Reagent Strip to PR1 Load media from PR1 17 open closed 1 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 −0.7 into Permeate channel Aspirate liquid out of 18 open open 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 PR1 & PR2 INCUBATE SWIIN 30 C. 19 closed closed 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 #1—may require intermittent airflow, media rinses Ramp up (30 C. to 20 closed closed 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 42 C.) INCUBATE SWIIN 21 closed closed 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 42 C.—may require intermittent airflow, media rinses Ramp down (42 C. to 22 closed closed 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 30 C.) INCUBATE SWIIN 30 C. 23 closed closed 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 #2—may require intermittent airflow, media rinses Pull media out of 24 sealed sealed 1 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 −0.7 Permeate channel into PR2 Aspirate liquid out of 25 open open 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 PR2 Transfer 10 mL 26 open closed 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 media + 10% glycerol from Reagent Strip to PR1 Pull 27 open sealed 1 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 −0.7 media + 10% glycerol from PR1 into Permeate channel Flood Retentate— 28 sealed sealed 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 1 1 Dislodge Cells Sweep all fluid to RR2 29 sealed sealed 1 0 1 0 0 0 1 0 −0.7 Aspirate 5 mL cell 30 closed open 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 solution from RR2 into final vial Aspirate liquid out of 31 open open 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 RR1 & RR2 Unload SWIIN 32 open open 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 -
TABLE 4 SWIIN Design 2 Flow Meter StatusFM1 (PR2) FM1 (PR2) FM2 (RR2) FM2 (RR2) Valve delay after Requires Description of step Detection Threshold Detection Threshold spike(s) pLLD Duration (sec) Load SWIIN cartridge on the NA NA NA NA NA 0 N/ A instrument Transfer 10 mL PBS- NA NA NA NA NA 0 as needed 0.01% Tween80 from Reagent Strip to PR1 Load PBS-0.01% Tween80 into NA NA NA NA NA 0 0.5 Permeate channel—Bubble Flush Load PBS-0.01% Tween80 into NA NA FALL 10 5 0 until FM trigger Permeate channel—Fill Channel Flood Retentate—Symmetrically Apply NA NA NA NA NA 0 30 Vacuum to Retentate Flood Retentate—Sweep to RR2 NA NA NA NA NA 0 60 Aspirate liquid out of RR1 & RR2 NA NA NA NA NA 0 determined by ADP Transfer 9.5 mL of PBS-0.01% Tween80 NA NA NA NA NA 0 determined by from Reagent Strip to RR1 ADP Transfer 0.5 mL cell Solution from FTEP NA NA NA NA NA 0 determined by to RR1 ADP Pipette cell solution up/down in RR1 NA NA NA NA NA 0 10 Pull cell solution from RR1 into NA NA NA NA NA 1 until RR1 & RR2 Retentate Channel are equal volume Pull retentate through membrane NA NA NA NA NA 0 90 (low vac) Pull retentate through membrane NA NA NA NA NA 0 30 (high vac) Sweep all fluid to PR1 RISE 50 NA NA 0 0 until FM trigger Aspirate liquid out of PR1 & PR2 NA NA NA NA NA 0 determined by ADP Transfer 10 mL media from Reagent NA NA NA NA NA 0 determined by Strip to PR1 ADP Load media from PR1 into Permeate NA NA NA NA NA 1 until PR1 is nearly channel exhausted Aspirate liquid out of PR1 & PR2 NA NA NA NA NA 0 determined by ADP INCUBATE SWIIN 30 C. # 1—may requireNA NA NA NA NA 0 32400 intermittent airflow, media rinses Ramp up (30 C. to 42 C.) NA NA NA NA NA 0 900 INCUBATE SWIIN 42 C.—may require NA NA NA NA NA 0 7200 intermittent airflow, media rinses Ramp down (42 C. to 30 C.) NA NA NA NA NA 0 900 INCUBATE SWIIN 30C. # 2—may requireNA NA NA NA NA 0 32400 intermittent airflow, media rinses Pull media out of Permeate channel RISE 50 NA NA 0 0 until FM trigger into PR2 Aspirate liquid out of PR2 NA NA NA NA NA 0 determined by ADP Transfer 10 mL media + 10% glycerol NA NA NA NA NA 0 determined by from Reagent Strip to PR1 ADP Pull media + 10% glycerol from PR1 into NA NA NA NA NA 1 until PR1 and PR2 Permeate channel are equal volume Flood Retentate—Dislodge Cells NA NA NA NA NA 0 30 Sweep all fluid to RR2 NA NA RISE 50 0 0 until FM trigger Aspirate 5 mL cell solution from RR2 NA NA NA NA NA 0 determined by into final vial ADP Aspirate liquid out of RR1 & RR2 NA NA NA NA NA 0 determined by ADP Unload SWIIN NA NA NA NA NA 0 N/A -
TABLE 5 SWIIN Design 2 Reservoir VolumesVolumes (Assume: SWIIN Volume = 5mL) RR1 RR1 PR1 PR1 PR2 PR2 RR2 RR2 Temperature Description of step Initial Final Initial 2 Final 2Initial 3 Final 3 Initial 4 Final 4 (° C). Notes Load SWIIN cartridge 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 Continue Ramp Up on the instrument (RT to 30) Transfer 10 mL PBS- 0.0 0.0 10.0 10.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 Continue Ramp Up 0.01% Tween80 from (RT to 30) Reagent Strip to PR1 Load PBS- 0.0 0.0 10.0 9.8 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 Continue Ramp Up This 0.5 s step consumes 0.01% Tween80 into (RT to 30) very little liquid Permeate channel— Bubble Flush Load PBS- 0.0 0.0 9.8 2.5 0.0 2.5 0.0 0.0 Continue Ramp Up Requires debounce 0.01% Tween80 into (RT to 30) delay for flow sensor to Permeate channel— reach high, trigger Fill Channel threshold untested Flood Retentate— 0.0 2.5 2.5 0.0 2.5 0.0 0.0 2.5 Continue Ramp Up Symmetrically Apply (RT to 30) Vacuum to Retentate Flood Retentate— 2.5 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 2.5 10.0 Continue Ramp Up Sweep to RR2 (RT to 30) Aspirate liquid out of 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 10.0 0.0 Continue Ramp Up RR1 & RR2 (RT to 30) Transfer 9.5 mL of 0.0 9.5 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 Continue Ramp Up PBS-0.01% Tween80 (RT to 30) from Reagent Strip to RR1 Transfer 0.5 mL cell 0.0 10.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 Continue Ramp Up Solution from FTEP (RT to 30) to RR1 Pipette cell solution 0.0 10.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 Continue Ramp Up up/down in RR1 (RT to 30) Pull cell solution 10.0 2.5 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 2.5 Continue Ramp Up from RR1 into (RT to 30) Retentate Channel Pull retentate 2.5 0.0 0.0 2.5 0.0 2.5 2.5 0.0 Continue Ramp Up through membrane (RT to 30) (low vac) Pull retentate 0.0 0.0 2.5 2.5 2.5 2.5 0.0 0.0 Continue Ramp Up This step is only here as a through membrane (RT to 30) safeguard, all liquid (high vac) should have transferred in prev step Sweep all fluid to PR1 0.0 0.0 2.5 10.0 2.5 0.0 0.0 0.0 Continue Ramp Up (RT to 30) Aspirate liquid out of 0.0 0.0 10.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 Continue Ramp Up PR1 & PR2 (RT to 30) Transfer 10 mL media 0.0 0.0 0.0 10.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 Continue Ramp Up from Reagent Strip to (RT to 30) PR1 Load media from PR1 0.0 0.0 10.0 0.5 0.0 4.5 0.0 0.0 Continue Ramp Up into Permeate (RT to 30) channel Aspirate liquid out of 0.0 0.0 0.5 0.0 4.5 0.0 0.0 0.0 Continue Ramp Up May keep some media in PR1 & PR2 (RT to 30) PR1/PR2 reservoirs during incubation INCUBATE SWIIN 30 C. 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 30 9 hours; may #1—may require intermittently seal intermittent airflow, manifold arms for media rinses airflow, media rinses Ramp up (30 C. to 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 Ramp Up 15 minutes; Ramp rate 42 C.) (30 to 42) still being worked by G8 INCUBATE SWIIN 0.0. 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 42 2 hours; may 42 C.—may require intermittently seal intermittent airflow, manifold arms for media rinses airflow, media rinses Ramp down (42 C. to 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 Ramp Down 15 minutes; Ramp rate 30 C.) (42 to 30) still being worked on by G8 INCUBATE SWIIN 30 C. 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 30 9 hours; may #2—may require intermittently seal intermittent airflow, manifold arms for media rinses airflow, media rinses Pull media out of 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 10.0 0.0 0.0 Ramp Down Permeate channel (30 to RT) into PR2 Aspirate liquid out of 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 Continue Ramp PR2 Down (30 to RT) Transfer 10 mL 0.0 0.0 0.0 10.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 Continue Ramp media + 10% glycerol Down (30 to RT) from Reagent Strip to PR1 Pull 0.0 0.0 10.0 2.5 0.0 2.5 0.0 0.0 Continue Ramp media + 10% glycerol Down (30 to RT) from PR1 into Permeate channel Flood Retentate— 0.0 2.5 2.5 0.0 2.5 0.0 0.0 2.5 Continue Ramp Dislodge Cells Down (30 to RT) Sweep all fluid to RR2 2.5 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 10.0 Continue Ramp Down (30 to RT) Aspirate 5 mL cell 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 5.0 Continue Ramp solution from RR2 Down (30 to RT) into final vial Aspirate liquid out of 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 Continue Ramp RR1 & RR2 Down (30 to RT) Unload SWIIN 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 Continue Ramp Down (30 to RT)
Claims (20)
Priority Applications (1)
Application Number | Priority Date | Filing Date | Title |
---|---|---|---|
US17/073,300 US20210031144A1 (en) | 2018-08-14 | 2020-10-17 | Instruments, modules, and methods for improved detection of edited sequences in live cells |
Applications Claiming Priority (14)
Application Number | Priority Date | Filing Date | Title |
---|---|---|---|
US201862718449P | 2018-08-14 | 2018-08-14 | |
US201862735365P | 2018-09-24 | 2018-09-24 | |
US201862779119P | 2018-12-13 | 2018-12-13 | |
US201862781112P | 2018-12-18 | 2018-12-18 | |
US201962841213P | 2019-04-30 | 2019-04-30 | |
US16/399,988 US10533152B1 (en) | 2018-08-14 | 2019-04-30 | Instruments, modules, and methods for improved detection of edited sequences in live cells |
US16/454,865 US10550363B1 (en) | 2018-08-14 | 2019-06-27 | Instruments, modules, and methods for improved detection of edited sequences in live cells |
US16/540,606 US10532324B1 (en) | 2018-08-14 | 2019-08-14 | Instruments, modules, and methods for improved detection of edited sequences in live cells |
US16/597,826 US10633626B2 (en) | 2018-08-14 | 2019-10-09 | Instruments, modules, and methods for improved detection of edited sequences in live cells |
US16/687,640 US10625212B2 (en) | 2018-08-14 | 2019-11-18 | Instruments, modules, and methods for improved detection of edited sequences in live cells |
US16/820,292 US10723995B1 (en) | 2018-08-14 | 2020-03-16 | Instruments, modules, and methods for improved detection of edited sequences in live cells |
US16/844,330 US10744463B2 (en) | 2018-08-14 | 2020-04-09 | Instruments, modules, and methods for improved detection of edited sequences in live cells |
US16/928,312 US10835869B1 (en) | 2018-08-14 | 2020-07-14 | Instruments, modules, and methods for improved detection of edited sequences in live cells |
US17/073,300 US20210031144A1 (en) | 2018-08-14 | 2020-10-17 | Instruments, modules, and methods for improved detection of edited sequences in live cells |
Related Parent Applications (1)
Application Number | Title | Priority Date | Filing Date |
---|---|---|---|
US16/928,312 Continuation US10835869B1 (en) | 2018-08-14 | 2020-07-14 | Instruments, modules, and methods for improved detection of edited sequences in live cells |
Publications (1)
Publication Number | Publication Date |
---|---|
US20210031144A1 true US20210031144A1 (en) | 2021-02-04 |
Family
ID=69141297
Family Applications (5)
Application Number | Title | Priority Date | Filing Date |
---|---|---|---|
US16/540,606 Active US10532324B1 (en) | 2018-08-14 | 2019-08-14 | Instruments, modules, and methods for improved detection of edited sequences in live cells |
US16/687,640 Active US10625212B2 (en) | 2018-08-14 | 2019-11-18 | Instruments, modules, and methods for improved detection of edited sequences in live cells |
US16/844,330 Active US10744463B2 (en) | 2018-08-14 | 2020-04-09 | Instruments, modules, and methods for improved detection of edited sequences in live cells |
US16/928,312 Active US10835869B1 (en) | 2018-08-14 | 2020-07-14 | Instruments, modules, and methods for improved detection of edited sequences in live cells |
US17/073,300 Abandoned US20210031144A1 (en) | 2018-08-14 | 2020-10-17 | Instruments, modules, and methods for improved detection of edited sequences in live cells |
Family Applications Before (4)
Application Number | Title | Priority Date | Filing Date |
---|---|---|---|
US16/540,606 Active US10532324B1 (en) | 2018-08-14 | 2019-08-14 | Instruments, modules, and methods for improved detection of edited sequences in live cells |
US16/687,640 Active US10625212B2 (en) | 2018-08-14 | 2019-11-18 | Instruments, modules, and methods for improved detection of edited sequences in live cells |
US16/844,330 Active US10744463B2 (en) | 2018-08-14 | 2020-04-09 | Instruments, modules, and methods for improved detection of edited sequences in live cells |
US16/928,312 Active US10835869B1 (en) | 2018-08-14 | 2020-07-14 | Instruments, modules, and methods for improved detection of edited sequences in live cells |
Country Status (1)
Country | Link |
---|---|
US (5) | US10532324B1 (en) |
Cited By (2)
Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
---|---|---|---|---|
US11155808B2 (en) | 2015-12-07 | 2021-10-26 | Zymergen Inc. | HTP genomic engineering platform |
US11208649B2 (en) | 2015-12-07 | 2021-12-28 | Zymergen Inc. | HTP genomic engineering platform |
Families Citing this family (9)
Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
---|---|---|---|---|
TWI695162B (en) * | 2017-09-28 | 2020-06-01 | 美商伊路米納有限公司 | Fluid dlspenser assembly and method for dispensing fluid into a fluid cartridge |
AU2019292919A1 (en) * | 2018-06-30 | 2021-03-11 | Inscripta, Inc. | Instruments, modules, and methods for improved detection of edited sequences in live cells |
US11001831B2 (en) | 2019-03-25 | 2021-05-11 | Inscripta, Inc. | Simultaneous multiplex genome editing in yeast |
WO2021102059A1 (en) | 2019-11-19 | 2021-05-27 | Inscripta, Inc. | Methods for increasing observed editing in bacteria |
US11281638B2 (en) * | 2020-04-22 | 2022-03-22 | Capital One Services, Llc | Consolidating multiple databases into a single or a smaller number of databases |
US11884924B2 (en) | 2021-02-16 | 2024-01-30 | Inscripta, Inc. | Dual strand nucleic acid-guided nickase editing |
WO2022251179A1 (en) * | 2021-05-26 | 2022-12-01 | Inscripta, Inc. | Crispr editing in diploid genomes |
EP4108318A1 (en) * | 2021-06-22 | 2022-12-28 | Sartorius Stedim Lab Ltd. | Crossflow filter device |
WO2023028521A1 (en) | 2021-08-24 | 2023-03-02 | Inscripta, Inc. | Genome-wide rationally-designed mutations leading to enhanced cellobiohydrolase i production in s. cerevisiae |
Citations (2)
Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
---|---|---|---|---|
US20160313306A1 (en) * | 2013-12-20 | 2016-10-27 | President And Fellows Of Harvard College | Low shear microfluidic devices and methods of use and manufacturing thereof |
US20170056788A1 (en) * | 2015-08-28 | 2017-03-02 | Idex Health & Science, Llc | Membrane Gas/Liquid Contactor |
Family Cites Families (144)
Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
---|---|---|---|---|
CA1293460C (en) | 1985-10-07 | 1991-12-24 | Brian Lee Sauer | Site-specific recombination of dna in yeast |
US4833080A (en) | 1985-12-12 | 1989-05-23 | President And Fellows Of Harvard College | Regulation of eucaryotic gene expression |
US6022742A (en) | 1986-11-26 | 2000-02-08 | Kopf; Henry B. | Culture device and method |
US6689610B1 (en) | 1989-08-22 | 2004-02-10 | University Of Utah Research Foundation | Cells and non-human organisms containing predetermined genomic modifications and positive-negative selection methods and vectors for making same |
US5464764A (en) | 1989-08-22 | 1995-11-07 | University Of Utah Research Foundation | Positive-negative selection methods and vectors |
KR100236506B1 (en) | 1990-11-29 | 2000-01-15 | 퍼킨-엘머시터스인스트루먼츠 | Apparatus for polymerase chain reaction |
WO1992015694A1 (en) | 1991-03-08 | 1992-09-17 | The Salk Institute For Biological Studies | Flp-mediated gene modification in mammalian cells, and compositions and cells useful therefor |
US6074605A (en) | 1995-03-10 | 2000-06-13 | Entremed, Inc. | Flow electroporation chamber and method |
JP4020429B2 (en) | 1995-06-07 | 2007-12-12 | インヴィトロジェン コーポレーション | Recombination cloning using engineered recombination sites |
US5851804A (en) | 1996-05-06 | 1998-12-22 | Apollon, Inc. | Chimeric kanamycin resistance gene |
US5792943A (en) | 1997-04-30 | 1998-08-11 | Hewlett-Packard Company | Planar separation column for use in sample analysis system |
US6774279B2 (en) | 1997-05-30 | 2004-08-10 | Carnegie Institution Of Washington | Use of FLP recombinase in mice |
WO1999021977A1 (en) | 1997-10-24 | 1999-05-06 | Life Technologies, Inc. | Recombinational cloning using nucleic acids having recombination sites |
DE69815384T2 (en) | 1997-12-05 | 2003-12-04 | Europ Lab Molekularbiolog | NEW METHOD FOR CLONING DNA USING THE E. COLI RECE / RECT RECOMBINATION SYSTEM |
US6027488A (en) | 1998-06-03 | 2000-02-22 | Genetronics, Inc. | Flow-through electroporation system for ex vivo gene therapy |
EP2428249B1 (en) | 1998-07-13 | 2015-10-07 | Inovio Pharmaceuticals, Inc. | Skin and muscle-targeted gene therapy by pulsed electrical field |
US6150148A (en) | 1998-10-21 | 2000-11-21 | Genetronics, Inc. | Electroporation apparatus for control of temperature during the process |
WO2000046386A2 (en) | 1999-02-03 | 2000-08-10 | The Children's Medical Center Corporation | Gene repair involving the induction of double-stranded dna cleavage at a chromosomal target site |
SE9900530D0 (en) | 1999-02-15 | 1999-02-15 | Vincenzo Vassarotti | A device for concentrating and / or purifying macromolecules in a solution and a method for manufacturing such a device |
US6678558B1 (en) | 1999-03-25 | 2004-01-13 | Genetronics, Inc. | Method and apparatus for reducing electroporation-mediated muscle reaction and pain response |
US6818185B1 (en) | 1999-05-28 | 2004-11-16 | Cepheid | Cartridge for conducting a chemical reaction |
US6300108B1 (en) | 1999-07-21 | 2001-10-09 | The Regents Of The University Of California | Controlled electroporation and mass transfer across cell membranes |
CN2397122Y (en) | 1999-09-20 | 2000-09-20 | 中国科学院力学研究所 | Rotary tube cell/tissue culture device |
AU8835601A (en) | 2000-08-21 | 2002-03-04 | Invitrogen Corp | Methods and reagents for molecular cloning |
FR2814642B1 (en) | 2000-10-03 | 2005-07-01 | Ass Pour Le Dev De La Rech En | TRANSGENIC MOUSE FOR THE TARGETED RECOMBINATION MEDIATED BY THE MODIFIED CRE-ER |
US7029916B2 (en) | 2001-02-21 | 2006-04-18 | Maxcyte, Inc. | Apparatus and method for flow electroporation of biological samples |
US20020139741A1 (en) * | 2001-03-27 | 2002-10-03 | Henry Kopf | Integral gasketed filtration cassette article and method of making the same |
DK2574662T3 (en) | 2001-08-22 | 2021-09-20 | Maxcyte Inc | Method for electroporation of biological samples |
US7166443B2 (en) | 2001-10-11 | 2007-01-23 | Aviva Biosciences Corporation | Methods, compositions, and automated systems for separating rare cells from fluid samples |
US7018819B2 (en) | 2001-11-30 | 2006-03-28 | Cellectricon Ab | Method and apparatus for manipulation of cells and cell-like structures focused electric fields in microfludic systems and use thereof |
AU2003206415A1 (en) | 2002-01-07 | 2003-07-24 | Uab Research Foundation | Electroporation cuvette-pipette tips, multi-well cuvette arrays, and electrode template apparatus adapted for automation and uses thereof |
US8106255B2 (en) | 2002-01-23 | 2012-01-31 | Dana Carroll | Targeted chromosomal mutagenasis using zinc finger nucleases |
CA2391641A1 (en) | 2002-06-28 | 2003-12-28 | Robert Longin | Robotic platform of cellular cultures in miniaturized reactor batteries, equipped with a system for real-time measurement of cell turbidity and all other optical properties |
US20040110253A1 (en) | 2002-08-13 | 2004-06-10 | Kappler John W. | Method for identifying MHC-presented peptide epitopes for T cells |
EP1565555A4 (en) | 2002-09-30 | 2008-07-09 | Maxcyte Inc | Apparatus and method for streaming electroporation |
EP1516920A1 (en) | 2003-09-19 | 2005-03-23 | The Automation Partnership | Cell culture vessel for the automated processing of cell cultures |
US20050118705A1 (en) | 2003-11-07 | 2005-06-02 | Rabbitt Richard D. | Electrical detectors for microanalysis |
US7078227B2 (en) | 2004-03-26 | 2006-07-18 | Molecular Transfer | Ready-to-use electroporation cuvette including frozen electrocompetent cells |
JP4937904B2 (en) | 2004-05-12 | 2012-05-23 | マックスサイト インコーポレーティッド | Method and apparatus associated with a controlled flow electroporation chamber |
CN103060191B (en) | 2004-06-12 | 2015-03-11 | 英杰生命新加坡私人有限公司 | Electroporator system |
US7422889B2 (en) | 2004-10-29 | 2008-09-09 | Stowers Institute For Medical Research | Dre recombinase and recombinase systems employing Dre recombinase |
US20070042427A1 (en) | 2005-05-03 | 2007-02-22 | Micronics, Inc. | Microfluidic laminar flow detection strip |
PL2325332T3 (en) | 2005-08-26 | 2013-03-29 | Dupont Nutrition Biosci Aps | Use of CRISPR associated genes (CAS) |
US20070105206A1 (en) | 2005-10-19 | 2007-05-10 | Chang Lu | Fluidic device |
US7799555B2 (en) | 2006-02-10 | 2010-09-21 | Bio-Rad Laboratories, Inc. | Apparatus for high-throughput electroporation |
US7923238B2 (en) | 2006-02-10 | 2011-04-12 | Bio-Rad Laboratories, Inc. | Multi-channel electroporation system |
WO2008052101A2 (en) | 2006-10-25 | 2008-05-02 | President And Fellows Of Harvard College | Multiplex automated genome engineering |
US8486692B2 (en) | 2006-11-14 | 2013-07-16 | Acme Biosystems Llc | Cell culture apparatus and associated methods |
US20110213288A1 (en) | 2007-04-23 | 2011-09-01 | The Board Of Regents, The University Of Texas System | Device And Method For Transfecting Cells For Therapeutic Uses |
WO2008151093A1 (en) | 2007-05-30 | 2008-12-11 | Alburtylab, Inc. | Liquid to liquid biological particle concentrator |
WO2009035062A1 (en) | 2007-09-10 | 2009-03-19 | Nec Corporation | Sample packing device |
GB0724860D0 (en) | 2007-12-20 | 2008-01-30 | Heptares Therapeutics Ltd | Screening |
WO2009091578A1 (en) | 2008-01-17 | 2009-07-23 | Genetronics, Inc. | Variable current density single needle electroporation system and method |
EP2279253B1 (en) | 2008-04-09 | 2016-11-16 | Maxcyte, Inc. | Engineering and delivery of therapeutic compositions of freshly isolated cells |
EP2135626B1 (en) | 2008-06-19 | 2011-01-26 | Eppendorf Array Technologies SA | Strip for multiparametrics assays |
JP5459903B2 (en) | 2008-09-02 | 2014-04-02 | 株式会社半導体エネルギー研究所 | Anthracene derivative, light emitting element, light emitting device, electronic device, and lighting device |
US20100076057A1 (en) | 2008-09-23 | 2010-03-25 | Northwestern University | TARGET DNA INTERFERENCE WITH crRNA |
KR101156886B1 (en) | 2008-11-04 | 2012-06-21 | 웅진코웨이주식회사 | Water level sensing apparatus |
WO2010059763A1 (en) | 2008-11-19 | 2010-05-27 | Amyris Biotechnologies, Inc. | Compositions and methods for the assembly of polynucleotides |
EP2206723A1 (en) | 2009-01-12 | 2010-07-14 | Bonas, Ulla | Modular DNA-binding domains |
DK2440941T3 (en) | 2009-06-10 | 2017-08-28 | Cynvenio Biosystems Inc | Sheath flow devices and methods |
US8677839B2 (en) | 2009-06-12 | 2014-03-25 | Innovaprep Llc | Surface sampler for biological particles |
CA2769320C (en) | 2009-08-02 | 2021-01-26 | Qvella Corporation | Cell concentration, capture and lysis devices and methods of use thereof |
US8584535B2 (en) | 2009-09-17 | 2013-11-19 | Innova Prep LLC | Liquid to liquid biological particle concentrator with disposable fluid path |
US8584536B2 (en) | 2009-09-21 | 2013-11-19 | Innovaprep Llc | Devices, systems and methods for elution of particles from flat filters |
WO2011040889A1 (en) * | 2009-10-02 | 2011-04-07 | Agency For Science, Technology And Research | Improved bioartificial kidneys |
GB0922434D0 (en) | 2009-12-22 | 2010-02-03 | Ucb Pharma Sa | antibodies and fragments thereof |
WO2011066498A2 (en) * | 2009-11-28 | 2011-06-03 | Smartflow Technologies, Inc. | Portable filtration unit |
PL2510096T5 (en) | 2009-12-10 | 2018-06-29 | Regents Of The University Of Minnesota | Tal effector-mediated dna modification |
DE102010001779A1 (en) | 2010-02-10 | 2011-08-11 | Hamilton Bonaduz Ag | Calibratable sensor unit for reaction vessels |
US8726744B2 (en) | 2010-02-16 | 2014-05-20 | Innovaprep Llc | Portable concentrator |
SG185481A1 (en) | 2010-05-10 | 2012-12-28 | Univ California | Endoribonuclease compositions and methods of use thereof |
CA2801028A1 (en) | 2010-06-03 | 2011-12-08 | The Regents Of The University Of California | Electroporation electrode configuration and methods |
EP2395087A1 (en) | 2010-06-11 | 2011-12-14 | Icon Genetics GmbH | System and method of modular cloning |
CN103540518B (en) | 2010-07-23 | 2015-07-08 | 贝克曼考尔特公司 | Test box |
US9361427B2 (en) | 2011-02-01 | 2016-06-07 | The Regents Of The University Of California | Scar-less multi-part DNA assembly design automation |
JP5874117B2 (en) | 2011-02-18 | 2016-03-02 | 学校法人東北学院 | Thermal conductivity sensor that calibrates the effects of fluid temperature and type, thermal flow sensor and thermal pressure sensor using the same |
US9382510B2 (en) | 2011-08-25 | 2016-07-05 | Jian Chen | Methods and devices for electroporation |
US8332160B1 (en) | 2011-11-17 | 2012-12-11 | Amyris Biotechnologies, Inc. | Systems and methods for engineering nucleic acid constructs using scoring techniques |
ITCO20120004A1 (en) | 2012-02-07 | 2013-08-08 | Giuseppe Caccia | APPARATUS FOR VAGINAL AND ANAL DYNAMIC ELECTROPORATION |
US9637739B2 (en) | 2012-03-20 | 2017-05-02 | Vilnius University | RNA-directed DNA cleavage by the Cas9-crRNA complex |
EP2831221A1 (en) | 2012-03-29 | 2015-02-04 | The Arizona Board Of Regents On Behalf Of The University of Arizona | Cell culture apparatus and culture methods using same |
EA038924B1 (en) | 2012-05-25 | 2021-11-10 | Те Риджентс Оф Те Юниверсити Оф Калифорния | Methods and compositions for rna-directed target dna modification and for rna-directed modulation of transcription |
LT2864531T (en) | 2012-06-25 | 2019-03-12 | Gen9, Inc. | Methods for nucleic acid assembly and high throughput sequencing |
CN116622704A (en) | 2012-07-25 | 2023-08-22 | 布罗德研究所有限公司 | Inducible DNA binding proteins and genomic disruption tools and uses thereof |
WO2014066655A2 (en) | 2012-10-25 | 2014-05-01 | Oncosec Medical Incorporation | Electroporation device |
KR102531576B1 (en) | 2012-12-06 | 2023-05-11 | 시그마-알드리치 컴퍼니., 엘엘씨 | Crispr-based genome modification and regulation |
US8697359B1 (en) | 2012-12-12 | 2014-04-15 | The Broad Institute, Inc. | CRISPR-Cas systems and methods for altering expression of gene products |
USD731634S1 (en) | 2012-12-31 | 2015-06-09 | Innovaprep Llc | Aerosol filter and extraction cap |
WO2014143381A1 (en) | 2013-03-09 | 2014-09-18 | Agilent Technologies, Inc. | Methods of in vivo engineering of large sequences using multiple crispr/cas selections of recombineering events |
US9499855B2 (en) | 2013-03-14 | 2016-11-22 | Elwha Llc | Compositions, methods, and computer systems related to making and administering modified T cells |
GB2584364A (en) | 2013-03-15 | 2020-12-02 | Abvitro Llc | Single cell bar-coding for antibody discovery |
US9234213B2 (en) | 2013-03-15 | 2016-01-12 | System Biosciences, Llc | Compositions and methods directed to CRISPR/Cas genomic engineering systems |
US20140297887A1 (en) | 2013-04-01 | 2014-10-02 | Whistle Talk Technologies Pvt. Ltd. | Method for transmitting information on priority basis to one or more nodes in distributed network |
CN115261411A (en) | 2013-04-04 | 2022-11-01 | 哈佛学院校长同事会 | Therapeutic uses of genome editing with CRISPR/Cas systems |
WO2014207016A1 (en) * | 2013-06-25 | 2014-12-31 | Tetra Laval Holdings & Finance S.A. | Membrane filtration device having a hygienic suspension arrangement |
CN116042726A (en) | 2013-07-09 | 2023-05-02 | 哈佛大学校长及研究员协会 | Multiplex RNA guided genome engineering |
US9029109B2 (en) | 2013-08-07 | 2015-05-12 | President And Fellows Of Harvard College | Microfluidic vortex-assisted electroporation system and method |
US10822606B2 (en) | 2013-09-27 | 2020-11-03 | The Regents Of The University Of California | Optimized small guide RNAs and methods of use |
US20150098954A1 (en) | 2013-10-08 | 2015-04-09 | Elwha Llc | Compositions and Methods Related to CRISPR Targeting |
CN103555574A (en) | 2013-11-11 | 2014-02-05 | 苏州文曲生物微系统有限公司 | Flow-type electric punching device |
ITTO20130940A1 (en) * | 2013-11-20 | 2015-05-21 | St Microelectronics Srl | KIT FOR BIOCHEMICAL ANALYSIS AND METHOD TO PERFORM A IMPROVED BIOCHEMICAL PROCESS |
WO2015088643A1 (en) | 2013-12-11 | 2015-06-18 | Regeneron Pharmaceuticals, Inc. | Methods and compositions for the targeted modification of a genome |
DE102013114732A1 (en) | 2013-12-20 | 2015-06-25 | Hamilton Bonaduz Ag | Covering device, in particular cover for the cover of reaction vessels |
US10787654B2 (en) | 2014-01-24 | 2020-09-29 | North Carolina State University | Methods and compositions for sequence guiding Cas9 targeting |
EP3690044B1 (en) | 2014-02-11 | 2024-01-10 | The Regents of the University of Colorado, a body corporate | Crispr enabled multiplexed genome engineering |
WO2015143558A1 (en) | 2014-03-27 | 2015-10-01 | British Columbia Cancer Agency Branch | T-cell epitope identification |
JP2017513477A (en) | 2014-04-14 | 2017-06-01 | マックスサイト インコーポレーティッド | Methods and compositions for modifying genomic DNA |
WO2015183025A1 (en) | 2014-05-28 | 2015-12-03 | 주식회사 툴젠 | Method for sensitive detection of target dna using target-specific nuclease |
EP3164482A1 (en) | 2014-07-03 | 2017-05-10 | Massachusetts Institute of Technology | Microfluidic assay for rapid optimization of cell electroporation |
US20160053272A1 (en) | 2014-07-18 | 2016-02-25 | Whitehead Institute For Biomedical Research | Methods Of Modifying A Sequence Using CRISPR |
US20160053304A1 (en) | 2014-07-18 | 2016-02-25 | Whitehead Institute For Biomedical Research | Methods Of Depleting Target Sequences Using CRISPR |
US20160076093A1 (en) | 2014-08-04 | 2016-03-17 | University Of Washington | Multiplex homology-directed repair |
CN113930455A (en) | 2014-10-09 | 2022-01-14 | 生命技术公司 | CRISPR oligonucleotides and gene clips |
CN104263646A (en) | 2014-10-10 | 2015-01-07 | 国家开发投资公司 | Tube for microalgae photobioreactor |
KR20160079661A (en) | 2014-12-28 | 2016-07-06 | 주식회사 펨토펩 | Modified Cell by Putting Material into the Cell without Using Vehicle |
EP3247808B1 (en) | 2015-01-21 | 2021-05-05 | Fred Hutchinson Cancer Research Center | Point-of-care and/or portable platform for gene therapy |
CA3017108A1 (en) | 2015-03-12 | 2016-09-15 | The Trustees Of The University Of Pennsylvania | System, method, and device for high-throughput, automated culturing of genetically modified organisms |
KR20170126500A (en) | 2015-03-16 | 2017-11-17 | 막스-델부뤽-센트럼 퓌어 몰레쿨라레 메디친 인 데어 헬름홀츠-게마인샤프트 | Methods for detecting novel immunogenic T cell epitopes using MHC cell libraries and isolating new antigen-specific T cell receptors |
CA2982759A1 (en) | 2015-04-13 | 2016-10-20 | Maxcyte, Inc. | Methods and compositions for modifying genomic dna |
US10677793B2 (en) | 2015-04-21 | 2020-06-09 | General Automation Lab Technologies Inc. | High resolution systems, kits, apparatus, and methods using lateral flow for high throughput microbiology applications |
EP4070887A1 (en) | 2015-04-21 | 2022-10-12 | Isolation Bio Inc. | Methods for high throughput microbiology applications |
US20180023045A1 (en) | 2015-04-21 | 2018-01-25 | General Automation Lab Technologies, Inc. | High resolution systems, kits, apparatus, and methods using combinatorial media strategies for high throughput microbiology applications |
LU92752B1 (en) | 2015-06-24 | 2016-08-07 | Université Du Luxembourg | Cell culture apparatus and culture methods using same |
US9790490B2 (en) | 2015-06-18 | 2017-10-17 | The Broad Institute Inc. | CRISPR enzymes and systems |
CN108369230B (en) | 2015-09-25 | 2021-09-17 | 阿布维特罗有限责任公司 | High throughput method for T cell receptor targeted identification of naturally paired T cell receptor sequences |
US11261435B2 (en) | 2015-11-05 | 2022-03-01 | Agency For Science, Technology And Research | Chemical-inducible genome engineering technology |
US9988624B2 (en) | 2015-12-07 | 2018-06-05 | Zymergen Inc. | Microbial strain improvement by a HTP genomic engineering platform |
EP3402890A1 (en) | 2016-01-12 | 2018-11-21 | SQZ Biotechnologies Company | Intracellular delivery of complexes |
US9896696B2 (en) | 2016-02-15 | 2018-02-20 | Benson Hill Biosystems, Inc. | Compositions and methods for modifying genomes |
CN109072191B (en) | 2016-04-04 | 2024-03-22 | 苏黎世联邦理工学院 | Mammalian cell lines for protein production and library generation |
CA3019814A1 (en) | 2016-04-04 | 2017-10-12 | CyteQuest, Inc. | System, device and method for electroporation of cells |
US20190136224A1 (en) | 2016-05-31 | 2019-05-09 | Massachusetts Institute Of Technology | Hydrodynamically Controlled Electric Fields for High Throughput Transformation & High Throughput Parallel Transformation Platform |
EP3272867B1 (en) | 2016-06-02 | 2019-09-25 | Sigma Aldrich Co. LLC | Using programmable dna binding proteins to enhance targeted genome modification |
CA3026170A1 (en) | 2016-06-03 | 2017-12-07 | Lonza Limited | Single use bioreactor |
CN109688820B (en) | 2016-06-24 | 2023-01-10 | 科罗拉多州立大学董事会(法人团体) | Methods for generating barcoded combinatorial libraries |
WO2018015419A1 (en) | 2016-07-22 | 2018-01-25 | Tecan Trading Ag | Pipette tip for an automated pipetting device and production method thereof |
US20190264193A1 (en) | 2016-08-12 | 2019-08-29 | Caribou Biosciences, Inc. | Protein engineering methods |
KR102606929B1 (en) | 2016-11-07 | 2023-11-27 | 제노비에 에이비 | An engineered two-part cellular device for discovery and characterization of T-cell receptor interactions with cognate antigens |
US11001796B2 (en) | 2016-11-23 | 2021-05-11 | The Charles Stark Draper Laboratory, Inc. | Bi-layer multi-well cell culture platform |
WO2018119296A1 (en) | 2016-12-22 | 2018-06-28 | The Charles Stark Draper Laboratory, Inc. | System and method of using a microfluidic electroporation device for cell treatment |
US20180362590A1 (en) | 2017-04-14 | 2018-12-20 | Synthetic Genomics, Inc. | Polypeptides with type v crispr activity and uses thereof |
US9982279B1 (en) | 2017-06-23 | 2018-05-29 | Inscripta, Inc. | Nucleic acid-guided nucleases |
KR20220104847A (en) | 2017-06-30 | 2022-07-26 | 인스크립타 인코포레이티드 | Automated cell processing methods, modules, instruments, and systems |
-
2019
- 2019-08-14 US US16/540,606 patent/US10532324B1/en active Active
- 2019-11-18 US US16/687,640 patent/US10625212B2/en active Active
-
2020
- 2020-04-09 US US16/844,330 patent/US10744463B2/en active Active
- 2020-07-14 US US16/928,312 patent/US10835869B1/en active Active
- 2020-10-17 US US17/073,300 patent/US20210031144A1/en not_active Abandoned
Patent Citations (2)
Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
---|---|---|---|---|
US20160313306A1 (en) * | 2013-12-20 | 2016-10-27 | President And Fellows Of Harvard College | Low shear microfluidic devices and methods of use and manufacturing thereof |
US20170056788A1 (en) * | 2015-08-28 | 2017-03-02 | Idex Health & Science, Llc | Membrane Gas/Liquid Contactor |
Cited By (5)
Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
---|---|---|---|---|
US11155808B2 (en) | 2015-12-07 | 2021-10-26 | Zymergen Inc. | HTP genomic engineering platform |
US11155807B2 (en) | 2015-12-07 | 2021-10-26 | Zymergen Inc. | Automated system for HTP genomic engineering |
US11208649B2 (en) | 2015-12-07 | 2021-12-28 | Zymergen Inc. | HTP genomic engineering platform |
US11312951B2 (en) | 2015-12-07 | 2022-04-26 | Zymergen Inc. | Systems and methods for host cell improvement utilizing epistatic effects |
US11352621B2 (en) | 2015-12-07 | 2022-06-07 | Zymergen Inc. | HTP genomic engineering platform |
Also Published As
Publication number | Publication date |
---|---|
US20200346168A1 (en) | 2020-11-05 |
US10744463B2 (en) | 2020-08-18 |
US20200078738A1 (en) | 2020-03-12 |
US10532324B1 (en) | 2020-01-14 |
US10835869B1 (en) | 2020-11-17 |
US10625212B2 (en) | 2020-04-21 |
US20200230556A1 (en) | 2020-07-23 |
Similar Documents
Publication | Publication Date | Title |
---|---|---|
US11046928B2 (en) | Instruments, modules, and methods for improved detection of edited sequences in live cells | |
US10835869B1 (en) | Instruments, modules, and methods for improved detection of edited sequences in live cells | |
US10752874B2 (en) | Instruments, modules, and methods for improved detection of edited sequences in live cells | |
WO2020037051A1 (en) | Instruments, modules, and methods for improved detection of edited sequences in live cells |
Legal Events
Date | Code | Title | Description |
---|---|---|---|
AS | Assignment |
Owner name: INSCRIPTA, INC., COLORADO Free format text: ASSIGNMENT OF ASSIGNORS INTEREST;ASSIGNORS:BELGRADER, PHILLIP;MASQUELIER, DON;ESTES, MATTHEW;AND OTHERS;SIGNING DATES FROM 20191119 TO 20200210;REEL/FRAME:054086/0619 |
|
STPP | Information on status: patent application and granting procedure in general |
Free format text: DOCKETED NEW CASE - READY FOR EXAMINATION |
|
STPP | Information on status: patent application and granting procedure in general |
Free format text: NON FINAL ACTION MAILED |
|
STPP | Information on status: patent application and granting procedure in general |
Free format text: RESPONSE TO NON-FINAL OFFICE ACTION ENTERED AND FORWARDED TO EXAMINER |
|
STPP | Information on status: patent application and granting procedure in general |
Free format text: FINAL REJECTION MAILED |
|
STCB | Information on status: application discontinuation |
Free format text: ABANDONED -- FAILURE TO RESPOND TO AN OFFICE ACTION |